Operating Instructions

SINAMICS
SINAMICS G120
Low voltage converters
Built-in units with CU250S-2 Control Units and
encoder evaluation

Edition 02/2023 www.siemens.com/drives

 Changes in the current
edition

Fundamental safety
instructions 1

SINAMICS Introduction 2

Description 3
SINAMICS G120
Converter with CU250S-2 Control
Unit Installing 4

Commissioning 5
Operating Instructions
Uploading the converter
settings 6
Protecting the converter
settings 7

Advanced commissioning 8
Alarms, faults and system
messages 9

Corrective maintenance 10

Technical data 11

Appendix A

Edition 02/2023, Firmware V4.7 SP14

02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14

A5E31759476B AK
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance
are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient
conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E31759476B AK Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2023.

Digital Industries Ⓟ 06/2023 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Changes in the current edition

Essential changes with respect to Edition 10/2020

New functions
SINAMICS G115D converter now supports the extended function 'Safety Limited Speed (SLS)'
with the firmware version V4.7 SP14.
Overview of new and modified function in firmware V4.7 SP14:
Firmware version 4.7 SP14 (Page 539)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 3
Changes in the current edition

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

4 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Table of contents

Changes in the current edition .............................................................................................................. 3

1 Fundamental safety instructions......................................................................................................... 13
1.1 General safety instructions................................................................................................. 13
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ..................................... 20
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ................................................................... 21
1.4 Security information .......................................................................................................... 22
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems ................................................................................. 23
2 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 25
2.1 About the Manual .............................................................................................................. 25
2.2 Guide through the manual ................................................................................................. 26
3 Description........................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1 Intended use...................................................................................................................... 29
3.2 OpenSSL ............................................................................................................................ 30
3.3 Transferring OpenOSS license terms to a PC........................................................................ 31
3.4 Identifying the converter.................................................................................................... 32
3.5 Directives and standards .................................................................................................... 33
3.6 Overview of Control Units .................................................................................................. 35
3.7 Power Modules .................................................................................................................. 36
3.7.1 Power Module with IP20 degree of protection .................................................................... 37
3.7.2 Power Module with Push-Through technology .................................................................... 39
3.8 Components for the Power Modules................................................................................... 40
3.8.1 Accessories for shielding .................................................................................................... 40
3.8.2 Line filter ........................................................................................................................... 41
3.8.3 Line reactor ....................................................................................................................... 42
3.8.4 Output reactor ................................................................................................................... 44
3.8.5 ((dv/dt filter plus VPL_PM240-2)) ........................................................................................ 47
3.8.6 Sine-wave filter .................................................................................................................. 49
3.8.7 Braking resistor .................................................................................................................. 51
3.8.8 Brake Relay ........................................................................................................................ 53
3.8.9 Safe Brake Relay................................................................................................................. 53
3.8.10 Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20.......................................................................................... 53
3.9 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated........................................................... 55
3.10 Encoder and Sensor Module............................................................................................... 56
4 Installing .............................................................................................................................................. 57
4.1 Installing the label for the North American market.............................................................. 57

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 5
Table of contents

4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system ............................................................ 58

4.2.1 Control cabinet .................................................................................................................. 59
4.2.2 Cables ............................................................................................................................... 60
4.2.3 Electromechanical components.......................................................................................... 63
4.3 Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors.................................................................... 64
4.4 Installing Power Modules ................................................................................................... 65
4.4.1 Basic installation rules for built-in units .............................................................................. 65
4.4.2 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM240-2 Power Module, IP20............... 66
4.4.3 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for PM240-2 Power Modules in push-through
technology ........................................................................................................................ 69
4.4.4 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM250 Power Module .......................... 73
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor ................................................................................ 76
4.5.1 Permissible line supplies..................................................................................................... 76
4.5.1.1 TN line system ................................................................................................................... 77
4.5.1.2 TT line system.................................................................................................................... 79
4.5.1.3 IT system ........................................................................................................................... 80
4.5.2 Requirements for the protective conductor ......................................................................... 81
4.5.3 Connecting a converter with the PM240-2 Power Module ................................................... 83
4.5.4 Connecting the converter with the PM250 Power Module................................................... 89
4.5.5 Connecting the motor to the converter in a star or delta connection ................................... 91
4.5.6 Connecting a motor holding brake ..................................................................................... 92
4.5.6.1 Installing a Brake Relay - PM250 Power Module .................................................................. 94
4.5.6.2 Installing a Brake Relay - PM240-2 Power Module ............................................................... 95
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control ............................................................ 96
4.6.1 Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side....................................................... 97
4.6.2 Terminal strips behind the upper front door........................................................................ 99
4.6.3 Terminal strips behind the lower front door ...................................................................... 100
4.6.4 Fieldbus and encoder interfaces on the lower side............................................................ 101
4.6.5 Factory interface settings ................................................................................................. 102
4.6.6 Default setting of the interfaces ....................................................................................... 104
4.6.7 Failsafe digital input......................................................................................................... 115
4.6.8 Connecting a failsafe digital input .................................................................................... 117
4.6.9 Wire up the terminal strip and connect the shield ............................................................. 119
4.6.10 Connecting the temperature contact of the braking resistor.............................................. 122
4.6.11 Fieldbus interfaces........................................................................................................... 123
4.6.12 Connecting the converter to PROFINET ............................................................................. 123
4.6.12.1 Communication via PROFINET IO and Ethernet ................................................................. 123
4.6.12.2 Connecting the PROFINET cable to the converter .............................................................. 125
4.6.12.3 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET?............................................... 125
4.6.12.4 Installing GSDML ............................................................................................................. 126
4.6.13 Connecting the converter to PROFIBUS ............................................................................. 126
4.6.13.1 Connecting the PROFIBUS cable to the converter .............................................................. 127
4.6.13.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS? .............................................. 127
4.6.13.3 Installing the GSD ............................................................................................................ 128
4.6.13.4 Set the PROFIBUS address................................................................................................. 128
4.7 Installing encoders........................................................................................................... 130
5 Commissioning .................................................................................................................................. 133
5.1 Commissioning guidelines ............................................................................................... 133

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

6 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Table of contents

5.2 Tools to commission the converter ................................................................................... 134

5.3 Preparing for commissioning............................................................................................ 135
5.3.1 Collecting motor data ...................................................................................................... 135
5.3.2 Forming DC link capacitors............................................................................................... 136
5.3.3 Converter factory setting.................................................................................................. 138
5.3.4 Converter function modules............................................................................................. 140
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC........................................................................................ 142
5.4.1 Creating a project ............................................................................................................ 142
5.4.2 Transfer converters connected via USB into the project ..................................................... 143
5.4.3 Starting wizards for the quick commissioning ................................................................... 144
5.4.4 Standard Drive Control ..................................................................................................... 147
5.4.5 Dynamic Drive Control ..................................................................................................... 149
5.4.6 Expert.............................................................................................................................. 151
5.4.7 Configuring encoders....................................................................................................... 154
5.4.8 Loading the settings into the converter ............................................................................ 155
5.4.9 Identify motor data .......................................................................................................... 156
5.5 Restoring the factory setting ............................................................................................ 158
5.5.1 Resetting the safety functions to the factory setting.......................................................... 159
5.5.2 Restore the factory settings (without safety functions)...................................................... 161
5.6 Series commissioning ...................................................................................................... 162
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel................................................................................... 163
5.7.1 Switching the motor on and off ........................................................................................ 164
5.7.2 Changing parameter values.............................................................................................. 165
5.7.3 Changing indexed parameters.......................................................................................... 166
5.7.4 Entering the parameter number directly ........................................................................... 167
5.7.5 Entering the parameter value directly ............................................................................... 168
5.7.6 Why can a parameter value not be changed? .................................................................... 169
6 Uploading the converter settings ...................................................................................................... 171
6.1 Uploading to the memory card......................................................................................... 172
6.1.1 Recommended memory cards .......................................................................................... 172
6.1.2 Automatic upload ............................................................................................................ 174
6.1.3 Message for a memory card that is not inserted................................................................ 175
6.1.4 Manual upload with Startdrive ......................................................................................... 175
6.1.5 Manual upload with BOP-2............................................................................................... 176
6.1.6 Safely removing a memory card using the BOP-2 .............................................................. 177
6.1.7 Safely remove the memory card with Startdrive................................................................ 178
6.2 Uploading to the BOP-2.................................................................................................... 180
6.3 Upload to a PC using Startdrive ........................................................................................ 181
6.4 More options for the upload............................................................................................. 182
7 Protecting the converter settings ...................................................................................................... 183
7.1 Write protection ............................................................................................................... 183
7.2 Know-how protection ...................................................................................................... 185
7.2.1 Extending the exception list for know-how protection ...................................................... 189
7.2.2 Activating and deactivating know-how protection ............................................................ 190

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 7
Table of contents

8 Advanced commissioning.................................................................................................................. 193

8.1 Overview of the converter functions................................................................................. 193
8.2 Brief description of the parameters................................................................................... 196
8.3 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off.................................................... 197
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip .................................................................. 200
8.4.1 Digital inputs ................................................................................................................... 201
8.4.2 Analog inputs as digital inputs ......................................................................................... 203
8.4.3 Failsafe digital inputs ....................................................................................................... 203
8.4.4 Digital outputs ................................................................................................................. 204
8.4.5 Analog inputs .................................................................................................................. 206
8.4.6 Adjusting characteristics for analog input ......................................................................... 208
8.4.7 Setting the deadband....................................................................................................... 209
8.4.8 Analog outputs ................................................................................................................ 210
8.4.9 Adjusting characteristics for analog output....................................................................... 211
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs ............................. 213
8.5.1 Two-wire control, ON/reverse ........................................................................................... 215
8.5.2 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1 .................................................. 217
8.5.3 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2 .................................................. 219
8.5.4 Three-wire control, enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation........................................ 221
8.5.5 Three-wire control, enable/ON/reverse.............................................................................. 223
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET ........................................................................... 225
8.6.1 Receive data and send data .............................................................................................. 225
8.6.2 Telegrams........................................................................................................................ 226
8.6.3 Control and status word 1 ................................................................................................ 229
8.6.4 Control and status word 2 ................................................................................................ 232
8.6.5 Control and status word 3 ................................................................................................ 233
8.6.6 NAMUR message word ..................................................................................................... 235
8.6.7 Control and status word, encoder..................................................................................... 236
8.6.8 Position actual value of the encoder ................................................................................. 238
8.6.9 Parameter channel........................................................................................................... 240
8.6.10 Examples ......................................................................................................................... 248
8.6.11 Expanding or freely interconnecting telegrams ................................................................. 250
8.6.12 Device-to-device communication...................................................................................... 254
8.6.13 Acyclically reading and writing converter parameters........................................................ 254
8.7 Drive control via Modbus RTU........................................................................................... 255
8.8 Drive control via USS ........................................................................................................ 258
8.9 Drive control via Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................. 261
8.10 Drive control via CANopen ............................................................................................... 263
8.11 Jogging ........................................................................................................................... 265
8.12 Limit position control ....................................................................................................... 267
8.13 Switching over the drive control (command data set) ....................................................... 269
8.14 Motor holding brake ........................................................................................................ 271
8.15 Free function blocks......................................................................................................... 276
8.15.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 276

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

8 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Table of contents

8.15.2 Runtime groups and run sequence ................................................................................... 277

8.15.3 List of free function blocks ............................................................................................... 277
8.15.4 Scaling ............................................................................................................................ 288
8.15.5 Activating free function block........................................................................................... 290
8.15.6 Further information ......................................................................................................... 290
8.16 Selecting physical units .................................................................................................... 291
8.16.1 Motor standard ................................................................................................................ 291
8.16.2 Unit system ..................................................................................................................... 291
8.16.3 Technological unit of the technology controller ................................................................ 293
8.16.4 Setting the system of units and technology unit ............................................................... 294
8.17 Extended messages ......................................................................................................... 295
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function ............................................................................... 297
8.18.1 Where are the safety functions described? ........................................................................ 297
8.18.2 Principle of operation....................................................................................................... 297
8.18.3 EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF and EMERGENCY STOP ........................................................ 299
8.18.4 Commissioning STO ......................................................................................................... 300
8.18.4.1 Commissioning tools........................................................................................................ 300
8.18.4.2 Password ......................................................................................................................... 300
8.18.4.3 Configuring a safety function ........................................................................................... 302
8.18.4.4 Interconnecting the "STO active" signal............................................................................. 303
8.18.4.5 Signal filter for STO selection ............................................................................................ 304
8.18.4.6 Setting the signal filter for STO selection........................................................................... 306
8.18.4.7 Forced checking procedure .............................................................................................. 306
8.18.4.8 Setting forced checking procedure ................................................................................... 307
8.18.4.9 Complete commissioning ................................................................................................. 309
8.18.4.10 Checking the assignment of the digital inputs .................................................................. 310
8.18.4.11 Acceptance test ............................................................................................................... 311
8.19 Setpoints ......................................................................................................................... 313
8.19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 313
8.19.2 Analog input as setpoint source ....................................................................................... 315
8.19.3 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus............................................................................. 316
8.19.4 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source ..................................................................... 317
8.19.5 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source ............................................................................ 319
8.19.6 Pulse input as source of setpoint value ............................................................................. 324
8.20 Setpoint processing.......................................................................................................... 326
8.20.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 326
8.20.2 Invert setpoint ................................................................................................................. 327
8.20.3 Inhibit direction of rotation .............................................................................................. 328
8.20.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed....................................................................... 329
8.20.5 Speed limitation .............................................................................................................. 331
8.20.6 Ramp-function generator ................................................................................................. 332
8.21 PID technology controller ................................................................................................. 337
8.22 Motor control................................................................................................................... 344
8.22.1 Reactor, filter and cable resistance at the converter output................................................ 344
8.22.2 U/f control ....................................................................................................................... 345
8.22.2.1 Optimizing motor starting................................................................................................ 349
8.22.2.2 Optimizing motor starting using Standard Drive Control ................................................... 353
8.22.3 Vector control .................................................................................................................. 355
8.22.3.1 Structure of the vector control.......................................................................................... 355

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 9
Table of contents

8.22.3.2 Default setting as a result of the application class Dynamic Drive Control .......................... 357
8.22.3.3 Adapting the encoder data............................................................................................... 358
8.22.3.4 Example for adapting the encoder data ............................................................................ 358
8.22.3.5 Checking the encoder signal ............................................................................................ 361
8.22.3.6 Optimizing the speed controller ....................................................................................... 361
8.22.3.7 Advanced settings............................................................................................................ 364
8.22.3.8 Friction characteristic ....................................................................................................... 366
8.22.3.9 Moment of inertia estimator ............................................................................................ 369
8.22.4 Torque control ................................................................................................................. 374
8.22.5 Application examples for closed-loop motor control.......................................................... 375
8.23 Electrically braking the motor........................................................................................... 376
8.23.1 ((Elektrisch bremsen))...................................................................................................... 376
8.23.2 DC braking....................................................................................................................... 378
8.23.3 Compound braking .......................................................................................................... 383
8.23.4 Dynamic braking.............................................................................................................. 385
8.23.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line ................................................................. 389
8.24 Overcurrent protection..................................................................................................... 390
8.25 Converter protection using temperature monitoring ......................................................... 391
8.26 Motor protection with temperature sensor ....................................................................... 394
8.27 Motor protection by calculating the temperature .............................................................. 396
8.28 How do I achieve a motor overload protection in accordance with IEC/UL 61800-5-1?........ 398
8.29 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage..................................................... 399
8.30 Monitoring the driven load............................................................................................... 401
8.30.1 Stall protection ................................................................................................................ 402
8.30.2 No-load monitoring ......................................................................................................... 402
8.30.3 Blocking protection .......................................................................................................... 403
8.30.4 Torque monitoring ........................................................................................................... 404
8.30.5 Rotation monitoring......................................................................................................... 406
8.30.6 Speed deviation monitoring ............................................................................................. 407
8.31 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running................................................... 409
8.32 Automatic restart............................................................................................................. 411
8.33 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control) ................................................................................... 414
8.34 Efficiency optimization ..................................................................................................... 416
8.35 Line contactor control ...................................................................................................... 419
8.36 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines....................................................... 421
8.37 Switchover between different settings .............................................................................. 423
8.38 Activating licensed functions............................................................................................ 425
8.38.1 Licensing ......................................................................................................................... 425
8.38.2 Creating or displaying the license key ............................................................................... 426
8.38.3 Writing the license key to the card .................................................................................... 429
9 Alarms, faults and system messages ................................................................................................. 431
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs .................................................................................. 432
9.2 System runtime ............................................................................................................... 437

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

10 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Table of contents

9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M) .......................................................................... 438

9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history ............................................................................ 439
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history............................................................................... 442
9.6 List of alarms and faults ................................................................................................... 445
10 Corrective maintenance .................................................................................................................... 455
10.1 Replace Control Unit ........................................................................................................ 457
10.2 Downloading the converter settings ................................................................................. 459
10.2.1 Converter without enabled safety functions ..................................................................... 459
10.2.1.1 Automatic download from the memory card .................................................................... 459
10.2.1.2 Manual downloading from the memory card with the BOP-2 ............................................ 459
10.2.1.3 Manual download from the memory card using Startdrive ................................................ 460
10.2.1.4 Download from BOP-2 operator panel .............................................................................. 461
10.2.1.5 Download from IOP-2 operator panel ............................................................................... 463
10.2.1.6 Download from Smart Access........................................................................................... 464
10.2.1.7 Download from the PC using Startdrive ............................................................................ 466
10.2.2 Converter with enabled safety functions........................................................................... 467
10.2.2.1 Automatic download from the memory card .................................................................... 467
10.2.2.2 Manual downloading from the memory card with the BOP-2 ............................................ 468
10.2.2.3 Download from BOP-2 operator panel .............................................................................. 470
10.2.2.4 Download from IOP-2 operator panel ............................................................................... 472
10.2.2.5 Download from Smart Access........................................................................................... 474
10.2.2.6 Download from the PC using Startdrive ............................................................................ 477
10.2.3 Download with active know-how protection with copy protection..................................... 478
10.3 Replacing a Power Module ............................................................................................... 481
10.4 PROFINET device name .................................................................................................... 483
10.5 Replacing an encoder....................................................................................................... 484
10.5.1 Replacing the encoder - same encoder type...................................................................... 484
10.5.2 Replacing the encoder - different encoder type ................................................................. 485
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade................................................................................... 487
10.6.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 487
10.6.2 Preparing the memory card.............................................................................................. 488
10.6.3 Upgrading the firmware ................................................................................................... 489
10.6.4 Firmware downgrade....................................................................................................... 491
10.6.5 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade ............................................ 493
10.7 Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change ........... 494
10.8 If the converter no longer responds.................................................................................. 495
11 Technical data.................................................................................................................................... 497
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit ............................................................................. 497
11.2 Overload capability of the converter ................................................................................. 502
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules.......................................................................... 503
11.3.1 High overload - low overload PM240-2 ............................................................................. 503
11.3.2 Ambient conditions.......................................................................................................... 503
11.3.3 General technical data, 200 V converters.......................................................................... 505
11.3.4 Specific technical data, 200 V converters .......................................................................... 506

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 11
Table of contents

11.3.5 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 200 V converters.............................. 513
11.3.6 General technical data, 400 V converters.......................................................................... 514
11.3.7 Specific technical data, 400 V converters .......................................................................... 515
11.3.8 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 400 V converters.............................. 523
11.3.9 General technical data, 690 V converters.......................................................................... 524
11.3.10 Specific technical data, 690 V converters .......................................................................... 525
11.3.11 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 690 V converters.............................. 528
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module .............................................................................. 529
11.4.1 Ambient conditions.......................................................................................................... 530
11.4.2 General technical data, PM250......................................................................................... 531
11.4.3 Specific technical specifications ........................................................................................ 532
11.4.4 Current reduction depending upon pulse frequency ......................................................... 534
11.5 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation .................................................... 535
11.6 Restrictions for special ambient conditions ....................................................................... 536
11.7 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields................................................................. 538
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................ 539
A.1 New and extended functions............................................................................................ 539
A.1.1 Firmware version 4.7 SP14 ............................................................................................... 539
A.1.2 Firmware version 4.7 SP13 ............................................................................................... 539
A.1.3 Firmware version 4.7 SP10 ............................................................................................... 541
A.1.4 Firmware version 4.7 SP9 ................................................................................................. 543
A.1.5 Firmware version 4.7 SP6 ................................................................................................. 545
A.1.6 Firmware version 4.7 SP3 ................................................................................................. 546
A.1.7 Firmware version 4.7 ....................................................................................................... 548
A.1.8 Firmware version 4.6 SP6 ................................................................................................. 549
A.1.9 Firmware version 4.6 ....................................................................................................... 550
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter ........................................................................... 551
A.2.1 Fundamentals.................................................................................................................. 551
A.2.2 Application example ........................................................................................................ 553
A.3 Manuals and technical support......................................................................................... 555
A.3.1 Overview of the manuals ................................................................................................. 555
A.3.2 Configuring support ......................................................................................................... 557
A.3.3 Product Support............................................................................................................... 558
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 559

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

12 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse sequence.

WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or tripping
too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at least
meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short circuit
does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to respond. The
required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply systems.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 13
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or a
fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter does
not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.

WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when touched,
can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may carry
a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV- (Protective
Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the electronics
modules.

WARNING
Electric shock due to equipment damage
Improper handling may cause damage to equipment. For damaged devices, hazardous
voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components; if touched, this can result
in death or severe injury.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged devices.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

14 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shield
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the conductors of power cables that are not used
(e.g. brake cores) at one end at the grounded housing potential.

WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is in operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.

WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the power
supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and start
work.

NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Only use screw inserts that exactly match the screw head.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor and
speed limitation system.
• Adjust the tools used regularly.

NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 15
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electromagnetic interference due to inadequate shield support
A lack of adequate shield support for the power cables can cause malfunctions and
impermissibly high levels of interference.
• Use the shield connection plates supplied or recommended.
• Use the shield connection clips recommended.

WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
Built-in devices can cause a fire and a pressure wave in the event of a fault. Fire and smoke can
escape from the control cabinet and cause serious personal injury and property damage.
• Install built-in appliances in a robust metal control cabinet that is suitable for protecting
people from fire and smoke.
• Only operate built-in devices with the control cabinet doors closed.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.

WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may
interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the immediate
vicinity of an converter are at risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons with
active implants.
• Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.

CAUTION
Symptomatic respiratory and skin reaction to chemicals
A newly purchased product might contain traces of substances that are identified as sensitizers.
Sensitizers are substances which can cause sensitization in the lungs and skin after exposure
to them.
Once sensitized, individuals can have severe reactions to further exposure, even in small
amounts. In the most extreme cases, individuals might develop asthma or dermatitis
respectively.
• If the product has a strong smell, keep it in a well-ventilated area for 14 days.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

16 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Unexpected machine movement caused by radio devices or mobile phones
Using radio devices, cellphones, or mobile WLAN devices in the immediate vicinity of the
components can result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional
safety of machines and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage.
• Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices, cellphones or WLAN devices.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support App" or a QR code scanner only on equipment
that has already been switched off.

NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductors or in the event of a ground fault in
the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage against ground. If
you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with grounded line
conductors, you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.

WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent fire
and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.

NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
• Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 17
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system, including
all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted and
activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important Safety instructions for Safety Integrated
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the Safety instructions in the
Safety Integrated documentation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

18 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in turn
can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 19
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic

discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules or
devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of aluminum
foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table with
ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

20 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples

Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding configuration,
equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not represent specific
customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 21
Fundamental safety instructions
1.4 Security information

1.4 Security information

Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/cert.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states in
your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with suitable
protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

22 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

When assessing the machine or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g. EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system integrator must
take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive components
of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware faults and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and
connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures inside and outside the components, including open flames, as
well as emissions of light, noise, particles, gases, etc. due to fault conditions, e.g.:
– Component failure
– Software errors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– External influences/damage
– Short circuits or ground faults in the intermediate DC circuit of the converter
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– External influences/damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to
people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 23
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

6. Influence of network-connected and wireless communications systems, e.g. ripple-control

transmitters or data communication via the network or mobile radio, WLAN or Bluetooth.
7. Motors for use in potentially explosive areas:
When moving components such as bearings become worn, this can cause enclosure
components to exhibit unexpectedly high temperatures during operation, creating a hazard
in areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere.
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

24 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Introduction 2
2.1 About the Manual

Who requires the operating instructions and what for?

These operating instructions primarily address fitters, commissioning engineers and machine
operators. The operating instructions describe the devices and device components and enable
the target groups being addressed to install, connect-up, set, and commission the converters
safely and in the correct manner.

What is described in the operating instructions?

These operating instructions provide a summary of all of the information required to operate
the converter under normal, safe conditions.
The information provided in the operating instructions has been compiled in such a way
that it is sufficient for all standard applications and enables drives to be commissioned
as efficiently as possible. Where it appears useful, additional information for entry level
personnel has been added.
The operating instructions also contain information about special applications. Since it is
assumed that readers already have a sound technical knowledge of how to configure and
parameterize these applications, the relevant information is summarized accordingly. This
relates, e.g. to operation with fieldbus systems.

What is the meaning of the symbols in the manual?

Reference to further information in the manual
Download from the Internet
DVD that can be ordered
End of a handling instruction.
❒

Examples of converter function symbols

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 25
Introduction
2.2 Guide through the manual

2.2 Guide through the manual

Chapter In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Description (Page 29) • How is the converter marked?
• Which components make up the converter?
• Which optional components are available for the converter?
• What is the purpose of the optional components?
• Which motors can be fed from the converter?
• Which commissioning tools are there?
Installing (Page 57) • Which sequence is recommended when installing the converter?
• What does EMC-compliant installation actually mean?
• Which options are available to install optional components below the converter?
• What are the converter dimensions?
• Which mounting and installation materials are required when installing the con‐
verter?
• To which line supplies can the converter be connected?
• How is the converter connected to the line supply?
• How is the braking resistor connected to the converter?
• Which terminals and fieldbus interfaces does the converter have?
• What are the interface functions?
Commissioning (Page 133) • Which motor data is required for commissioning
• How is the converter set in the factory?
• What is the commissioning procedure?
• How do you restore the converter factory settings?
Uploading the converter set‐ • Why is it necessary to back up the converter settings?
tings (Page 171) • Which options are available to back up the settings?
• How does the data backup function?
• How do you prevent the converter settings from being changed?
• How do you prevent the converter settings from being read out?
Protecting the converter set‐ • How do I protect the converter settings against manipulation?
tings (Page 183) • How do I protect my know-how, which is embedded in the converter settings, so that
it cannot be copied by unauthorized persons?
Advanced commissioning • Which functions are included in the converter firmware?
(Page 193) • How are the functions set?
Corrective maintenance • What is the meaning of the LEDs provided on the converter?
(Page 455) • How does the system runtime respond?
• How does the converter save alarms and faults?
• What do the converter alarms and faults mean?
• How are converter faults resolved?
• Which I&M data is saved in the converter?

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

26 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Introduction
2.2 Guide through the manual

Chapter In this section you will find answers to the following questions:
Alarms, faults and system • How are converter components replaced?
messages (Page 431) • How is the firmware version of the converter changed?
• What must be done after a converter replacement if the safety functions of the
converter are active?
Technical data (Page 497) • What is the converter technical data?
• What do "High Overload" and "Low Overload" mean?
• What effect do the installation altitude or ambient temperature have on the con‐
verter, for example?
Appendix (Page 539) • What are the new functions of the current firmware?
• How is the converter operated using the BOP-2 Operator Panel?
• How can signal interconnections be changed in the converter firmware?
• What does "BiCo technology" mean?
• Where can I find additional information about the converter?

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 27
Introduction
2.2 Guide through the manual

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

28 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Description 3
3.1 Intended use

Use for the intended purpose

The converter described in this manual is a device to control a three-phase motor. The converter
is designed for installation in electrical installations or machines.
It has been approved for industrial and commercial use on industrial networks. Additional
measures have to be taken when connected to public grids.
The technical specifications and information about connection conditions are indicated on
the rating plate and in the operating instructions.

Use of third-party products

This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts the
fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 29
Description
3.2 OpenSSL

3.2 OpenSSL

Use of OpenSSL
This product contains software developed in the OpenSSL project for use within the OpenSSL
toolkit.
This product contains cryptographic software created by Eric Young.
This product contains software developed by Eric Young.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
OpenSSL (https://www.openssl.org/)
Cryptsoft (mailto:[email protected])

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

30 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.3 Transferring OpenOSS license terms to a PC

3.3 Transferring OpenOSS license terms to a PC

Requirement
You have an empty memory card and a reader for the memory card.

Procedure

Procedure
To transfer OpenOSS license terms to a PC, proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the converter power supply.
2. Insert an empty memory card into the card slot of the converter.
Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side. (Page 97)
3. Switch on the converter power supply.
4. The converter writes file "Read_OSS.ZIP" to the memory card within approximately
30 seconds.
5. Switch off the converter power supply.
6. Withdraw the memory card from the converter.
7. Insert the memory card into the card reader of a PC.
8. Please read the license terms.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 31
Description
3.4 Identifying the converter

3.4 Identifying the converter

Main components of the converter

Each SINAMICS G120 converter comprises a Control 3RZHU0RGXOH

Unit and Power Module.
• The Control Unit controls and monitors the Power  &RQWURO8QLW
Module and the connected motor.
• The Power Module provides the connections for
line supply and motor.

The following data is provided on the Power Module type plate (①):
• Designation, e.g. PM240-2 Power Module
• Technical data: Voltage, current and power
• Article number, e.g. 6SL3210-1PE21-1UL0
• Version, e.g. A02
The following data can be found on the Control Unit type plate (②):
• Designation, e.g. CU250S-2 DP Control Unit
• Article number, e.g. 6SL3246-0BA22-1PA0
• Version, e.g. 02 (hardware), 4.7 (firmware)

Further converter components

The following components are available so that you can adapt the converter to different
applications and ambient conditions:
• Line filter (Page 41)
• Line reactor (Page 42)
• Output reactor (Page 44)
• Sine-wave filter (Page 49)
• Braking resistor (Page 51)
• Brake relay to control a motor holding brake (Page 53)
• Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20 (Page 53)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

32 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.5 Directives and standards

3.5 Directives and standards

Description
The following directives and standards are relevant for the converters:

European Low Voltage Directive

The converters fulfill the requirements stipulated in the Low-Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU, if
they are covered by the application area of this directive.

European Machinery Directive

The converters fulfill the requirements stipulated in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC, if
they are covered by the application area of this directive.
However, the use of the converters in a typical machine application has been fully assessed
for compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.

Directive 2011/65/EU
The converter fulfills the requirements of Directive 2011/65/EU relating to the restriction of
the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic devices (RoHS).

European EMC Directive

The compliance of the converter with the regulations of the Directive 2014/30/EU has been
verified through full compliance with IEC/EN 61800-3.

Underwriters Laboratories (North American market)

Converters provided with one of the test symbols displayed fulfill the requirements stipulated for
the North American market as a component of drive applications, and are appropriately listed.

EMC requirements for South Korea

The converters with the KC marking on the rating plate satisfy the EMC requirements for South
Korea.

Eurasian conformity
The converters comply with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/Kazakhstan customs
union (EAC).

Australia and New Zealand (RCM formerly C-Tick)

The converters showing the test symbols fulfill the EMC requirements for Australia and New
Zealand.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 33
Description
3.5 Directives and standards

Immunity to voltage drop of semiconductor process equipment.

The converters comply with the requirements of standard SEMI F47-0706.

DNV-GL
The SINAMICS CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit facilitates DNV-GL-certified cabinet designs.

China RoHS
The converters comply with the China-RoHs directive. Further information is provided on the
Internet:
China RoHS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109738656)

Quality systems
Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.

Further information

Certificates for download

• EC Declaration of Conformity: (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
58275445)
• Certificates for the relevant directives, prototype test certificates, manufacturers
declarations and test certificates for functions relating to functional safety ("Safety
Integrated"): (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/134200)
• Certificates for products that were certified by UL: (http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/
template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.html)
• Certificates for products that were certified by TÜV SÜD: (https://www.tuev-sued.de/
industrie_konsumprodukte/zertifikatsdatenbank)

Standards that are not relevant

The converters do not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory Certification (CCC).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

34 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.6 Overview of Control Units

3.6 Overview of Control Units

Versions
The CU250S-2 Control Units differ with regard to the type of fieldbus.

Table 3-1 Control Unit versions

Designation Article number Fieldbus

CU250S-2 6SL3246-0BA22-1BA0 USS, Modbus RTU
CU250S-2 DP 6SL3246-0BA22-1PA0 PROFIBUS
CU250S-2 PN 6SL3246-0BA22-1FA0 PROFINET, EtherNet/IP
CU250S-2 CAN 6SL3246-0BA22-1CA0 CANopen

Shield connection kit for the Control Unit

The shield connection kit is an optional component. The shield connection kit comprises the
following components:
• Shield plate
• Elements for optimum shield support and strain relief of the signal and communication
cables
Article number for the SINAMICS CU Screening Termination Kit 4: 6SL3264-1EA00-0LA0.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 35
Description
3.7 Power Modules

3.7 Power Modules

Important data on the Power Modules is provided in this section. Further information is
contained in the Hardware Installation Manual of the Power Module.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
All power data refers to rated values or to power for operation with low overload (LO).
You can operate the CU250S-2 Control Unit with the following Power Modules:
• PM240-2, in IP20 degree of protection and push-through technology
• PM240P-2
• PM250

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

36 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.7 Power Modules

3.7.1 Power Module with IP20 degree of protection

30
)6')6*

30
)6$)6&

Figure 3-1 Examples of Power Modules with IP20 degree of protection

PM240-2 for standard applications

The PM240-2 Power Module is available without a filter or with an integrated class A line filter.
The PM240-2 permits dynamic braking via an external braking resistor.

Table 3-2 1-phase/3-phase 200 VAC … 240 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PB… and 6SL3210-1PC…

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power (kW) 0.55 … 0.75 1.1 … 2.2 3.0 … 4.0 11 … 18.5 22 … 30 37 … 55

Table 3-3 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PE…

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF FSG

Power (kW) 0.55 … 3.0 4.0 … 7.5 11 … 15 18.5 … 37 45 … 55 75 … 132 160 … 250

Table 3-4 3-phase 500 VAC … 690 VAC, article number 6SL3210-1PH…

Frame size FSD FSE FSF FSG

Power (kW) 11 … 37 45 … 55 75 … 132 160 … 250

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 37
Description
3.7 Power Modules

PM250 for standard applications with energy recovery

The PM250 Power Module is available without a filter or with integrated class A line filter. The
PM250 permits dynamic braking with energy recovery into the line supply.

Table 3-5 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3225-0BE…

Frame size FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power (kW) 7.5 … 15 18.5 … 30 37 … 45 55 … 90

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

38 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.7 Power Modules

3.7.2 Power Module with Push-Through technology

Figure 3-2 Examples of Power Modules with Push-Through technology FSA … FSC

PM240-2 with Push-Through technology for standard applications

The PM240-2 Power Module is available with Push-Through technology without a filter or with
an integrated class A line filter. The PM240-2 allows dynamic braking using an external braking
resistor.

Table 3-6 1-phase/3-phase 200 VAC … 240 VAC, article number 6SL3211-1PB…

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power (kW) 0.75 2.2 4.0 18.5 30 55

Table 3-7 3-phase 380 VAC … 480 VAC, article number 6SL3211-1PE…

Frame size FSA FSB FSC FSD FSE FSF

Power (kW) 3.0 7.5 15 37 55 132

Table 3-8 3 AC 500 V … 690 V, Article No. 6SL3211-1PH…

Frame size FSD FSE FSF

Power (kW) 37 55 132

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 39
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.1 Accessories for shielding

Shield connection kit

Establish the shield and strain relief for the power connec‐
tions using the shield connection kit.
The shield connection kit comprises a shield plate and ser‐
rated strips with screws.

Table 3-9 Article numbers for the shield connection kit

Frame size PM240-2 PM250 Power Module

FSA The shield connection kit is included in 6SL3262-1AA00-0BA0
FSB the scope of delivery 6SL3262-1AB00-0DA0
FSC 6SL3262-1AC00-0DA0
FSD 6SL3262-1AD00-0DA0
FSE 6SL3262-1AD00-0DA0
FSF 6SL3262-1AF00-0DA0
FSG ---

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

40 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.2 Line filter

With a line filter, the converter can achieve a higher radio interference class.

NOTICE
Overloading the line filter when connected to line supplies that are not permissible
The line filter is only suitable for operation on TN or TT line supplies with a grounded neutral
point. If operated on other line supplies, the line filter will be thermally overloaded and will be
damaged.
• For converters equipped with line filter, only connect to TN or TT line supplies with a
grounded neutral point.

External line filters for PM250

Power Module Power Class B line filter according to

EN55011: 2009
FSC 6SL3225-0BE25‑5AA0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3203-0BD23-8SA0
6SL3225-0BE27‑5AA0,
6SL3225-0BE31‑1AA0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 41
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.3 Line reactor

The line reactor supports the overvoltage protection, smoothes the

harmonics in the line supply and bridges commutation dips. For the
Power Modules subsequently listed, a line reactor is suitable in order to
dampen the specified effects.
The figure on the right-hand side shows as example the line reactors for
the PM240-2 Power Modules, FSB.

The line requirements for deployment of a line reactor depends on the Power Module:
Technical data (Page 497)

NOTICE
Damage to the converter as a result of a missing line reactor
Depending on the Power Module and line supply, if a line reactors is not used, this can result
in damage to the converter and other components in the electrical plant or system.
• Install a line reactor if the relative short-circuit voltage of the line supply is below 1%

Line reactors for PM240-2, 380 V … 480 V

Power Module Power Line reactor

FSA 6SL3210-1PE11-8 . L1, 0.55 kW … 1.1 kW 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0
6SL3210-1PE12-3 . L1,
6SL3210-1PE13-2 . L1
FSB 6SL3210-1PE14-3 . L1, 1.5 kW … 3 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0
6SL321 . -1PE16-1 . L1,
6SL321 . -1PE18-0 . L1
FSC 6SL3210-1PE21-1 . L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0
6SL3210-1PE21-4 . L0,
6SL321 . -1PE21-8 . L0
6SL3210-1PE22-7 . L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0
6SL321 . -1PE23-3 . L0

FSD … FSG: A line reactor is not required.

Line reactors for PM240-2 Power Module, 500 V … 690 V

A line reactor is not required.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

42 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Line reactors for PM240-2, 200 V … 240 V

Power Module Power Line reactor

FSA 6SL3210-1PB13-0 . L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW 6SL3203-0CE13-2AA0
6SL3210-1PB13-8 . L0
FSB 6SL3210-1PB15-5 . L0, 1.1 kW … 2.2 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-0AA0
6SL3210-1PB17-4 . L0,
6SL321 . -1PB21-0 . L0
FSC 6SL3210-1PB21-4 . L0, 3 kW … 4 kW 6SL3203-0CE21-8AA0
6SL321 . -1PB21-8 . L0
6SL321 . -1PC22-2 . L0, 5.5 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3203-0CE23-8AA0
6SL3210-1PC22-8 . L0

FSD … FSF: A line reactor is not required.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 43
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.4 Output reactor

Output reactors reduce the voltage stress on the motor windings and
the load placed on the converter as a result of capacitive recharging
currents in the cables. One or two output reactors are required for
longer motor cables.
You will find more information about permissible motor cable lengths
in the Hardware Installation Manual for the Power Module.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
The figure on the right-hand side shows as example the output reactors
for PM240-2 Power Modules, FSB and FSC.

NOTICE
Overheating of the output reactor if the pulse frequency is too high
The output reactor is dimensioned for the converter pulse frequency set in the factory.
Converter operation with pulse frequencies higher than the factory setting can result in
thermal overload of the output reactor. Excessively high temperatures damage the output
reactor.
• Operate the converter with an output reactor with a maximum pulse frequency ≤ factory
setting.

Output reactors for PM240-2 Power Modules, 380 V … 480 V

Power Module Power Output reactor

FSA 6SL3210‑1PE11‑8 . L1, 0.55 kW … 2.2 kW 6SL3202‑0AE16‑1CA0
6SL3210‑1PE12‑3 . L1,
6SL3210‑1PE13‑2 . L1,
6SL3210‑1PE14‑3 . L1,
6SL3210‑1PE16‑1 . L1
6SL321 . ‑1PE18‑0 . L1 3 kW 6SL3202‑0AE18‑8CA0
FSB 6SL3210‑1PE21‑1 . L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3202‑0AE21‑8CA0
6SL3210‑1PE21‑4 . L0,
6SL321 . ‑1PE21‑8 . L0
FSC 6SL3210‑1PE22‑7 . L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3202‑0AE23‑8CA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE23‑3 . L0
FSD 6SL3210‑1PE23‑8 . L0 18.5 kW … 37 kW 6SE6400‑3TC07‑5ED0
6SL3210‑1PE24‑5 . L0
6SL3210‑1PE26‑0 . L0
6SL321 . ‑1PE27‑5 . L0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PE28‑8 . L0, 45 kW … 55 kW 6SE6400‑3TC14‑5FD0
6SL321 . ‑1PE31‑1 . L0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PE31‑5 . L0 75 kW
6SL3210‑1PE31‑8 . L0 90 kW
6SL3210‑1PE32‑1 . L0 110 kW 6SL3000‑2BE32‑1AA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE32‑5 . L0 132 kW 6SL3000‑2BE32‑6AA0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

44 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Power Module Power Output reactor

FSG 6SL3210‑1PE33‑0 . L0 160 kW 6SL3000‑2BE33‑2AA0
6SL3210‑1PE33‑7 . L0 200 kW 6SL3000‑2BE33‑8AA0
6SL3210‑1PE34‑8 . L0 250 kW 6SL3000‑2BE35‑0AA0

Output reactors for PM240-2 Power Modules, 500 V … 690 V

Power Module Power Output reactor

FSF 6SL3210‑1PH28‑0 . L0, 75 kW … 90 kW 6SL3000‑2AH31‑0AA0
6SL3210‑1PH31‑0 . L0
6SL3210‑1PH31‑2 . L0, 110 kW … 132 kW 6SL3000‑2AH31‑5AA0
6SL3210‑1PH31‑4 . L0
FSG 6SL3210‑1PH31‑7CL0 160 kW 6SL3000‑2AH31‑8AA0
6SL3210‑1PH32‑1CL0 200 kW 6SL3000‑2AH32‑4AA0
6SL3210‑1PH32‑5CL0 250 kW 6SL3000‑2AH32‑6AA0

Output reactors for PM240-2 Power Modules, 200 V … 240 V

Power Module Power Output reactor

FSA 6SL3210‑1PB13‑0 . L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW 6SL3202‑0AE16‑1CA0
6SL321 . ‑1PB13‑8 . L0
FSB 6SL3210‑1PB15‑5 . L0 1.1 kW
6SL3210‑1PB17‑4 . L0 1.5 kW 6SL3202‑0AE18‑8CA0
FSB 6SL321 . ‑1PB21‑0 . L0 2.2 kW 6SL3202‑0AE21‑8CA0
FSC 6SL3210‑1PB21‑4 . L0, 3 kW … 4 kW
6SL321 . ‑1PB21‑8 . L0
6SL321 . ‑1PC22‑2 . L0, 5.5 kw … 7.5 kW 6SL3202‑0AE23‑8CA0
6SL3210‑1PC22‑8 . L0
FSD 6SL3210‑1PC24‑2UL0, 11 kW … 18.5 kW 6SE6400‑3TC07‑5ED0
6SL3210‑1PC25‑4UL0,
6SL3210‑1PC26‑8UL0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PC28‑0UL0, 22 kW … 55 kW 6SE6400‑3TC14‑5FD0
6SL3210‑1PC31‑1UL0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PC31‑3UL0,
6SL3210‑1PC31‑6UL0,
6SL3210‑1PC31‑8UL0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 45
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Output reactors for PM250 Power Module

Power Module Power Output reactor

FSC 6SL3225-0BE25‑5 . A0, 7.5 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AJ23-2CA0
6SL3225-0BE27‑5 . A0,
6SL3225-0BE31‑1 . A0
FSD 6SL3225-0BE31-5 . A0 18.5 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
6SL3225-0BE31-8 . A0 22 kW 6SE6400-3TC03-8DD0
6SL3225-0BE32-2 . A0 30 kW 6SE6400-3TC05-4DD0
FSE 6SL3225-0BE33-0 . A0 37 kW 6SE6400-3TC08-0ED0
6SL3225-0BE33-7 . A0 45 kW 6SE6400-3TC07-5ED0
FSF 6SL3225-0BE34-5 . A0 55 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0
6SL3225-0BE35-5 . A0 75 kW 6SE6400-3TC15-4FD0
6SL3225-0BE37-5 . A0 90 kW 6SE6400-3TC14-5FD0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

46 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.5 ((dv/dt filter plus VPL_PM240-2))

A combination of dv/dt filter and a voltage peak limiter (VPL) – dv/dt

filter plus VPL – is available to suppress voltage peaks.
When using a dv/dt filter plus VPL, observe the following restrictions:
• The output frequency must not exceed 150 Hz.
• The pulse frequency must not exceed 4 kHz.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter plus VPL if it is not activated during commissioning
The dv/dt filter plus VPL may be damaged if it is not activated during commissioning.
• Activate the dv/dt filter plus VPL during commissioning via parameter p0230.
• Activate the dv/dt filter plus VPL during commissioning according to the electric
specifications.

NOTICE
Damage to the dv/dt filter plus VPL if the connection to the capacitor is not removed
The dv/dt filter plus VPL may be damaged if the connection to the capacitor of the common
mode filter is not removed when the dv/dt filter plus VPL operates in the IT line system.

Further information is provided on the Internet:

• FAQ of dv/dt filter plus VPL (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13224/
faq)
For applications in the USA and Canada, you can also use the dv/dt filters plus VPL
recommended by Siemens Product Partner for Drive Options. For more information, see the
link below:
Voltage limiter and dv/dt filter (https://www.mdexx.com/wp-content/uploads/2019/11/
BAF-18-001-76_Instruction_manual.pdf)

dv/dt filters plus VPL for PM240‑2 Power Modules, 3 AC 400 V

Power Module Power dv/dt filter plus VPL

Manufacturer: mdexx Mag‐
netronic Devices s.r.o
FSD 6SL3210-1PE23-8 .L0 18.5 kW JTA:TEF1203-0HB
6SL3210-1PE24-5 .L0 22 kW JTA:TEF1203-0JB
6SL3210-1PE26-0 .L0 30 kW
FSD 6SL321 .-1PE27-5 .L0 37 kW JTA:TEF1203-0KB
FSE 6SL3210-1PE28-8 .L0 45 kW

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 47
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Power Module Power dv/dt filter plus VPL

Manufacturer: mdexx Mag‐
netronic Devices s.r.o
FSE 6SL321 .-1PE31-1 .L0 55 kW JTA:TEF1203-0LB
FSF 6SL3210-1PE31-5 .L0 75 kW
FSF 6SL3210-1PE31-8 .L0 90 kW JTA:TEF1203-0MB
6SL3210-1PE32-1 .L0 110 kW
6SL321 .-1PE32-5 .L0 132 kW

dv/dt filters plus VPL for PM240‑2 Power Modules, 3 AC 690 V

Power Module Power dv/dt filter plus VPL

Manufacturer: mdexx Mag‐
netronic Devices s.r.o
FSD 6SL3210-1PH21-4 .L0 11 kW JTA:TEF1203-0GB
6SL3210-1PH22-0 .L0 15 kW
6SL3210-1PH22-3 .L0 18.5 kW
6SL3210-1PH22-7 .L0 22 kW JTA:TEF1203-0HB
6SL3210-1PH23-5 .L0 30 kW
6SL3210-1PH24-2 .L0 37 kW
FSE 6SL3210-1PH25-2 .L0 45 kW JTA:TEF1203-0JB
6SL3210-1PH26-2 .L0 55 kW
FSF 6SL3210-1PH28-0 .L0 75 kW JTA:TEF1203-0KB
6SL3210-1PH31-0 .L0 90 kW
6SL3210-1PH31-2 .L0 110 kW JTA:TEF1203-0LB
6SL3210-1PH31-4 .L0 132 kW
FSG 6SL3210-1PH31-7CL0 160 kW JTA:TEF1203-0MB
6SL3210-1PH32-1CL0 200 kW
6SL3210-1PH32-5CL0 250 kW

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

48 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.6 Sine-wave filter

The sine-wave filter at the converter output limits the voltage rate-of-
rise and the peak voltages at the motor winding. The maximum
permissible length of motor feeder cables is increased to 300 m.
The following applies when using a sine-wave filter:
• Operation is only permissible with pulse frequencies from 4 kHz
to 8 kHz.
From 110 kW power rating of the Power Modules (according to
the type plate) only 4 kHz is permissible.
• The converter power is reduced by 5%.
• The maximum output frequency of the converter is 150 Hz at 380 V to 480 V.
• Operation and commissioning may only be performed with the motor connected, as the
sine-wave filter is not no-load proof.
• An output reactor is superfluous.

Sine-wave filter for PM240-2 Power Module, 380 V … 480 V

Power Module Power Sine-wave filter

FSD 6SL3210‑1PE23‑8 . L0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
6SL3210‑1PE24‑5 . L0
6SL3210‑1PE26‑0 . L0 30 kW 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE27‑5 . L0 37 kW 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PE28‑8 . L0 45 kW
6SL321 . ‑1PE31‑1 . L0 55 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PE31‑5 . L0 75 kW
6SL3210‑1PE31‑8 . L0 90 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0
6SL3210‑1PE32‑1 . L0, 110 kW … 132 kW 6SL3000-2CE32-3AA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE32‑5 . L0
FSG 6SL3210‑1PE33‑0 . L0 160 kW 6SL3000-2CE32-8AA0
6SL3210‑1PE33‑7 . L0 200 kW 6SL3000-2CE33-3AA0
6SL3210‑1PE34‑8 . L0 250 kW 6SL3000-2CE34-1AA0

Sine-wave filter for PM240-2 Power Module, 200 V … 240 V

Power Module Power Sine-wave filter

FSD 6SL3210‑1PC24‑2UL0 11 kW 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
6SL3210‑1PC25‑4UL0 15 kW 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
6SL321 . ‑1PC26‑8UL0 18.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PC28‑0UL0 22 kW
6SL321 . ‑1PC31‑1UL0 30 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PC31‑3UL0 37 kW
6SL3210‑1PC31‑6UL0, 45 kW … 55 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0
6SL321 . ‑1PC31‑8UL0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 49
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Sine-wave filter for PM250 Power Module

Power Module Power Sine-wave filter

FSC 6SL3225-0BE25‑5 . A0 7.5 kW 6SL3202-0AE22-0SA0
6SL3225-0BE27‑5 . A0, 11.0 kW … 15.0 kW 6SL3202-0AE23-3SA0
6SL3225-0BE31‑1 . A0
FSD 6SL3225-0BE31-5 . A0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW 6SL3202-0AE24-6SA0
6SL3225-0BE31-8 . A0
6SL3225-0BE32-2 . A0 30 kW 6SL3202-0AE26-2SA0
FSE 6SL3225-0BE33-0 . A0, 37 kW … 45 kW 6SL3202-0AE28-8SA0
6SL3225-0BE33-7 . A0
FSF 6SL3225-0BE34-5 . A0, 55 kW … 75 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-5SA0
6SL3225-0BE35-5 . A0
6SL3225-0BE37-5 . A0 90 kW 6SL3202-0AE31-8SA0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

50 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.7 Braking resistor

The braking resistor allows loads with a high moment of inertia to be quickly
braked.
The Power Module controls the braking resistor via its integrated braking module.
The figure shown on the right-hand side shows as example the braking resistor
for a PM240-2 Power Module, FSB.

Braking resistors for PM240-2, 380 V … 480 V

Power Module Power Braking resistor

FSA 6SL3210‑1PE11‑8 . L1, 0.55 kW … 1.5 kW 6SL3201‑0BE14‑3AA0
6SL3210‑1PE12‑3 . L1,
6SL3210‑1PE13‑2 . L1,
6SL3210‑1PE14‑3 . L1
6SL321 . ‑1PE16‑1 . L1, 2.2 kW … 3.0 kW 6SL3201‑0BE21‑0AA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE18‑0 . L1
FSB 6SL3210‑1PE21‑1 . L0, 4 kW … 7.5 kW 6SL3201‑0BE21‑8AA0
6SL3210‑1PE21‑4 . L0,
6SL321 . ‑1PE21‑8 . L0
FSC 6SL3210‑1PE22‑7 . L0, 11 kW … 15 kW 6SL3201‑0BE23‑8AA0
6SL321 . ‑1PE23‑3 . L0
FSD 6SL3210‑1PE23‑8 . L0, 18.5 kW … 22 kW JJY:023422620001
6SL3210‑1PE24‑5 . L0
6SL3210‑1PE26‑0 . L0, 30 kW … 37 kW JJY:023424020001
6SL3210‑1PE27‑5 . L0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PE28‑8 . L0, 45 kW … 55 kW JJY:023434020001
6SL3210‑1PE31‑1 . L0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PE31‑5 . L0, 75 kW … 90 kW JJY:023454020001
6SL3210‑1PE31‑8 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PE32‑1 . L0, 90 kW … 132 kW JJY:023464020001
6SL3210‑1PE32‑5 . L0
FSG 6SL3210‑1PE33‑0AL0, 160 kW … 250 kW 6SL3000‑1BE32‑5AA0
6SL3210‑1PE33‑7AL0,
6SL3210‑1PE34‑8AL0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 51
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

Braking resistors for PM240-2, 500 V … 690 V

Power Module Power Braking resistor

FSD 6SL3210‑1PH21‑4 . L0, 11 kW … 37 kW JJY:023424020002
6SL3210‑1PH22‑0 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PH22‑3 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PH22‑7 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PH23‑5 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PH24‑2 . L0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PH25‑2 . L0, 45 kW … 55 kW JJY:023434020002
6SL3210‑1PH26‑2 . L0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PH28‑0 . L0, 75 kW … 90 kW JJY:023464020002
6SL3210‑1PH31‑0 . L0,
6SL3210‑1PH31‑2 . L0, 110 kW … 132 kW JJY:023464020002
6SL3210‑1PH31‑4 . L0
FSG 6SL3210‑1PH31‑7CL0, 160 kW … 250 kW 6SL3000‑1BH32‑5AA0
6SL3210‑1PH32‑1CL0,
6SL3210‑1PH32‑5CL0

Braking resistors for PM240-2, 200 V … 240 V

Power Module Power Braking resistor

FSA 6SL3210‑1PB13‑0 . L0, 0.55 kW … 0.75 kW JJY:023146720008
6SL321 . ‑1PB13‑8 . L0
FSB 6SL3210‑1PB15‑5 . L0, 1.1 kW … 2.2 kW JJY:023151720007
6SL3210‑1PB17‑4 . L0,
6SL321 . ‑1PB21‑0 . L0
FSC 6SL3210‑1PB21‑4 . L0, 3 kW … 4 kW JJY:02 3163720018
6SL321 . ‑1PB21‑8 . L0
6SL3210‑1PC22‑2 . L0, 5.5 kW … 7.5 kW JJY:023433720001
6SL3210‑1PC22‑8 . L0
FSD 6SL3210‑1PC24‑2UL0, 11 kW … 18.5 kW JJY:023422620002
6SL3210‑1PC25‑4UL0,
6SL3210‑1PC26‑8UL0
FSE 6SL3210‑1PC28‑0UL0, 22 kW … 30 kW JJY:023423320001
6SL3210‑1PC31‑1UL0
FSF 6SL3210‑1PC31‑3UL0, 37 kW … 55 kW JJY:023434020003
6SL3210‑1PC31‑6UL0,
6SL3210‑1PC31‑8UL0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

52 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

3.8.8 Brake Relay

The Brake Relay has a switch contact (NO contact) for controlling a
motor holding brake.
Article number: 6SL3252‑0BB00‑0AA0
The following Power Modules have a connection possibility for the
Brake Relay:
• PM240-2
• PM240P-2
• PM250

3.8.9 Safe Brake Relay

The Safe Brake Relay controls a 24 V motor brake and monitors the
brake control for a short-circuit or interrupted cable.
Article number: 6SL3252-0BB01-0AA0
The following Power Modules have a connection possibility for the
Brake Relay:
• PM240-2
• PM240P-2
• PM250

3.8.10 Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20

Overview
When using the CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit, the Control Unit can be installed next to the
PM240-2 Power Module.
Article No: 6SL3255-0BW01-0NA0

&RQQHFWLQJFDEOH

$GDSWHUIRU
&RQWURO8QLW
$GDSWHUIRU3RZHU
0RGXOHV

&RQWURO8QLW

3RZHU0RGXOH
Figure 3-3 Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 53
Description
3.8 Components for the Power Modules

The SINAMICS CUA20 Control Unit Adapter Kit comprises the following components:
• Adapter which is snapped onto the Power Module
• Adapter for the Control Unit
• Prefabricated cable to connect the two adapters

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

54 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Description
3.9 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated

3.9 Motors and multi-motor drives that can be operated

Siemens motors that can be operated

You can connect standard induction motors to the converter.
You can find information on further motors on the Internet:
Motors that can be operated (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
100426622)

Third-party motors that can be operated

You can operate standard asynchronous motors from other manufacturers with the converter:

NOTICE
Insulation failure due to unsuitable third-party motor
A higher load occurs on the motor insulation in converter mode than with line operation.
Damage to the motor winding may occur as a result.
• Please observe the notes in the System Manual "Requirements for third-party motors"

Further information is provided on the Internet:

Requirements for third-party motors (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/79690594)

Multi-motor operation
Multi-motor operation involves simultaneously operating several identical motors on one
converter. For standard induction motors, multi-motor operation is generally permissible.
Additional preconditions and restrictions relating to multi-motor operation are available on
the Internet:
Multi-motor drive (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/84049346)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 55
Description
3.10 Encoder and Sensor Module

3.10 Encoder and Sensor Module

You can connect the following encoders to the Control Unit:
• For the position or speed control
– Resolver
– HTL encoder
– TTL encoder
– Sine/cosine encoder
– EnDat 2.1
• For the position control
– SSI encoder
You require a Sensor Module to connect a non-DRIVE-CLiQ-capable encoder to the DRIVE-
CLiQ interface of the converter.

Sensor Module Article number Permissible encoders

SMC10 6SL3055-0AA00-5AA3 Resolvers
SMC20 6SL3055-0AA00-5BA3 sin/cos encoders, absolute encoders En‐
dat 2.1, SSI encoders
SMC30 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA2 HTL or TTL encoders, SSI encoders

SME20 6SL3055-0AA00-5EA3 sin/cos encoder

SME25 6SL3055-0AA00-5HA3 Absolute encoder Endat 2.1, SSI encoder

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

56 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Installing 4
4.1 Installing the label for the North American market

Description

Figure 4-1 Adhesive label with danger and warning notes for North America

The converter is supplied with an adhesive label with danger and warning notes for the
North American market.
Attach the adhesive label in the required language to the inside of the control cabinet where
it is clearly visible at all times.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 57
Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

The converter is designed for operation in industrial environments where strong
electromagnetic fields are to be expected.
Reliable and disturbance-free operation is only ensured for EMC-compliant installation.
To achieve this, subdivide the control cabinet and the machine or system into EMC zones:

EMC zones

/LQHVXSSO\ &RQWUROFDELQHW

)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV

/LQHUHDFWRURUOLQHILOWHU 9SRZHUVXSSO\

+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO
&RQYHUWHU V\VWHP

&RQQHFWLRQRIVHQVRUV
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU HJSRVLWLRQSUHVVXUHRU
VLQHZDYHILOWHU WHPSHUDWXUH

%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU

'ULYHQPDFKLQH

Figure 4-2 Example of the EMC zones of a plant or machine

Inside the control cabinet

• Zone A: Line supply connection
• Zone B: Power electronics
Devices in Zone B generate energy-rich electromagnetic fields.
• Zone C: Control and sensors
Devices in Zone C do not generate any energy-rich electromagnetic fields themselves, but
their functions can be impaired by electromagnetic fields.

Outside the control cabinet

• Zone D: Motors, braking resistors
Devices in Zone D generate electromagnetic fields with a significant amount of energy

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

58 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

4.2.1 Control cabinet

• Assign the various devices to zones in the control cabinet.
• Electromagnetically uncouple the zones from each other by means of one of the following
actions:
– Side clearance ≥ 25 cm
– Separate metal enclosure
– Large-area partition plates
• Route cables of various zones in separate cable harnesses or cable ducts.
• Install filters or isolation amplifiers at the interfaces of the zones.

Control cabinet assembly

• Connect the door, side panels, top and base plate of the control cabinet with the control
cabinet frame using one of the following methods:
– Electrical contact surface of several cm² for each contact location
– Several screw connections
– Short, finely stranded, braided copper wires with cross-sections
≥ 95 mm² / 000 (3/0) (‑2) AWG
• Install a shield support for shielded cables that are routed out of the control cabinet.
• Connect the PE bar and the shield support to the control cabinet frame through a large
surface area to establish a good electrical connection.
• Mount the control cabinet components on a bare metal mounting plate.
• Connect the mounting plate to the control cabinet frame and PE bar and shield support
through a large surface area to establish a good electrical connection.
• For screw connections onto painted or anodized surfaces, establish a good conductive
contact using one of the following methods:
– Use special (serrated) contact washers that cut through the painted or anodized surface.
– Remove the insulating coating at the contact locations.

Measures required for several control cabinets

• Install equipotential bonding for all control cabinets.
• Screw the frames of the control cabinets together at several locations through a large surface
area using serrated washers to establish a good electrical connection.
• In plants and systems where the control cabinets are lined up next to one another, and which
are installed in two groups back to back, connect the PE bars of the two cabinet groups at as
many locations as possible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 59
Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

&RQWUROFDELQHW &RQWUROFDELQHW

7UDQVIRUPHU
0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV

/LQHILOWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
/
FRQGXFWLYH
/
&RQYHUWHU FRQQHFWLRQV
/ WKURXJKDODUJH
1 VXUIDFHDUHD
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
3( VLQHZDYHILOWHU

6KLHOGVXSSRUW
3( 3(

(TXLSRWHQWLDOERQGLQJ

'ULYHQPDFKLQH
3(

)RXQGDWLRQ

Figure 4-3 Grounding and high-frequency equipotential bonding measures in the control cabinet
and in the plant/system

Further information
Additional information about EMC-compliant installation is available in the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)

4.2.2 Cables
Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference are connected
to the converter:
• Cables with a high level of interference:
– Cable between the line filter and converter
– Motor cable
– Cable at the converter DC link connection
– Cable between the converter and braking resistor
• Cables with a low level of interference:
– Cable between the line and line filter
– Signal and data cables

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

60 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

Cable routing inside the cabinet

• Route the power cables with a high level of interference so that there is a minimum clearance
of 25 cm to cables with a low level of interference.
If the minimum clearance of 25 cm is not possible, insert separating metal sheets between
the cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference.
Connect these separating metal sheets to the mounting plate to establish a good electrical
connection.
• Cables with a high level of interference and cables with a low level of interference may only
cross over at right angles:
• Keep all of the cables as short as possible.
• Route all of the cables close to the mounting plates or cabinet frames.
• Route signal and data cables - as well as the associated equipotential bonding cables - parallel
and close to one another.
• Twist incoming and outgoing unshielded individual conductors.
Alternatively, you can route incoming and outgoing conductors in parallel, but close to one
another.
• Ground any unused conductors of signal and data cables at both ends.
• Signal and data cables must only enter the cabinet from one side, e.g. from below.
• Use shielded cables for the following connections:
– Cable between the converter and line filter
– Cable between the converter and output reactor or sine-wave filter

&RQWUROFDELQHW

0RXQWLQJSODWH
)XVHVVZLWFKHVDQG
FRQWDFWRUV

/LQHILOWHU

&RQQHFWVKLHOG

&RQYHUWHU (OHFWULFDOO\
FRQGXFWLYH
FRQQHFWLRQV
&RQQHFWVKLHOG WKURXJKDODUJH
2XWSXWUHDFWRURU VXUIDFHDUHD
VLQHZDYHILOWHU
&RQQHFWVKLHOG
6KLHOGVXSSRUW

%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU

Figure 4-4 Routing converter cables inside and outside a control cabinet

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 61
Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

Routing cables outside the control cabinet

• Maintain a minimum clearance of 25 cm between cables with a high level of interference and
cables with a low level of interference.
• Use shielded cables for the following connections:
– Converter motor cable
– Cable between the converter and braking resistor
– Signal and data cables
• Connect the motor cable shield to the motor enclosure using a PG gland that establishes a
good electrical connection.

Requirements relating to shielded cables

• Use cables with finely-stranded, braided shields.
• Connect the shield to at least one end of the cable.
 &RQQHFWVKLHOG

6KLHOGSODWH
 %DUHVKLHOG
7RRWKHG
WDSH
0RXQWLQJSODWH

+RVHFODPS

Figure 4-5 Examples for EMC-compliant shield support

• Attach the shield to the shield support directly after the cable enters the cabinet.
• Do not interrupt the shield.
• Only use metallic or metallized plug connectors for shielded data cables.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

62 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.2 EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system

4.2.3 Electromechanical components

Surge voltage protection circuit

• Connect surge voltage protection circuits to the following components:
– Coils of contactors
– Relays
– Solenoid valves
– Motor holding brakes
• Connect the surge voltage protection circuit directly at the coil.
• Use RC elements or varistors for AC-operated coils and freewheeling diodes or varistors for
DC-operated coils.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 63
Installing
4.3 Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors

4.3 Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors

Installing reactors, filters and braking resistors

The following supplementary components may be required depending on the Power Modules
and the particular application:
• Line reactors
• Filter
• Braking resistors
• Brake Relay
Installing these components is described in the documentation provided.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

64 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

4.4 Installing Power Modules

4.4.1 Basic installation rules for built-in units

Protection against the spread of fire

The device may be operated only in closed housings or in control cabinets with protective covers
that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used. The installation of the device in
a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must prevent the
spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet.

Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination

Protect the device, e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54
according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12. Further measures may be necessary for particularly critical
operating conditions.
If condensation or conductive pollution can be excluded at the installation site, a lower
degree of control cabinet protection may be permitted.

Installing
Rules for admissible mounting:
• Only mount the Power Module in a vertical position with the motor connectors at the bottom.

• Maintain the minimum clearances to other components.

• Use the specified installation parts and components.
• Comply with the specified torques.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 65
Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

4.4.2 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM240-2 Power Module,
IP20
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.

Frame sizes FSA ... FSC

'H E
WK WK
:LG 'H :LG SW
K
SWK 

F
&8
23
&8

F
23
+HLJKWZLWKRXW
VKLHOGSODWH

+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOG
K

K
SODWH
6KLHOGSODWH

)6$ 6KLHOG

)6%)6&
SODWH

Table 4-1 Dimensions

Frame Width Height [mm] Mounting depth in the cabi‐ Mount‐

size [mm] net with Control Unit (CU) ing depth
[mm] 3) with
without with shield without OP with OP 1) CUA20 2)
shield plate plate [mm]

FSA 73 196 276 227 238 194

FSB 100 292 370 227 238 194
FSC 140 355 432 227 238 194
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover
2)
Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20
3)
Depth of Power Module without Control Unit: 165 mm

Table 4-2 Drilling dimensions, cooling clearances and fixing

Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top Bottom Front
FSA 186 62.3 6 80 100 100 3 x M4 / 2.5
FSB 281 80 6 80 100 100 4 x M4 / 2.5
FSC 343 120 6 80 100 100 4 x M5 / 3.5
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

66 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Frame sizes FSD … FSF

'H
SW
WK K
: LG ZL
WK E
&
8

F
2
3
+HLJKWZLWKRXWVKLHOGSODWH

K
+HLJKWZLWKVKLHOGSODWH

6KLHOG
SODWH

'H
SW
K

Table 4-3 Dimensions

Frame Width Height [mm] Mounting depth in the cabi‐ Mounting

size [mm] net with Control Unit (CU) depth
[mm] 3) with
without with shield without OP with OP 1) CUA20 2)
shield plate plate [mm]

FSD 200 472 624 256 267 237

FSE 275 551 728 256 267 237
FSF 305 709 965 376 387 357
FSG 305 1000 1286 376 387 357
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover
2)
Control Unit Adapter Kit CUA20
3)
Depth of Power Module without Control Unit: FSD, FSE 237 mm, FSF, FSG 357 mm

Table 4-4 Drilling dimensions, cooling clearances and fixing

Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top 2) Bottom 2) Front
FSD 430 170 7 300 350 100 4 x M5 / 6.0
FSE 509 230 8.5 300 350 100 4 x M6 / 10

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 67
Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Frame Drilling dimensions [mm] Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]
size h b c Top 2) Bottom 2) Front
FSF 680 270 13 300 350 100 4 x M8 / 25
FSG 970.5 265 15 300 350 100 4 x M8 / 25
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm
2)
The top and bottom cooling air clearances refer to the Power Module without shield plate

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

68 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

4.4.3 Dimension drawings, drilling dimensions for PM240-2 Power Modules in

push-through technology
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.

Frame sizes FSA ... FSC

Panel thickness of the control cabinet ≤ 3.5 mm

WK
:LG 'H (OHFWULFDOFDELQHWFXWRXWDQGPRXQWLQJKROHV
7 SW
K
7 
& E
8

F

2 E šPP
3

D
D
šPP

)6$ )6&

D
D )6%

D
D
G
+HLJKW

D
D

H H

D
D
F

F
 

 0RXQWLQJKROHIRUWKHPRXQWLQJIUDPH
6KLHOG
SODWH

Figure 4-6 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions for frame sizes FSA ... FSC

Table 4-5 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted

Frame Width Height [mm] Mounting depth in the cabinet

size [mm] with Control Unit (CU) [mm]
without shield with shield plate without OP with OP 1)
plate
FSA 126 238 322 180 191
FSB 154 345 430 180 191
FSC 200 411 500 180 191
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 69
Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Table 4-6 Cooling air clearances and additional dimensions

Frame Power Module depth [mm] T1 T2 Cooling air clearances [mm] 1)

size Top Bottom Front
FSA … FSC 171 118 53 80 100 100
1)
The Power Module is designed for mounting without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance
reasons, we recommend a lateral clearance of 1 mm.

Table 4-7 Electrical cabinet cutout and mounting holes

Frame Control cabinet cutout [mm] Fixing/torque [Nm]

size a b c d e
FSA 103 106 27 198 88 8 × M5 / 3.5
FSB 148 134 34.5 304 116 8 × M5 / 3.5
FSC 123 174 30.5 365 156 10 × M5 / 3.5

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

70 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Frame sizes FSD … FSF

Panel thickness of the control cabinet ≤ 3.5 mm

&XWRXWVRIWKHFRQWUROFDELQHWDQGPRXQWLQJKROHV

7
& 8
23 
WK 
:LG 








 




)6'

)6)

+HLJKW3RZHU0RGXOH






෪PP


+HLJKWWRWDO





 ෪PP





6KLHOGSODWH


)6(

 0RXQWLQJKROHIRUWKHPRXQWLQJ
IUDPH
7


7
'HS
WK


෪PP




Figure 4-7 Dimension drawing and drilling dimensions for frame sizes FSD ... FSF

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 71
Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Table 4-8 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)

Frame Width Height [mm] Mounting depth in the cabinet

size [mm] with Control Unit (CU) [mm]
without shield with shield plate without OP with OP 1)
plate
FSD 275 517 650 158 169
FSE 354 615 722 158 169
FSF 384 754 1021 196 207
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover

Table 4-9 Cooling air clearances and additional dimensions

Frame Power Module depth [mm] T1 T2 Cooling air clearances [mm]

size Top Bottom Front
FSD, FSE 237 141 97.5 350 350 29
FSF 358 177.5 180.5 80 100 100

Table 4-10 Mounting

Frame Fixing/torque [Nm]

size
FSD, FSE 10 × M5 / 3.5
FSF 12 × M6 / 5.9

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

72 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

4.4.4 Dimensioned drawings, drilling dimensions for the PM250 Power Module
The following dimension drawings and drilling patterns are not to scale.

Frame size FSC



 


&8
23





Table 4-11 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted

Frame Mounting depth in the cabinet with Control Unit (CU) [mm]
size without OP with OP 1)
FSC 227 238
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover

Table 4-12 Cooling air clearances and fastening

Frame Cooling air clearances [mm] 1) Fixing/torque [Nm]

size Top Bottom Front
FSC 125 125 65 4 x M5 / 3
1)
You can mount the Power Modules without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance reasons, we
recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 73
Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Frame sizes FSD … FSF

'H
WK SWK
:LG

&8
23
E

F
+HLJKW

K
6KLHOGSODWH

Table 4-13 Dimensions depend on the operator panel (OP) that is inserted 1)

Frame Width Height [mm] Mounting depth in the cabinet with

size [mm] Control Unit (CU) [mm] 2)
without shield with shield plate without OP with OP 1)
plate
FSD with‐ 275 419 542 266 277
out filter
FSD with 275 512 635 266 277
filter
FSE with‐ 275 499 622 266 277
out filter
FSE with 275 635 758 266 277
filter
FSF with‐ 350 634 792 378 389
out filter
FSF with 350 934 1092 378 389
filter
1)
BOP-2, IOP-2 or blanking cover
2)
Power Module depth without Control Unit: FSD, FSE 204 mm, FSF 316 mm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

74 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.4 Installing Power Modules

Table 4-14 Drilling dimensions, cooling clearances and fixing

Frame size Drilling dimensions Cooling air clearances Fixing/torque

[mm] [mm] 1) [Nm]
b h c Top Bottom Front
FSD without filter 235 325 11 300 300 65 4 x M6 / 6
FSD with filter 235 419 11 300 300 65 4 x M6 / 6
FSE without filter 235 405 11 300 300 65 4 x M6 / 6
FSE with filter 235 541 11 300 300 65 4 x M6 / 6
FSF without filter 300 598 11 350 350 65 4 x M8 / 13
FSF with filter 300 898 11 350 350 65 4 x M8 / 13
1)
You can mount the Power Modules without any lateral cooling air clearance. For tolerance reasons, we
recommend a lateral clearance of approx. 1 mm.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 75
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

WARNING
Electric shock when the motor terminal box is open
As soon as the converter is connected to the line supply, the motor connections of the converter
may carry dangerous voltages. When the motor is connected to the converter, there is danger
to life through contact with the motor terminals if the motor terminal box is open.
• Close the motor terminal box before connecting the converter to the line supply.

Note
Fault protection when insulation fails in the motor circuit at the output side
In case of insulation failure in the motor circuit, the overcurrent trip of the converter meets the
requirements of IEC 60364-4-41:2005/AMD1:2017 Section 411 and Annex D for protection
against electric shock.
• Observe the installation specifications for this converter.
• Ensure the continuity of the protective conductor.
• Observe the applicable installation standards.

4.5.1 Permissible line supplies

Restrictions for installation altitudes above 2000 m

Above an installation altitude of 2000 m, the permissible line supplies are restricted.
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

76 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

Screw for functional grounding on the converter, frame size FSG

If you wish to use the converters with integrated C3 line filter, please note the information in the
sections "TN line system", "TT line system" and "IT system" below.

Figure 4-8 Remove screw for functional grounding

4.5.1.1 TN line system

A TN system transfers the PE protective con‐ ([DPSOH 6HSDUDWHWUDQVIHURI1DQG3(

ductor to the installed plant or system using a JURXQGHGQHXWUDOSRLQW
cable. /
Generally, in a TN system the neutral point is /
grounded. There are versions of a TN system /
with a grounded line conductor, e.g. with 1
grounded L1. 3(

A TN system can transfer the neutral conduc‐

7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
tor N and the PE protective conductor either JHQHUDWRU
separately or combined.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 77
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

Converter connected to a TN system

• Converters with integrated line filter:
– Operation on TN line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TN line systems with grounded line conductor not permissible.
Note
Special feature of FSG converters
FSG converters with integrated C3 line filter can be operated in TN line systems ≤ 600 V
with a grounded line conductor if you remove the screw for functional grounding.
Figure 4-8 Remove screw for functional grounding (Page 77)
If you remove the screw for functional grounding, the EMC properties deteriorate and the
requirements of Class C3 are no longer met.

• Converters with external line filter:

– Operation on TN line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TN line systems with grounded line conductor not permissible.
• Converters without line filter:
– Operation on all TN line systems ≤ 600 V permissible
– Operation on TN line systems > 600 V and grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TN line systems > 600 V and grounded line conductor not permissible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

78 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.1.2 TT line system

In a TT line system, the transformer ground‐ ([DPSOH 7UDQVIHURI1JURXQGHGQHXWUDO

ing and the installation grounding are inde‐ SRLQW
pendent of one another. /
There are TT line supplies where the neutral /
conductor N is either transferred – or not. /
1
3(

7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU

Note
Operation in IEC or UL systems
For installations in compliance with IEC, operation on TT line systems is permissible. For
installations in compliance with UL, operation on TT line systems is not permissible.

Converters connected to a TT system

• Converters with integrated line filter:
– Operation on TT line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TT line systems without grounded neutral point not permissible.
Note
Special feature of FSG converters
FSG converters with integrated C3 line filter can be operated in TT line systems without
a grounded neutral point if you remove the screw for functional grounding.
Figure 4-8 Remove screw for functional grounding (Page 77)
If you remove the screw for functional grounding, the EMC properties deteriorate and the
requirements of Class C3 are no longer met.

• Converters with external line filter:

– Operation on TT line systems with grounded neutral point permissible.
– Operation on TT line systems without grounded neutral point not permissible.
• Converters without line filter:
– Operation on all TT line systems permissible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 79
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.1.3 IT system

In an IT line system, all of the conductors are ([DPSOH 7UDQVIHURI1LPSHGDQFHZLWK

insulated with respect to the PE protective UHVSHFWWR3(SURWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRU
conductor – or connected to the PE protective /
conductor through an impedance. /
There are IT systems with and without transfer /
of the neutral conductor N. 1
3(

7UDQVIRUPHURU 7RWKHV\VWHP
JHQHUDWRU

Note
Behavior of the converter when a ground fault occurs
If the converter is to remain operable even when a ground fault occurs at the converter output,
you must install an output reactor. This prevents an overcurrent trip or damage to the drive.

Converters connected to an IT system

• Converters with integrated line filter:
– Operation on IT line systems not permissible.
Note
Special feature of FSG converters
FSG converters with integrated C3 line filter can be operated in IT line systems if you
remove the screw for functional grounding.
Figure 4-8 Remove screw for functional grounding (Page 77)
If you remove the screw for functional grounding, the EMC properties deteriorate and the
requirements of Class C3 are no longer met.

• Converters without line filter:

– Operation on all IT line systems permissible.

Note
690 V converters: Output reactors for frame sizes FSD and FSE
An output reactor is required for 690 V reactors in frame sizes FSD and FSE.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

80 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.2 Requirements for the protective conductor

Overview
A high leakage current flows through the protective conductor in converter operation. The
protective conductor of the converter must not be interrupted for safe touch protection in
converter operation.
This primarily results in requirements for the minimum conductor cross-section of the
protective conductor.
No restriction applies to the length of the protective conductor for touch protection.
However, short protective conductors are advantageous for EMC-compliant installation.

Description

WARNING
Electric shock due to interrupted protective conductor
The drive components conduct a high leakage current via the protective conductor. Touching
conductive parts when the protective conductor is interrupted can result in death or serious
injury.
• Comply with the requirements for the protective conductor.

/
/
/
3(

 

① Protective conductor for line feeder cables

② Protective conductor for converter line feeder cables
③ Protective conductor between PE and the control cabinet
④ Protective conductor for motor feeder cables

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 81
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

The minimum cross-section of the protective conductor ① … ④ depends on the cross-

section of the line or motor feeder cable:
• Line or motor feeder cable ≤ 16 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = cross-section of the line or motor
feeder cable
• 16 mm² < line or motor feeder cable ≤ 35 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = 16 mm2
• Line or motor feeder cable > 35 mm2
⇒ Minimum cross-section of the protective conductor = ½ cross-section of the line or motor
feeder cable
Additional requirements placed on the protective conductor ① according to IEC 60204-1:
• For permanent connection, the protective conductor must fulfill at least one of the following
conditions:
– The protective conductor is routed so that it is protected against damage along its
complete length.
Cables routed inside switch cabinets or enclosed machine housings are considered to be
adequately protected against mechanical damage.
– As a conductor of a multi-conductor cable, the protective conductor has a cross-section ≥
2.5 mm² Cu.
– For an individual conductor, the protective conductor has a cross-section ≥ 10 mm² Cu.
– The protective conductor consists of 2 individual conductors with the same cross-section.
• When connecting a multi-core cable using an industrial plug connector according to
EN 60309, the protective conductor must have a cross-section of ≥ 2.5 mm² Cu.
• Observe the local regulations for protective conductors subject to a high leakage current at
the installation site.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

82 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.3 Connecting a converter with the PM240-2 Power Module

/LQHUHDFWRU ([WHUQDOOLQH &RQYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRU

ILOWHU
/ / / / / 8 8 8
/ / / / / 9 9 9
/ / / / / : : :
3( 3( 3( 3( 3(

3( 5 5 &75/
/ 5 '&35
/
/
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU %UDNH5HOD\
Figure 4-9 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 3 AC, FSA … FSC

([WHUQDOOLQH &RQYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRURU

ILOWHU GXGWILOWHU
/ / / 8 8 8
/ / / 9 9 9
/ / / : : :
3( 3( 3( 3( 3(

&75/

%UDNH5HOD\
3( 5 5
5 5 ) '&16 8
'&36 9
/
/ 3( :
/
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU 9ROWDJH3HDN/LPLWHU
Figure 4-10 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 3 AC, FSD … FSF

/LQHUHDFWRU &RQYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRU

/ / / 8 8 8

/ / / 9 9 9
/ : : :
3( 3( 3(

3( 5 5 &75/
/ 5 '&35
1
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU %UDNH5HOD\
Figure 4-11 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 1 AC 200 V, FSA … FSC

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 83
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

&RQYHUWHU 2XWSXWUHDFWRURU
GXGWILOWHU
/ 8 8 8
/ 9 9 9
/ : : :
3( 3( 3(

&75/

%UDNH5HOD\
3( 5 5
5 5 ) '&16 8
'&36 9
/
1 3( :
3( %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU 9ROWDJH3HDN/LPLWHU
Figure 4-12 Connection of the PM240-2 Power Module, 1 AC 200 V, FSD … FSF

Table 4-15 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM240-2 Power Modules

Converter Connection Cross-section and tightening torque Stripped

Metric Imperial insula‐
tion
length
FSA Line system, motor 1.5 … 2.5 mm2, 0.5 Nm 16 … 14 AWG, 4.5 lbf in 8 mm
FSB and braking resistor 1.5 … 6 mm , 0.6 Nm
2
16 … 10 AWG, 5.5 lbf in 8 mm
FSC 6 …16 mm², 1.3 Nm 10 … 6 AWG, 12 lbf in 10 mm
Plug connector
with screw termi‐
nals
FSD Line and motor Screw-type termi‐ 10 … 35 mm2, 8 … 2 AWG, 18 mm
nal 2.5 … 4.5 Nm 22 … 40 lbf in
Braking resistor 2.5 … 16 mm2, 20 … 6 AWG, 10 mm
1.2 … 1.5 Nm 10.5 … 13 lbf in
FSE Line and motor Screw-type termi‐ 25 … 70 mm2, 6 … 3/0 AWG, 25 mm
nal 8 … 10 Nm 71 … 88.5 lbf in
Braking resistor 10 … 35 mm2, 8 … 2 AWG, 18 mm
2.5 … 4.5 Nm 22 … 40 lbf in
FSF Line and motor 35 … 2 × 120 mm2, 1 AWG … 2 × 4/0 AWG, /
22 … 25 Nm 195 … 221 lbf.in
Cable lug according
to SN71322 for
M10 bolts
Braking resistor Screw-type termi‐ 25 1) … 70 mm2, 6 … 3/0 AWG, 25 mm
nal 8 … 10 Nm 71 … 88.5 lbf in
FSG Line and motor 35 … 2 × 185 mm2, 1 AWG … 2 × 350 MCM, /
22 … 25 Nm 195 … 221 lbf.in
Cable lug according
to SN71322 for
M10 bolts
Braking resistor Screw-type termi‐ 25 … 70 mm2, 6 … 3/0 AWG, 25 mm
nal 8 … 10 Nm 71 … 88.5 lbf in

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

84 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

1)
16 mm2 allowed during short-time duty

Connections for frame sizes FSA … FSC

The Power Modules are equipped with withdraw‐

able plug connectors that cannot be inadvertent‐
ly interchanged.

To remove a plug connector, you must release it
by pressing on the red lever.
/
/ ① Release lever
/
'&1 :
3( 9
8
'&35 5 

/LQHVXSSO\
%UDNLQJ
UHVLVWRU 0RWRU

Connections for frame sizes FSD … FSG

You must remove the covers from the con‐

nections in order to connect the line supply,
braking resistor and motor to the converter. %UHDNRXWRSHQLQJ
IRU'&OLQN
In addition, for frame sizes FSD and FSE, re‐
lease the two terminal screws on the con‐
nections for the motor and braking resistor,
and remove the dummy plug.
For frame sizes FSF and FSG, you must
breakout the openings from the connection
2
cover for the power connections. Use side
cutters or a fine saw blade. 1

FSD … FSG: Remove the top covers

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 85
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

 

 

FSD, FSE: Remove the lower cover FSF, FSG: Remove the lower cover

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

86 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

6KLHOGSODWH
RSWLRQDO
5
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU 5
6KLHOGSODWH
RSWLRQDO )
)

5
6KLHOGSODWH 5 %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
RSWLRQDO
)

5 %UDNLQJUHVLVWRU
5

)6*

)6)

)6')6(

/ 8
/ 8 / 9
/ / 9 :
/ /
/ 8 :
/ 9
:

/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU

/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU
/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU

Figure 4-13 Connections for the line supply, motor and braking resistor

You must re-attach the connection covers in order to re-establish the touch protection of the
converter after it has been connected up.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 87
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

Additional information when connecting FSG converters

Note
Conductor cross-section 240 mm2
Cable lugs for M10 bolts according to SN71322 are suitable for cables with cross-sections of
35 mm2 … 185 mm2 (1 AWG … 2 × 350 MCM).
If you wish to establish connections with cables of 240 mm2 (500 MCM), you must use narrow
cable lugs, e.g. Klauke 12SG10. Other cable lugs are not suitable due to the narrow design of the
converter.
The maximum permissible width of the cable lugs is 37 mm (1.45 inches).

Remove the plastic insulating plate as shown below to gain better access to the terminals for
the power connections.

WARNING
Damage to converter as a result of operation without insulating plates
Without the insulating plates, voltage flashovers may occur between the phases.
• Replace the insulating plates after connecting the cables.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

88 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.4 Connecting the converter with the PM250 Power Module

/LQHILOWHUV &RQYHUWHU 6LQXVILOWHURURXWSXW

UHDFWRU
/ / / 8 8 8

/ / / 9 9 9

/ / / : : :
/
/ 3( 3( 3( 3( 3(
/
3(
Figure 4-14 Connecting the PM250 Power Module

Table 4-16 Connection, cross-section and tightening torque for PM250 Power Modules

Converter Line supply and motor connection Cross-section and tightening torque Stripped
Metric Imperial insula‐
tion
length
FSC Screw-type terminal 4 …10 mm2, 2.3 Nm 12 … 8 AWG, 20 lbf in 10 mm
FSD 10 … 35 mm , 6 Nm
2
7 … 2 AWG, 53 lbf in --
FSE 25 … 50 mm2, 6 Nm 3 … 1/0 AWG, 53 lbf in --
Cable lug
FSF 35 … 120 mm , 13 Nm 2 … 4/0 AWG, 115 lbf in
2
--

Connections for frame size FSC

/ / /
89:

3(

/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 89
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

Connections for frame sizes FSD … FSF

The line and motor connections have covers to prevent them from being touched.

/ / / 3( 89:

/LQHVXSSO\ 0RWRU


You must open the cover to connect the line and motor:
1. Release the catches on both sides of the covers using a screwdriver.
2. Swivel the covers upwards.
Close the covers once you have connected the line and motor.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

90 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.5 Connecting the motor to the converter in a star or delta connection

Overview
Standard induction motors up to a rated power of approximately 3 kW are usually connected in
star/delta connection (Y/Δ) at 400 V/230 V. For a 400‑V line supply, you can connect the motor
to the converter either in a star or in a delta connection.

Function description

Operating the motor in a star connection

: 8 9 8 In a star connection, the motor can provide its

81 9
rated torque MN in the range 0 … rated fre‐
+] quency fN.
8 9 : I1 I
0 Rated voltage UN = 400 V is available at a rated
01 frequency fN = 50 Hz.
8 The motor goes into field weakening above the
3 I rated frequency. In field weakening, the avail‐
8
able motor torque decreases proportionally
31
9 with 1/f. In field weakening, the available pow‐
: I er remains constant.

Operating the motor in a delta connection with 87 Hz characteristic

: 8 9 8 In a delta connection, the motor is oper‐

෭෪8 1 9
9 ated with a voltage and frequency above
81
+] +] its rated values. As a consequence, the
8 9 : I1 ෭෪I1 I motor power is increased by a
0
01 factor √3 ≈ 1.73.
In the range f = 0 … 87 Hz, the motor can
8
3 I output its rated torque MN.
8 ෭෪31 The maximum voltage U = 400 V is avail‐
9 31
able at a frequency of f = √3 × 50 Hz ≈
:
I 87 Hz.

The motor only goes into field weakening above 87 Hz.

The higher motor power when operated with an 87 Hz characteristic has the following
disadvantages:
• The converter must supply approximately 1.73x current. Select a converter based on its rated
current - and not its rated power.
• The motor temperature increases more significantly than when operated with f ≤ 50 Hz.
• The motor must have windings that are approved for a voltage > rated voltage UN.
• As the fan impeller rotates faster, the motor has a higher noise level than operation with
f ≤ 50 Hz.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 91
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.6 Connecting a motor holding brake

The converter uses the Brake Relay to control the motor holding brake. Two types of Brake Relay
exist:
• The Brake Relay controls the motor holding brake
• The Safe Brake Relay controls a 24 V motor holding brake and monitors the brake control for
short-circuit or cable breakage.

Note
Brake Relay and Safe Brake Relay
There are no differences between the Brake Relay and the Safe Brake Relay in terms of installation
and connection to the converter.
Connection to the converter
To ensure that you have the correct cable for connecting the Brake Relay irrespective of the
converter size, you are supplied with two preassembled cables with different lengths. Connect
the appropriate cable to the Brake Module and to the converter as shown below.
If you are using your own cable, ensure that the cable is insulated and rated for 600 V.
Connecting the motor holding brake via a PELV circuit
The Brake Relay must be connected to the protective conductor if the motor brake is supplied
from a PELV circuit.

Brake Relay

&RQYHUWHU 9$&RU
9$&

5HFWLILHU
HJLQWKH 0RWRU
&75/

PRWRU KROGLQJ
WHUPLQDOER[ EUDNH

&RQQHFWLRQV
&RQYHUWHU &RQQHFWLRQ99$&
0RWRUKROGLQJEUDNH

&RQYHUWHU b9'&

0RWRUKROGLQJ
&75/

EUDNH

9DULVWRU9RUWUDQVLO
GLRGH

&RQQHFWLRQ9b'&

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

92 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

Safe Brake Relay

9'&  %5
H[WHUQDO  0RWRUKROGLQJ
0 %5 EUDNH
0

&RQYHUWHU &75/

&RQQHFWLRQV
&RQYHUWHU
9'&
0RWRUKROGLQJEUDNH

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 93
Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.6.1 Installing a Brake Relay - PM250 Power Module

Installing the Brake Relay

If you use the optional shield plate, install the Brake Relay on the shield plate of the Power
Module.
If you do not use the shield plate, install the Brake Relay as close as possible to the Power
Module.

Connecting the Brake Relay to the converter

The connector for the Brake relay is located at the front of the Power Module for the FSA … FSC
frame sizes. These Power Modules have a cable entry for the connecting cable to the Brake Relay.
The connector for the Brake Relay is located at the bottom of the Power Module for the FSD …
FSF frame sizes.

%UDNHUHOD\FRQQHFWRUIRU)6$)6& %UDNHUHOD\FRQQHFWRUIRU)6')6)
3RZHU0RGXOHV 3RZHU0RGXOHV

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

94 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.5 Connecting the line supply and motor

4.5.6.2 Installing a Brake Relay - PM240-2 Power Module

Installing the Brake Relay

• FSA … FSC: Install the Brake Relay next to the Power Module.
• FSD … FSG: Install the Brake Relay at the rear of the lower shield plate. Attach the Brake Relay
before you install the shield plate.

Connecting the Brake Relay to the converter

The connector for the Brake Relay is located at the front of the Power Module. Lay the cable
harness for the Brake Relay in the cable routing.

%UDNHUHOD\FRQQHFWRUIRU)6$)6&3RZHU %UDNHUHOD\FRQQHFWRUIRU)6')6)3RZHU0RGXOHV
0RGXOHVZLWKRXW672WHUPLQDOV ZLWK672WHUPLQDOV

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 95
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

The Power Module has a holder for the Control Unit and a release mechanism.
There are different release mechanisms depending on the particular Power Module.

Inserting the Control Unit

Procedure

1. Place the two catches of the Control Unit in the matching grooves of the Power Module.
2. Press the Control Unit onto the Power Module until you hear that it latches.
The Control Unit is plugged onto the Power Module.
❒

Removing the Control Unit

Procedure
Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module by pressing the release mechanism.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

96 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.1 Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side.

Interfaces on the Control Unit

To access the interfaces at the front of the

Control Unit, you must unplug the Opera‐
tor Panel (if one is being used) and open
the front doors.
① Terminal strips

② Selecting the fieldbus %LW 
address:
%LW 
• PROFIBUS %LW 
• USS %LW 
• Modbus RTU %LW 
;   ;
• CanOpen %LW 
%LW 
  ; 2Q 2II
③ Status LED
;   ; 5'<
%)
6$)(
/1. RQO\IRU
 /1. 352),1(7
;  ④ USB interface for connection to a PC
  ;
⑤ Keep the switch in the "Vector" posi‐
 tion. The converter is not functional in
the "Servo" setting.
; 
⑥ Switch for analog in‐ $,
puts
 ; $,
I 0/4 mA … 20 mA , 8
U -10/0 V … 10 V
⑦ Connection to the operator panel
; ; ⑧ Memory card slot
;
;
;
;

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 97
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Protection against unauthorized access via the USB interface

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from manipulation of the converter software
Manipulation of the converter software can cause unsafe operating states in your system that
may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Prevent unauthorized persons from accessing the converter's USB interface:
– Do not route the USB interface outside the control cabinet.
– Lock the control cabinet or the control room in which the converter is installed.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

98 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.2 Terminal strips behind the upper front door

;
     9,1 2SWLRQDOH[WHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\99
   *1',1 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDO
   ','2
   ','2 'LJLWDOLQSXWVRURXWSXWV
   ','2 6ZLWFKDEOHYLDS
   ','2
;
 *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
;
 $2 $QDORJRXWSXWV 9ಹ9P$ಹP$
 9RXW
 $2
 *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
;
ุN˖  9287 ,QWHUQDOSRZHUVXSSO\PD[P$
 *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
 $, $QDORJLQSXW 99P$P$
9
 $,
 $, $QDORJLQSXW 99P$P$
 $,
9
 *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
 702725 7HPSHUDWXUHVHQVRU 37&3W.7<ELPHWDOOLF
 702725
;
 (1&287 3RZHUVXSSO\
 *1' 5HIHUHQFHWHUPLQDO
 $36 &KDQQHO$
 $16 &KDQQHO$ 
 %36 &KDQQHO% 
+7/HQFRGHU  %16 &KDQQHO%  6LQXVRLGDOVLJQDO
 =3 =HURVLJQDO  6LQXVRLGDOVLJQDO
 =1 =HURVLJQDO  &RVLQHVLJQDO
 5  &RVLQHVLJQDO
 5 
5HVROYHU 
 ([FLWDWLRQ
 ([FLWDWLRQ
Figure 4-15 Interconnection example of the digital inputs with external 24 V power supply
*1' All terminals with reference potential "GND" are connected with one another in the converter.
 9,1 If you use one of the digital outputs DO 24 … DO 27, then you must connect a 24 V supply at
 *1',1 terminals 31 and 32.
If you do not use digital outputs DO 24 … DO 27, then the 24 V supply at terminals 31 and
32 is optional. When a 24 V power supply is connected at terminals 31, 32, even when the
Power Module is disconnected from the line supply, the Control Unit remains in operation.
The Control Unit thus maintains the fieldbus communication, for example.
→ for terminals 31, 32 only use a 24 VDC power supply with PELV (Protective Extra Low
Voltage).
→ for applications in the USA and Canada: Use a 24 VDC power supply, NEC Class 2.
→ connect the 0 V of the power supply with the protective conductor.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 99
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

If you use a common external power supply for terminals 31, 32 and the digital inputs, you
must connect "GND" and the reference potential of the digital input ("DI COM1/2/3") with
each other at the terminals.
 $, You may use the internal 10V power supply or an external power supply for the analog inputs at
 $, terminals 3, 4 and 10, 11. For an internal 10V power supply, you must connect AI 0 or AI 1 to GND.
 $,
 $,

4.6.3 Terminal strips behind the lower front door

;
 ',
  ',
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDORXWSXWZLWK  ',
VRXUFHRXWSXWDQGVLQN  ',
 ', 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
RXWSXWFRQWDFW  ', ORZ9KLJK!9PD[9
)DLOVDIHGLJLWDORXWSXWZLWK  ',
WZRVRXUFHRXWSXWFRQWDFWV  ',
 ',
 ',
 ',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOVDQG
; ;
 '212   9RXW ,QWHUQDOVXSSO\IRUGLJLWDOLQSXWV
 '2&20   *1' 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
 '21&      ',&20 5HIHUHQFHIRUWHUPLQDOV
 '212    ',
 '2&20    ', 'LJLWDOLQSXWV
 '21&    ', ORZ9KLJK!9PD[9
 '212    ',
 '2&20
'LJLWDORXWSXWV
PD[$9
Figure 4-16 Interconnection example of the digital inputs with external 24 V power supplies
*1' All terminals with reference potential "GND" are connected with one another in the converter.
',; Reference potentials for DI 1, DI 3 and DI 5, electrically isolated from "GND"
',&20 Reference potential for DI 0, DI 2, DI 4 and DI 6, electrically isolated from "GND"
',&20 Reference potential for DI 16 … DI 19, electrically isolated from "GND"

Table 4-17 Supply options for the digital inputs

Supply Reference potential interconnection

You are using an external 24 V supply As shown above, connect the reference potential of the exter‐
nal 24‑V supply to the reference potential of the corresponding
digital input.
You are using the internal 24 V supply at terminal 9 Connect the appropriate reference potential of the digital input
to GND.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

100 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.4 Fieldbus and encoder interfaces on the lower side

; ; ;

2)) 21 2)) 21

; ; %XVWHUPLQDWRU ; ; %XVWHUPLQDWRU ; ;

33 ;

;3      
; ; ;
;3
 352),1(7 &$1 352),%86 56
   
 5;5HFHLYHGDWD      9UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDO
 5; 5HFHLYHGDWD  &$1B/&$1VLJQDO  0UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRU  563UHFHLYHDQG
 7; 6HQGGDWD GRPLQDQWORZ 3B6HUY VHQG 
   &$1B*1'&$1  5['7['3UHFHLYHDQG  561UHFHLYHDQG
  JURXQG VHQG %% VHQG 
 7; 6HQGGDWD    &1753FRQWUROVLJQDO  &DEOHVKLHOG
   &$1B6+/'   *1'UHIHUHQFHSRWHQWLDOIRU  
  2SWLRQDOVKLHOG GDWD &&
 *1' RSWLRQDOJURXQG  9SRZHUVXSSO\
 &$1B+&$1VLJQDO  3B6HUY
GRPLQDQWKLJK  5['7['1UHFHLYHDQG
 
VHQG $$
   
   ;
; .7<3W '5,9(&/L4
(QFRGHU 37&RUWHPSHUD +7/ 77/ 66,
56
$ % (QFRGHU
WXUHVZLWFK
  (QFRGHUZLWK'5,9(&/L4
VWDQGDUG
 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVLQJ 7HPS    LQWHUIDFHRUHQFRGHUYLD6HQVRU
0RGXOH
 66,FORFN    &ORFN
 ,QYHUVH66,FORFN    &ORFN
 (QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\  9 9 9  6HQGGDWD
 (QFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\  9 9 9  6HQGGDWD
 6HQVHVLJQDOIURPWKHHQFRGHU   6HQVH   5HFHLYHGDWD
 5HIHUHQFHIRUHQFRGHUSRZHUVXSSO\  9 9 9  
 0RWRUWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVLQJ 7HPS     
 5HIHUHQFHIRUVHQVHVLJQDO   6HQVH   5HFHLYHGDWD
 =HURVLJQDO  5 5   
 =HURVLJQDO  5 5   
 &KDQQHO%  % %  $ 9SRZHUVXSSO\
 &KDQQHO%  % % 
 &KDQQHO66,GDWD  $ $ 'DWD % 9UHIHUHQFHIRUSRZHU
 &KDQQHO$66,GDWD  $ $ 'DWD VXSSO\

2SWLRQDOFRQQHFWLRQRIWKHSRZHUVXSSO\DWSLQRUSLQ

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 101
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.5 Factory interface settings

The factory setting of the interfaces depends on which fieldbus the Control Unit supports.

Control Units with USS or CANopen interface

The fieldbus interface is not active.

;
 9,1
 *1',1
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
;
 *1'
 $2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
 $2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH P$ಹP$
;  *1'
 (1& ;
 *1'  9287
 $36  *1'
 $16  $, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW 99
 %36  $,
 %16  $,
 =3 1RIXQFWLRQ 1RIXQFWLRQ
 $,
 =1  *1'
 5  702725 1RIXQFWLRQ
 5  702725
;
 ', 212))
 ', 5HYHUVHGLUHFWLRQRIURWDWLRQ
 ',
 ', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
 ',
1RIXQFWLRQ
 ',
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ',
1RIXQFWLRQ
 ',
;  ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 '212  ',&20
:DUQLQJ
 '2&20
 '21& ;
 '212 )DXOW  9RXW
 '2&20  *1'
 '21&  ',&20
 '212 1RIXQFWLRQ  ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 '2&20  ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
Figure 4-17 Factory setting of the CU250S-2 and CU250S-2 CAN Control Units

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

102 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Control Units with PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface

The function of the fieldbus interface depends on DI 3.

;
+LJKHUOHYHOFRQWURO  9,1
 *1',1
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
352),%86  ','2 1RIXQFWLRQ
352),1(7 ;
 *1'
 $2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
 $2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH P$P$
;  *1'
 (1& ;
 *1'  9287
 $36  *1'
 $16  $, 1RIXQFWLRQ
 %36  $,
 %16 1RIXQFWLRQ  $, 1RIXQFWLRQ
 =3  $,
 =1  *1'
 5  702725 1RIXQFWLRQ
 5  702725
&RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
&RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
;
1RIXQFWLRQ
 ',
-RJJLQJ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', -RJJLQJ
 ', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
 ', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHG
 ', VHWSRLQW

; ', 
 '212 7HOHJUDP3='
$ODUP 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2&20 -RJJLQJRU ', 
 '21& 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '212 )DXOW  ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 '2&20  ',
 '21& 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ',
 '212 1RIXQFWLRQ  ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 '2&20  ',&20
;
 9RXW
 *1'
 ',&20
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
 ', 1RIXQFWLRQ
Figure 4-18 Factory setting of the CU250S-2 DP and CU250S-2 PN Control Units

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 103
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.6 Default setting of the interfaces

Changing the function of the terminals

The function of the terminals and fieldbus interface can be adjusted.
In order that you do not have to successively change terminal for terminal, several terminals
can be jointly set using default settings ("p0015 Macro drive unit").
The terminal settings made in the factory described above correspond to the following
default settings:
• Default setting 12 (p0015 = 12): "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"
• Default setting 7 (p0015 = 7): "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Default setting 1: "Conveyor systems with 2 fixed frequencies"

', 212))FORFNZLVH
', 212))FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Fixed speed setpoint 3: p1003, fixed speed setpoint 4: p1004, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1024
DI 4 and DI 5 = high: The converter adds both fixed speed setpoints
Designation in the BOP-2: coN 2 SP

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

104 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 2: "Conveyor systems with Basic Safety"

', 212))ZLWKIL[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 5HVHUYHGI¾UDVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ
',
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001, fixed speed setpoint 2: p1002, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1024
DI 0 and DI 1 = high: The converter adds both fixed speed setpoints.
Designation in the BOP-2: coN SAFE

Default setting 3: "Conveyor systems with 4 fixed frequencies"

', 212))ZLWKIL[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Fixed speed setpoint 1: p1001, … fixed speed setpoint 4: p1004, fixed speed setpoint active: r1024
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1024
Several of the DI 0, DI 1, DI 4, and DI 5 = high: the converter adds the corresponding fixed speed setpoints.
Designation in the BOP-2: coN 4 SP

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 105
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 4: "Conveyor system with fieldbus"

&RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: coN Fb

Default setting 5: "Conveyor systems with fieldbus and Basic Safety"

&RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
',
', 5HVHUYHGI¾UDVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 4: r0722.4, DI 5: r0722.5
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: coN Fb S

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

106 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 7: "Fieldbus with data set switchover"

Factory setting for converters with PROFIBUS interface

',  &RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
',  &RQWUROYLDWHUPLQDOVWULS
',  1RIXQFWLRQ
',
',  -RJJLQJ
', ',  1RIXQFWLRQ
',  -RJJLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 6ZLWFKRYHUFRQWURODQGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', 
7HOHJUDP3='
',  6SHHGVHWSRLQW
-RJJLQJRU
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Jog 1 speed setpoint: p1058, factory setting: 150 rpm
Jog 2 speed setpoint: p1059, factory setting: -150 rpm
Designation in the BOP-2: FB cdS

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 107
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 8: "MOP with Basic Safety"

', 212))
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUUDLVH
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU

6SHHGVHWSRLQW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 5HVHUYHGIRUDVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ
',
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
MOP = motorized potentiometer
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: MoP SAFE

Default setting 9: "Standard I/O with MOP"

', 212))
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUUDLVH
', 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
 ', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW

6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
MOP = motorized potentiometer
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 3: r0722.3
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Std MoP

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

108 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 12: "Standard I/O with analog setpoint"

\kpGW vuVvmmX
]kpGX yŒŒ™š•Ž
^kpGY hŠ’•–ž“Œ‹ŽŒGˆœ“›
ZhpGWR z—ŒŒ‹GšŒ›—–•›
X_ kvGW mˆœ“›
X`
YW
YXkvGX
Y
YZ kvGY v—Œ™ˆ›–•
Y[
Y\
XYhvGW z—ŒŒ‹GˆŠ›œˆ“Gˆ“œŒ
Y]hvGX jœ™™Œ•›GˆŠ›œˆ“Gˆ“œŒ
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: Std ASP

Default setting 13: "Standard I/O with analog setpoint and safety"

', 212))
', 5HYHUVLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 5HVHUYHGI¾UDVDIHW\IXQFWLRQ
',
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 :DUQLQJ

$2 $FWXDOVSHHGYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: ASPS

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 109
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 14: "Process industry with fieldbus"

PROFIdrive telegram 20

&RQWUROYLD352),GULYHWHOHJUDP
3='  1RIXQFWLRQ
',
3='  212))
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 1RIXQFWLRQ
3='  1RIXQFWLRQ
', 3='  0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 023 UDLVH
3='  1RIXQFWLRQ
',
3='  0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
3=' 
3='
6SHHGVHWSRLQW
3=' 
023
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
MOP = motorized potentiometer
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 5: r0722.5
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1], p1070[1] = 1050
Switch controller via PZD01, bit 15: p0810 = r2090.15
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc Fb

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

110 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 15: "Process industry"

', 212))
', ([WHUQDOIDXOW
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
', 6ZLWFKRYHUVSHHGVHWSRLQW
', ',  1RIXQFWLRQ
',  0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 023 KLJKHU
', ',  1RIXQFWLRQ
',  0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUORZHU
', 
$,
0 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
', 

 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 $FWXDOFXUUHQWYDOXH
MOP = motorized potentiometer
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.5, …, DI 4: r0722.5 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Motorized potentiometer setpoint after ramp-function generator: r1050
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0], p1070[1] = 1050
Designation in the BOP-2: Proc

Default setting 17: "2-wire (forw/backw1)"

', 212))FORFNZLVH
', 212))FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.2, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 2-wIrE 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 111
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 18: "2-wire (forw/backw2)"

', 212))FORFNZLVH
', 212))FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 2: r0722.2 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 2-wIrE 2

Default setting 19: "3-wire (enable/forw/backw)"

', (QDEOH2))
', 21FORFNZLVH
', 21FRXQWHUFORFNZLVH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 4: r0722.4 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 3-wIrE 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

112 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 20: "3-wire (enable/on/reverse)"

', (QDEOH2))
', 21
', 5HYHUVLQJ
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
$, 6SHHGVHWSRLQW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: AO 0: p0771[0], DI 0: r0722.0, …, DI 4: r0722.4 AI 0: r0755[0]
p0731 AO 1: p0771[1]
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 755[0]
Designation in the BOP-2: 3-wIrE 2

Default setting 21: "USS fieldbus"

866 EDXG3='3.:YDULDEOH
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
 '2 )DXOW


 '2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: FB USS

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 113
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Default setting 22: "CAN fieldbus"

&$1RSHQ NEDXG
', $FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
 '2 )DXOW


'2 $ODUP

$2 6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
$2 &XUUHQWDFWXDOYDOXH
DO 0: p0730, DO 1: p0731 AO 0: p0771[0], AO 1: p0771[1] DI 2: r0722.2
Speed setpoint (main setpoint): p1070[0] = 2050[1]
Designation in the BOP-2: FB CAN

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

114 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.7 Failsafe digital input

To enable a safety function via the terminal strip of the converter, you need a failsafe digital
input.
 ', 
ุ )',
For specific default settings of the terminal strip, e.g. default
 ',  setting 2, the converter combines two digital inputs to form
one failsafe digital input FDI 0.

Which devices are you allowed to connect?

The failsafe digital input is designed for the following devices:
• Connection of safety sensors, e.g. emergency stop command devices or light curtains.
• Connection of pre-processing devices, e.g. failsafe control systems and safety relays.

Signal state
The converter expects signals with the same state at its failsafe digital input:
• High signal: The safety function is deselected.
• Low signal: The safety function is selected.

Connecting P/P and P/M-switching fail-safe digital outputs

9'& 9'&

)'2 )'2
0 0

PP-switching digital output PM-switching digital output

It is permissible to connect PP and PM-switching safe outputs to a fail-safe digital input.

Fault detection
The converter compares the two signals of the failsafe digital input. The converter thus detects,
for example the following faults:
• Cable break
• Defective sensor
The converter cannot detect the following faults:
• Cross-circuit of the two cables
• Short-circuit between signal cable and 24 V power supply

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 115
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Special measures to prevent cross-circuits and short-circuits

The routing of cables over longer distances, e.g. between remote control cabinets, increases the
risk of damaging cables. Damaged cables raise the risk of an undetected cross-circuit with power-
conducting cables laid in parallel. A cross-circuit can cause interruption to the transfer of safety-
related signals.
To avoid cross circuit faults and short-circuits, you must protect the cables between a sensor
and the converter; this can be done by routing the cables separately or in a steel pipe/duct

On and off test

The converter filters signal changes using on and off tests at the failsafe digital input using an
adjustable software filter.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

116 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.8 Connecting a failsafe digital input

Overview
The converter allows a PM-switching output as well as a PP-switching output to be connected.

9'& 9'&

3 3 3
 ',  ',
 ', )',  ', )',
 ',  ',
0  ',&20  ',&20

0 0
Figure 4-19 Connecting a PM-switching and a PP-switching output

Function description
The following examples comply with PL d according to EN 13849-1 and SIL2 according to IEC
61508 for the case that all components are installed within one control cabinet.

 9RXW

 ',
 ', )',
 ',
 ',&20
 *1'

Figure 4-20 Connecting a sensor, e.g. Emergency Stop mushroom pushbutton or limit switch

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 117
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

9'&

6WDUW

$ ,1. ,1 7 ,1 7 ,1) ,16

 $XWRVWDUW0RQLWRUHG6WDUW
 &URVVIDXOWGHWHFWLRQ2))21
 VLQJOHFKDQQHOVGRXEOHVHQVRU
 6WDUWXSWHVW\HVQR

6.$%
$ 4

 ',
)',
 ',
 ',
 ',&20
0

Figure 4-21 Connecting a safety relay, e.g. SIRIUS 3SK11

9'&
60

9'& 

6
 ',
 )',
 ',


  ',
  ',&20
0

Figure 4-22 Connecting an F digital output module, e.g. SIMATIC F digital output module

Further information
The Safety Integrated Function Manual provides additional connection options and connections
in separate control cabinets.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

118 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.9 Wire up the terminal strip and connect the shield

WARNING
Electric shock when connecting an unsuitable power supply
Death or serious injury can result when live parts are touched in the event of a fault.
• For all connections and terminals of the electronic modules, only use power supplies with
protective extra low voltage (PELV), Class 2.

WARNING
Electric shock due to unsuitable motor temperature evaluation system
Voltage flashovers to the electronics of the converter can occur in motors without safe
electrical separation of the temperature sensors in accordance with IEC 61800‑5‑1 when the
motor develops a fault.
• Install a temperature monitoring relay 3RS1… or 3RS2…
• Evaluate the temperature monitoring relay output using a digital input of the converter, e.g.
using the "External fault" function.

You can find additional information about the temperature monitoring relay on the Internet:
Manual 3RS1 / 3RS2 temperature monitoring relays (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/54999309)

NOTICE
Overvoltages for long signal cables
Using > 30 m long cables at the converter's digital inputs and 24 V power supply or inductive
circuits at the digital inputs can lead to overvoltage. Overvoltages can damage the converter.
• Connect an overvoltage protection device between the terminal and the associated
reference potential.
We recommend using the Weidmüller overvoltage protection terminal with designation
MCZ OVP TAZ DIODE 24VDC.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 119
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Note
Malfunction caused by incorrect switching states as the result of diagnostic flows in the
off state (logical state "0")
In contrast to mechanical switching contacts, e.g. emergency stop switches, diagnostic flows
can also flow with semiconductor switches in the off state. If interconnection with digital inputs
is faulty, the diagnostic flows can lead to incorrect switching states and thus to a malfunction of
the drive.
• Observe the conditions for digital inputs and digital outputs specified in the relevant
manufacturers documentation.
• Check the conditions of the digital inputs and digital outputs in regard to the flows in off
state. If applicable, connect the digital inputs with suitably dimensioned, external resistors
to protect against the reference potential of the digital inputs.

Permissible cables

Table 4-18 Permissible cables and wiring options

Solid or finely stranded Finely stranded conduc‐ Finely stranded conduc‐ Two finely stranded con‐
conductor tor with non-insulated tor with partially insula‐ ductors with the same
conductor end sleeve ted conductor end cross-section with parti‐
sleeve ally insulated twin end
sleeves
PP  PP  PP PP
PP PP PP ෪PP

Wiring the terminal strip in compliance with EMC

If you use shielded cables, then you must connect the shield to the mounting plate of the control
cabinet or with the shield support of the converter through a good electrical connection and a
large surface area.
Use the shield connection kit (Article No. 6SL3264-1EA00-0LA0) of the Control Unit as strain
relief.

EMC-compliant wiring of failsafe inputs

Use shielded signal lines. Connect the shield at both cable ends.
In order to connect two or more converter terminals, use the shortest possible jumpers
directly at the terminals themselves.

Further information
Further information about EMC-compliant wiring is available on the Internet:
EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

120 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Connecting encoder and signal cables to the terminal strip in compliance with EMC

• Use shielded cables.

• Mount the shield plate of the ③ Control Unit.
Signal cables ①
• Connect the shield of the signal cables to the shield
plate of the Control Unit ③ and to the shield plate of
the Power Module ④.

• Attach the strain relief elements to the shield plate ⑥.
 • Before the signal cable leaves the control cabinet, also
connect the shield ⑤.
 
Encoder cables ②
• Connect the shield of the encoder cable to the shield
plate of the Control Unit ③.
 • Attach a strain relief element to the shield plate ⑥.
 • Before the encoder cable leaves the control cabinet,
also connect the shield ⑤.


Connecting encoders to SUB-D connectors or via DRIVE-CLiQ in compliance with EMC

• Use shielded cables.
• Connect the cable shield in the connector housing.
• Mount a strain relief, e.g. at the shield plate of the Control Unit.
• Where the cable leaves the control cabinet, also connect the shield to the shield rail of the
control cabinet.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 121
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.10 Connecting the temperature contact of the braking resistor

WARNING
Fire caused by an unsuitable or incorrectly installed braking resistor
Using an unsuitable or improperly installed braking resistor can cause fires and smoke to
develop. Fire and smoke development can cause severe personal injury or material damage.
• Only use braking resistors that are approved for the converter.
• Install the braking resistor in accordance with regulations.
• Monitor the temperature of the braking resistor.

Procedure
1. Connect the temperature monitoring system of the braking resistor (terminals T1 and T2 on
the braking resistor) to a free digital input on the converter.
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU ,QYHUWHU

7  9RXW ([WHUQDOIDXOW
7  ',
5  ',
5  *1'

'&35
5
Figure 4-23 Example: Temperature monitoring of the braking resistor via digital input DI 3 on the
Control Unit

2. Define the function of the digital input used as an external fault with p2106.
As an example with temperature monitoring via digital input DI 3: p2106 = 722.3.
You have ensured that the braking resistor temperature is monitored.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

122 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.11 Fieldbus interfaces

Overview
There are different versions of the Control Units for communication with a higher-level control
system:

Fieldbus Profiles S7 commu‐ Control Unit

PROFIdrive PROFIsafe 1) PROFIenergy 2) nication 2)

PROFINET ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ CU250S-2 PN
EtherNet/IP 2)
--- ---
PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ --- ✓ CU250S-2 DP
USS 2)
--- --- CU250S-2
Modbus RTU 2) --- ---
CANopen 2) --- --- CU250S-2 CAN
1)
Information on PROFIsafe can be found in the "Safety Integrated" Function Manual.
2)
Information about fieldbuses, profiles and communication types can be found in the
"Fieldbus" Function Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

4.6.12 Connecting the converter to PROFINET

4.6.12.1 Communication via PROFINET IO and Ethernet

You can either integrate the converter in a PROFINET network or communicate with the
converter via Ethernet.

The converter in PROFINET IO operation

4*."5*$
4
1$
4VQFSWJTPS

$POUSPMMFS

130'*/&5
4*/".*$4
4*/".*$4
(
(% 4*/".*$4
($

4*/".*$4

4*/".*$4
(9
(%

Figure 4-24 The converter in PROFINET IO operation (examples)

The converter supports the following functions:

• RT
• IRT: The converter forwards the clock synchronism, but does not support clock synchronism.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 123
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

• MRP: Media redundancy, impulsed with 200 ms. Precondition: Ring topology
With MRP, you get an uninterrupted switchover if you set the failure monitoring time to a
value > 200 ms.
• MRPD: Media redundancy, bumpless. Precondition: IRT and the ring topology created in the
control
• Diagnostic alarms in accordance with the error classes specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
• Device replacement without removable data storage medium: The replacement converter is
assigned the device name from the IO controller, not from its memory card or from the
programming device.
• Shared Device for converters that support PROFIsafe.

The converter as Ethernet node

1$

&UIFSOFU
4*/".*$4
4*/".*$4
(
(% 4*/".*$4
($

4*/".*$4
4*/".*$4
(9
(%

Figure 4-25 The converter as Ethernet node (examples)

Further information on the operation as Ethernet nodes can be found in the Function Manual
"Fieldbuses".
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Further information on PROFINET

Further information on PROFINET can be found on the Internet:
• PROFINET – the Ethernet standard for automation (http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/
automation/en/industrial-communications/profinet/Pages/Default.aspx)
• PROFINET system description (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
19292127)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

124 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

4.6.12.2 Connecting the PROFINET cable to the converter

Procedure
1. Integrate the converter in the bus system (e.g. ring topology) of the control using PROFINET
cables and the two PROFINET sockets X150-P1 and X150-P2.
Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side. (Page 97)
The maximum permitted cable length from the previous station and to the next one is 100 m.
2. Externally supply the converter with 24 VDC through terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communications with the control should also run
when the line voltage is switched off.
You have connected the converter to the control system via PROFINET.
❒

Communication with the control system even if the line voltage is switched off
You must supply the converter with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the converter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.

4.6.12.3 What do you have to set for communication via PROFINET?

Configuring PROFINET communication in the I/O controller

You require the appropriate engineering system to configure PROFINET communication in the IO
controller.
If required, load the GSDML file of the converter into the engineering system.
Installing GSDML (Page 126)

Device name
In addition to the MAC address and IP address, PROFINET also uses the device name to identify
PROFINET devices (Device name). The device name must be unique across the PROFINET
network.
To assign the device name, you need an engineering software, e.g. HW-Config.
The converter saves the device name on the inserted memory card.

IP address
In addition to the device name, PROFINET also uses an IP address.
You have the following options to specify the IP address of the converter:
• You specify the IP address using engineering software, e.g. via HW Config.
• The IO Controller assigns an IP address to the converter.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 125
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Telegram
Set the same telegram in the converter as in the IO Controller. Interconnect the telegrams in the
control program of the IO Controller with the signals of your choosing.
Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET (Page 225)

Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFINET communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F
via PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500
(TO) via PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)

4.6.12.4 Installing GSDML

Procedure
1. Save the GSDML to your PC.
– With Internet access:
GSDML (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSDML as a zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSDML file on your computer.
3. Import the GSDML into the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSDML in the engineering system of the controller.

4.6.13 Connecting the converter to PROFIBUS

6,0$7,&6 3& &ODVV0DVWHU

&ODVVPDVWHU

352),%86'3
6,1$0,&6*
6,1$0,&6*' 6ODYH
6ODYH

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

126 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

The PROFIBUS DP interface has the following functions:

• Cyclic communication
• Acyclic communication
• Diagnostic alarms
General information on PROFIBUS DP can be found in the Internet:
• PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com/downloads/installation-guide/)
• Information about PROFIBUS DP (http://www.automation.siemens.com/net/html_76/
support/printkatalog.htm)

4.6.13.1 Connecting the PROFIBUS cable to the converter

Procedure
1. Connect the converter to socket X126 via a PROFIBUS cable with the higher-level control.
Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side. (Page 97)
The maximum permitted cable length to the previous station or the subsequent one is 100 m
at a baud rate of 12 Mbit/s.
2. If necessary, connect a 24 V supply voltage to terminals 31 and 32.
The external 24 V supply is only required if communication with the control may not be
interrupted even if the line voltage is switched off.
You connected the converter with the control via PROFIBUS.
❒

4.6.13.2 What do you have to set for communication via PROFIBUS?

Configuring PROFIBUS communication

You require the appropriate engineering system to configure PROFIBUS communication in the
PROFIBUS master.
If required, load the GSD file of the converter into the engineering system.
Installing the GSD (Page 128)

Setting the address

Set the address of the PROFIBUS device.
Set the PROFIBUS address (Page 128)

Setting the telegram

Set the same telegram in the converter as in the PROFIBUS master. Interconnect the telegrams
in the control program of the PROFIBUS master with the signals of your choosing.
Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET (Page 225)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 127
Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

Application examples
You can find application examples for PROFIBUS communication on the Internet:
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M/G120/G120C/G120D with S7-300/400F
via PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/60441457)
Controlling the speed of a SINAMICS G110M / G120 (Startdrive) with S7-1500
(TO) via PROFINET or PROFIBUS, with Safety Integrated (via terminal) and HMI (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/78788716)

Communication with the control system even if the line voltage is switched off
You must supply the converter with 24 V DC at terminals 31 and 32 if you wish to maintain
communication with the control system when the line voltage is switched off.
In the case of brief interruptions of the 24 V power supply, the converter may signal a fault
without communications with the control system being interrupted.

4.6.13.3 Installing the GSD

Procedure
1. Save the GSD on your PC using one of the following methods.
– With Internet access:
GSD (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/22339653/133100)
– Without Internet access:
Insert a memory card into the converter.
Set p0804 = 12.
The converter writes the GSD as zipped file (*.zip) into directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/
DATA/CFG on the memory card.
2. Unzip the GSD file on your computer.
3. Import the GSD in the engineering system of the controller.
You have now installed the GSD file in the engineering system of the controller.

4.6.13.4 Set the PROFIBUS address

Valid address area: 1 … 125

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

128 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.6 Connecting the interfaces for the converter control

You have the following options for setting the address:

• Using the address switch on the Control Unit:
([DPSOH
%LW 
%LW 
%LW 
%LW  
%LW 
%LW  
%LW 
2Q 2II  2Q 2II
Figure 4-26 Address switch with example for bus address 10

The address switch has priority over the other settings.

• With a commissioning tool, e.g. an operator panel, via parameter p0918 (factory setting:
p0918 = 126).
It is only possible to change p0918 if an invalid address is set in the address switch.
Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper side. (Page 97)

Setting the bus address

Procedure
1. Set the address using one of the subsequently listed options:
– Via the address switch
– With a commissioning tool via p0918
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
4. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings become effective after switching on.
The PROFIBUS address is set.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 129
Installing
4.7 Installing encoders

4.7 Installing encoders

Encoders for position control

Permissible encoders for position control and the permissible combination of encoders for speed
and position control are listed in the "Basic positioner" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Encoders for speed control

The encoder must be mounted on the motor shaft.

Table 4-19 Suitable encoders for the closed-loop speed control

Encoder type Terminal strip SUB-D -X2100 DRIVE-CLiQ -X100

-X136

Connection via Connection via

SMC or SME DRIVE-CLiQ
Resolver ✓ ✓
HTL encoder ✓ ✓ ✓
TTL encoder ✓ ✓
SSI encoder ✓ ✓
EnDat 2.1 ✓
sin/cos encoder ✓
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder ✓
Terminal Overview of the interfaces on the front and upper
strips behind the side. (Page 97)
upper front door
(Page 99)

You can find information about prefabricated encoder cables for the terminal strip and the
SUB-D interface-X2100 in the Internet:
Encoder cables (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108441438)

Example: Connecting an SSI encoder to SUB-D connector -X2100

&ORFN  %. 7$.7 
&ORFN  %1 7$.7 
5' QRWFRQQHFWHG
2*
'DWD  %8 '$7 
'DWD  97 '$7 
<(
*1

9  :+5' 99 

9  :+<( 9 
:+%.
:+%8

Figure 4-27 Connecting SSI encoders 1XP8014-20, 1XP8024-20 or 1XP8024-21

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

130 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Installing
4.7 Installing encoders

Suitable prefabricated encoder cables:

• 6FX5002-2CC06-…
• 6FX8002-2CC06-…

Example: Connecting an HTL encoder at terminal strip -X136

(1&287  :+%. 3(QFRGHU 

:+5' 5 
:+%8 5 
*1'  :+<( 0(QFRGHU 
5' &75/7$&+2 
2* QRWFRQQHFWHG $
<( $
$3 
*1 $
  W
$1  
%
%3  %. % 
%1  %1 %  
W
%8 5 5
=3  97 5 
=1  
 W
Figure 4-28 Connecting a bipolar HTL encoder 1XP8012 or 1XP8032

Suitable prefabricated encoder cables:

• 6FX5002-2CA12-…
• 6FX8002-2CA12-…

Example: Connecting a unipolar HTL encoder at terminal strip -X136

;(1&287  3(QFRGHU

0(QFRGHU
$
*1' 

$ W
$3  %
$1 
%  W
%3 
%1  5
=3  5 
=1  W

Figure 4-29 Connecting a unipolar HTL encoder

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 131
Installing
4.7 Installing encoders

Connecting a combi encoder

Combi encoders are a combination of SSI encoder with HTL encoder in one enclosure. You
require a Y encoder cable to connect a combi encoder to the converter.

+7/VLJQDOV
;
<HQFRGHUFDEOH

&RPELQDWLRQRI66,HQFRGHU
DQG+7/HQFRGHU ;
66,VLJQDOV

Figure 4-30 Connecting a combi encoder to a CU250S-2 Control Unit

The matching Y encoder cable can be ordered from the KnorrTec company.
Article No. 10051910
Additional information on installing and configuration a combi encoder is available in the
Internet:
Connecting and commissioning a combi encoder (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/en/en/view/109748046)

SMC and SME Sensor Modules

Table 4-20 Permissible SMC/SME Sensor Modules and encoders that can be connected

SMC10 SMC20 SMC30 SME20 SME25

Two-pole resolver ✓
Multi-pole resolver ✓
sin/cos encoder 1 Vpp ✓
sin/cos encoder 1 Vpp without rotor position track (C ✓
and D tracks)
SSI encoders with incremental signals sin/cos 1 Vpp ✓ ✓
SSI encoders with TTL/HTL incremental signals ✓
SSI encoder without incremental signals ✓
HTL or TTL encoder ✓
Absolute encoders Endat 2.1 ✓ ✓

You can find information about prefabricated encoder cables for the Sensor Module in the
Internet:
Encoder cables (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108441438)
You can find additional information on installing and connecting the Sensor Modules in the
"SINAMICS S120 Control Units and supplementary system components" manual.
S120 system components (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
68040800)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

132 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Commissioning 5
5.1 Commissioning guidelines

Overview

5IF
DPOWFSUFS
JT
1. Define the requirements to be met by the

JOTUBMMFE drive for your application.
 (Page 135)
1SFQBSF
GPS
2. Restore the factory settings of the con‐
DPNNJTTJPOJOH verter if necessary.


(Page 158)
%PFT
UIF
3. Check if the factory setting of the con‐
DPOWFSUFS
IBWF
/P
PS
VOLOPXO
verter is sufficient for your application.
UIF
GBDUPSZ

TFUUJOH
(Page 138)
 4. Set the following for quick commission‐
:FT 3FTUPSF
UIF
GBDUPSZ
ing of the drive:
TFUUJOHT
GPS
UIF
DPOWFSUFS
– The closed-loop motor control
– The inputs and outputs

 – The fieldbus interface
*T
UIF

GBDUPSZ
TFUUJOH
/P (Page 142)
TV꫾DJFOU
5. Check if additional converter functions
 are required for the application.
:FT 1FSGPSN
RVJDL
(Page 193)
DPNNJTTJPOJOH
6. If necessary, adapt the drive.

 (Page 193)
*T
RVJDL
7. Save your settings.
DPNNJTTJPOJOH
/P
TV꫾DJFOU (Page 171)


:FT 1FSGPSN
FYUFOEFE

DPNNJTTJPOJOH


#BDLJOH
VQ
EBUB

$PNNJTTJPOJOH
JT

DPNQMFUFE

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 133
Commissioning
5.2 Tools to commission the converter

5.2 Tools to commission the converter

Operator panel
An operator panel is used to commission, troubleshoot and control the converter, as well as to
back up and transfer the converter settings.
The Intelligent Operator Panel (IOP‑2) can either be snapped onto a converter, or is
available as handheld device with a connecting cable to the converter. The graphics-capable
plain text display of the IOP‑2 enables intuitive converter operation.
Additional information on the IOP‑2 is available in the Internet:
SINAMICS IOP-2 release for sale (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109747625)
The Operator Panel BOP‑2 for snapping onto the converter has a two-line display for
diagnostics and operating the converter.
Operating Instructions of the BOP-2 and IOP-2 operator panels:
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

PC tools
STARTER and Startdrive are PC tools that are used to commission, troubleshoot and control
the converter, as well as to back up and transfer the converter settings. You can connect the
PC with the converter via USB or via the PROFIBUS / PROFINET fieldbus.
Connecting cable (3 m) between PC and converter: Article number 6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0
Startdrive DVD: Article number 6SL3072-4CA02-1XG0
Startdrive, system requirements and download (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109760844)
Startdrive tutorial (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/73598459)
STARTER, system requirements and download (http://
support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26233208)

Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation

Siemens respects the principles of data protection, in particular the data minimization rules
(privacy by design).
For this product, this means:
The product does not process neither store any person-related data, only technical function
data (e.g. time stamps). If the user links these data with other data (e.g. shift plans) or if
he stores person-related data on the same data medium (e.g. hard disk), thus personalizing
these data, he has to ensure compliance with the applicable data protection stipulations.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

134 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

5.3 Preparing for commissioning

5.3.1 Collecting motor data

Data for a standard induction motor

Before starting commissioning, you must know the following data:
• Which motor is connected to the converter?
Note down the Article No. of the motor and the motor’s nameplate data.
If available, note down the motor code on the motor’s nameplate.
$UWLFOH1R

,(&
,(&
1(0$
1(0$

6SHHG
3RZHU
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
Figure 5-1 Example of the rating plate for a standard induction motor

• In which region of the world is the motor to be used?

- Europe IEC: 50 Hz [kW]
- North America NEMA: 60 Hz [hp] or 60 Hz [kW]
• How is the motor connected?
Pay attention to the connection of the motor (star connection [Y] or delta connection [Δ]).
Note the appropriate motor data for connecting.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 135
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

5.3.2 Forming DC link capacitors

Description
You may have to reform the DC link capacitors if the Power Module has been stored for more than
one year. When the converter is operational, DC link capacitors that have not been formed can
be damaged.

Table 5-1 The forming duration depends on how long the converter was stored for

Storage time from the date of manufacture Recommended forming duration

1 – 2 years 1 hour
2 – 3 years 2 hours
> 3 years 8 hours

The production date of the Power Module is coded in the 3rd and 4th digit of the serial
number on the rating plate: "S X ‑- ③ ④ X X X…"

Table 5-2 Production year and month

Digit ③ Year of manufacture Digit ④ Month of manufacture

D 2013 1 ... 9 January ... September
E 2014 0 October
F 2015 N November
H 2016 D December
J 2017
K 2018
L 2019
M 2020

Forming the DC link of PM240-2 and PM240P-2 Power Modules

You form the DC link capacitors by supplying the converter with a line voltage of ≤ 100 % of the
rated voltage for a defined time.

)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV
8>@
)RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRI\HDUV



 )RUPLQJIRUVWRUDJHWLPHVRIDQGPRUH\HDUV

W>K@
         
Figure 5-2 Forming the DC-link capacitors

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

136 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

Form DC Link of other power modules

Formation of the DC link capacitors is not required for the following power modules even after
a lengthy period of storage.
• PM230
• PM250

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 137
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

5.3.3 Converter factory setting

Motor
With its factory settings, the converter is set up for an induction motor suitable for the power
rating of the Power Module.

Converter interfaces
The inputs and outputs and the fieldbus interface of the converter have specific functions when
set to the factory settings.
Factory interface settings (Page 102)

Switching the motor on and off

212))

5HYHUVLQJ W

W
0RWRUVSHHG
USP

6HWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ V V W

6HWSRLQWLQYHUWHG
Figure 5-3 Switching on and switching off the motor and reversing in the factory setting

The converter is set in the factory as follows:

• After the ON command, the motor accelerates with a ramp-up time of 10 s (referred to
1500 rpm) to its speed setpoint.
• After the OFF1 command, the motor brakes down to standstill with 10 s ramp-down time.
• The motor direction of rotation reverses with the reversing command.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times define the maximum motor acceleration when the speed
setpoint changes. The ramp-up and ramp-down time is derived from the time between motor
standstill and the maximum speed, or between the maximum speed and motor standstill.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

138 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

Switching the motor on and off in the jog mode

-RJ

-RJ W

W
0RWRUVSHHG

USP

USP W

Figure 5-4 Jogging the motor with the factory settings

In the case of converters with a PROFIBUS or PROFINET interface, operation can be switched
via digital input DI 3. The motor is either switched on and off via the fieldbus – or operated in
the jog mode via its digital inputs.
When a control command is received at the respective digital input, the motor rotates at
±150 rpm. The same ramp-up and ramp-down times as described above apply.

Minimum and maximum speed

• Minimum speed - factory setting 0 [rpm]
The minimum speed is the lowest speed of the motor independent of the speed setpoint. A
minimum speed > 0 is, for example, useful for fans or pumps.
• Maximum speed - factory setting 1500 [rpm]
The converter limits the motor speed to the maximum speed.

Operate the converter with the factory setting

We recommend that you execute quick commissioning. For quick commissioning, you must
adapt the converter to the connected motor by setting the motor data in the converter.
In basic applications with a standard induction motor, you can attempt to operate the drive
with a rated power of < 18.5 kW without carry out an additional commissioning steps.
Check whether the control quality of the drive without commissioning is adequate for the
requirements of the application.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 139
Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

5.3.4 Converter function modules

Function modules
Not all of the converter functions are enabled in the factory setting. For instance, you must
enable the "Encoder" function, so that the converter can evaluate an encoder signal.
A function module is a set of converter functions that can be released or inhibited all
together.
You configure the following function modules in the quick commissioning:
• Fieldbus interface
• DRIVE-CLiQ interface
• Technology controller
• Basic positioner
• Evaluating encoders
• Extended messages
Extended messages (Page 295)
• Extended setpoint channel, e.g. motorized potentiometer and fixed setpoints
• Free function blocks
You configure the following function modules when commissioning your drive:
• You monitor the motor speed using the Extended safety functions.
• The extended ramp-function generator allows the motor to be accelerated and braked
smoothly without any jerk.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

140 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.3 Preparing for commissioning

Positioning drive with one or Speed-controlled drive with an Available function modules
two encoders and Extended encoder, free function blocks
safety functions and Extended safety functions
&RQVWUDLQWDVDUHVXOWRIWKHLQYHUWHU &RQVWUDLQWDVDUHVXOWRIWKHLQYHUWHU
FRPSXWDWLRQDOSHUIRUPDQFH FRPSXWDWLRQDOSHUIRUPDQFH

([WHQGHGVDIHW\ ([WHQGHGVDIHW\
IXQFWLRQV IXQFWLRQV
%DVLFSRVLWLRQHU )UHHIXQFWLRQEORFNV

([WHQGHGPHVVDJHV ([WHQGHGUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
([WHQGHGPHVVDJHV
HQFRGHUV
HQFRGHU HQFRGHU ([WHQGHGVDIHW\
)LHOGEXV )LHOGEXV IXQFWLRQV
%DVLFSRVLWLRQHU

7HFKQRORJ\FRQWUROOHU

&ORVHGORRSVSHHG &ORVHGORRSVSHHG )UHHIXQFWLRQEORFNV

FRQWURO FRQWURO
([WHQGHGUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
([WHQGHGPHVVDJHV
(QFRGHU
'5,9(&/L4
)LHOGEXV

Qualitative utilization level of the converter using function modules

that have been released

The computational performance of the converter is designed for typical converter

applications.
Every configured function module uses part of the computational performance of the
converter. If you enable all of the converter function modules, then the converter responds
with a fault, because its available computational performance is exceeded.
Only configure function modules that you actually require for your particular application.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
FAQ combination of functions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
90157463)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 141
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

The screen forms that are shown in this manual show generally valid examples. The number of
setting options available in screen forms depends on the particular converter type.

5.4.1 Creating a project

Creating a new project

Procedure
1. Start the Startdrive commissioning software.
2. In the menu, select "Project" → "New…".
3. Specify a name of your choice for the project.
You have created a new project.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

142 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.2 Transfer converters connected via USB into the project

Integrating the converter into the project

Procedure
1. Switch on the converter power supply.
2. First insert a USB cable into your PC and then into the converter.
3. The PC operating system installs the USB driver when you are connecting the converter and
PC together for the first time.
4. Press the "Accessible nodes" button.

5. When the USB interface is appropriately set, then the "Accessible nodes" screen form shows
the converters that can be accessed.



If you have not correctly set the USB interface, then the following "No additional nodes
found" message is displayed. In this case, follow the description below.
6. Transfer the converter into the project using the menu: "Online - Upload device as new
station (hardware and software)".
You have transferred a converter accessible via the USB interface into your project.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 143
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.3 Starting wizards for the quick commissioning

Starting commissioning wizards

Procedure
1. In the project, select the drive you wish to commission.
2. Press the following buttons:

You have started the commissioning wizard.

❒

Select the application class

Procedure
When selecting an application class, the converter assigns the motor control with the
appropriate default settings:
• [1] Standard Drive Control (Page 147)
• [2] Dynamic Drive Control (Page 149)
• [0] Expert - or if no application class is listed:
Expert (Page 151)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

144 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

Application Standard Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control
class without encoder with encoder
Properties • Typical correction time after a • Typical settling time after a speed change: < 100 ms
of the speed change: 100 ms … 200 ms • Typical settling time after a load surge: 200 ms
closed-loop
• Typical settling time after a load
speed con‐ /RDG
surge: 500 ms
trol
/RDG
6SHHG W

6SHHG W
0RWRU W
WRUTXH
0RWRU W
WRUTXH
PV

PV W
• "Dynamic Drive Control" controls and limits the motor torque
• "Standard Drive Control" is suitable • We recommend "Dynamic Drive Control" for the following appli‐
to address the following require‐ cations:
ments: – Motor power ratings > 11 kW
– Motor power ratings < 45 kW – For load surges 10 % … >100 % of the rated motor torque
– Ramp-up time 0 → rated speed • "Dynamic Drive Control" is necessary for a ramp-up time 0 → rated
(depending on the motor pow‐ speed (dependent on the rated motor power):
er rating): < 1 s (0.1 kW) … < 10 s (250 kW).
1 s (0.1 kW) … 10 s (45 kW) • Torque accuracy that can be • The control extends the tor‐
– Applications with steady load achieved: ± 5% for 15% … que accuracy of ± 5 % to
torque without load surges 100% of the rated speed speeds < 15 % of the rated
• "Standard Drive Control" is insensi‐ speed.
tive with respect to imprecise set‐
ting of the motor data
Application • Pumps, fans and compressors with • Pumps and compressors with displacement machines
examples flow characteristic • Rotary furnaces
• Wet or dry blasting technology • Extruder
• Mills, mixers, kneaders, crushers, • Centrifuges
agitators
• Horizontal conveyor technology
(conveyor belts, roller conveyors,
chain conveyors)
• Basic spindles
Motors that Induction motors Induction and synchronous mo‐ Induction motors
can be oper‐ tors
ated
Power Mod‐ PM240-2
ules that can
be operated
Max. output 550 Hz 240 Hz
frequency

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 145
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

Application Standard Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control Dynamic Drive Control
class without encoder with encoder
Torque con‐ Without torque control Speed control with lower-level torque control
trol
Position con‐ Without position control • Positioning cycles using the "Basic positioner" function > approx.
trol 500ms
• Memory card with "Basic positioner" license required
• The "Travel to fixed stop" func‐ • No restrictions regarding the
tion is not possible. functions of the basic posi‐
tioner
Commis‐ • Unlike "Dynamic Drive Control," no • Reduced amount of parameters when compared to "Expert"
sioning the speed controller needs to be set • "Dynamic Drive Control" is preset for Power Modules, frame
closed-loop
• When compared to "Expert": size D … frame size F
speed con‐
trol – Simplified commissioning using
predefined motor data
– Reduced number of parameters
• "Standard Drive Control" is preset
for Power Modules, frame size A …
frame size C

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

146 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.4 Standard Drive Control

Procedure for application class [1]: Standard Drive Control

The wizard only displays the "setpoint input" if you configured a converter with PROFINET or
PROFIBUS interface.
Select whether the converter is connected to a higher-level control via the fieldbus.
Select whether the ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint is implemented in the
higher-level control or in the converter.
Select the required function modules for your application.

Converter function modules (Page 140)

Select the I/O configuration to preassign the converter interfaces.
Factory interface settings (Page 102)
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)
Set the applicable motor standard and the converter supply voltage.
If an optional component is installed between converter and motor, the corresponding
setting must be performed.
If a braking resistor is installed, you set the maximum braking power to which the braking
resistor will be subjected.
Select your motor.
If you use Startdrive, then this commissioning step is included in Step 5.
Enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
If you have selected a motor based on its article number, the data has already been entered.
Define whether the converter actuates a motor holding brake.
Set the most important parameters to suit your application.
Select the technological application:
• [0] Constant load: Typical applications include conveyor drives
• [1] Speed-dependent load: Typical applications include pumps and fans

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 147
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

Motor identification (not all the following settings may be visible in Startdrive):
• [0]: No motor data identification
• [2]: Recommended setting. Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off
the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot freely rotate, e.g. for a mechanically limited traversing
range.
• [12]: The same setting as [2]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
If you selected the "Basic positioner" function module, you must configure the encoder:
Configuring encoders (Page 154)
If you did not selected the "Basic positioner" function module, close the commissioning
wizard:
Set the check mark for "RAM data to EEPROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost if the power fails.
Press the "Finish" button.

You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of the
converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

148 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.5 Dynamic Drive Control

Procedure for application class [2]: Dynamic Drive Control

The wizard only displays the "setpoint input" if you configured a converter with PROFINET or
PROFIBUS interface.
Select whether the converter is connected to a higher-level control via the fieldbus.
Select whether the ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint is implemented in the
higher-level control or in the converter.
Select the required function modules for your application.

Converter function modules (Page 140)

Select the I/O configuration to preassign the converter interfaces.
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)
Factory interface settings (Page 102)
Set the applicable motor standard and the converter supply voltage.
If an optional component is installed between converter and motor, the corresponding
setting must be performed.
If a braking resistor is installed, you set the maximum braking power to which the braking
resistor will be subjected.
Select your motor.
If you use Startdrive, then this commissioning step is included in Step 5.
Enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
If you have selected a motor based on its article number, the data has already been entered.
Define whether the converter actuates a motor holding brake.
Set the most important parameters to suit your application.
Technological use:
• [0]: Recommended setting in all applications with speed encoder. For standard applications.
• [1]: Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times.
• [5] Recommended setting for applications without encoder with high break loose torque.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 149
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

Motor identification:
• [1]: Recommended setting. Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [2]: Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Select this setting if the motor cannot freely rotate, e.g. for a mechanically limited traversing
range.
• [3]: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the motor
after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [11]: The same setting as [1]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
• [12]: The same setting as [2]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
Configuring encoders (Page 154)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

150 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.6 Expert

Procedure without application class or for the application class [0]: Expert
The wizard only displays the "setpoint input" if you configured a converter with PROFINET or
PROFIBUS interface.
Select whether the converter is connected to a higher-level control via the fieldbus.
Select whether the ramp-function generator for the speed setpoint is implemented in the
higher-level control or in the converter.
Select the required function modules for your application.

Converter function modules (Page 140)

Select the control mode.

Control U/f control or flux current control Vector control without an en‐ Vector control with an encoder
mode (FCC) coder
Properties • Responds to speed changes with a • The vector control responds to speed changes with a typical set‐
typical settling time of tling time of < 100 ms.
100 ms … 200 ms • The vector control responds to load surges with a typical settling
• Responds to load surges with a typ‐ time of 200 ms
ical settling time of 500 ms
/RDG
/RDG

6SHHG W
6SHHG W

0RWRU W
0RWRU W WRUTXH
WRUTXH

W PV
PV
• Vector control is required in the following cases:
• U/f and FCC are suitable for the fol‐
lowing cases: – For ramp-up times 0 → rated speed < 2 s
– For ramp-up times 0 → rated – For applications with fast and high load impulses
speed > 2 s • Torque accuracy that can be • The control extends the tor‐
– For applications with increasing achieved: ± 5% for 15 % … que accuracy of ± 5 %, also
load torque without load surges 100 % of the rated speed for speeds < 15 % of the rated
speed.
• The closed-loop control is insensi‐
tive to inaccurate motor data set‐
tings, e.g. the motor temperature

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 151
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

Control U/f control or flux current control Vector control without an en‐ Vector control with an encoder
mode (FCC) coder
Application • Pumps, fans, and compressors with • Pumps and compressors with • Vertical conveyor technology
examples flow characteristic displacement machines (conveyor belts, roller con‐
• Wet or dry blasting technology • Rotary furnaces veyors, chain conveyors)

• Mills, mixers, kneaders, crushers, • Extruder • Escalators/moving stairways

agitators • Centrifuges • Lifter/lowerer
• Horizontal conveyor technology • Elevators
(conveyor belts, roller conveyors, • Gantry cranes
chain conveyors)
• Cable railways
• Basic spindles
• Stacker cranes
Motors that Induction motors Induction and synchronous mo‐ Induction motors
can be oper‐ tors
ated
Power Mod‐ No restrictions
ules that can
be operated
Max. output 550 Hz 240 Hz
frequency
Torque con‐ Without torque control Speed control with lower-level torque control
trol
Position con‐ Without position control • Positioning cycles using the "Basic positioner" function > approx.
trol 500ms
• Memory card with "Basic positioner" license required
• The "Travel to fixed stop" func‐ • No restrictions regarding the
tion is not possible. functions of the basic posi‐
tioner
Commis‐ • Unlike "Dynamic Drive Control," no • Fewer parameters when compared to "Configuration for experts"
sioning speed controller needs to be set
• When compared to "Expert":
– Simplified commissioning using
predefined motor data
– Reduced number of parameters

Select the I/O configuration to preassign the converter interfaces.

Factory interface settings (Page 102)
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)
Set the applicable motor standard and the converter supply voltage.
Select the application for the converter:
• "[0] Load cycle with high overload for applications requiring a high dynamic performance,
e.g. conveyor systems.
• "[1] Load cycle with low overload ..." for applications that do not require a high dynamic
performance, e.g. pumps or fans.
• [6], [7]: Load cycles for applications with encoderless 1FK7 synchronous motors.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

152 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

If an optional component is installed between converter and motor, the corresponding

setting must be performed.
If a braking resistor is installed, you set the maximum braking power to which the braking
resistor will be subjected.
Select your motor.
Enter the motor data according to the rating plate of your motor.
If you have selected a motor based on its article number, the data has already been entered.
Define whether the converter actuates a motor holding brake.
Set the most important parameters to suit your application.
Technological use:
• [0]: In all applications that do not fall under [1] … [3]
• [1]: Applications involving pumps and fans
• [2]: Applications with short ramp-up and ramp-down times. However, this setting is not
suitable for hoisting gear and cranes/lifting gear.
• [3]: Setting only for steady-state operation with slow speed changes. We recommend setting
[1] if load surges in operation cannot be ruled out.
• [5]: Applications with high breakaway torque
Motor identification:
• [1]: Recommended setting. Measure the motor data at standstill and with the motor rotating.
The converter switches off the motor after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [2]: Measure the motor data at standstill. The converter switches off the motor after the
motor data identification has been completed.
Recommended setting for the following cases:
– You have selected "Speed control" as control mode, however the motor cannot freely
rotate, e.g. for mechanically limited traversing sections.
– You have set "U/f control" as control mode.
• [3]: Measure the motor data while the motor is rotating. The converter switches off the motor
after the motor data identification has been completed.
• [11]: The same setting as [1]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
• [12]: The same setting as [2]. The motor accelerates to the currently set setpoint after the
motor data identification.
Calculating the motor parameters: Select "Complete calculation".
Configuring encoders (Page 154)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 153
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.7 Configuring encoders

Set the following:
• Select whether the converter evaluates one or two encoders.
• Select the interface via which the converter evaluates the encoder.
• Select a standard encoder from the list of encoder types.
– Code number < 1000: Encoders with integrated DRIVE-CLiQ
– 100x: Resolvers with different pole pair numbers
– 2xxx: sin/cos encoder
– 3xxx: HTL/TTL encoders and SSI encoders
If you cannot find your encoder in the list, then initially select the closest possible encoder
type. Continue the configuration, and then adapt the encoder data.
Adapting the encoder data (Page 358)
The commissioning step is only visible if you selected the "Basic positioner" function module.
Select the encoder that you use for position sensing.
The commissioning step is only visible if you selected the "Basic positioner" function module.
Initially, you can skip the commissioning step. The settings are explained in the context of
commissioning the basic positioner in the "Basic positioner" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
Set the check mark for "RAM data to EEPROM (save data in the drive)" to save your data in the
converter so that it is not lost if the power fails.
Press the "Finish" button.

You have entered all of the data that is necessary for the quick commissioning of your
converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

154 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.8 Loading the settings into the converter

Procedure
1. Select your drive.
2. Press the "Load to device" button. .
3. ☑ In the following screen form, select "Back up parameter assignment in the EEPROM".
4. Load your settings into the converter.
5. Wait until loading has been completed.
You have loaded your settings to the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 155
Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

5.4.9 Identify motor data

Overview
Using the motor data identification, the converter measures the data of the stationary motor. In
addition, based on the response of the rotating motor, the converter can determine a suitable
setting for the vector control.
To start the motor data identification routine, you must switch on the motor.

Identifying the motor data and optimizing the closed-loop control

Requirements
• You have selected a method of motor data identification during quick commissioning, e.g.
measurement of the motor data while the motor is stationary.
When quick commissioning is complete, the converter issues alarm A07991.
• The motor has cooled down to the ambient temperature.
An excessively high motor temperature falsifies the motor data identification results.
• The PC and converter are connected to each other online.

WARNING
Unexpected machine motion while the motor data identification is in progress
For the stationary measurement, the motor can make several rotations. The rotating
measurement accelerates the motor up to the rated speed. Secure dangerous machine parts
before starting motor data identification:
• Before switching on, ensure that nobody is working on the machine or located within its
working area.
• Secure the machine's work area against unintended access.
• Lower suspended loads to the floor.

Procedure

 

  

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

156 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.4 Quick commissioning with a PC

1. Open the control panel.

2. Assume master control for the converter.
3. Set the "Drive enables"
4. Switch on the motor.
The converter starts the motor data identification. This measurement can take several
minutes.
Depending on the setting, after motor data identification has been completed, the converter
switches off the motor - or it accelerates it to the currently set setpoint.
5. If required, switch off the motor.
6. Relinquish the master control after the motor data identification.
7. Save the settings in the converter (RAM → EEPROM):




You have completed the motor data identification.

❒

Self-optimization of the speed control

If you have not only selected motor data identification with the motor stationary, but also
rotating measurement with self-optimization of the speed control, you must switch on the
motor again as described above and wait for the optimization run to finish.
Quick commissioning has been completed once the motor data identification has been
successfully completed.
Recommendations
• Induction motors
When commissioning induction machines, you are advised to proceed as follows:
– Before connecting the load, a complete "rotating measurement" (p1900 = 3 or without
encoder: p1960 = 1; with encoder: p1960 = 2) should be carried out. Since the induction
machine is idling, you can expect highly accurate results for the saturation characteristic
and the rated magnetizing current.
– When the load is connected, speed controller tuning should be repeated because the total
moment of inertia has changed. This is realized by selecting parameter p1960 (without
encoder: p1960 = 3; with encoder: p1960 = 4). During the speed optimization, the
saturation characteristic recording is automatically deactivated in parameter p1959.
• Permanent-magnet synchronous motors
When permanent-magnet synchronous motors are commissioned, the speed controller
should be tuned (p1900 = 3 or p1960 > 0) when the load is connected.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 157
Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory setting

5.5 Restoring the factory setting

When must you reset the converter to the factory settings?

Reset the converter to the factory settings in the following cases:
• The line voltage was interrupted during commissioning and you were not able to complete
commissioning.
• You can no longer trace the settings that you made during commissioning.
• You do not know whether the converter was already operational.

Restoring the factory settings when the safety functions are enabled
If you are using the integrated safety functions of the converter, e.g. "Safe Torque Off", you must
reset the safety functions separately from the remaining converter settings.
The settings of the safety functions are protected by a password.

Settings that are not changed when restoring the factory setting
The communication settings and the settings of the motor standard (IEC/NEMA) are kept when
restoring the factory setting.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

158 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory setting

5.5.1 Resetting the safety functions to the factory setting

Procedure

 
 

1. Go online.
2. Select "Commissioning".
3. Select "Backing up/reset".
4. Select "Safety parameters are reset".
5. Press the "Start" button.
6. Enter the password for the safety functions.
7. Confirm that the parameters have been saved (RAM to ROM).
8. Go offline.
9. Switch off the converter power supply.
10.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
11.Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have restored the safety functions in the converter to the factory settings.
❒
Exception: The password for the safety functions is not reset.
Password (Page 300)

Procedure with an operator panel

1. Set p0010 = 30
Activate reset settings.
2. p9761 = …
Enter the password for the safety functions
3. Start the reset with p0970 = 5.
4. Wait until the converter sets p0970 = 0.
5. Set p0971 = 1.
6. Wait until the converter sets p0971 = 0.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 159
Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory setting

7. Switch off the converter power supply.

8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have restored the safety function settings of your converter to the factory settings.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

160 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.5 Restoring the factory setting

5.5.2 Restore the factory settings (without safety functions)

Resetting to factory settings with Startdrive

Procedure




 

1. Go online.
2. Select "Commissioning".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Select "All parameters will be reset".
5. Press the "Start" button.
6. Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory settings.
You have reset the converter to the factory settings.
❒

Resetting to factory setting with the BOP-2 operator panel

Procedure
1. Select "Reset to factory settings"
2. 2.

2. Start the reset.

2.

3. Wait until the converter has been reset to the factory setting.
2.

You have reset the converter to the factory settings.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 161
Commissioning
5.6 Series commissioning

5.6 Series commissioning

Overview
Series commissioning is the commissioning of several identical converters. During series
commissioning, it is sufficient to commission one of the converters and then transfer the
settings of the first converter to additional converters.

Precondition
The following preconditions apply to the converters regarding series commissioning:
• All converters have the same article number
• The converters to which the settings are transferred have the same or a higher firmware
version as the source converter with the original settings.

Function description

Procedure
1. Commission the first converter.
2. Back up the settings of the first converter to an external storage medium.
Uploading the converter settings (Page 171)
3. Transfer the settings from the first converter to another converter via the data storage
medium.
Downloading the converter settings (Page 459)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

162 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

Overview

6HOHFW &RQWUROPRWRU 'LDJQRVWLFV &KDQJH %DVLF 5HVHW

GLVSOD\ DFNQRZOHGJH VHWWLQJV FRPPLVVLR EDFNXS
YDOXHV IDXOW QLQJ

2. 2. 2. 2. 2.

2.
6HWSRLQW
6SHHG

2XWSXWYROWDJH
,QFUHDVH
GHFUHDVH
'&OLQNYROWDJH VSHHG 2.
2.
2XWSXWFXUUHQW

2XWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
6SHHG
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
&XUUHQW
9ROWDJH
6SHHG
1)
Status display once the power supply for the converter has been switched on.
Figure 5-5 Menu of the BOP-2

7KHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ

-RJLVDFWLYH

$QDODUPLVDFWLYH

)ODVKLQJV\PERO$IDXOWLVDFWLYH

0DVWHUFRQWURORIWKHLQYHUWHULVUHOHDVHGYLDWKH%23

Figure 5-6 Additional symbols of the BOP-2

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 163
Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.1 Switching the motor on and off

Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the option of switching the motor on and off using the control keys.

Function description

Procedure
1. Enable the control priority via the operator panel.

2. Switch on the motor.

3. Switch off the motor.

4. Disable the control priority via the operator panel.

You switched the motor on and off again.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

164 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.2 Changing parameter values

Overview
You can modify the settings of the converter by changing the parameter values in the converter.

Precondition
The converter only permits changes to write parameters. Write parameters begin with a "P", e.g.
P45.
The value of a read-only parameter cannot be changed. Read-only parameters begin with an
"r", for example: r2.

Function description

Procedure
1. Select the menu to display and change parameter values.
2.

2. Select the parameter filter.

2.

– The converter only displays the most important parameters:

– The converter displays all of the parameters to you:

3. When the parameter number flashes, select the desired parameter number.

2.

4. When the parameter value flashes, change the parameter value.

2.

You changed a parameter value.

❒

Additional information
The converter immediately saves any changes so that they are protected against power failure.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 165
Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.3 Changing indexed parameters

Overview
For indexed parameters, several parameter values are assigned to a parameter number. Each of
the parameter values has its own index.

Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The number of an indexed parameter flashes in the BOP-2 display.

Function description

Procedure
1. Set the parameter index.

2. 2.

2. Set the parameter value for the selected index.

2.

You have now changed an indexed parameter.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

166 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.4 Entering the parameter number directly

Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the possibility of setting the parameter number digit by digit.

Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The number of a given parameter flashes in the BOP-2 display.

Function description

Procedure
1. Press the OK button until the first digit of the parameter number flashes.

2. V

2. Change the parameter number digit-by-digit.

If you press the OK button, the BOP‑2 jumps to the next digit.

2. 2.

3. After you have entered all of the digits of the parameter number, press the OK button.
You set the parameter number directly.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 167
Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.5 Entering the parameter value directly

Overview
The BOP‑2 offers the option of setting the parameter value digit by digit.

Precondition
You are in the menu for displaying and changing parameter values.
The parameter value flashes in the BOP-2 display.

Function description

Procedure
1. Press the OK button until the first digit of the parameter value flashes.

2. V

2. Change the parameter value digit-by-digit.

2. 2.

You set the parameter value directly.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

168 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

5.7.6 Why can a parameter value not be changed?

Overview
Whether or not a parameter value can be changed depends on the type of parameter and the
operating mode of the converter.

Function description
The converter indicates why it currently does not permit a parameter to be changed:

Read parameters cannot

be adjusted 2.
V

The parameter can only

be adjusted during quick 2.
9
V 9

commissioning.
A parameter can only be
adjusted when the motor 2.
9
V 9

is switched off

Further information
For each parameter, the parameter list contains the operating state in which the parameter can
be changed.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 169
Commissioning
5.7 Handling the BOP 2 operator panel

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

170 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Uploading the converter settings 6
Overview
After commissioning, your settings are permanently saved in the converter.
We recommend that you additionally back up the converter settings on an external storage
medium by means of an upload. Without a backup, your settings could be lost should the
converter develop a fault.
The following storage media options are available:
• Memory card
• Operator panel BOP-2
• Operator panel IOP-2
• SINAMICS G120 Smart Access
• PG/PC

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 171
Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

6.1 Uploading to the memory card

6.1.1 Recommended memory cards

Function description

Table 6-1 Memory cards to back up converter settings

Scope of delivery Article number

Memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 6SL3054-7EH00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP3 6SL3054-7TB00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP6 6SL3054-7TD00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP9 6SL3054-7TE00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP10 6SL3054-7TF00-2BA0
Memory card with firmware V4.7 SP14 6SL3054-7TG00-2BA0

Apply for
If you use the "Basic positioner" function or the expanded safety functions, then you must
insert a memory card with a valid license in the Control Unit.
There are two ways of ordering a license:
• Without a memory card:
You order a license and you then transfer it to precisely one memory card.
• With memory card:
You order the license on a memory card with or without firmware. The license cannot be
transferred
The converter also uses the inserted license card as memory card to back up its settings.

Table 6-2 License for basic positioners

Scope of delivery Article number

License without memory card 6SL3074-7AA04-0AA0
License with memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 6SL3054-7EH00-2BA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP3 6SL3054-7TB00-2BA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP6 6SL3054-7TD00-2BA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP9 6SL3054-7TE00-2BA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP10 6SL3054-7TF00-2BA0-Z E01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP14 6SL3054-7TG00-2BA0-Z E01

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

172 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Table 6-3 License for the extended safety functions

Scope of delivery Article number

License without memory card 6SL3074-0AA10-0AA0
License with memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 6SL3054-7EH00-2BA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP3 6SL3054-7TB00-2BA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP6 6SL3054-7TD00-2BA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP9 6SL3054-7TE00-2BA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP10 6SL3054-7TF00-2BA0-Z F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP14 6SL3054-7TG00-2BA0-Z F01

Table 6-4 Basic positioner license + license for the extended safety functions

Scope of delivery Article number

License without memory card 6SL3074-0AA10-0AA0
License with memory card without firmware 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 6SL3054-7EH00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP3 6SL3054-7TB00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP6 6SL3054-7TD00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP9 6SL3054-7TE00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP10 6SL3054-7TF00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01
License with memory card with firmware V4.7 SP14 6SL3054-7TG00-2BA0-Z E01 + F01

Further information

Using memory cards from other manufacturers

The converter only supports memory cards up to 2 GB. SDHC cards (SD High Capacity) and
SDXC cards (SD Extended Capacity) are not permitted.
If you use other SD or MMC memory cards, then you must format the memory card as
follows:
• MMC: Format FAT 16
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC)
• SD: Format FAT 16 or FAT 32
– Insert the card into your PC's card reader.
– Command to format the card:
format x: /fs:fat or format x: /fs:fat32 (x: Drive code of the memory card on your PC.)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 173
Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Functional restrictions with memory cards from other manufacturers

The following functions are either not possible – or only with some restrictions – when using
memory cards from other manufacturers:
• Licensing functions is only possible using the recommended memory cards.
• Know-how protection is only possible with one of the recommended memory cards.
• In certain circumstances, memory cards from other manufacturers do not support writing or
reading data from/to the converter.

6.1.2 Automatic upload

Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter automatically backs up its settings on the inserted memory card and always keeps it
up to date.

Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched off.

Function description

Procedure
1. Insert an empty memory card into the converter.
Note
Accidental overwrite of the converter settings
When the supply voltage is switched on, the converter automatically accepts the settings
already backed up on the memory card. If you use a memory card on which settings are
already backed up, you will overwrite the settings of the converter.
• Use an empty memory card for the first automatic back-up of your settings.

Note
Unintentional firmware update
If the memory card contains a converter firmware, the converter may perform a firmware
update after the supply voltage has been switched on.
• Before inserting the memory card, ensure that it is empty.
Firmware upgrade and downgrade (Page 487)

2. Switch on the power supply for the converter.

After the power supply has been switched on, the converter copies its changed settings to
the memory card.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

174 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

6.1.3 Message for a memory card that is not inserted

Function description
The converter identifies that a memory card is not inserted, and signals this state. The message
is deactivated in the converter factory setting.

Activate message

Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 2
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is activated.
❒
To cyclically signal to the higher-level control that a memory card is not inserted, connect
parameter r9401 to the send data of the fieldbus interface.

Deactivate message

Procedure
1. Set p2118[x] = 1101, x = 0, 1, … 19
2. Set p2119[x] = 3
Message A01101 for a memory card that is not inserted is deactivated.
❒

Parameter

Parameter Explanation Factory setting

p2118[0…19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 0
r9401 Safely remove memory card status -

6.1.4 Manual upload with Startdrive

Overview
If you insert the memory card into a converter that is already supplied with power, you must start
the upload manually using a commissioning tool.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 175
Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
• A memory card is inserted in the converter.

Function description

Procedure





  

1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Back up the settings to the EEPROM of the converter.
5. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
6. Start data transfer
7. Wait until Startdrive signals that data backup has been completed.
You have backed up the converter settings to a memory card.
❒

6.1.5 Manual upload with BOP-2

Overview
If you insert the memory card into a converter that is already supplied with power, you must start
the upload manually using a commissioning tool.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

176 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.
A memory card is inserted in the converter.

Function description

Procedure
1. Select the upload.
2. 2.

2. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
2.

3. Start the upload.

2.

4. Wait until the converter has backed up the settings to the memory card.
2.

You have backed up the settings of the converter to the memory card.
❒

6.1.6 Safely removing a memory card using the BOP-2

Function description

NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on the
memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
• Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 177
Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Procedure
1. Select the menu for changing parameter values.
2. 2.

2. If a memory card is inserted, p9400 = 1.

Set p9400 = 2.
2. 2.

3. The converter indicates whether it is currently writing data to the memory card:
– The converter sets p9400 = 100:

You must not remove the memory card. Wait for several seconds and then set p9400 = 2
again.
– The converter sets p9400 = 3:

Remove the memory card.

4. After removing the memory card, the converter sets p9400 = 0.

You have safely removed the memory card.

❒

6.1.7 Safely remove the memory card with Startdrive

Function description

NOTICE
Data loss from improper handling of the memory card
If you remove the memory card when the converter is switched on without implementing the
"safe removal" function you may destroy the file system on the memory card. The data on the
memory card are lost. The memory card will only function again after formatting.
• Only remove the memory card using the "safe removal" function.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

178 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Uploading the converter settings
6.1 Uploading to the memory card

Procedure

1. In the Drive Navigator select the following screen form:

2. Click on the button to safely remove the memory card.
Startdrive will tell you whether you can remove the memory card from the converter.
You have now safely removed the memory card from the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 179
Uploading the converter settings
6.2 Uploading to the BOP-2

6.2 Uploading to the BOP-2

Overview
You can back up the converter settings on the BOP-2 operator panel.

Precondition
The converter power supply has been switched on.

Function description

Procedure
1. Select the upload to the operator panel.
2. 2.

2. Start the upload.

2.

3. Wait until the upload is completed.

2.

The upload from the converter to the BOP-2 is completed.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

180 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Uploading the converter settings
6.3 Upload to a PC using Startdrive

6.3 Upload to a PC using Startdrive

Overview
You can backup the converter settings to a PC.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.

Function description

Procedure
1. Go online.
2. Select "Online" > "Upload device to PG/PC."
3. Back up the project with "Project" > "Save."
4. Wait until Startdrive signals that data backup has been completed.
5. Go offline.
You have backed up the settings.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 181
Uploading the converter settings
6.4 More options for the upload

6.4 More options for the upload

Function description
In addition to the default setting, the converter has an internal memory for backing up three
other settings.
On the memory card, you can back up 99 other settings in addition to the default setting.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Memory options (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/43512514)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

182 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Protecting the converter settings 7
7.1 Write protection

Overview
The write protection prevents unauthorized changing of the converter settings.

Function description
Write protection is applicable for all user interfaces:
• Commissioning tool, e.g. operator panel or PC
• Parameter changes via fieldbus
No password is required for write protection.

Activate and deactivate write protection

Parameter
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status
.00 1 signal: Write protection active
p7761 Write protection (factory setting: 0)
0: Deactivate write protection
1: Activate write protection

Parameter

Table 7-1 Parameters that can be changed with active write protection

Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 183
Protecting the converter settings
7.1 Write protection

Number Name
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch

Note
Write protection for multimaster fieldbus systems
Via multimaster fieldbus systems, e.g. BACnet or Modbus RTU, in spite of write protection being
activated, parameters can still be changed. So that write protection is also active when accessing
via these fieldbuses, you must additionally set p7762 to 1.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

184 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

7.2 Know-how protection

Overview
Know-how protection prevents unauthorized reading of the converter settings.
To protect your converter settings against unauthorized copying, in addition to know-how
protection, you can also activate copy protection.

Requirement
Know-how protection requires a password.

Combination of know-how protection and Is a memory card necessary?

copy protection
Know-how protection without copy protection The converter can be operated with or without mem‐
ory card.
Know-how protection with basic copy protection The converter can only be operated
Know-how protection with extended copy pro‐ with a SIEMENS memory card
tection Recommended memory
cards (Page 172)

Function description
The active know-how protection provides the following:
• With just a few exceptions, the values of all adjustable parameters p … are invisible.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read and changed when know-how protection is
active.
In addition, you can define an exception list of adjustable parameters, which end users
may change.
– Several adjustable parameters can be read but not changed when know-how protection
is active.
• The values of monitoring parameters r … remain visible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 185
Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

• Locked functions:
– Downloading converter settings using a PC
– Automatic controller optimization
– Stationary or rotating measurement of the motor data identification
– Deleting the alarm history and the fault history
– Generating acceptance documents for safety functions
• Executable functions:
– Restoring factory settings
– Acknowledging faults
– Displaying faults, alarms, fault history, and alarm history
– Reading out the diagnostic buffer
– Controlling a converter using a PC
– Uploading adjustable parameters that can be changed or read when know-how
protection is active.
– Displaying acceptance documents for safety functions
When know-how protection is active, support can only be provided (from Technical Support)
after prior agreement from the machine manufacturer (OEM).

Know-how protection without copy protection

You can transfer the converter settings to another converter, e.g. using a memory card or an
operator panel.

Know-how protection with basic copy protection

After replacing a converter, to be able to operate the new converter with the settings of the
replaced converter without knowing the password, the memory card must be inserted in the
new converter.

Know-how protection with extended copy protection

It is not possible to insert and use the memory card in another converter without knowing
the password.

Commissioning know-how protection

1. Check as to whether you must extend the exception list.
List of exceptions (Page 189)
2. Activate the know-how protection.
Know-how protection (Page 190)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

186 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

Parameter

Table 7-2 Parameters that can be changed with active know-how protection

Number Name
p0003 Access level / Acc_level
p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm par_filt
p0124[0...n] CU detection using LED / CU detect LED
p0791[0...1] CO: Fieldbus analog outputs / Fieldbus AO
p0970 Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset
p0971 Save parameters / Sav par
p0972 Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
p2111 Alarm counter / Alarm counter
p3950 Service parameter / Serv par
p3981 Acknowledge drive object faults / Ackn DO faults
p3985 Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select
p7761 Write protection / Write protection
p8402[0...8] RTC daylight saving time setting / RTC DST
p8805 Identification and Maintenance 4 Configuration / I&M 4 Config
p8806[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 1 / I&M 1
p8807[0...15] Identification and Maintenance 2 / I&M 2
p8808[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 3 / I&M 3
p8809[0...53] Identification and Maintenance 4 / I&M 4
p8980 EtherNet/IP profile / Eth/IP profile
p8981 EtherNet/IP ODVA STOP mode / Eth/IP ODVA STOP
p8982 EtherNet/IP ODVA speed scaling / Eth/IP ODVA n scal
p8983 EtherNet/IP ODVA torque scaling / Eth/IP ODVA M scal
p9400 Safely remove memory card / Mem_card rem
p9484 BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch

Table 7-3 Parameters that can be read with active know-how protection

Number Name
p0015 Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
p0100 IEC/NEMA Standards / IEC/NEMA Standards
p0170 Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count
p0300[0...n] Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0304[0...n] Rated motor voltage / Mot U_rated
p0305[0...n] Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0505 Selecting the system of units / Unit sys select
p0595 Technological unit selection / Tech unit select
p0730 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 0 / CU S_src DO 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 187
Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

Number Name
p0731 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 1 / CU S_src DO 1
p0732 BI: CU signal source for terminal DO 2 / CU S_src DO 2
p0806 BI: Inhibit master control / Inhibit PcCtrl
p0870 BI: Close main contactor / Close main cont
p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection / PZD telegr_sel
p1080[0...n] Minimum velocity / v_min
p1082[0...n] Maximum velocity / v_max
p1520[0...n] CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p2000 Reference speed reference frequency / n_ref f_ref
p2001 Reference voltage / Reference voltage
p2002 Reference current / I_ref
p2003 Reference torque / M_ref
p2006 Reference temperature / Ref temp
p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection / Fieldbus protocol
p2038 PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PZD telegr ext
p7763 KHP OEM exception list number of indices for p7764 / KHP OEM qty p7765
p7764[0...n] KHP OEM exception list / KHP OEM excep list

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

188 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

7.2.1 Extending the exception list for know-how protection

In the factory setting, the exception list only includes the password for know-how protection.
Before activating know-how protection, you can additionally enter the adjustable parameters
in the exception list, which must still be able to be read and changed by end users – even if
know-how protection has been activated.
You do not need to change the exception list, if, with exception of the password, you do not
require additional adjustable parameters in the exception list.

Absolute know-how protection

If you remove password p7766 from the exception list, it is no longer possible to enter or change
the password for know-how protection.
You must reset the converter to the factory settings in order to be able to gain access to
the converter adjustable parameters. When restoring the factory settings, you lose what you
have configured in the converter, and you must recommission the converter.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p7763 KHP OEM exception list, number of indices for p7764 1
p7764[0…p7763] KHP OEM exception list [0] 7766
p7766 is the password for know-how protection [1...499] 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 189
Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

7.2.2 Activating and deactivating know-how protection

Requirements
• The converter has now been commissioned.
• You have generated the exception list for know-how protection.
• To guarantee know-how protection, you must ensure that the project does not remain at the
end user as a file.

Function description

Activating know-how protection

1. Enter a password of your choice in p7767.
Each index of p7767 corresponds with a character in the ASCII format.
2. Complete entry of the password with p7767[29] = 0.
3. Enter the same password in p7768 as that for p7767.
4. Complete entry of the password with p7768[29] = 0.
The know-how protection for the converter is activated.
❒

Deactivating know-how protection

1. Enter the password for the know-how protection in p7766.
Each index of p7766 corresponds with a character in the ASCII format.
2. Complete entry of the password with p7766[29] = 0.
The know-how protection for the converter is deactivated.
❒

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r7758[0...19] KHP Control Unit serial number ---
p7759[0...19] KHP Control Unit reference serial number ---
r7760 Write protection/know-how protection status ---
p7765 KHP configuration 0000 bin
p7766[0...29] KHP password, input ---
p7767[0...29] KHP password, new ---
p7768[0...29] KHP password, confirmation ---
p7769[0...20] KHP memory card reference serial number ---
r7843[0...20] Memory card serial number ---

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

190 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

Further information

Preventing data reconstruction from the memory card

As soon as know-how protection has been activated, the converter only backs up encrypted
data to the memory card.
In order to guarantee know-how protection, after activating know-how protection, we
recommend that you insert a new, empty memory card. For memory cards that have already
been written to, previously backed up data that was not encrypted can be reconstructed.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 191
Protecting the converter settings
7.2 Know-how protection

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

192 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Advanced commissioning 8
8.1 Overview of the converter functions

Overview

(QFRGHU
6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQW 3RZHU
SURFHVVLQJ 0RGXOH
0RWRUFRQWURO
7HFKQRORJ\ 3,'
FRQWUROOHU %DVLFSRVLWLR
QHU

&RPPDQGV 'ULYHFRQWURO (QFRGHU

6WDWXV &RQWURO8QLW

3URWHFWLRQ $YDLODELOLW\ (QHUJ\VDYLQJ

)DLOVDIHFRPPDQGV 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQV
)DLOVDIHVWDWXV

Drive control
The converter receives its commands from the higher-level control via the terminal strip
or the fieldbus interface of the Control Unit. The drive control defines how the converter
responds to the commands.
Sequence control when switching the motor on and off (Page 197)
Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip (Page 200)
Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs (Page 213)
Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET (Page 225)
Drive control via Modbus RTU (Page 255)
Drive control via USS (Page 258)
Drive control via Ethernet/IP (Page 261)
Drive control via CANopen (Page 263)
Jogging (Page 265)
Limit position control (Page 267)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 193
Advanced commissioning
8.1 Overview of the converter functions

The converter can switch between different settings of the drive control.
Switching over the drive control (command data set) (Page 269)
The converter provides the control for a motor holding brake. The motor holding brake holds
the motor in position when it is switched off.
Motor holding brake (Page 271)
The free function blocks permit configurable signal processing within the converter.
Free function blocks (Page 276)
You can select in which physical units the converter represents its associated values.
Selecting physical units (Page 291)
You can activate additional monitoring functions in the converter.
Extended messages (Page 295)

Safety functions
The safety functions fulfill increased requirements regarding the functional safety of the drive.
Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function (Page 297)
The extended safety functions monitor the drive speed. You require a license to operate the
converter with the extended safety functions.
Activating licensed functions (Page 425)
The extended safety functions are described in the "Safety Integrated" Function Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Setpoints and setpoint processing

The setpoint generally determines the motor speed.
Setpoints (Page 313)
The setpoint processing uses a ramp-function generator to prevent speed steps occurring and
to limit the speed to a permissible maximum value.
Setpoint processing (Page 326)

Technology controller
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or
flow. The closed-loop motor control receives the setpoint either from the higher-level control
or from the technology controller.
PID technology controller (Page 337)

Basic positioner
The basic positioner traverses an axis with position control to a target position.
You require a license to use the basic positioner.
Activating licensed functions (Page 425)
The basic positioner is described in the "Basic positioner" Function Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

194 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.1 Overview of the converter functions

Motor control
The closed-loop motor control ensures that the motor follows the speed setpoint. You can
choose between various control modes.
Motor control (Page 344)
The converter provides several methods to brake the motor electrically. During electrical
braking, the motor develops a torque that reduces the speed down to standstill.
Electrically braking the motor (Page 376)

Protection of the drive and the driven load

The protection functions prevent damage to the motor, converter and driven load.
Overcurrent protection (Page 390)
Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
Motor protection with temperature sensor (Page 394)
Motor protection by calculating the temperature (Page 396)
Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage (Page 399)
The monitoring of the driven load prevents impermissible operating modes, e.g. dry-running
of a pump.
Monitoring the driven load (Page 401)

Increasing the drive availability

The kinetic buffering converts the kinetic energy of the load into electrical energy to buffer
short-term power failures.
Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control) (Page 414)
The "Flying restart" function permits the fault-free switching on of the motor while it is still
turning.
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 409)
For active automatic restart, after a power failure, the converter attempts to automatically
restart the motor and to acknowledge any faults that occur.
Automatic restart (Page 411)

Energy saving
$
%
For standard induction motors, the efficiency optimization reduces the motor losses in the
& partial load range.
Efficiency optimization (Page 416)
If necessary, the main contactor control disconnects the converter from the power system
and so reduces the converter losses.
Line contactor control (Page 419)
The converter calculates how much energy controlled converter operation saves when
compared to mechanical flow control (e.g. throttle).
Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines (Page 421)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 195
Advanced commissioning
8.2 Brief description of the parameters

8.2 Brief description of the parameters

Overview
The brief parameter description provides the most important information for all of the
parameters that are assigned to a certain converter function.
If the number of parameter indices depends on the data sets, then the parameter index is
shown in an abbreviated form.

1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIFRPPDQGGDWDVHWV &'6 

1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIGULYHGDWDVHWV ''6
1XPEHURILQGLFHV QXPEHURIPRWRUGDWDVHWV 0'6
3DUDPHWHUVZLWKLQGLFHV
3DUDPHWHUVZLWKELWV

1XPEHU 1DPH )DFWRU\VHWWLQJ

S>&@
S>'@
S>0@
S>@
S
Figure 8-1 Brief parameter description

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

196 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.3 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off

8.3 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off

Overview
The sequence control defines the rules for switching the motor on and off.

5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ

21 2))

2SHUDWLRQ

Figure 8-2 Simplified representation of the sequence control

After switching the supply voltage on, the converter normally goes into the "ready to start"
state. In this state, the converter waits for the command to switch on the motor.
The converter switches on the motor with the ON command. The converter changes to the
"Operation" state.
After the OFF1 command, the converter brakes the motor down to standstill. The converter
switches off the motor once standstill has been reached. The converter is again "ready to
start".

Function description

6ZLWFKRQWKHSRZHUVXSSO\RIWKHLQYHUWHU
6
6ZLWFKLQJRQLQKLELWHG
2))
DQGQRW 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 2)) 0RWRU 2))
DQGQRW 2)) VWDWLRQDU\

2)) 6
5HDG\IRUVZLWFKLQJRQ

21
2)) RU -RJJLQJ 2)) 6E
RU -RJJLQJ 4XLFNVWRS

0RWRU 2)) 2)) 0RWRU 2))

6 VWDWLRQDU\ VWDWLRQDU\
5HDG\ 2))

6D 6F
,QKLELW (QDEOH 5DPSVWRS -RJJLQJGRZQUDPS
RSHUDWLRQ RSHUDWLRQ
2)) 21 1HLWKHUMRJJLQJ -RJJLQJ
QRUMRJJLQJ RU -RJJLQJ
6
2SHUDWLRQ
Figure 8-3 Sequence control of the converter when the motor is switched on and off

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 197
Advanced commissioning
8.3 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off

Converter states S1 … S5c are defined in the PROFIdrive profile. The sequence control defines
the transition from one state to another.

Table 8-1 Converter states

The motor is switched off The motor is switched on

Current does not flow in the motor and the motor Current flows in the motor and the motor gener‐
does not generate any torque ates a torque
S1 The ON command and an OFF command S4 The motor is switched on.
are active at the same time.
In order for the converter to exit the state,
you must deactivate OFF2 and OFF3 and
activate the ON command again.
S2 The converter waits for a new command to S5a, The motor is still switched on. The convert‐
switch on the motor. S5c er brakes the motor with the ramp-down
time of the ramp-function generator.
S3 The converter waits for "Enable opera‐ S5b The motor is still switched on. The convert‐
tion". The "Enable operation" command is er brakes the motor with the OFF3 ramp-
always active in the converter factory set‐ down time.
ting.

Table 8-2 Commands for switching the motor on and off

ON The converter switches the motor on.

Jogging 1
Jogging 2
Enable opera‐
tion
OFF1, OFF3 1. The converter brakes the motor.
2. The converter switches off the motor once it comes to a standstill.
The converter identifies that the motor is at a standstill when at least one of the following
conditions is satisfied:
• The speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226, and the time started in
p1228 has expired.
• The speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226, and the time subsequently
started in p1227 has expired.
OFF2 The converter switches off the motor immediately without first braking it.
Inhibit opera‐
tion

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

r0046.0…31 CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
p0857 Power unit monitoring time 10000 ms
p0858[C] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake 0
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal 863.1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

198 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.3 Sequence control when switching the motor on and off

Number Name Factory setting

p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms
p1226[D] Speed threshold for standstill detection 20 rpm
p1227 Standstill detection monitoring time 300 s
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time 0.01 s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 199
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

Overview
In the converter, the input and output signals are interconnected with specific converter
functions using special parameters. The following parameters are available to interconnect
signals:
• Binectors BI and BO are parameters to interconnect binary signals.
• Connectors CI and CO are parameters to interconnect analog signals.
The following chapters describe how you adapt the function of individual converter inputs
and outputs using binectors and connectors.

%,S[[[[ &RQWURO8QLW
 ', U S
 '2
 ', U
S
 ', U
 '2
 ', U
S
 ', U
 '2
 ', U
S
 ', U  '2
 ', U
 ', U S>@
 ', U S>@
 ', U  $2 &2U[[\\
 ', U  *1'
 ', U S>@
S>@
 ', U
 $2
 ', U
 *1'
S>@
, 8
 $, &,S\\\\
U>@
 $,

S>@
, 8
 $,
U>@
 $,
S
 '21& %2U\\[[Q
 '212
 '2&20
S
 '212
 '2&20
S
 '21&
 '212
 '2&20

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

200 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.1 Digital inputs

Function description

%,S[[[[
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U
 ', U

To change the function of a digital input, you must interconnect the status parameter of the
digital input with a binector input of your choice.
Binector inputs are designated in the parameter list with "BI".
Interconnecting signals in the converter (Page 551)

Switchable terminals

S


U
 ',
 '2
S


U
 ',
 '2
S


U
 ',
 '2
S


U
 ',
 '2

In the converter factory setting, the switchable terminals are active as digital inputs.
To use a terminal that can be switched over as a digital input, set the corresponding bit of
parameter p0728.x = 0.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 201
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

Example

S
 ', U 

To acknowledge converter fault messages using digital input DI 1, you must interconnect DI 1
with the command to acknowledge faults (p2103).
Set p2103 = 722.1.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0721 CU digital inputs, terminal actual value -
r0722 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
r0723 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted --
p0724 CU digital inputs debounce time 4 ms
p0728 CU set input or output 0000 0000 0000 0000 bin
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 0
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) Dependent on the converter
p0844[C] BI: No coast down/coast down (OFF2) signal source Dependent on the converter
1
p0848[C] BI: No quick stop/quick stop (OFF3) signal source 1 1
p0852[C] BI: Enable operation/inhibit operation Dependent on the converter
p1020[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
p1021[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
p1022[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 2 0
p1023[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 3 0
p1035[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint higher Dependent on the converter
p1036[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower Dependent on the converter
p1055[C] BI: Jogging bit 0 Dependent on the converter
p1056[C] BI: Jogging bit 1 Dependent on the converter
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion Dependent on the converter
p2103[C] BI: 1. Acknowledge faults Dependent on the converter
p2106[C] BI: External fault 1 1
p2112[C] BI: External alarm 1 1

For additional binector inputs and additional information on parameters, please refer to the
parameter list.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

202 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.2 Analog inputs as digital inputs

Function description

$,
$,
 9RXW
 9RXW , 8
 *1' %,S[[[[
',
 $, U
 $,
',
 $, U
 $,

To use an analog input as additional digital input, you must interconnect the corresponding
status parameter r0722.11 or r0722.12 with a binector input of your choice.
You may operate the analog input as a digital input with 10 V or with 24 V.

NOTICE
Defective analog input due to overcurrent
If the analog input switch is set to "Current input" (I), a 10 V or 24 V voltage source results in an
overcurrent at the analog input. An overcurrent condition destroys the analog input.
• If you use an analog input as a digital input, then you must set the analog input switch to
"Voltage" (U).

8.4.3 Failsafe digital inputs

Function description

 ', 
ุ )',
 ', 

The converter combines two digital inputs into one failsafe digital input.
Additional information on failsafe digital inputs is provided in the description of the STO
safety function.
Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function (Page 297)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 203
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.4 Digital outputs

Function description

S
 '21& %2U\\[[Q
 '212
 '2&20
S
 '212
 '2&20
S
 '21&
 '212
 '2&20
S
 '2
S
 '2
S
 '2
S
 '2

To change the function of a digital output, you must interconnect the digital output with a
binector output of your choice.
Binector outputs are designated in the parameter list with "BO".

Switchable terminals

S


', S
 '2
S 


', S
 '2
S 


', S
 '2
S 


', S
 '2


In the converter factory setting, the switchable terminals are active as digital inputs.
To use a terminal that can be switched over as a digital output, set the corresponding bit of
parameter p0728.x = 1.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

204 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

Example

S
 '2  U


To output converter fault messages via digital output DO 1, you must interconnect DO 1 with
these fault messages.
Set p0731 = 52.3

Parameter

Table 8-3 Frequently used binector outputs (BO) of the converter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0052[0...15] CO/BO: Status word 1 -
.00 1 signal: Ready for switching on
.01 1 signal: Ready for operation
.02 1 signal: Operation enabled
.03 1 signal: Fault active
.04 0 signal: OFF2 active
.05 0 signal: OFF3 active
.06 1 signal: Switching on inhibited active
.07 1 signal: Alarm active
.08 0 signal: Deviation, setpoint/actual speed
.09 1 signal: Control request
.10 1 signal: Maximum speed (p1082) reached
.11 0 signal: I, M, P limit reached
.13 0 signal: Alarm, motor overtemperature
.14 1 signal: Motor clockwise rotation
.15 0 signal: Alarm, converter overload
r0053[0...11] CO/BO: Status word 2 -
.00 1 signal: DC braking active
.02 1 signal: Speed > minimum speed (p1080)
.06 1 signal: Speed ≥ setpoint speed (r1119)
p0728 Set CU input or output 0000 0000 0000 0000
bin

You can find additional binector outputs in the parameter list.

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Further information
You can invert the signal of the digital output using parameter p0748.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and the function diagrams 2230 ff.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 205
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.5 Analog inputs

Function description

S>@
, 8
 $, &,S\\\\
U>@
 $,

S>@
, 8
 $,
U>@
 $,

Interconnecting signals in the converter (Page 551)

Defining the analog input type

The parameter p0756[x] and the switch on the converter specify the analog input type.

AI 0 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[0] = 0

Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input ‑10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected --- 8
AI 1 Unipolar voltage input 0 V … +10 V p0756[1] = 0
Unipolar voltage input monitored +2 V … +10 V 1
Unipolar current input 0 mA … +20 mA 2
Unipolar current input monitored +4 mA … +20 mA 3
Bipolar voltage input ‑10 V … +10 V 4
No sensor connected --- 8

In addition, you must also set the switch associated with the analog input. You , 8
can find the switch on the Control Unit behind the lower front door.
$,
• Voltage input: Switch position U (factory setting)
$,
• Current input: Switch position I

Defining the function of an analog input

You define the analog input function by interconnecting a connector input of your choice
with parameter p0755. Parameter p0755 is assigned to the particular analog input via its
index, e.g. parameter p0755[0] is assigned to analog input 0.
Connector inputs are designated in the parameter list with "CI".

Example

S
 $, U>@ >@

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

206 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

In order to enter the supplementary setpoint via analog input AI 0, you must interconnect
AI 0 with the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Set p1075 = 755[0].

Parameter

Table 8-4 Frequently used connector inputs (CI) of the converter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint 0
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p2253[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 0
p2264[C] CI: Technology controller actual value 0

You can find additional connector inputs in the parameter list.

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Further information

Signal smoothing
When required, you can smooth the signal, which you read-in via an analog input, using
parameter p0753.
Additional information is provided in the parameter list and in function diagram 2251.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Using an analog input as a digital input

An analog input can also be used as a digital input.
Digital inputs (Page 201)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 207
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.6 Adjusting characteristics for analog input

Function description
If you change the analog input type using p0756, then the converter automatically selects the
appropriate scaling of the analog input. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two
points (p0757, p0758) and (p0759, p0760). Parameters p0757 … p0760 are assigned to an
analog input via their index, e.g. parameters p0757[0] … p0760[0] belong to analog input 0.

S  S 
9ROWDJHLQSXW99 &XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$
 
\  \ 
S S

\  \ 
S S
[  [  9 [  [  P$
S S S S

You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.

Example
The converter should convert a 6 mA … 12 mA signal into the value range ‑100% … 100% via
analog input 0. The wire-break monitoring of the converter should respond when 6 mA is fallen
below.

&XUUHQWLQSXWP$P$

\ 
S

[ 
S
[  P$
S

\ 
S

Procedure
1. Set the DIP switch for analog input 0 on the Control Unit to current input ("I").
, 8

2. set p0756[0] = 3
You have defined analog input 0 as a current input with wire-break monitoring.
3. Set p0757[0] = 6.0 (x1)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

208 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

4. Set p0758[0] = -100.0 (y1)

5. Set p0759[0] = 12.0 (x2)
6. Set p0760[0] = 100.0 (y2)
7. Set p0761[0] = 6
An input current < 6 mA results in fault F03505.
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0757[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value x1 0
p0758[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value y1 0%
p0759[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value x2 10
p0760[0…n] CU analog inputs characteristic value y2 100%
p0761[0…n] CU analog inputs wire-break monitoring, response 2
threshold
p0762[0…n] CU analog inputs wire breakage monitoring time 100 ms

8.4.7 Setting the deadband

Function description

 

9P$ 9P$
'HDGEDQG 'HDGEDQG

With the control enabled, electromagnetic interference on the signal cable can cause the
motor to slowly rotate in one direction in spite of a speed setpoint = 0.
The deadband acts on the zero crossover of the analog input characteristic. Internally, the
converter sets its speed setpoint = 0, even if the signal at the analog input terminals is slightly
positive or negative. This prevents the converter from rotating the motor when the speed
setpoint = 0.

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0764[0] Analog inputs deadband, AI 0 0
p0764[1] Analog inputs deadband, AI 1 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 209
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

8.4.8 Analog outputs

Function description

S>@
S>@
 $2 &2U[[\\
 *1'
S>@
S>@
 $2
 *1'

Defining the analog output type

Define the analog output type using parameter p0776.

AO 0 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[0] = 0

Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2
AO 1 Current output (factory setting) 0 mA … +20 mA p0776[1] = 0
Voltage output 0 V … +10 V 1
Current output +4 mA … +20 mA 2

Defining the function of an analog output

You define the analog output function by interconnecting parameter p0771 with a connector
output of your choice. Parameter p0771 is assigned to the specific analog output via its
index, e.g. parameter p0771[0] is assigned to analog output 0.
Connector outputs are designated in the parameter list with "CO".
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Example

S>@
 $2  U

To output the converter output current via analog output 0, you must interconnect AO 0 with
the signal for the output current.
Set p0771 = 27.

Parameter

Table 8-5 Frequently used connector outputs (CO) of the converter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0021 CO: Speed actual value, smoothed - rpm
r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

210 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0026 CO: DC link voltage, smoothed -V
r0027 CO: Absolute actual current, smoothed - Arms
r0063 CO: Speed actual value - rpm

You can find additional connector outputs in the parameter list.

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

8.4.9 Adjusting characteristics for analog output

Function description
If you change the analog output type, then the converter automatically selects the appropriate
scaling of the analog output. The linear scaling characteristic is defined using two points (p0777,
p0778) and (p0779, p0780).

S  S 
9ROWDJHRXWSXW99 &XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
9 P$
\  \ 
S S

\  \ 
S S
[  [   [  [  
S S S S

Parameters p0777 … p0780 are assigned to an analog output via their index, e.g. parameters
p0777[0] … p0770[0] belong to analog output 0.
You must define your own characteristic if none of the default types match your particular
application.

Example
Via analog output 0, the converter should convert a signal in the value range 0% … 100% into
an output signal 6 mA … 12 mA.

&XUUHQWRXWSXWP$P$
P$
\ 
S

\ 
S
[  [  
S S

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 211
Advanced commissioning
8.4 Adapt the default setting of the terminal strip

Procedure
1. Set p0776[0] = 2
This defines analog output 0 as a current output.
2. Set p0777[0] = 0.0 (x1)
3. Set p0778[0] = 6.0 (y1)
4. Set p0779[0] = 100.0 (x2)
5. Set p0780[0] = 12.0 (y2)
The characteristic for the application example is set.
❒

Parameters

Table 8-6 Parameters for the scaling characteristic

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0777[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x1 -
p0778[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y1 0V
p0779[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value x2 100%
p0780[0…1] CU analog outputs characteristic value y2 20 V

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

212 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital

inputs

Overview
The converter offers various methods to start and stop the motor and reverse its direction.

Two-wire control, ON/reverse 212))

ON/OFF1: W
5HYHUVLQJ
Switches the motor on or off
W
Reversing: 6723 6723
Reverses the motor direction of rota‐
&ORFNZLVH 6WRS &RXQWHU 6WRS
tion FORFNZLVH

Two-wire control, clockwise/coun‐ 212))

terclockwise rotation 1 and clock‐ FORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
W
wise/counterclockwise rotation 2 212))
FRXQWHU
ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation: FORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ W
6723 6723
Switches the motor on or off, clock‐
wise rotation &ORFNZLVH 6WRS &RXQWHU 6WRS
FORFNZLVH
ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation:
Switches the motor on or off, counter-
clockwise rotation

Three-wire control, enable/clock‐ (QDEOH2))

wise/counterclockwise rotation W
Enable/OFF1: 21FORFNZLVH
URWDWLRQ
Enables the motor to be switched on or W
21FRXQWHU
switched off FORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ
ON clockwise rotation: W
6723 6723
Switches on the motor, clockwise rota‐
&ORFNZLVH 6WRS &RXQWHU 6WRS
tion FORFNZLVH
ON counter-clockwise rotation:
Switches on the motor, counter-clock‐
wise rotation

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 213
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Three-wire control, enable/ON/ (QDEOH2))

reverse W
Enable/OFF1: 21

Enables the motor to be switched on or W

5HYHUVLQJ
switched off
ON: W
6723 6723
Switches on the motor
&ORFNZLVH 6WRS &RXQWHU 6WRS
Reversing: FORFNZLVH
Reverses the motor direction of rota‐
tion

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

214 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5.1 Two-wire control, ON/reverse

Function description

212))

5HYHUVLQJ W

W
6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W

Figure 8-4 Two-wire control, ON/reverse

Command "ON/OFF1" switches the motor on and off. The "Reversing" command inverts the
motor direction of rotation.

Table 8-7 Function table

ON/OFF1 Reversing Function

0 0 The motor stops
0 1
1 0 Clockwise motor rotation
1 1 Counter-clockwise motor rotation

Examples

Table 8-8 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs

Parameter Description
p3334 = 0 2/3 wire control selection
0: Two-wire control, ON/reverse
p0840[C] = 722.0 BI: ON/OFF (OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p1113[C] = 722.1 BI: Setpoint inversion (reversing)
Command is received via digital input 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 215
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Table 8-9 Set two-wire control, ON/reverse in quick commissioning

Parameter Description
p0015 = 12 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1
• Digital input 1: Reversing
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
r0722.0…n CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p3334 2/3 wire control selection 0
0: Two-wire control, ON/reverse

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

216 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5.2 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1

Function description

212))
&ORFNZLVH &RPPDQGKDVQRHIIHFW
212)) W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W

Figure 8-5 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1

Commands "ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation" and "ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation" switch

on the motor - and simultaneously select a direction of rotation. The converter only accepts a
new command when the motor is at a standstill.

Table 8-10 Function table

ON/OFF1 clockwise rota‐ ON/OFF1 counter-clock‐ Function

tion wise rotation
0 0 The motor stops.
1 0 Clockwise motor rotation.
0 1 Counter-clockwise motor rotation.
1 1 The motor direction of rotation is defined by
the command that first reaches state "1".

Examples

Table 8-11 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs

Parameter Description
p3334 = 1 2/3 wire control selection
1: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 217
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Table 8-12 Set two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1 in quick commissioning

Parameter Description
p0015 = 17 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation
• Digital input 1: ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0722.0…n CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p3330[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 0
p3331[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 0
r3333.0…n CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word -
p3334 2/3 wire control selection 0
1: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

218 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5.3 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2

Function description

212))
&ORFNZLVH
212)) W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W

Figure 8-6 Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2

Commands "ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation" and "ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation" switch

on the motor - and simultaneously select a direction of rotation. The converter accepts a new
command at any time, independent of the motor speed.

Table 8-13 Function table

ON/OFF1 clockwise rota‐ ON/OFF1 counter-clock‐ Function

tion wise rotation
0 0 The motor stops.
1 0 Clockwise motor rotation.
0 1 Counter-clockwise motor rotation.
1 1 The motor stops.

Examples

Table 8-14 Two-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs

Parameter Description
p3334 = 2 2/3 wire control selection
2: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0 (DI 0)
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 1 (DI 1)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 219
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Table 8-15 Set two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2 in quick commissioning

Parameter Description
p0015 = 18 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: ON/OFF1 clockwise rotation
• Digital input 1: ON/OFF1 counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0722.0…n CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p3330[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 0
p3331[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 0
r3333.0…n CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word -
p3334 2/3 wire control selection 0
2: Two-wire control, clockwise/counterclockwise rotation 2

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

220 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5.4 Three-wire control, enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation

Function description

(QDEOH2))

21 W
&ORFNZLVH
21 W
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH
W
6723 6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W

Figure 8-7 Three-wire control, enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation

The "Enable" command is a precondition for switching on the motor. Commands "ON
clockwise rotation" and "ON counter-clockwise rotation" switch on the motor - and
simultaneously select a direction of rotation. Removing the enable switches the motor off
(OFF1).

Table 8-16 Function table

Enable / OFF1 ON clockwise rota‐ ON counter-clock‐ Function

tion wise rotation
0 0 or 1 0 or 1 The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 Clockwise motor rotation.
1 0 0→1 Counter-clockwise motor rotation.
1 1 1 The motor stops.

Examples

Table 8-17 Three-wire control and setting the assignment of the digital inputs

Parameter Description
p3334 = 3 2/3 wire control selection
3: Three-wire control enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3332[C] = 722.2 BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (ON counter-clockwise rotation)
Command is received via digital input 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 221
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Table 8-18 Set three-wire control, enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation in quick

commissioning

Parameter Description
p0015 = 19 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: Enable/OFF1
• Digital input 1: ON clockwise rotation
• Digital input 2: ON counter-clockwise rotation
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0722.0…n CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p3330[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 0
p3331[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 0
p3332[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 0
r3333.0…n CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word -
p3334 2/3 wire control selection 0
3: Three-wire control enable/clockwise/counterclockwise ro‐
tation

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

222 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

8.5.5 Three-wire control, enable/ON/reverse

Function description
The "Enable" command is a precondition for switching on the motor. The "ON" command
switches the motor on. The "Reversing" command inverts the motor direction of rotation.
Removing the enable switches the motor off (OFF1).

(QDEOH2))

21 W

5HYHUVLQJ W

W
6723 6723
6SHHGVHWSRLQW

&ORFNZLVH
&RXQWHUFORFNZLVH W

Figure 8-8 Three-wire control, enable/ON/reverse

Table 8-19 Function table

Enable / OFF1 ON Reversing Function

0 0 or 1 0 or 1 The motor stops.
1 0→1 0 Clockwise motor rotation.
1 0→1 1 Counter-clockwise motor rotation.

Examples

Table 8-20 Changing the assignment of the digital inputs

Parameter Description
p3334 = 4 2/3 wire control selection
4: Three-wire control enable/clockwise/counterclockwise rotation
p3330[C] = 722.0 BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 (enable/OFF1)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3331[C] = 722.1 BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 (ON)
Command is received via digital input 0
p3332[C] = 722.2 BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 (reversing)
Command is received via digital input 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 223
Advanced commissioning
8.5 Controlling clockwise and counter-clockwise rotation via digital inputs

Table 8-21 Set three-wire control, enable/ON/reverse in quick commissioning

Parameter Description
p0015 = 20 Macro drive unit
Assigning digital inputs to the commands:
• Digital input 0: Enable/OFF1
• Digital input 1: ON
• Digital input 2: Reversing
Default setting of the interfaces (Page 104)

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0722.0…n CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p3330[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 1 0
p3331[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 2 0
p3332[C] BI: 2/3 wire control command 3 0
r3333.0…n CO/BO: 2/3 wire control control word -
p3334 2/3 wire control selection 0
4: Three-wire control enable/ON/reverse

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

224 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.1 Receive data and send data

Overview

Cyclic data exchange

The converter receives cyclic data from the higher-level control - and returns cyclic data to
the control.

5HFHLYHGDWD 6HQGGDWD

Figure 8-9 Cyclic data exchange

Converter and higher-level control system package their data in the form of telegrams.

)UDPH

+HDGHU 3.: 3=' 7UDLOHU

8VHUGDWD
Figure 8-10 Telegram structure

A telegram has the following structure:

• Header and trailer form the protocol frame.
• User data is located within the frame:
– PKW: The control system can read or change the parameters in the converter via "PKW
data".
Not every telegram has a "PKW range".
– PZD: The converter receives control commands and setpoints from the higher-level
control - and sends status messages and actual values via "PZD data".

PROFIdrive and telegram numbers

For typical applications, certain telegrams are defined in the PROFIdrive profile and are
assigned a fixed PROFIdrive telegram number. As a consequence, behind a PROFIdrive
telegram number, there is a defined signal composition. As a consequence, a telegram
number uniquely describes cyclic data exchange.
The telegrams are identical for PROFIBUS and PROFINET.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 225
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.2 Telegrams

Available telegrams without "basic positioner"

The user data of available telegrams are described in the following.
The converter has the following telegrams if you have not configured the "Basic positioner"
function:

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67: 5HFHLYHXVHUGDWD
B$
=6: 1,67B$ 6HQGXVHUGDWD

16-bit speed setpoint

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
67: 162//B% 67:

=6: 1,67B% =6:

32-bit speed setpoint

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
*B
67: 162//B% 67:
67:
*B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B;,67 *B;,67
=6:

32-bit speed setpoint with 1 position encoder

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
*B *B67
67: 162//B% 67:
67: :
*B *B
=6: 1,67B% =6: *B;,67 *B;,67 *B;,67 *B;,67
=6: =6:

32-bit speed setpoint with 2 position encoders

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//B
67:
$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B 3,67B 0(/'B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 */$77 1$085

16-bit speed setpoint for VIK-Namur

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

226 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: 0B/,0 67:
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B
=6: =6:
*/$77 */$77

16-bit speed setpoint with torque limiting

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(

16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3='
162//
67:
B$
3.:
1,67B$
=6:
*/$77

16-bit speed setpoint to read and write parameters

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
162//
67: )UHHO\DVVLJQDEOH
B$
3.:
1,67B$ ,$,67B 0,67B :$51B )$8/7B
=6:
*/$77 */$77 */$77 &2'( &2'(

16-bit speed setpoint for PCS7 to read and write parameters

7HOHJUDP
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
67: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHUHFHLYHGDWD

=6: 7HOHJUDPOHQJWKIRUWKHWUDQVPLWGDWD

Free interconnection and length

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

PZD Process data PKW Parameter channel
STW1 … STW3 Control word 1 … control word 3 PIST Actual active power
ZSW1 … STW3 Status word 1 ... status word 3 M_LIM Torque limit
NSOLL_A Speed setpoint 16-bit FAULT_CODE Fault code
NSOLL_B Speed setpoint 32-bit WARN_CODE Alarm code
NIST_A Actual speed value 16-bit MELD_NAMUR Control word according to the VIK-NA‐
MUR definition
NIST_B Actual speed value 32-bit G1_STW / G2_STW Control word for encoder 1 or encoder 2
IAIST Actual current value G1_ZSW / G2_ZSW Status word for encoder 1 / encoder 2

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 227
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Abbreviation Explanation Abbreviation Explanation

IAIST_GLATT Smoothed actual current value G1_XIST1 / G2_XIST1 Position actual value 1 from encoder 1 /
encoder 2
MIST_GLATT Smoothed actual torque value G1_XIST2 / G2_XIST2 Position actual value 2 from encoder 1 /
encoder 2

Available telegrams if "Basic positioner" has been configured

If you have configured the "Basic positioner" function, then the converter has the following
telegrams for cyclic data exchange with the higher-level control system:
• Standard telegram 7, PZD-2/2
• Standard telegram 9, PZD-10/5
• SIEMENS telegram 110, PZD-12/7
• SIEMENS telegram 111, PZD-12/12
• Telegram 999, free interconnection
Telegrams 7, 9, 110 and 111 are described in the "Basic positioner" Function Manual
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Interconnection of the process data

S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@ 

S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG

31R
S>@ U>@ 

S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG

31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R

S>@ U>@
31R
S>@ U>@
31R 3='VHQGZRUG
 6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUGRXEOHZRUG  6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUZRUG
 6HQGZRUGYDOXHGRXEOHZRUG  6HQGZRUGYDOXHZRUG
Figure 8-11 Interconnection of the send words

In the converter, send data are available in the "Word" format (p2051) and in the "Double
word" format (p2061). If you set a specific telegram, or you change the telegram, the
converter automatically interconnects parameters p2051 and p2061 with the appropriate
signals.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

228 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@  U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@  U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@ 

U>@
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@

9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG 
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG 
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
GRXEOHZRUG ZRUG ELWE\ELW
Figure 8-12 Interconnection of the receive words

The converter saves the receive data in the "Word" format (r2050), in the "Double word"
format (r2060) and bit-by-bit (r2090 …r2093). If you set a specific telegram, or change
the telegram, then the converter automatically interconnects parameters r2050, r2060 and
r2090 …r2093 with the appropriate signals.
If you wish to adapt a predefined telegram, then you must interconnect to the send and
receive data with the appropriate signals. You must first adapt parameters p0922 and p2079
to allow manual interconnection of the send and receive data. Details regarding the free
interconnection of process data are provided in the List Manual in function diagrams 2420
and 2472.

8.6.3 Control and status word 1

Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p0840[0] =
p1121 of the ramp-function generator. The con‐ r2090.0
verter switches off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in
addition, bit 3 = 1, the converter switches on the
motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor p0844[0] =
then coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Fast stopping p0848[0] =
The motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp-down r2090.2
time p1135 down to standstill.
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 229
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-func‐ p1140[0] =
tion generator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator p1141[0] =
stops at the actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator fol‐
lows the setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp- p1142[0] =
down time p1121 of the ramp-function gener‐ r2090.6
ator.
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120
to the setpoint.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge faults Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still p2103[0] =
active, the converter switches to the "switching r2090.7
on inhibited" state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the p0854[0] =
fieldbus. r2090.10
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the proc‐
ess data from the fieldbus.
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Not used
13 ---1) 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized po‐ p1035[0] =
tentiometer. r2090.13
14 ---1) 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized po‐ p1036[0] =
tentiometer. r2090.14
15 CDS bit 0 Reserved Changes over between settings for different op‐ p0810 =
eration interfaces (command data sets). r2090.15
1)
If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter‐

Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
0 1 = Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initial‐ p2080[0] =
ized; pulses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is p2080[1] =
active. With the command "Enable operation" r0899.1
(STW1.3), the converter switches on the motor.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

230 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter‐

Telegram 20 All other tele‐ connection
grams in the con‐
verter
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, p2080[2] =
bit 3. r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault p2080[3] =
using STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibited active It is only possible to switch on the motor after p2080[6] =
an OFF1 followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledge‐ p2080[7] =
ment is necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the tol‐ Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tol‐ p2080[8] =
erance range erance range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to accept p2080[9] =
the converter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed reached or Speed is greater than or equal to the corre‐ p2080[10]
exceeded sponding maximum speed. = r2199.1
11 1 = current or 1 = torque limit Comparison value for current or torque has p2080[11]
torque limit reached been reached or exceeded. = r0056.13 /
reached r1407.7
12 ---1) 1 = Holding Signal to open and close a motor holding brake. p2080[12]
brake open = r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemperature -- p2080[13]
= r2135.14
14 1 = Motor rotates clockwise Internal converter actual value > 0 p2080[14]
0 = Motor rotates counter-clock‐ Internal converter actual value < 0 = r2197.3
wise
15 1 = CDS display 0 = Alarm, con‐ -- p2080[15]
verter thermal = r0836.0 /
overload r2135.15
1)
If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous
telegram is kept.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 231
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.4 Control and status word 2

Control word 2 (STW2)

Bit Meaning Signal interconnection in the

Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 Telegrams 9, 110 and 111 converter

0 1 = drive data set selection DDS bit 0 p0820[0] = r2093.0

1 1 = drive data set selection DDS bit 1 p0821[0] = r2093.1
2…6 Reserved
7 1 = parking axis is selected p0897 = r2093.7
8 1 = travel to fixed stop active Reserved p1545[0] = r2093.8
9…11 Reserved
12 1 = master sign-of-life bit 0 p2045 = r2050[3]
13 1 = master sign-of-life bit 1
14 1 = master sign-of-life bit 3
15 1 = master sign-of-life bit 4

Status word 2 (ZSW2)

Bit Meaning Signal interconnection in the

converter
0 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0 p2081[0] = r0051.0
1 1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 1 p2081[1] = r0051.1
2…4 Reserved
5 1 = Alarm class bit 0 p2081[5] = r2139.11
6 1 = alarm class bit 1 p2081[6] = r2139.12
7 Reserved
8 1 = travel to fixed stop active p2081[8] = r1406.8
9 Reserved
10 1 = pulses enabled p2081[10] = r0899.11
11 Reserved
12 Device sign-of-life bit 0 Internally interconnected
13 Device sign of life bit 1
14 Device sign of life bit 2
15 Device sign of life bit 3

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

232 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.5 Control and status word 3

Control word 3 (STW3)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec‐

Telegram 350 tion in the converter 1)

0 1 = fixed setpoint bit 0 Selects up to 16 different fixed p1020[0] = r2093.0

1 1 = fixed setpoint bit 1 setpoints. p1021[0] = r2093.1
2 1 = fixed setpoint bit 2 p1022[0] = r2093.2
3 1 = fixed setpoint bit 3 p1023[0] = r2093.3
4 1 = DDS selection bit 0 Changes over between settings p0820 = r2093.4
5 1 = DDS selection bit 1 for different motors (drive data p0821 = r2093.5
sets).
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 1 = technology controller enable -- p2200[0] = r2093.8
9 1 = enable DC braking -- p1230[0] = r2093.9
10 Not used
11 1 = Enable droop Enable or inhibit speed control‐ p1492[0] = r2093.11
ler droop.
12 1 = torque control active Changes over the control mode p1501[0] = r2093.12
0 = speed control active for vector control.
13 1 = no external fault -- p2106[0] = r2093.13
0 = external fault is active (F07860)
14 Not used
15 1 = CDS bit 1 Changes over between settings p0811[0] = r2093.15
for different operation interfaces
(command data sets).
1)
If you switch from telegram 350 to a different one, then the converter sets all interconnections p1020,
… to "0". Exception: p2106 = 1.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 233
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Status word 3 (ZSW3)

Bit Meaning Description Signal intercon‐

nection in the
converter
0 1 = DC braking active -- p2051[3] = r0053
1 1 = |n_act | > p1226 Absolute current speed > stationary
state detection
2 1 = |n_act | > p1080 Absolute actual speed > minimum
speed
3 1 = i_act ≧ p2170 Actual current ≥ current threshold
value
4 1 = |n_act | > p2155 Absolute actual speed > speed
threshold value 2
5 1 = |n_act | ≦ p2155 Absolute actual speed < speed
threshold value 2
6 1 = |n_act | ≧ r1119 Speed setpoint reached
7 1 = DC link voltage ≦ p2172 Actual DC link voltage ≦ threshold
value
8 1 = DC link voltage > p2172 Actual DC link voltage > threshold
value
9 1 = ramp-up or ramp-down completed Ramp-function generator is not ac‐
tive.
10 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller output ≦
the lower limit p2292
11 1 = technology controller output at Technology controller out‐
the upper limit put > p2291
12 Not used
13 Not used
14 Not used
15 Not used

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

234 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.6 NAMUR message word

Function description

Fault word according to the VIK-NAMUR definition (MELD_NAMUR)

Bit Significance P No.

0 1 = Control Unit signals a fault p2051[5] = r3113
1 1 = line fault: Phase failure or inadmissible voltage
2 1 = DC link overvoltage
3 1 = Power Module fault, e.g. overcurrent or overtemperature
4 1 = converter overtemperature
5 1 = ground fault/phase fault in the motor cable or in the motor
6 1 = motor overload
7 1 = communication error to the higher-level control system
8 1 = fault in a safety-relevant monitoring channel
10 1 = fault in the internal converter communication
11 1 = line fault
15 1 = other fault

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 235
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.7 Control and status word, encoder

Telegrams 3 and 4 allow the higher-level control system to directly access the encoder.
Direct access is necessary, if the higher-level control is responsible for the closed-loop
position control for the drive.
If you enable the "Basic positioner" position control in the converter, then telegrams 3 and 4
cannot be selected, and the converter handles the encoder control.

Control word encoder (G1_STW and G2_STW)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec‐

tion in the converter
Bit 7 = 0 Bit 7 = 1
0 Function 1 1 = search for reference 1 = request flying referencing Telegram 3:
cam 1 with a positive to the rising edge of refer‐ Encoder 1:
start direction ence cam 1 p0480[0] = r2050[4]
1 Function 2 1 = search for reference 1 = request flying referencing
cam 1 with a negative to the falling edge of refer‐
Telegram 4:
start direction ence cam 1
Encoder 1:
2 Function 3 1 = search for reference 1 = request flying referencing
p0480[0] = r2050[4]
cam 2 with a positive to the rising edge of refer‐
encoder 2:
start direction ence cam 2
p0480[1] = p2050[9]
3 Function 4 1 = search for reference 1 = request flying referencing
cam 2 with a negative to the falling edge of refer‐
start direction ence cam 2 Telegram 102:
4 Command bit 0 1 = activate the function requested using bit 0 … 3 Encoder 1:
p0480[0] = r2050[5]
5 Command bit 1 1 = read the value requested using bit 0 … 3
6 Command bit 2 Reserved
Telegram 103:
7 Mode 1 = flying referencing
0 = search for reference cams Encoder 1:
p0480[0] = r2050[5]
8 Reserved --- encoder 2:
… p0480[1] =
12 p2050[10]
13 Cyclic absolute 1 = request for the cyclic transfer of the position actual
value value in G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2
14 Parking 1 = request to park the encoder
15 Acknowledge 0 → 1 = acknowledge encoder fault

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

236 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Status word encoder (G1_ZSW and G2_ZSW)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal interconnec‐

tion in the converter
Bit 7 = 0 Bit 7 = 1
0 Function 1 1 = search for refer‐ 1 = flying referencing to the rising Telegram 3:
ence cam 1 is active edge of reference cam 1 is active Encoder 1:
1 Function 2 1 = search for refer‐ 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[4] = r0481[0]
ence cam 1 is active edge of reference cam 1 is active
2 Function 3 1 = search for refer‐ 1 = flying referencing to the rising Telegram 4:
ence cam 2 is active edge of reference cam 2 is active
Encoder 1:
3 Function 4 1 = search for refer‐ 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[4] = r0481[0]
ence cam 2 is active edge of reference cam 2 is active encoder 2:
4 Status value 1 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the rising p2051[9] = r0481[1]
value is at reference edge of reference cam 1 has been
cam 1 completed
Telegram 102:
5 Status value 2 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the falling Encoder 1:
value is at reference edge of reference cam 1 has been p2051[5] = r0481[0]
cam 1 completed
6 Status value 3 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the rising
value is at reference edge of reference cam 2 has been Telegram 103:
cam 2 completed Encoder 1:
7 Status value 4 1 = position actual 1 = flying referencing to the falling p2051[5] = r0481[0]
value is at reference edge of reference cam 2 has been encoder 2:
cam 2 completed p2051[10] =
r0481[0]
8 Reference 1 = reference cam 1 supplies a high signal
cam 1 0 = reference cam 1 supplies a low signal
9 Reference 1 = reference cam 2 supplies a high signal
cam 2 0 = reference cam 2 supplies a low signal
10 Reserved ---
11 Acknowledge 1 = acknowledge encoder fault is active
12 Reserved ---
13 Cyclic absolute 1 = the position actual value is in G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2.
value
14 Parking 1 = the encoder is parked
15 Fault 1 = the encoder indicates its actual fault in r0483

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 237
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.8 Position actual value of the encoder

G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1

In the factory setting, the converter transfers the encoder position actual value with a fine
resolution of 11 bits to the higher-level control system.

1XPEHURIHQFRGHUSXOVHV )LQHUHVROXWLRQ

%LW   
Figure 8-13 G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1

The transferred encoder signal has the following properties:

• After the converter power supply has been switched on, the encoder signal = 0.
• The higher-level control must be able to handle a counter overflow of the encoder signal.

G1_XIST2 and G2_XIST2

In G1_XIST2 or G2_XIST2, the converter transfers different values to the higher-level control
system:

(QFRGHU 1R
SDUNHG"

<HV (QFRGHU 1R
IDXOW"

<HV 5HIHUHQ 1R
FLQJ"

<HV

*[B;,67  *[B;,67 IDXOW *[B;,67  *[B;,67 

FRGH UHTXHVWHGYDOXH SRVLWLRQDFWXDO
YDOXH

Encoder x parked Gx_ZSW.14 = 1

Encoder fault x Gx_ZSW.15 = 1
Referencing encoder x Gx_ZSW.4 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.5 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.6 = 1 or Gx_ZSW.7 = 1
Figure 8-14 G1_XIST2 and G2_XIST2

The converter transfers the position values in the same format (encoder pulse number and
fine resolution) the same as G1_XIST1 and G2_XIST1.

Table 8-22 Fault code

No. Explanation Possible cause

1 Encoder fault One or more encoder faults.
Observe the converter message.
2 Zero-mark monitoring ---

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

238 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

No. Explanation Possible cause

3 Encoder parking canceled Parking was already requested.
4 Search for reference canceled • Encoder has no zero mark (reference mark).
• Reference mark 2, 3 or 4 was requested.
• Switchover to "Flying measurement" was reques‐
ted during search for reference.
• Command "Read value x" requested during search
for reference mark.
• Inconsistent position measured value with dis‐
tance-coded reference marks.
5 Retrieve reference value canceled • More than four values were requested.
• No value requested.
• Requested value is not available.
6 Flying referencing canceled • Reference cam has not been configured
• During "Flying referencing" a changeover was
made to search for reference.
• During "Flying referencing" a request was issued
"Read value x".
7 Retrieve measured value canceled • More than one value was requested.
• No value requested.
• Requested value is not available.
• Encoder is parked.
8 Position actual value transfer canceled • No absolute encoder available.
• Alarm bit in the absolute value protocol set.
3841 Encoder does not support the function ---

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 239
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.9 Parameter channel

Overview
The parameter channel allows parameter values to be cyclically read and written to.

3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.( VWZRUG ,1' QGZRUG 3:( UGDQGWKZRUGV
      
$. 6 318 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3:( 3:(
3
0

Structure of the parameter channel:

• PKE (1st word)
– Type of task (read or write).
– Bit 11 is reserved and is always assigned 0.
– Parameter number
• IND (2nd word)
– Parameter index
• PWE (3rd and 4th word)
– Parameter value

Function description

AK: Request and response ID

Table 8-23 Request identifiers, control → converter

AK Description Response identifier

positive nega‐
tive
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2)
Change parameter value (field, word) 1)
4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

240 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Table 8-24 Response identifiers, converter → control

AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number to
the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 8-25 Error numbers for response identifier 7

No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tempo‐
rary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal
for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the converter
prevents a parameter change)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 241
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

No. Description
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter pre‐
vents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within
the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index

0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector

Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 8-26 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

242 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (r7841[2])
To obtain the value of indexed parameter r7841, you must fill the parameter channel with
the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
       
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH

Figure 8-15 Parameter channel for read request from r7841[2]

Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)

The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the
automatic restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must
be set to 26:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
      
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW
 
Figure 8-16 A parameter channel to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must fill the parameter channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 243
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)

• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, Bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
• PWE2, Bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (Index of Parameter (DI 2 = 2))
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
       
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYH2EMHFW ,QGH[
 
Figure 8-17 Parameter channel to assign digital input 2 with ON/OFF1

Function description

AK: Request and response ID

Table 8-27 Request identifiers, control → converter

AK Description Response identifier

positive nega‐
tive
0 No request 0 7/8
1 Request parameter value 1/2 7/8
2 Change parameter value (word) 1 7/8
3 Change parameter value (double word) 2 7/8
4 Request descriptive element 1) 3 7/8
6 2) Request parameter value (field) 1) 4/5 7/8
7 2)
Change parameter value (field, word) 1)
4 7/8
8 2) Change parameter value (field, double word) 1) 5 7/8
9 Request number of field elements 6 7/8
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The following request IDs are identical: 1 ≡ 6, 2 ≡ 7 and 3 ≡ 8.
We recommend that you use identifiers 6, 7 and 8.

Table 8-28 Response identifiers, converter → control

AK Description
0 No response
1 Transfer parameter value (word)
2 Transfer parameter value (double word)
3 Transfer descriptive element 1)
4 Transfer parameter value (field, word) 2)
5 Transfer parameter value (field, double word) 2)
6 Transfer number of field elements

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

244 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

AK Description
7 Converter cannot process the request.
In the most significant word of the parameter channel, the converter sends an error number to
the control, refer to the following table.
8 No master controller status / no authorization to change parameters of the parameter channel
interface
1)
The required element of the parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).
2)
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word).

Table 8-29 Error numbers for response identifier 7

No. Description
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be
changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a subindex that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the
parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without
permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element error
value that cannot be changed)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control, see also p0927.)
0C hex Keyword missing
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for tempo‐
rary reasons that are not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal
for other permanent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
65 hex Parameter number is currently deactivated (depending on the mode of the converter)
66 hex Channel width is insufficient (communication channel is too small for response)
68 hex Illegal parameter value (parameter can only assume certain values)
6A hex Request not included / task is not supported (the valid request identifications can be found
in table "Request identifications controller → converter")
6B hex No change access for a controller that is enabled. (The operating state of the conerter
prevents a parameter change)
86 hex Write access only for commissioning (p0010 = 15) (operating state of the converter pre‐
vents a parameter change)
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within
the "absolute" limits, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for
the converter power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 245
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index

0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
29000 … 29999 0000 … 1999 70 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector

Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 8-30 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor

Examples

Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (r7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter r7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (page index): = 2 (index of parameter)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

246 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

• IND, bit 0 … 7 (subindex): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)

• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
       
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 3DJHLQGH[ 6XELQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH

Figure 8-18 Telegram for a read request from r7841[2]

PNU (parameter number) and page index

Parameter number PNU Page index

0000 … 1999 0000 … 1999 0 hex
2000 … 3999 0000 … 1999 80 hex
6000 … 7999 0000 … 1999 90 hex
8000 … 9999 0000 … 1999 20 hex
10000 … 11999 0000 … 1999 A0 hex
20000 … 21999 0000 … 1999 50 hex
30000 … 31999 0000 … 1999 F0 hex
60000 … 61999 0000 … 1999 74 hex

Subindex
For indexed parameters, the parameter index is located in subindex as hexadecimal value.

PWE: Parameter value or connector

Parameter values or connectors can be located in the PWE.

Table 8-31 Parameter value or connector

PWE 1 PWE 2
Parameter value Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 8 Bit 7 … 0
0 0 8-bit value
0 16-bit value
32-bit value
Connector Bit 15 … 0 Bit 15 … 10 Bit 9 … 0
Number of the connector 3F hex The index or bit field
number of the connec‐
tor

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 247
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.10 Examples
Read request: Read out serial number of the Power Module (p7841[2])
To obtain the value of the indexed parameter p7841, you must fill the telegram of the
parameter channel with the following data:
• PKE, Bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 6 (request parameter value (field))
• PKE, Bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 1841 (parameter number without offset)
Parameter number = PNU + offset (page index)
(7841 = 1841 + 6000)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 2 (index of parameter)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 90 hex (offset 6000 corresponds to 90 hex)
• Because you want to read the parameter value, words 3 and 4 in the parameter channel for
requesting the parameter value are irrelevant. They should be assigned a value of 0, for
example.
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
       
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYHREMHFW ,QGH[

Figure 8-19 Telegram for a read request from p7841[2]

Write request: Change restart mode (p1210)

The restart mode is inhibited in the factory setting (p1210 = 0). In order to activate the
automatic restart with "acknowledge all faults and restart for an ON command", p1210 must
be set to 26:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 4BA hex (1210 = 4BA hex, no offset, as 1210 < 1999)
• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 0 hex (parameter is not indexed)
• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, bit 0 … 15: = 0 hex
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 15: = 1A hex (26 = 1A hex)
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
      
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH ELW
 
Figure 8-20 Telegram, to activate the automatic restart with p1210 = 26

Write request: Assign digital input 2 with the function ON/OFF1 (p0840[1] = 722.2)
In order to link digital input 2 with ON/OFF1, you must assign parameter p0840[1] (source,
ON/OFF1) the value 722.2 (DI 2). To do this, you must populate the telegram of the
parameter channel as follows:
• PKE, bit 12 … 15 (AK): = 7 hex (change parameter value (field, word))
• PKE, bit 0 … 10 (PNU): = 348 hex (840 = 348 hex, no offset, as 840 < 1999)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

248 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

• IND, bit 8 … 15 (subindex): = 1 hex (CDS1 = Index 1)

• IND, bit 0 … 7 (page index): = 0 hex (offset 0 corresponds to 0 hex)
• PWE1, Bit 0 … 15: = 2D2 hex (722 = 2D2 hex)
• PWE2, Bit 10 … 15: = 3F hex (drive object - for SINAMICS G120, always 63 = 3f hex)
• PWE2, Bit 0 … 9: = 2 hex (Index of Parameter (DI 2 = 2))
3DUDPHWHUFKDQQHO
3.(VWZRUG ,1'QGZRUG 3:(KLJKUGZRUG 3:(ORZWKZRUG
       
$. 3DUDPHWHUQXPEHU 6XELQGH[ 3DJHLQGH[ 3DUDPHWHUYDOXH 'ULYH2EMHFW ,QGH[
 
Figure 8-21 Telegram, to assign DI 2 with ON/OFF1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 249
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.11 Expanding or freely interconnecting telegrams

Overview
When you have selected a telegram, the converter interconnects the corresponding signals with
the fieldbus interface. Generally, these interconnections are locked so that they cannot be
changed. However, with the appropriate setting in the converter, the telegram can be extended
or even freely interconnected.

Function description

Interconnection of send data and receive data

S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R
S>@ U>@ 

S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG

31R
S>@ U>@ 

S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG

31R
S>@ U>@
S>@ U>@ 31R 3='VHQGZRUG
31R

S>@ U>@
31R
S>@ U>@
31R 3='VHQGZRUG
 6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUGRXEOHZRUG  6HQGZRUGSDUDPHWHUQXPEHUZRUG
 6HQGZRUGYDOXHGRXEOHZRUG  6HQGZRUGYDOXHZRUG
Figure 8-22 Interconnection of the send data

In the converter, the send data are available in the "Word" format (p2051) - and in the
"Double word" format (p2061). If you set a specific telegram, or you change the telegram,
the converter automatically interconnects parameters p2051 and p2061 with the appropriate
signals.

U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@  U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@  U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@  U
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ U
U>@

U>@
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@

9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG 
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG 
9DOXHUHFHLYHZRUG
GRXEOHZRUG ZRUG ELWE\ELW
Figure 8-23 Interconnection of the receive data

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

250 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

The converter saves the receive data as follows:

• "Word" format in r2050
• "Double word" format in r2060
• Bit-by-bit in r2090 … r2093

Extending a telegram: Procedure

1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set parameter p2079 to the value of the corresponding telegram.
3. Interconnect additional send words and receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have extended a telegram.
❒

Freely interconnecting signals in the telegram: Procedure

1. Set p0922 = 999.
2. Set p2079 = 999.
3. Interconnect additional send words and receive words with signals of your choice via
parameters r2050 and p2051.
You have freely interconnected a telegram.
❒

Example
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words. You want to test the
extension by initiating that the converter returns each receive word back to the higher-level
control system.

Procedure
1. p0922 = 999
2. p2079 = 1
3. p2051[2] = r2050[2]
4. …
5. p2051[5] = r2050[5]
6. Test the telegram length for received and sent words:
– r2067[0] = 6
– r2067[1] = 6
You wish to extend telegram 1 to 6 send words and 6 receive words.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 251
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

p0922 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection 1
r2050[0…11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -
p2051[0…16] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send word 0 or dependent on
the converter
r2053[0…16] PROFIdrive diagnostics send PZD word -
r2060[0…10] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive double word -
p2061[0…15] CI: PROFIdrive PZD send double word 0
r2063[0…15] PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word -
r2067 PZD maximum interconnected -
[0] Receive (r2050, r2060)
[1] Send (p2051, p2061)
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended 1
p2080[0…15] BI: Binector-connector converter, status word 1 [0] 899
[1] 899.1
[2] 899.2
[3] 2139.3
[4] 899.4
[5] 899.5
[6] 899.6
[7] 2139.7
[8] 2197.7
[9] 899.9
[10] 2199.1
[11] 1407.7
[12] 0
[13] 2135.14
[14] 2197.3
[15] 2135.15
r2090.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive receive PZD1 bit by bit -
r2091.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial -
r2092.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD3 receive bit-serial -
r2093.0…15 BO: PROFIdrive PZD4 receive bit-serial -

Parameter

Parameter Description
p0922 PROFIdrive telegram selection
999: Free telegram (message frame) configuration

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

252 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

Parameter Description
p2079 PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended
The following values apply if you have still not enabled the "Basic positioner" function in
the converter:
1: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2
2: Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4
3: Standard telegram 3, PZD-5/9
4: Standard telegram 4, PZD-6/14
20: Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6
350: SIEMENS telegram 350, PZD-4/4
352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6
353: SIEMENS telegram 353, PZD-2/2, PKW-4/4
354: SIEMENS telegram 354, PZD-6/6, PKW-4/4
999: Free telegram configuration
The following values apply if you have enabled the "Basic positioner" function in the
converter:
7: Standard telegram 7, PZD-2/2
9: Standard telegram 9, PZD-10/5
110: SIEMENS telegram 110, PZD-12/7
111: SIEMENS telegram 111, PZD-12/12
999: Free telegram configuration
r2050[0…11] PROFIdrive PZD receive word
Received PZD (setpoints) in the word format
p2051[0… PROFIdrive PZD send word
16] Sent PZD (actual values) in the word format

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 253
Advanced commissioning
8.6 Drive control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET

8.6.12 Device-to-device communication

Overview
"Direct data exchange" is sometimes called "device-to-device communication" or "data exchange
broadcast". With direct data exchange, devices exchange data without any direct involvement
of the master.

Additional information
Further information about the "Direct data exchange" function is provided in the Fieldbus
function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

8.6.13 Acyclically reading and writing converter parameters

Overview
The converter supports the writing and reading of parameters via acyclic communication:
• For PROFIBUS: Up to 240 bytes per write or read request via data set 47
• For PROFINET: Write or read requests via B02E hex and B02F hex

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Example

Application example, "Read and write to parameters"

Further information is provided on the Internet:
Application examples (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/29157692)

Further information
Further information about acyclic communication is provided in the Fieldbus function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

254 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.7 Drive control via Modbus RTU

8.7 Drive control via Modbus RTU

Overview
Modbus RTU is used to transfer cyclic process data and acyclic parameter data between
precisely one master and up to 247 slaves. The converter is always the slave, and sends data
when requested to do so by the master. Slave-to-slave communication is not possible.

Function description

Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 of p0840[0] =
the ramp-function generator. The converter switches r2090.0
off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in addi‐
tion, bit 3 = 1, the converter switches on the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp- p0848[0] =
down time p1135 down to standstill. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-function gen‐ p1140[0] =
erator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops at the p1141[0] =
actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows the
setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp-down p1142[0] =
time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120 to the
setpoint.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still active, p2103[0] =
faults the converter switches to the "switching on inhibited" r2090.7
state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the fieldbus. p0854[0] =
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the process data r2090.10
from the fieldbus.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 255
Advanced commissioning
8.7 Drive control via Modbus RTU

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti‐ p1035[0] =
ometer. r2090.13
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized potentiom‐ p1036[0] =
eter. r2090.14
15 Reserved

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal intercon‐

nection in the
converter
0 1 = Ready for switching on Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; pulses locked. p2080[0] =
r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is active. With the p2080[1] =
command "Enable operation" (STW1.3), the converter switches on r0899.1
the motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault using STW1.7. p2080[3] =
r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibited ac‐ It is only possible to switch on the motor after an OFF1 followed by p2080[6] =
tive ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledgement is necessary. p2080[7] =
r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation within the Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tolerance range. p2080[8] =
tolerance range r2197.7
9 1 = Master control requested The automation system is requested to accept the converter con‐ p2080[9] =
trol. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding maximum p2080[10] =
reached or exceeded speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not reached Comparison value for current or torque has been fallen below. p2080[11] =
r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor overtemper‐ -- p2080[13] =
ature r2135.14

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

256 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.7 Drive control via Modbus RTU

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal intercon‐

nection in the
converter
14 1 = Motor rotates clockwise Internal converter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
0 = Motor rotates counter- Internal converter actual value < 0 r2197.3
clockwise
15 0 = Alarm, converter thermal p2080[15] =
overload r2135.15
1)
If you change over from another telegram to telegram 20, then the assignment of the previous telegram is kept.

Parameter

Table 8-32 Settings for Modbus RTU

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2020 Fieldbus interface baud rate 8
p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0
p2024 Fieldbus interface times [0] 1000 ms
[1] 0 ms
[2] 0 ms
r2029 Fieldbus interface error statistics -
p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection 0
p2031 Fieldbus interface Modbus parity 2
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 100 ms

Further information
Further informationAdditional information about Modbus RTU is provided in the "Fieldbus"
function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 257
Advanced commissioning
8.8 Drive control via USS

8.8 Drive control via USS

Overview
USS is used to transfer cyclic process data and acyclic parameter data between precisely
one master and up to 31 devices. The converter is always the device, and sends data when
requested to do so by the master. Device-to-device communication is not possible.

Function description

Control word 1 (STW1)

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
0 0 = OFF1 The motor brakes with the ramp-down time p1121 of p0840[0] =
the ramp-function generator. The converter switches r2090.0
off the motor at standstill.
0 → 1 = ON The converter goes into the "ready" state. If, in addi‐
tion, bit 3 = 1, the converter switches on the motor.
1 0 = OFF2 Switch off the motor immediately, the motor then p0844[0] =
coasts down to a standstill. r2090.1
1 = No OFF2 The motor can be switched on (ON command).
2 0 = Quick stop (OFF3) Quick stop: The motor brakes with the OFF3 ramp- p0848[0] =
down time p1135 down to standstill. r2090.2
1 = No quick stop (OFF3) The motor can be switched on (ON command).
3 0 = Inhibit operation Immediately switch-off motor (cancel pulses). p0852[0] =
1 = Enable operation Switch-on motor (pulses can be enabled). r2090.3
4 0 = Disable RFG The converter immediately sets its ramp-function gen‐ p1140[0] =
erator output to 0. r2090.4
1 = Do not disable RFG The ramp-function generator can be enabled.
5 0 = Stop RFG The output of the ramp-function generator stops at the p1141[0] =
actual value. r2090.5
1 = Enable RFG The output of the ramp-function generator follows the
setpoint.
6 0 = Inhibit setpoint The converter brakes the motor with the ramp-down p1142[0] =
time p1121 of the ramp-function generator. r2090.6
1 = Enable setpoint Motor accelerates with the ramp-up time p1120 to the
setpoint.
7 0 → 1 = Acknowledge Acknowledge fault. If the ON command is still active, p2103[0] =
faults the converter switches to the "switching on inhibited" r2090.7
state.
8, 9 Reserved
10 0 = No control via PLC Converter ignores the process data from the fieldbus. p0854[0] =
1 = Control via PLC Control via fieldbus, converter accepts the process data r2090.10
from the fieldbus.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

258 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.8 Drive control via USS

Bit Meaning Explanation Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
11 1 = Direction reversal Invert setpoint in the converter. p1113[0] =
r2090.11
12 Reserved
13 1 = MOP up Increase the setpoint saved in the motorized potenti‐ p1035[0] =
ometer. r2090.13
14 1 = MOP down Reduce the setpoint saved in the motorized potentiom‐ p1036[0] =
eter. r2090.14
15 Reserved

Status word 1 (ZSW1)

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
0 1 = Ready for switching Power supply switched on; electronics initialized; pul‐ p2080[0] =
on ses locked. r0899.0
1 1 = Ready Motor is switched on (ON/OFF1 = 1), no fault is active. p2080[1] =
With the command "Enable operation" (STW1.3), the r0899.1
converter switches on the motor.
2 1 = Operation enabled Motor follows setpoint. See control word 1, bit 3. p2080[2] =
r0899.2
3 1 = Fault active The converter has a fault. Acknowledge fault using p2080[3] =
STW1.7. r2139.3
4 1 = OFF2 inactive Coast down to standstill is not active. p2080[4] =
r0899.4
5 1 = OFF3 inactive Quick stop is not active. p2080[5] =
r0899.5
6 1 = Switching on inhibi‐ It is only possible to switch on the motor after an OFF1 p2080[6] =
ted active followed by ON. r0899.6
7 1 = Alarm active Motor remains switched on; no acknowledgement is p2080[7] =
necessary. r2139.7
8 1 = Speed deviation with‐ Setpoint / actual value deviation within the tolerance p2080[8] =
in the tolerance range range. r2197.7
9 1 = Master control re‐ The automation system is requested to accept the con‐ p2080[9] =
quested verter control. r0899.9
10 1 = Comparison speed Speed is greater than or equal to the corresponding p2080[10] =
reached or exceeded maximum speed. r2199.1
11 1 = Torque limit not Comparison value for current or torque has been fallen p2080[11] =
reached below. r0056.13 /
r1407.7
12 Reserved p2080[12] =
r0899.12
13 0 = Alarm, motor over‐ -- p2080[13] =
temperature r2135.14

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 259
Advanced commissioning
8.8 Drive control via USS

Bit Meaning Remarks Signal inter‐

connection
in the con‐
verter
14 1 = Motor rotates clock‐ Internal converter actual value > 0 p2080[14] =
wise r2197.3
0 = Motor rotates coun‐ Internal converter actual value < 0
ter-clockwise
15 0 = Alarm, converter p2080[15] =
thermal overload r2135.15

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2020 Fieldbus interface baud rate 8
p2021 Fieldbus interface address 0
p2022 Fieldbus interface USS PZD number 2
p2023 Fieldbus interface USS PKW number 127
p2024 Fieldbus interface times [0] 1000 ms
[1] 0 ms
[2] 0 ms
r2029 Fieldbus interface error statistics -
p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection 0
p2031 Fieldbus interface Modbus parity 2
p2040 Fieldbus interface monitoring time 100 ms

Further information
Additional information about USS is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

260 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.9 Drive control via Ethernet/IP

8.9 Drive control via Ethernet/IP

Overview
EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based fieldbus. EtherNet/IP is used to transfer cyclic process data as
well as acyclic parameter data.

Function description

Parameter Description
p2030 = 10 Fieldbus interface protocol selection: Ethernet/IP
p8924 PN DHCP mode 0: DHCP off
2: DHCP on, identification based on MAC address
3: DHCP on, identification based on Name of Station
p8925 PN interfaces configuration 0: No function
1: Reserved
2: Save the configuration and activate
3: Delete configuration
p8980 Ethernet/IP profile 0: SINAMICS
A change only becomes active after the converter power 1: ODVA AC/DC
supply is switched off and switched on again.
p8982 Ethernet/IP ODVA speed scaling
A change only becomes active after the converter power supply is switched off and
switched on again.
123: 32 127: 2 131: 0.125
124: 16 128: 1 132: 0.0625
125: 8 129: 0.5 133: 0.03125
126: 4 130: 0.25

Parameter

Settings for Ethernet/IP

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2030 Fieldbus interface protocol selection 0
p8920 PN Name of Station -
p8921[0…3] PN IP Address 0
p8922[0…3] PN Default Gateway 0
p8923[0…3] PN Subnet Mask 0
p8924 PN DHCP mode 0
p8925 Activate PN interface configuration 0
p8980 EtherNet/IP profile 0
p8982 EtherNet/IP ODVA speed scaling 128

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 261
Advanced commissioning
8.9 Drive control via Ethernet/IP

Further information
Additional information about USS is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

262 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.10 Drive control via CANopen

8.10 Drive control via CANopen

The most important settings for CANopen

Parame‐ Explanation
ter
p8620 CAN Node ID (Factory setting: 126)
Valid addresses: 1 … 247.
The parameter is only active if address 0 is set at the Control Unit address switch.
A change only becomes effective after the converter power supply has been switched off and
switched on again.
p8622 CAN Bit rate 0: 1 Mbit/s 3: 250 kbit/s 6: 20 kbit/s
(Factory setting: 6) 1: 800 kbit/s 4: 125 kbit/s 7: 10 kbit/s
2: 500 kbit/s 5: 50 kbit/s
p8700 … CAN Receive PDO n [0] = COB-ID of the PDO
p8707 (n = 1 … 8) [1] = Transmission Type of the PDO
p8710 … CAN Receive Mapping for [0] = Mapped object 1 … [3] = Mapped object 4
p8717 RPDO n (n = 1 … 8)
p8720 … CAN Transmit PDO n (n = 1 [0] = COB-ID of the PDO
p8727 … 8) [1] = Transmission Type of the PDO
[2] = Inhibit Time (in 100 μs)
[3] = reserved
[4] = Event Timer (in ms)
p8730 … CAN Transmit Mapping [0] = Mapped object 1 … [3] = Mapped object 4
p8737 for TPDO n (n = 1 … 8)
p8744 CAN PDO Mapping Config‐ 1: Predefined connection set
uration 2: Free PDO mapping
(Factory setting: 2)
r8784 CAN status word .00 Ready to switch on .08 Can be freely interconnected
.01 Ready (p8785)
.02 Operation enabled .09 Control requested
.03 Fault active .10 Target reached
.04 No coast down active .11 Torque limit reached
.05 No fast stop active .12 Velocity equal to zero
.06 Switching on inhibited active .14 Can be freely interconnected
.07 Alarm active (p8786)
.15 Can be freely interconnected
(p8787)
r8795 CAN control word .00 ON/OFF1 .06 Enable speed setpoint
.01 Do not activate coast down .07 Acknowledge fault
.02 Do not activate quick stop .08 Stop
.03 Enable operation .11 Can be freely interconnected
.04 Enable ramp-function genera‐ …
tor .15 Can be freely interconnected
.05 Freeze ramp-function genera‐
tor continuation

Further information
Further information about CANopen is provided in the "Fieldbus" function manual.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 263
Advanced commissioning
8.10 Drive control via CANopen

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

264 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.11 Jogging

8.11 Jogging

Overview
The "Jog" function is typically used to temporarily move a motor using local control
commands.

Requirement
The OFF1 command must be active. With an active ON command, the converter ignores the
commands "Jogging 1" and "Jogging 2".

Function description

5HDG\WRVZLWFKRQ

-RJJLQJ QRMRJJLQJ

2SHUDWLRQ

Commands "Jog 1" or "Jog 2" switch the motor on and off.
The commands are only active when the converter is in the "Ready for switching on" state.

-RJJLQJ
W
-RJJLQJ
W
0RWRUVSHHG
0D[LPXPVSHHG
S
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
S S W
6HWSRLQWMRJJLQJ
S
Figure 8-24 Behavior of the motor when "jogging"

After switching on, the motor accelerates to the setpoint, jog 1 or setpoint, jog 2. The two
different setpoints can, for example, be assigned to motor clockwise and counter-clockwise
rotation.
When jogging, the same ramp-function generator is active as for the ON/OFF1 command.

Example

Parameter Description
p1055 = 722.0 Jogging bit 0: Select jogging 1 via digital input 0
p1056 = 722.1 Jogging bit 1: Select jogging 2 via digital input 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 265
Advanced commissioning
8.11 Jogging

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

p1055[C] BI: Jogging bit 0 Depending on the
converter
p1056[C] BI: Jogging bit 1 Depending on the
converter
p1058[D] Jogging 1 speed setpoint 150 rpm
p1059[D] Jogging 2 speed setpoint -150 rpm
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1110[C] BI: Inhibit negative direction Depending on the
converter
p1111[C] BI: Inhibit positive direction 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time Depending on the
converter
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time Depending on the
converter

Parameter

Table 8-33 Jog settings

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1055[C] BI: Jogging bit 0 0
p1056[C] BI: Jogging bit 1 0
p1058[D] Jogging 1 speed setpoint 150 rpm
p1059[D] Jogging 2 speed setpoint -150 rpm
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1110[C] BI: Inhibit negative direction 0
p1111[C] BI: Inhibit positive direction 0
p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion 0
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time 10 s
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time 10 s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

266 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.12 Limit position control

8.12 Limit position control

Overview

0LQXVOLPLWVZLWFK 3OXVOLPLWVZLWFK

0LQXVOLPLWSRVLWLRQ 3OXVOLPLWSRVLWLRQ

An end position is a position in the direction of motion of a machine component where

motion stops as a result of the inherent mechanical design. A limit switch is a sensor that
signals that the end position has been reached.
The end position control of the converter controls the motor depending on 2 limit switch
signals:
• When an end position is reached, the converter stops the motor.
• At end position, the converter prevents the motor from moving the machine component
further in the direction of this end position.

Function description

6WDUWOLPLWVZLWFK
S
W
3OXVOLPLWVZLWFK
S
W
0LQXVOLPLWVZLWFK
S

6SHHGVHWSRLQWDIWHUILOWHU W
U

/LPLWVZLWFK212))
U
W
/LPLWVZLWFK2))
U
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH W
U

3OXVOLPLWVZLWFKDFWXDWHG
U
0LQXVOLPLWVZLWFKDFWXDWHG W
U
/LPLWVZLWFKD[LVVWDWLRQDU\ W
VWDQGVWLOO
U
W
    
Figure 8-25 End position control of the converter

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 267
Advanced commissioning
8.12 Limit position control

Table 8-34 Explanation

① The higher-level control system issues a positive setpoint.

The motor moves the machine component in the direction of the positive end position.
② The positive end position has been reached. The motor stops with the OFF3 ramp-down time.
③ The higher-level control system issues a negative setpoint.
With a signal change 0 → 1 at p3340, the motor moves the machine component in the direction of
"Limit switch minus".
④ The negative end position has been reached. The motor stops with the OFF3 ramp-down time.
⑤ The higher-level control system issues a positive setpoint.
With a signal change 0 → 1 at p3340, the motor moves the machine component in the direction of
"Limit switch plus".

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p3340[C] BI: Start limit switch 0
p3342[C] BI: Plus limit switch 1
p3343[C] BI: Minus limit switch 1
r3344 CO/BO: Limit switch status word -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

268 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.13 Switching over the drive control (command data set)

8.13 Switching over the drive control (command data set)

Overview
Several applications require the option of switching over the master control to operate the
converter.

&'6

&'6

Figure 8-26 Converter control either via fieldbus or via terminal strip

Function description

Command data set (CDS)

You can set the converter control in various ways and toggle between the settings.
The settings in the converter, which are assigned to a specific master control, are called the
command data set.
You select the command data set using parameters p0810 and p0811. To do this, you must
interconnect parameters p0810 and p0811 with control commands of your choice, e.g. a
digital input.

Changing the number of command data sets

Up to 4 command data sets are possible.
1. Set p0010 = 15.
2. The number of command data sets is configured with p0170.
3. Set p0010 = 0.
You have changed the number of command data sets.
❒

Copying command data sets

1. Set p0809[0] to the number of the command data set whose settings you wish to copy
(source).
2. Set p0809[1] to the number of the command data set into which you wish to copy the
settings.
3. Set p0809[2] = 1
4. The converter sets p0809[2] = 0.
You have copied the settings of a command data set into another command data set.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 269
Advanced commissioning
8.13 Switching over the drive control (command data set)

Example

&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
'DWDIURP  3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@

WKH  S>@
ILHOGEXV  212))
 U

 S>@
 $FNQRZOHGJH
3='  U
3='  S>@
3='  &RQWUROE\
3='  U
3=' 
3/&
3='  S>@ 023ORZHU &'6
3=' 
3='  U

S &RQWUROOLQJ
6HOHFWFRPPDQGGDWDVHW
 ', U LQYHUWHU
&'6
IXQFWLRQV
&RPPDQGGDWDVHW
3DUDPHWHULQGH[>@
S>@
-RJ
 ', U
S>@
-RJ
 ', U
S>@
$FNQRZOHGJH
 ', U
&'6

The converter evaluates its control commands depending on digital input DI 3:

• Via a fieldbus from a central control system
• Via the converter digital inputs at the installation.

Note
The converter requires approx. 4 ms to switch over the command data set.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
r0050 CO/BO: Command data set CDS effective -
p0170 Number of command data sets (CDS) 2
p0809[0 … 2] Copy command data set CDS 0
p0810 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 0 Dependent on the
converter
p0811 BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

270 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.14 Motor holding brake

8.14 Motor holding brake

Overview
The motor holding brake holds the motor in position when it is switched off.
When the "Motor holding brake" function is correctly set, the motor remains switched on as
long as the motor holding brake is open. The converter only switches the motor off when the
motor holding brake is closed.

Function description

6ZLWFKRQPRWRU
21
2))RU2))
W
0RWRULVPDJQHWL]HG
U 
W
2SHQEUDNH S
U 

S S W
2SHUDWLRQHQDEOHG
U 
W
6SHHGVHWSRLQW U

S
W
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH U S

S
W
S
%UDNHLVRSHQ
0 0
W
Figure 8-27 Motor holding brake function

After the ON command:

1. The converter switches on the motor with the ON command.
2. At the end of the "motor excitation build-up time" (p0346), the converter issues the
command to open the brake.
3. The converter keeps the motor at a standstill until the "motor holding brake opening time"
p1216 has ended.
The motor holding brake must be opened within time p1216.
4. The converter accelerates the motor to the speed setpoint.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 271
Advanced commissioning
8.14 Motor holding brake

After the OFF1 or OFF3 command:

1. The converter brakes the motor down to a standstill using the OFF1 or OFF3 command.
2. When braking, the converter compares the speed setpoint and the actual speed with the
"standstill detection speed threshold" p1226:
– Speed setpoint < p1226: The "standstill detection monitoring time" p1227 starts
– Current speed < p1226: The "pulse cancellation deceleration time" p1228 starts
3. When the first of the two times (p1227 or p1228) has elapsed, the converter issues the
command to close the brake.
4. After the "motor holding brake closing time" p1217, the converter switches off the motor.
The motor holding brake must close within the time p1217.

After the OFF2 command

6ZLWFKRQPRWRU
21
2))
W
0RWRULVPDJQHWL]HG
U 
W
2SHQEUDNH S
U 
W
2SHUDWLRQHQDEOHG S
U 

6SHHGVHWSRLQW U W

W
%UDNHLVRSHQ
0 0
W
Figure 8-28 Controlling the motor holding brake after OFF2

After the OFF2 command, the converter issues the signal to immediately close the motor
holding brake, irrespective of the motor speed.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

272 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.14 Motor holding brake

Commissioning a motor holding brake

WARNING
Load can fall if the "Motor holding brake" function is incorrectly set
For applications with a suspended load, such as cranes and elevators, there is a danger to life
if the "Motor holding brake" function is not completely set or is incorrectly set.
• When commissioning the "Motor holding brake" function, secure any suspended loads, e.g.
by applying the following measures:
– Lower the load down to the floor.
– Secure the dangerous area so that nobody can inadvertently enter it.
• Set the "Motor holding brake" function according to the following description.
• After commissioning, check that the motor holding brake and the motor control function
reliably.
• For applications involving suspended loads, we recommend that you use vector control
with an encoder.

Requirement
The motor holding brake is connected to the converter.

Procedure
1. Set p1215 = 1.
The "Motor holding brake" function is enabled.
2. Check the magnetizing time p0346.
The magnetizing time must be greater than zero. The converter assigns the magnetizing time
when it is being commissioned.
3. Find out the mechanical opening and closing times from the technical data of the motor
holding brake.
– Depending on the brake size, brake opening times lie between 25 ms and 500 ms.
– Depending on the brake size, brake closing times lie between 15 ms and 300 ms.
4. Set the following parameters in the converter suitably for the mechanical opening and
closing times of the motor holding brake:
– p1216 ≥ mechanical opening time of the motor holding brake
– p1217 > mechanical closing time of the motor holding brake
5. Switch on the motor.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 273
Advanced commissioning
8.14 Motor holding brake

6. Check the acceleration behavior of the drive immediately after the motor has been switched
on:
– If the motor holding brake opens too late, the converter will accelerate the motor
suddenly against the closed motor holding brake.
Set p1216 larger.
– If the motor waits too long before accelerating after the motor holding brake has opened,
reduce p1216.
For applications involving a pulling load, e.g. lifting gear/crane, if p1216 is too long, then
the load can briefly sag/sink after the motor holding brake is opened. If you reduce p1216,
then the amount that the load sags/sinks is reduced.
7. If the load sags after switching on the motor, then you must increase the motor torque when
opening the motor holding brake. Depending on the control mode, you must set different
parameters:
– U/f control (p1300 = 0 to 3):
Increase p1310 in small steps.
Increase p1351 in small steps.
– Vector control (p1300 ≥ 20):
Increase p1475 in small steps.
8. Switch off the motor.
9. Check the behavior of the drive immediately after the motor has been switched off:
– If the motor holding brake closes too late, the load briefly sags before the motor holding
brake closes.
Set a larger value for p1217.
– If the motor waits too long before switching off after the motor holding brake has closed,
reduce p1217.
The "Motor holding brake" function has been commissioned.
❒

Parameter

Table 8-35 Setting the control logic of the motor holding brake

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0052.0…15 CO/BO: Status word 1 -
p1215 Motor holding brake configuration 0
p1216 Motor holding brake opening time 100 ms
p1217 Motor holding brake closing time 100 ms

Table 8-36 Advanced settings

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0346[M] Motor excitation build-up time 0s
p0855[C] BI: Unconditionally open holding brake 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

274 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.14 Motor holding brake

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0858[C] BI: Unconditionally close holding brake 0
p1226[D] Speed threshold for standstill detection 20 rpm
p1227 Standstill detection monitoring time 300 s
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time 0.01 s
p1351[D] CO: Motor holding brake start frequency 0
p1352[C] CI: Motor holding brake start frequency signal source 1351
p1475[C] CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding 0
brake

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 275
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

8.15 Free function blocks

8.15.1 Overview

Overview
The free function blocks permit configurable signal processing in the converter.

Function description
The following free function blocks are available:

Table 8-37 Free function blocks

Logic blocks AND 0 OR 0 XOR 0 NOT 0

AND 1 OR 1 XOR 1 NOT 1
AND 2 OR 2 XOR 2 NOT 2
AND 3 OR 3 XOR 3 NOT 3
NOT 4
NOT 5
Calculation Adder Subtractor Multiplier Divider Compara‐ Absolute Polyline
blocks tor value
ADD 0 SUB 0 MUL 0 DIV 0 NCM 0 AVA 0 PLI 0
ADD 1 SUB 1 MUL 1 DIV 1 NCM 1 AVA 1 PLI 1
ADD 2
Timer blocks Pulse gen‐ Pulse ON delay OFF delay Pulse stretching
erator shorten‐
ing
MFP 0 PCL 0 PDE 0 PDF 0 PST 0
MFP 1 PCL 1 PDE 1 PDF 1 PST 1
MFP 2 PDE 2 PDF 2
MFP 3 PDE 3 PDF 3
Memory block RS flip-flop D flip-flop
RSR 0 DFR 0
RSR 1 DFR 1
RSR 2 DFR 2
Breaker block Analog Binary switch
switch
NSW 0 BSW 0
NSW 1 BSW 1
Control block Limiter Smooth‐ Integrator Differentiator
ing
LIM 0 PT1 0 INT 0 DIF 0
LIM 1 PT1 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

276 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Complex block Limit monitor

LVM 0
LVM 1

You can only use a function block once. The converter has 3 adders for instance, ADD 0,
ADD 1, and ADD 2. If you have already configured 3 adders, then no other adders are
available.

8.15.2 Runtime groups and run sequence

In order to activate a free function block, you must assign it to a runtime group.
There are 6 runtime groups in different time slices.

Table 8-38 Permissible runtime groups of the free function blocks

Runtime group 1 2 3 4 5 6
Time slice 8 ms 16 ms 32 ms 64 ms 128 ms 256 ms
AND, OR, XOR, NOT, RSR, DFR, BSW ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, AVA, NCM, PLI, MFP, - - - - ✓ ✓
PCL, PDE, PDF, PST, NSW, LIM, PT1, INT, DIF,
LVM

✓: You can assign the free function blocks to this runtime group
-: A free function block is not possible in this runtime group
Within a runtime group, the converter calculates the function blocks in an ascending run
sequence.

8.15.3 List of free function blocks

Logic block AND (AND block)

S[[[ If a value of 1 is available at all inputs I0 … I3, then Q = 1.

>@ , 4 U[[[
>@ , In all other cases, output Q = 0.
>@ ,
>@ ,

AND 0 AND 1 AND 2 AND 3

I0 … I3 p20030[0 … 3] p20034[0 … 3] p20038[0 … 3] p20042[0 … 3]
Q r20031 r20035 r20039 r20043
Runtime group p20032 p20036 p20040 p20044
Run sequence p20033 p20037 p20041 p20045

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 277
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Logic block OR (OR block)

S[[[ If a value of 0 is available at all inputs I0 … I3, then Q = 0.

>@ , 4 U[[[
>@ , In all other cases, output Q = 1.
, ุ
>@
>@ ,

OR 0 OR 1 OR 2 OR 3
I0 … I3 p20046[0 … 3] p20050[0 … 3] p20054[0 … 3] p20058[0 … 3]
Q r20047 r20051 r20055 r20059
Runtime group p20048 p20052 p20056 p20060
Run sequence p20049 p20053 p20057 p20061

Logic block XOR (EXCLUSIVE OR block)

S[[[ The function block logically combines the binary quantities

>@ , 4 U[[[
, at inputs I according to a logical exclusive or function.
>@ 
>@ ,
>@ ,

Table 8-39 Truth table

I0 I1 I2 I3 Q
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0
0 1 0 0 1
0 1 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0
0 1 1 1 1
1 0 0 0 1
1 0 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 1
1 1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1 1
1 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0

XOR 0 XOR 1 XOR 2 XOR 3

I0 … I3 p20062[0 … 3] p20066[0 … 3] p20070[0 … 3] p20074[0 … 3]
Q r20063 r20067 r20071 r20075

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

278 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

XOR 0 XOR 1 XOR 2 XOR 3

Runtime group p20064 p20068 p20072 p20076
Run sequence p20065 p20069 p20073 p20077

Logic block NOT (converter)

S[[[ The function block inverts the input:

, 4 U[[[
>@ 
I=0⇒Q=1
I=1⇒Q=0

NOT 0 NOT 1 NOT 2 NOT 3 NOT 4 NOT 5

I p20078[0] p20082[0] p20086[0] p20090[0] p20300[0] p20304[0]
Q r20079 r20083 r20087 r20091 r20301 r20305
Runtime group p20080 p20084 p20088 p20092 p20302 p20306
Run sequence p20081 p20085 p20089 p20093 p20303 p20307

Calculation block ADD (adder)

S[[[ Y = X0 + X1 + X2 + X3
>@ ;
(
>@ ; < The function block adds inputs X0 … X3, and limits the result
;  U[[[
>@
(
in the range -3.4E38 … 3.4E38.
>@ ;

ADD 0 ADD 1 ADD 2

X0 … X3 p20094[0 … 3] p20098[0 … 3] p20308[0 … 3]
Y r20095 r20099 r20309
Runtime group p20096 p20100 p20310
Run sequence p20097 p20101 p20311

Calculation block SUB (subtractor)

S[[[ ( Y = X0 - X1
>@ ; ;; < U[[[
>@ ; The function block subtracts input X1 from input X0
(
and limits the result in the range -3.4E38 … 3.4E38.

SUB 0 SUB 1
X0, X1 p20102[0, 1] p20106[0, 1]
Y r20103 r20107
Runtime group p20104 p20108
Run sequence p20105 p20109

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 279
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Calculation block MUL (multiplier)

S[[[ Y = X0 × X1 × X2 × X3
>@ ;
(
>@ ; < The function block multiplies inputs X0 … X3, and limits the
;  U[[[
>@
(
result in the range -3.4E38 … 3.4E38.
>@ ;

MUL 0 MUL 1
X0 … X3 p20110[0 … 3] p20114[0 … 3]
Y r20111 r20115
Runtime group p20112 p20116
Run sequence p20113 p20117

Calculation block DIV (divider)

S[[[ ( Y = X0 / X1
>@ ; ; < U[[[>@
>@ ; ; <,1 The function block divides the inputs and limits the
( >@
02' >@ result in the range -3.4E38 … 3.4E38. With a division
4) U[[[ of 0/0, Y remains unchanged.

Significance of other outputs:

• YIN: Integer quotient
• MOD = (Y - YIN) × X1 (division remainder)
• QF: The converter sets QF = 1 when output value Y exceeds the permissible value range or
for division by zero.

DIV 0 DIV 1
X0, X1 p20118[0, 1] p20123[0, 1]
Y, YIN, MOD r20119[0 … 2] r20124[0 … 2]
QF r20120 r20125
Runtime group p20121 p20126
Run sequence p20122 p20127

Calculation block NCM (numeric comparator)

S[[[ ! 48 U[[[ The function block compares two inputs with one another.
>@ ;
 4( U[[[
>@ ;
 4/ U[[[

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

280 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Table 8-40 Function table

Comparing inputs QU QE QL
X0 > X1 1 0 0
X0 = X1 0 1 0
X0 < X1 0 0 1

NCM 0 NCM 1
X0, X1 p20312[0, 1] p20318[0, 1]
QU r20313 r20319
QE r20314 r20320
QL r20315 r20321
Runtime group p20316 p20322
Run sequence p20317 p20323

Calculation block AVA (absolute value generator)

S[[[ < Y = abs(X)

>@ ; < U[[[
61 U[[[ This function block calculates the absolute value of the value
; present at input X.
When X < 0, then the converter sets SN = 1.

AVA 0 AVA 1
X p20128[0] p20133[0]
Y r20129 r20134
SN r20130 r20135
Runtime group p20131 p20136
Run sequence p20132 p20137

Calculation block PLI (polyline)

< The function block adapts output Y to input X along

% 20 interpolation points (A0,B0) … (A19,B19).
S[[[ $ $%
>@ ; < U[[[
$ $ ; The function block linearly interpolates between
%
the interpolation points. The characteristic is hori‐
% zontal outside A0 and A19.
The values A0 … A19 must be in ascending order.
Interpolation points that are not required must be set to the values of the last interpolation
point required.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 281
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

PLI 0 PLI 1
X p20372[0] p20378[0]
Y r20373 r20379
A0 … A19 p20374[0 … 19] p20380[0 … 19]
B0 … B19 p20375[0 … 19] p20381[0 … 19]
Runtime group p20376 p20382
Run sequence p20377 p20383

Timer block MFP - pulse generator

S[[[
The pulse generator generates a pulse with a fixed duration.
>@ , 4 U[[[
7
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output
, Q = 1 for pulse duration T.

The pulse generator cannot be subsequently triggered.

W
4


7 7 7 W

MFP 0 MFP 1 MFP 2 MFP 3

I p20138[0] p20143[0] p20354[0] p20359[0]
T p20139 p20144 p20355 p20360
Q r20140 p20145 p20356 p20361
Runtime group p20141 p20146 p20357 p20362
Run sequence p20142 p20147 p20358 p20363

Timer block PCL (pulse shortener)

S[[[
The pulses shortener limits the pulse duration.
>@ , 4 U[[[
The rising edge of a pulse at input I, sets Q =1.
7
, When I = 0 or if pulse duration T has expired, then function
 block sets Q = 0.

W
4


7 7 W

PCL 0 PCL 1
I p20148[0] p20153[0]
T p20149 p20154
Q r20150 r20155

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

282 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

PCL 0 PCL 1
Runtime group p20151 p20156
Run sequence p20152 p20157

Timer block PDE (ON delay)

S[[[ The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q = 1 after

>@ , 7  4
U[[[ pulse delay time T.
, When I = 0, then the function block sets Q = 0.


7 7 W
4



PDE 0 PDE 1 PDE 2 PDE 3

I p20158[0] p20163[0] p20334[0] p20339[0]
T p20159 p20164 p20335 p20340
Q r20160 r20165 r20336 r20341
Runtime group p20161 p20166 p20337 p20342
Run sequence p20162 p20167 p20338 p20343

Timer block PDF (OFF delay)

S[[[ When I = 1, then the function block sets Q = 1.

>@ ,  7 4
U[[[
The falling edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q = 0 after
, OFF delay time T.

 When input I returns to 1 before time T has expired, output
7 7 7 W
4 Q remains 1.


W

PDF 0 PDF 1 PDF 2 PDF 3

I p20168[0] p20173[0] p20344[0] p20349[0]
T p20169 p20174 p20345 p20350
Q r20170 r20175 r20346 r20351
Runtime group p20171 p20176 p20347 p20352
Run sequence p20172 p20177 p20348 p20353

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 283
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Timer block PST (pulse stretcher)

S[[[
The function block generates a pulse with a defined
>@ , 4 U[[[ length.
>@ 5 7
The rising edge of a pulse at input I sets output Q = 1.
,
 When I = 0 and pulse duration T has expired, then function
 block sets Q = 0.
W
5 When reset input R = 1, then the function block sets Q = 0.


W
4


7 7 7 7 W
7

PST 0 PT 1
I, R p20178[0, 1] p20183[0, 1]
T p20179 p20184
Q r20180 r20185
Runtime group p20181 p20186
Run sequence p20182 p20187

Memory block RSR (RS flip-flop)

S[[[ RS flip-flop, reset dominant.

>@ 6 4 U[[[
>@ 5
41 U[[[

Table 8-41 Truth table

S R Q QN
0 0 No change
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1

RSR 0 RSR 1 RSR 2

S, R p20188[0, 1] p20193[0, 1] p20324[0, 1]
Q r20189 r20194 r20325
QN r20190 r20195 r20326
Runtime group p20191 p20196 p20327
Run sequence p20192 p20197 p20328

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

284 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Memory block DFR (D flip-flop)

S[[[ D flip-flop, reset dominant.

>@ , 4 U[[[
>@ '
>@ 6 41 U[[[
>@ 5

Table 8-42 Truth table

D I S R Q QN
0 0 0 0 No change
1 ↑ 0 0 1 0
0 ↑ 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 1

DFR 0 DFR 1 DFR 2

I, D, S, R p20198[0 … 3] p20203[0 … 3] p20329[0 … 3]
Q r20199 r20204 r20330
QN r20200 r20205 r20331
Runtime group p20201 p20206 p20332
Run sequence p20202 p20207 p20333

Breaker block NSW (numeric changeover switch)

S[[[ This function block switches one of two numeric input vari‐
>@ ;  < ables to the output:
>@ ; U[[[

S[[[ When I = 0, then Y = X0.
>@ ,
When I = 1, then Y = X1.

NSW 0 NSW 1
X0, X1 p20218[0, 1] p20223[0, 1]
I p20219[0] p20224[0]
Y r20220 r20225
Runtime group p20221 p20226
Run sequence p20222 p20227

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 285
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Breaker block BSW (binary changeover switch)

S[[[ This function block switches one of two binary input varia‐
>@ , 
4 U[[[ bles to the output:
>@ ,

S[[[ When I = 0, then Q = I0.
>@ ,
When I = 1, then Q = I1.

BSW 0 BSW 1
I0, I1 p20208[0, 1] p20213[0, 1]
I p20209[0] p20214[0]
Q r20210 r20215
Runtime group p20211 p20216
Run sequence p20212 p20217

Control block LIM (limiter)

/8
< 48 U[[[ Y = LU, if X ≥ LU
S[[[
>@ ; < U[[[ Y = X, if LL < X < LU
;
// 4/ U[[[ Y = LL, if X ≤ LL
The function block limits output Y to values within LL … LU.

LIM 0 LIM 1
X p20228[0] p20236[0]
LU 1)
p20229 p20237
LL 1) p20230 p20238
Y r20231 r20239
QU r20232 r20240
QL r20233 r20241
Runtime group p20234 p20242
Run sequence p20235 p20243
1)
LU must be greater than LL

Control block PT1 (smoothing element)

S[[[
< Y(t) = X × (1 - exp(-t / T))
>@ ; < The function block smooths input signal X with time con‐
>@ 69 U[[[
7 W stant T. T defines the gradient of the increase in output
S[[[ quantity Y.
>@ 6
If set input S = 1, then Y = SV.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

286 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

PT1 0 PT1 1
X, SV p20244[0, 1] p20250[0, 1]
S p20245[0] p20251[0]
T p20246 p20252
Y r20247 r20253
Runtime group p20248 p20254
Run sequence p20249 p20255

Control block INT (integrator)

S
<
/8
< 48 U Yn = Yn+1 + Tcyc / TI × Xn
>@ ; < ; < The rate of change of output quantity Y is
>@ 69 ;
U
7, W 4/ U proportional to input quantity X.
//
S
6

The converter limits output Y to values LU and LO. Also see limiter LIM.
As long as S = 1, then the converter sets Y = SV.

INT 0
LU p20257 Runtime group p20264
LO p20258 Run sequence p20265
TI p20259

Control block DIF (differentiator)

S < Yn = (Xn - Xn-1) × TD / Tzyk

>@ ; < U
Output Y is proportional to the rate of change of input X.
W

DIF 0
TD p20285
Runtime group p20287
Run sequence p20288

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 287
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Complex block LVM (limit monitor)

S[[[ 48 U[[[ The function block monitors an input quantity by comparing

;
>@ 40 U[[[ it with reference quantities.
4/ U[[[
48


0 ;
40


;
4/


+< +< ;
/ /

LVM 0 LVM 1
X p20266[0] p20275[0]
M p20267 p20276
L p20268 p20277
HY p20269 p20278
QU r20270 r20279
QM r20271 r20280
QL r20272 r20281
Runtime group p20273 p20282
Run sequence p20274 p20283

8.15.4 Scaling
If you interconnect a physical quantity, e.g. speed or voltage to the input of a free function block,
then the converter automatically scales the signal to a value of 1. The analog output signals of
the free function blocks are also scaled: 0 ≙ 0 %, 1≙ 100 %.
If you interconnect the output signal of a free function block with a function that requires
physical input quantities, then the converter converts the scaled signal into the physical
quantity.

Scaling parameters of physical quantities

Speed 100 % ≙ p2000 (reference speed)

Example: p2000 = 3000 rpm, actual speed 2100 rpm ⇒ the scaled input quan‐
tity = 2100 / 3000 = 0.7.
Voltage 100 % ≙ p2001 reference voltage
Current 100 % ≙ p2002 reference current
Torque 100 % ≙ p2003 reference torque
Power 100 % ≙ p2004 reference power

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

288 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

Angle 100 % ≙ p2005 reference angle

Temperature 100 % ≙ p2006 reference temperature
Example: p2006 = 100 °C, actual temperature = 120 °C. ⇒ the scaled input
quantity = 120 °C / 100 °C = 1.2.
The allocation of parameters and scaling parameters is provided in the parameter description
of the List Manual.

Limits
The converter expects limits within the free function blocks as scaled values:
Scaled limit = physical limit value / value of the reference parameter

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 289
Advanced commissioning
8.15 Free function blocks

8.15.5 Activating free function block

The free function blocks are not active in the factory setting.

Activating and interconnecting free function blocks

Requirement
You have configured the converter with the "Free function blocks" function module.
Quick commissioning with a PC (Page 142)

Procedure
1. Activate the function block: Assign the function block to a runtime group of your choice.
Example: Assign ADD 0 to runtime group 1: p20096 = 1.
2. If you have assigned several function blocks to the same runtime group, define a sensible run
sequence within the runtime group.
Example: Calculate ADD 0 before ADD 1: p20097 < p20101.
3. Interconnect the inputs and outputs of the function block with the required signals in the
converter.
You have activated a free function block and interconnected its inputs and outputs.
❒

8.15.6 Further information

Application description for the free function blocks

Further information is provided on the Internet:
FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/85168215)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

290 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.16 Selecting physical units

8.16 Selecting physical units

8.16.1 Motor standard

Selection options and parameters involved

The converter represents the motor data corresponding to motor standard IEC or NEMA in
different system units: SI units or US units.

Table 8-43 Parameters involved when selecting the motor standard

Parame‐ Designation Motor standard IEC/NEMA, p0100 =

ter 01)
1 2
IEC motor NEMA motor NEMA motor
50 Hz, SI units 60 Hz, US units 60 Hz, SI units
r0206 Power Module rated power kW hp kW
p0219 Braking resistor braking power kW hp kW
p0307 Rated motor power kW hp kW
p0316 Motor torque constant Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A
r0333 Rated motor torque Nm lbf ft Nm
p0341 Motor moment of inertia kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
p0344 Motor weight kg Lb kg
r0394 Rated motor power kW hp kW
r1493 Total moment of inertia, scaled kgm2 lb ft2 kgm2
1)
Factory setting
It is only possible to change the motor standard during quick commissioning.

8.16.2 Unit system

Some physical units depend on the system of units selected (SI or US), for example the power
[kW or hp] or the torque [Nm or lbf ft]. You can select in which system of units the converter
represents its physical values.

Options when selecting the system of units

The following options apply when selecting the system of units:
• p0505 = 1: System of units SI (factory setting)
Torque [Nm], power [kW], temperature [°C or K]
• p0505 = 2: Referred system of units/SI
Represented as [%]

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 291
Advanced commissioning
8.16 Selecting physical units

• p0505 = 3: US system of units

Torque [lbf ft], power [hp], temperature [°F]
• p0505 = 4: System of units, referred/US
Represented as [%]

Special features
The values for p0505 = 2 and for p0505 = 4 - represented in the converter - are identical.
However, the reference to SI or US units is required for internal calculations and to output
physical variables.
For variables, which cannot be represented as [%], then the following applies:
• p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 2
• p0505 = 3 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4
In the case of variables whose units are identical in the SI system and US system, and which
can be displayed as a percentage, the following applies:
• p0505 = 1 corresponds to setting p0505 = 3
• p0505 = 2 corresponds to setting p0505 = 4

Reference variables
There is a reference variable in the converter for most parameters with physical units. When the
referred representation [%] is set, then the converter scales the physical variables based on the
particular reference variable.
When the reference variable changes, then the significance of the scaled value also changes.
Example:
• Reference speed = 1500 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 1200 rpm
• Reference speed = 3000 rpm → fixed speed = 80 % corresponds to the speed = 2400 rpm
For each parameter you can find the associated reference variable for scaling in the
parameter list. Example: r0065 is scaled with reference variable p2000.
If scaling is not specified in the parameter list, then the converter always shows/displays the
parameter unscaled.

Groups of units
In the parameter list you will find the following information for parameters with changeable
units:
• Unit group
Designates the group to which the parameter belongs
• Unit selection
Designates the parameter that changes over the unit

Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

292 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.16 Selecting physical units

The parameter belongs to the unit group 7_1 and p0505 changes over the unit.

Table 8-44 Unit group (p0100)

Unit group Unit selection for p0100 =

0 1 2
7_4 Nm lbf ft Nm
14_6 kW hp kW
25_1 kg m² lbf ft² kg m²
27_1 kg lb kg
28_1 Nm/A lbf ft/A Nm/A

Table 8-45 Unit group (p0505)

Unit group Unit selection for p0505 = Reference value for %

1 2 3 4
2_1 Hz % Hz % p2000
3_1 rpm % rpm % p2000
5_1 Vrms % Vrms % P2001
5_2 V % V % p2001
5_3 V % V % p2001
6_2 Arms % Arms % p2002
6_5 A % A % p2002
7_1 Nm % lbf ft % p2003
7_2 Nm Nm lbf ft lbf ft -
14_5 kW % hp % r2004
14_10 kW kW hp hp -
21_1 °C °C °F °F -
21_2 K K °F °F -
39_1 1/s² % 1/s² % p2007

8.16.3 Technological unit of the technology controller

Options when selecting the technological unit

p0595 defines in which technological unit the input and output variables of the technology
controller are calculated, e.g. [bar], [m³/min] or [kg/h].

Reference variable
p0596 defines the reference variable of the technological unit for the technology controller.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 293
Advanced commissioning
8.16 Selecting physical units

Unit group
Parameters involved with p0595 belong to unit group 9_1.
The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in p0595.

Special features
You must optimize the technology controller after changing p0595 or p0596.

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

8.16.4 Setting the system of units and technology unit

Setting using Startdrive

Requirement
You are offline with Startdrive.

Procedure
1. In the project, select "Parameter".
2. Select "Units".


 

3. Select the system of units.

4. Select the technological unit of the technology controller.
5. Save your settings.
6. Go online.
The converter signals that offline, other units and process variables are set than in the
converter itself.
7. Accept these settings in the converter.
You have selected the motor standard and system of units.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

294 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.17 Extended messages

8.17 Extended messages

Overview
You must configure the "Extended messages" function module in order to be able to use the
extended messages.
Converter function modules (Page 140)

Parameter Explanation
p2152 Delay for comparison n > n_max (Factory setting: 200 ms)
p2157 Speed threshold value 5 (Factory setting: 900 rpm)
p2158 Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 5 (Factory setting: 10 ms)
p2159 Speed threshold value 6 (Factory setting: 900 rpm)
p2160 Delay for n_act comparison with speed threshold value 6 (Factory setting: 10 ms)
p2170 Current threshold value (Factory setting: 0 A)
p2171 Current threshold value reached delay time (Factory setting: 10 ms)
p2172 DC-link voltage threshold value (Factory setting: 800 V)
p2173 DC-link voltage comparison delay time (Factory setting: 10 ms)
p2176 Torque threshold value comparison delay time (Factory setting: 200 ms)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 295
Advanced commissioning
8.17 Extended messages

Parameter Explanation
p2179 Output load detection current limit (Factory setting: 0 A) Rotation
p2180 Output load detection delay time (Factory setting: 2000 ms) monitoring
(Page 406)
p2181 Load monitoring response (Factory setting: 0)
0: Load monitoring deactivated
1: A07920 for torque/speed too low
2: A07921 for torque/speed too high
3: A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
4: F07923 for torque/speed too low
5: F07924 for torque/speed too high
6: F07925 for torque/speed outside the tolerance
p2182 Load monitoring speed threshold 1 (Factory setting: 150 rpm)
p2183 Load monitoring speed threshold 2 (Factory setting: 900 rpm)
p2184 Load monitoring speed threshold 3 (Factory setting: 1500 rpm)
p2185 Load monitoring torque threshold 1 upper (Factory setting:
1000000 Nm)
p2186 Load monitoring torque threshold 1 lower (Factory setting: 0 Nm)
p2187 Load monitoring torque threshold 2 upper (Factory setting:
1000000 Nm)
p2188 Load monitoring torque threshold 2 lower (Factory setting: 0 Nm)
p2189 Load monitoring torque threshold 3 upper (Factory setting:
1000000 Nm)
p2190 Load monitoring torque threshold 3 lower (Factory setting: 0 Nm)
p2192 Load monitoring delay time (Factory setting: 10 s)
p2193 Load monitoring configuration (factory setting: 1)
0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Torque and load failure monitoring
2: Speed and load failure monitoring
3: Load failure monitoring
p3231 Load monitoring speed deviation (Factory setting: 150 rpm)
p3233 Torque actual value filter time constant (Factory setting: 100 ms)

Further information on this topic is provided in the List Manual.

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

296 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

8.18.1 Where are the safety functions described?

Overview
The operating instructions describe how to commission the STO safety function as basic
function for control via a failsafe digital input.
A description of all the safety functions is provided in the "Safety Integrated" Function
Manual:
• The basic functions and the extended functions
• Controlling safety functions via PROFIsafe
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

8.18.2 Principle of operation

Overview

6HOHFW672

672LVDFWLYH

An active STO function prevents energy from being fed to the motor. The motor can no
longer generate torque on the motor shaft.
Consequently, the STO function prevents the starting of an electrically-driven machine
component.

Requirement
The machine manufacturer has already performed a risk assessment, e.g. in compliance with
EN ISO 1050, "Safety of machinery - Principles of risk assessment". The risk assessment must
confirm that it is permissible to use the STO safety function.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 297
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Function description

Table 8-46 Principle of operation of STO

Safe Torque Off (STO) Standard converter functions linked with STO
1. The converter identifies when STO is selected via ---
a failsafe digital input or via PROFIsafe.
2. The converter interrupts the energy supply to the If you use a motor holding brake, the converter
motor. closes the motor holding brake.
If you use a line contactor, the converter opens
the line contactor.
3. The converter signals "STO is active" via a failsafe ---
digital output or via PROFIsafe.

6HOHFW672 6HOHFW672

W W
6SHHG 6SHHG

W W
672LVDFWLYH 672LVDFWLYH
W W
$ %
Figure 8-29 STO when the motor is at standstill (A), and rotating (B)

(A): When selecting STO, if the motor is already stationary (zero speed), then STO prevents
the motor from starting.
(B): If the motor is still rotating (B) when STO is selected, it coasts down to standstill.

The STO safety function is standardized

The STO function is defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-2:
"[…] [The converter] does not supply any energy to the motor which can generate a torque
(or for a linear motor, a force)".
⇒ The STO converter function conforms to IEC/EN 61800-5-2.

Example
The STO function is suitable for applications where the motor is already at a standstill or will
come to a standstill in a short, safe period of time through friction. STO does not shorten the run-
on time of machine components.

Application Possible solution

When the EMERGENCY STOP button is • Connect the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton with a failsafe
pressed, it is not permissible for a sta‐ converter digital input.
tionary motor to inadvertently acceler‐
• Select STO via the failsafe digital input.
ate.
A central EMERGENCY STOP button • Evaluate the EMERGENCY STOP button in a central control.
must prevent the unintentional acceler‐ • Select STO via PROFIsafe.
ation of several motors that are at a
standstill.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

298 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

See also
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

8.18.3 EMERGENCY SWITCHING OFF and EMERGENCY STOP

Overview
In plants, systems and machines a distinction must be made between "EMERGENCY OFF"
and "EMERGENCY STOP". The STO safety function is only suitable for implementing an
"EMERGENCY STOP".

Function description
EN 60204‑1 defines "EMERGENCY OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP":
• "EMERGENCY OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" are functions that are used in an emergency.
• "EMERGENCY OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP" minimize different risks in the system or
machine.
– "EMERGENCY OFF" minimizes the risk of electric shock.
– "EMERGENCY STOP" minimizes the risk of unexpected motion.
• Stop Categories 0, 1 and 2 are available for EMERGENCY STOP.

Table 8-47 The distinction between "EMERGENCY OFF" and "EMERGENCY STOP"

Action: EMERGENCY OFF EMERGENCY STOP

Stop Category 0 according to
EN 60204‑1
Risk:

Electric shock Unexpected movement

Measure to minimize Switch off the power supply Prevent movement
risk: Either completely or partially switch Prevent any hazardous movement
off hazardous voltages

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 299
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Action: EMERGENCY OFF EMERGENCY STOP

Stop Category 0 according to
EN 60204‑1
Classic solution: Switch off the power supply: Switch-off the drive power supply:

Solution with the STO STO is not suitable for switching off a Select STO:
safety function inte‐ voltage.
grated in the drive:

It is permissible that you also switch off

the converter supply voltage. Howev‐
er, switching off the voltage is not re‐
quired as a risk reduction measure.

8.18.4 Commissioning STO

8.18.4.1 Commissioning tools

Overview
We recommend that you commission the safety functions using the Startdrive PC tool.
Tools to commission the converter (Page 134)

8.18.4.2 Password

Overview
The password protects the settings of the safety functions from being changed by unauthorized
persons.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

300 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Function description

Do you have to assign a password?

The probabilities of failure (PFH) and certification of the safety functions also apply without
password.
The machine manufacturer decides whether or not a password is required.

Further information

What do I do if I lose the password?

You have forgotten the password, however, you would nevertheless like to change the
setting of the safety functions.

Procedure
1. Create a new project for the converter using Startdrive.
Leave all the settings in the project on those set in the factory.
2. Load the project in the converter.
After loading, the converter has the factory settings.
3. If a memory card inserted in the converter, remove it.
4. Recommission the converter.
You can obtain additional information or learn about alternative procedures from Product
Support.
Product Support (Page 558)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 301
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

8.18.4.3 Configuring a safety function

Overview
You must enable the STO safety function and define how STO is selected.

Function description

Procedure
1. Select "Select safety functionality".

2. Select "Basic Functions".

3. Select "Control type/safety functions".

4. Select "Via terminals" as control type for the safety functions.

You have configured the safety functions.
❒
Additional safety function configurations are described in the "Safety Integrated" Function
Manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

302 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
p9601 SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (processor 1) 0000 0000 bin
p9761 SI password input 0000 hex
p9762 SI password new 0000 hex
p9763 SI password acknowledgment 0000 hex

8.18.4.4 Interconnecting the "STO active" signal

Overview
If you require the feedback signal "STO active" of the converter in your higher-level control
system, then you must appropriately interconnect the signal.

Requirement
You are online with Startdrive.

Function description

Procedure

$ % 

'
&

'

The screen form varies depending on the converter and the interface that has been selected.
(A) Control type
(B) Delay time for SS1 and enable SBC for a converter with CU250S‑2 Control Unit
(C) STO via the Power Module terminals for a PM240‑2 or PM240P‑2, FSD … FSF Power Module
(D) Enable SBC for a converter with CU250S‑2 Control Unit

1. Select the button for the feedback signal.

2. Select the signal that matches your particular application.
You have interconnected the "STO active" checkback signal.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 303
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

After STO has been selected, the converter signals "STO active" to the higher-level control.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r9773[0…31] CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) -
.01 1 signal: STO is active in the drive

8.18.4.5 Signal filter for STO selection

Overview
Two filters are available for a failsafe digital input:
• When the discrepancy time is active, the converter tolerates input signals that briefly differ.
• When the debounce time is active, the converter suppresses brief signal changes.

Function description

Discrepancy time
The converter checks that the two input signals of the failsafe digital input always have the
same signal state (high or low).
With electromechanical sensors (e.g. emergency stop buttons or door switches), the two
sensor contacts switch, but never at exactly the same time, and are therefore temporarily
inconsistent (discrepancy).
Only a permanent discrepancy signifies a fault in the failsafe digital input circuit, e.g. wire
breakage.
You must set the discrepancy time to ignore signals that are briefly inconsistent.

)',LQSXWVLJQDOV 'LVFUHSDQF\ )',LQSXWVLJQDOV 'LVFUHSDQF\

'LVFUHSDQF\WLPH W 'LVFUHSDQF\WLPH W

6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ 6DIHW\IXQFWLRQ
DFWLYH DFWLYH
W W
6LJQDOGLVFUHSDQF\

W
7HPSRUDU\GLVFUHSDQF\ 3HUPDQHQWGLVFUHSDQF\
Figure 8-30 Discrepancy time

The discrepancy time does not extend the converter response time. The converter activates
the safety functions as soon as one of the two F-DI signals changes its state from high to low.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

304 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Debounce time
In the following cases, an immediate converter response to signal changes of the failsafe
digital inputs is not desirable:
• If a failsafe digital input of the converter is interconnected with an electromechanical sensor,
brief signal changes can occur due to contact bounce.
• In order to identify faults due to short-circuit or cross faults, several control modules test their
failsafe digital outputs with "bit pattern tests" (on/off test). If a failsafe digital input of the
converter is interconnected with a failsafe digital output of an open-loop control module,
then the converter responds with a bit pattern test.
The typical duration of the signal change within a bit pattern test:
– On test: 1 ms
– Off test: 4 ms
Too many signal changes within a specific time result in a converter fault.

)',LQSXWVLJQDOV %LWSDWWHUQWHVW

6DIHW\IXQFWLRQDFWLYH W

)DXOW) W

W
Figure 8-31 Converter response to a bit pattern test

You must set the debounce time to ignore temporary signal changes.

)',LQSXWVLJQDOV %LWSDWWHUQWHVW

W
'HERXQFHWLPH 'HERXQFHWLPH
6DIHW\IXQFWLRQDFWLYH

W
Figure 8-32 Filter to suppress brief signals

The debounce time extends the response time of the safety function.

Further information

Debounce times for standard and safety functions

The debounce time p0724 for "standard" digital inputs has no influence over the failsafe
input signals. Conversely, the same applies: The F-DI debounce time does not affect the
signals of the "standard" inputs.
If you use an input as a standard input, set the debounce time using parameter p0724 .

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 305
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

If you use an input as a failsafe input, set the debounce time as described above.

8.18.4.6 Setting the signal filter for STO selection

Overview
If required, you must set the signal filter for selecting the STO safety function.

Requirement
You are online with Startdrive.

Function description

Procedure

 

1. Navigate to the filter settings.

2. Set the debounce time for the F-DI input filter.
3. Set the discrepancy time for the simultaneity monitoring.
You have set the signal filter of the failsafe digital input.
❒

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p9650 SI F-DI switchover discrepancy time (CPU 1) 500 ms
p9651 SI STO debounce time (processor 1) 1 ms

8.18.4.7 Forced checking procedure

Overview
The forced checking procedure (test stop) is a converter self test, which is necessary when you
have enabled at least one safety function.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

306 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Function description
Each time the forced checking procedure starts, the converter checks its circuits to switch off the
torque.
You start the forced checking procedure each time that the STO function is selected.
Using a timer block, the converter monitors as to whether the forced checking procedure is
regularly started.

672LV 6WDUWIRUFHGFKHFNLQJSURFHGXUHRI
DFWLYH WKHEDVLFIXQFWLRQV
7  )RUFHGFKHFNLQJSURFHGXUHRIWKH
EDVLFIXQFWLRQVLVUHTXLUHG
$
0RQLWRULQJWLPH
Figure 8-33 Starting and monitoring the forced checking procedure (test stop)

8.18.4.8 Setting forced checking procedure

Overview
You must set the time interval in which, as a minimum, you must start the forced checking
procedure at least once.

Requirement
You are online with Startdrive.

Function description

Procedure


 

1. Select the screen form for setting the forced checking procedure.
2. Set the monitoring time to a value to match your application.
3. Using this signal, the converter signals that a forced checking procedure (test stop) is
required.
Interconnect this signal with a converter signal of your choice.
You have set the forced checking procedure (test stop) for the Basic Functions.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 307
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p9659 SI forced checking procedure timer 8h
r9660 SI forced checking procedure remaining time -h
r9773.0…31 CO/BO: SI status (processor 1 + processor 2) -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

308 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

8.18.4.9 Complete commissioning

Overview
You must exit commissioning the safety functions and save the settings.

Requirement
You are online with Startdrive.

Function description

Procedure

  

1. Press the "End safety commissioning" button.

2. Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
3. Disconnect the online connection.
4. Select the "Load from device (software)" button.
5. Save the project.
6. Switch off the converter power supply.
7. Wait until all LEDs on the converter go dark (no voltage condition).
8. Switch on the converter power supply again.
Your settings are now active.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 309
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
p0971 Save parameters 0
p9700 SI copy function 0000 hex
p9701 Acknowledge SI data change 0000 hex

8.18.4.10 Checking the assignment of the digital inputs

Overview
The simultaneous connection of digital inputs with a safety function and a "standard" function
may lead to the drive behaving in unexpected ways.
If you control the safety functions in the converter via failsafe digital inputs, then you must
check as to whether the failsafe digital inputs are in some instances interconnected with a
"standard" function.

Function description

Procedure

1. Select the screen for the digital inputs.

2. Remove all interconnections of the digital inputs that you use as failsafe digital input F-DI:
3. You must delete the digital input connections for all CDS if you use the switchover of the
command data sets (CDS).
You can find a description of the CDS switchover in the operating instructions.
You have ensured that the failsafe digital inputs only control the safety functions in the
converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

310 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

8.18.4.11 Acceptance test

Overview
The machine manufacturer is responsible in ensuring that his plant or machine functions
perfectly. As a consequence, after commissioning, the machine manufacturer must check those
functions or have them checked by specialist personnel, which represent an increased risk of
injury or material damage. This acceptance or validation is, for example, also specified in the
European machinery directive and essentially comprises two parts:
• Checking the safety-relevant functions and machine parts.
→ Acceptance test.
• Generate an "Acceptance report" that describes the test results.
→ Documentation.
Supply information for the validation, e.g. the harmonized European standards
EN ISO 13849‑1 and EN ISO 13849‑2.

Function description

Acceptance test of the machine or plant

The acceptance test checks whether the safety-relevant functions in the plant or machine
function correctly. The documentation of the components used in the safety functions can
also provide information about the necessary tests.
Testing the safety-related functions includes, e.g. the following:
• Are all safety equipment such as protective door monitoring devices, light barriers or
emergency-off switches connected and ready for operation?
• Does the higher-level control respond as expected to the safety-relevant feedback signals of
the converter?
• Do the converter settings match the configured safety-relevant function in the machine?

Acceptance test of the converter

The acceptance test of the converter is a part of the acceptance test of the entire machine or
plant.
The acceptance test of the converter checks whether the integrated drive safety functions are
set up correctly for the planned safety function of the machine.

Documentation of the converter

The following must be documented for the converter:
• The results of the acceptance test.
• The settings of the integrated drive safety functions.
The documentation must be signed.

Who may perform the acceptance test of the converter?

The following are authorized to perform a converter acceptance test: Only personnel from
the machine manufacturer, who, on account of their technical qualifications and knowledge

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 311
Advanced commissioning
8.18 Safe Torque Off (STO) safety function

of the safety functions, are in a position to perform the acceptance test in the correct and
appropriate manner.

Wizard for the acceptance test

The "Startdrive Advanced" commissioning tool (requires an appropriate license) includes a
wizard for the acceptance test of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
"Startdrive Advanced" guides you through the acceptance test, generates the appropriate
traces to analyze the machine response – and generates an acceptance report as Excel file.
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Startdrive, system requirements and download (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109760844)

Reduced acceptance test after function expansions

A full acceptance test is necessary only after first commissioning. A reduced acceptance test
is sufficient when safety functions are expanded.

Measure Acceptance test

Acceptance test Documentation
Functional expansion of the ma‐ Yes. • Supplement machine overview
chine (additional drive). Only check the safety • Supplement converter data
functions of the new
• Add function table
drive.
• Log the new checksums
• Countersignature
Transfer of converter settings to No. • Add machine description
other identical machines by means Only check the control • Check checksums
of series commissioning. of all of the safety func‐
• Checking the firmware versions
tions.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

312 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19 Setpoints

8.19.1 Overview
The converter receives its main setpoint from the setpoint source. The main setpoint mainly
specifies the motor speed.

6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQWIURP
RSHUDWRUSDQHO
RU3&

0DLQVHWSRLQW
6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ


0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 6XSSOHPHQWD
U\VHWSRLQW
5DLVH
0
/RZHU 7HFKQRORJ\
3,'
FRQWUROOHU

-RJJLQJ
)L[HGVHWSRLQWV VHWSRLQW

,QYHUWHUFRQWURO

3UREHV

PLQ

Figure 8-34 Setpoint sources for the converter

You have the following options when selecting the source of the main setpoint:
• Converter fieldbus interface
• Analog input of the converter
• Motorized potentiometer emulated in the converter
• Fixed setpoints saved in the converter
• Probe: The converter converts a sequence of pulse signals at the digital input into an analog
value.
You have the same selection options when selecting the source of the supplementary
setpoint.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 313
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Under the following conditions, the converter switches from the main setpoint to other
setpoints:
• When the technology controller is active and appropriately interconnected, its output
specifies the motor speed.
• When jogging is active
• When controlled from an operator panel or a PC

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

314 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19.2 Analog input as setpoint source

Function description

6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
$, S
U>@ 
$,
$QDORJLQSXWDFWXDOYDOXH 

S

6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW

Figure 8-35 Example: Analog input 0 as setpoint source

In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the analog input can
be interconnected with the main setpoint.

Example
Setting with analog input 0 as setpoint source:

Parameter Description
p1070 = 755[0] Interconnects main setpoint with analog input 0
p1075 = 755[0] Interconnects supplementary setpoint with analog input 0

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

r0755[0 … 1] CO: CU analog inputs, actual value in percent -%
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 315
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19.3 Specifying the setpoint via the fieldbus

Function description

6FDOLQJ
S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' S
5HFHLYHZRUG3=' U>@ 


S

6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW

Figure 8-36 Fieldbus as setpoint source

In the quick commissioning, you define the preassignment for the converter interfaces.
Depending on what has been preassigned, after quick commissioning, the receive word
PZD02 can be interconnected with the main setpoint.

Example
Setting with receive word PZD02 as setpoint source:

Parameter Description
p1070 = 2050[1] Interconnects the main setpoint with the receive word PZD02 from the fieldbus.
p1075 = 2050[1] Interconnects the supplementary setpoint with receive word PZD02 from the field‐
bus.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm
r2050[0…11] CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

316 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19.4 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source

Function description
The "Motorized potentiometer" function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer. The
output value of the motorized potentiometer can be set with the "higher" and "lower" control
signals.

S 6FDOLQJ
5DLVH S U
S 0DLQVHWSRLQW
/RZHU S
U 
0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 
VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKHUDPS
IXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU
S

6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW

Figure 8-37 Motorized potentiometer as setpoint source

21
2))
W
023UDLVH
S
W
023ORZHU
S
W
6HWSRLQW
U
QPD[
S

W
S S

QPD[

Figure 8-38 Function chart of the motorized potentiometer

Example
Setting with the motorized potentiometer as setpoint source:

Parameter Description
p1070 = 1050 Interconnects the main setpoint with the motorized potentiometer output.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 317
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Parameter

Table 8-48 Basic setup of motorized potentiometer

Number Name Factory setting

p1035[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint higher 0
p1036[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint lower Dependent on the
converter
p1040[D] Motorized potentiometer start value 0 rpm
p1047[D] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-up time 10 s
p1048[D] Motorized potentiometer, ramp-down time 10 s
r1050 Motorized potentiometer, setpoint after the ramp-function - rpm
generator
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1

Table 8-49 Extended setup of motorized potentiometer

Number Name Factory setting

p1030[D] Motorized potentiometer configuration 0000 0110 bin
p1037[D] Motorized potentiometer, maximum speed 0 rpm
p1038[D] Motorized potentiometer, minimum speed 0 rpm
p1043[C] BI: Motorized potentiometer, accept setting value 0
p1044[C] CI: Motorized potentiometer, setting value 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

318 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19.5 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source

Function description

6HOHFWLRQ
6FDOLQJ
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S U
0DLQVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S
U 
 )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW 
DFWLYH
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
S

6FDOLQJ U
S 6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW

Figure 8-39 Fixed speed setpoint as setpoint source

The converter makes a distinction between two methods when selecting the fixed speed
setpoints:

Directly selecting a fixed speed setpoint

)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVHWSRLQW S 

)L[HGVHWSRLQW S 
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S   HIIHFWLYH
 
)L[HGVHWSRLQW S  U
  
Figure 8-40 Direct selection of the fixed speed setpoint

Table 8-50 Resulting setpoint

p1020 p1021 p1022 p1023 Resulting setpoint

0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 p1001
0 1 0 0 p1002
1 1 0 0 p1001 + p1002
0 0 1 0 p1003
1 0 1 0 p1001 + p1003
0 1 1 0 p1002 + p1003
1 1 1 0 p1001 + p1002 + p1003
0 0 0 1 p1004

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 319
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

p1020 p1021 p1022 p1023 Resulting setpoint

1 0 0 1 p1001 + p1004
0 1 0 1 p1002 + p1004
1 1 0 1 p1001 + p1002 + p1004
0 0 1 1 p1003 + p1004
1 0 1 1 p1001 + p1003 + p1004
0 1 1 1 p1002 + p1003 + p1004
1 1 1 1 p1001 + p1002 + p1003 + p1004

Selecting the fixed speed setpoint, binary

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWVHOHFWLRQELW S

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S 

)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S 
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S  U
   )L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQWHIIHFWLYH
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S 
)L[HGVSHHGVHWSRLQW S 
Figure 8-41 Binary selection of the fixed speed setpoint

Table 8-51 Resulting setpoint

p1020 p1021 p1022 p1023 Resulting setpoint

0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 p1001
0 1 0 0 p1002
1 1 0 0 p1003
0 0 1 0 p1004
1 0 1 0 p1005
0 1 1 0 p1006
1 1 1 0 p1007
0 0 0 1 p1008
1 0 0 1 p1009
0 1 0 1 p1010
1 1 0 1 p1011
0 0 1 1 p1012
1 0 1 1 p1013
0 1 1 1 p1014
1 1 1 1 p1015

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

320 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Example
After it has been switched on, a conveyor belt only runs with two different velocities. The motor
should now operate with the following corresponding speeds:
• The signal at digital input 0 switches the motor on and accelerates it up to 300 rpm.
• The signal at digital input 1 accelerates the motor up to 2000 rpm.
• With signals at both digital inputs, the motor accelerates up to 2300 rpm.

Table 8-52 Settings for the application example

Parameter Description
p1001[0] = Fixed speed setpoint 1
300.000
p1002[0] = Fixed speed setpoint 2
2000.000
p0840[0] = 722.0 ON/OFF1: Switches on the motor with digital input 0
p1070[0] = 1024 Main setpoint: Interconnects the main setpoint with a fixed speed setpoint.
p1020[0] = 722.0 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 1 with dig‐
ital input 0 (DI 0).
p1021[0] = 722.1 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 2 with dig‐
ital input 1 (DI 1).
p1016 = 1 Fixed speed setpoint mode: Directly selects fixed speed setpoints.

Table 8-53 Resulting fixed speed setpoints for the application example

Fixed speed setpoint selected via Resulting setpoint

DI 0 = 0 Motor stops
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 0 300 rpm
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 1 2300 rpm

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1001[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 0 rpm
p1002[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 0 rpm
p1003[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 3 0 rpm
p1004[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 4 0 rpm
p1005[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 5 0 rpm
p1006[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 6 0 rpm
p1007[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 7 0 rpm
p1008[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 8 0 rpm
p1009[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 9 0 rpm
p1010[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 10 0 rpm
p1011[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 11 0 rpm
p1012[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 12 0 rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 321
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1013[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 13 0 rpm
p1014[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 14 0 rpm
p1015[D] CO: Fixed speed setpoint 15 0 rpm
p1016 Fixed speed setpoint selection mode 1
p1020[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
p1021[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
p1022[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 2 0
p1023[C] Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 3 0
r1024 Fixed speed setpoint active - rpm
r1025.0 Fixed speed setpoint status -
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint Dependent on the
converter
p1071[C] CI: Main setpoint scaling 1
r1073 CO: Main setpoint active - rpm
p1075[C] CI: Supplementary setpoint 0
p1076 CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling 1
r1077 CO: Supplementary setpoint effective - rpm

Example

Directly selecting two fixed speed setpoints

The motor should operate at different speeds as follows:
• The signal on digital input 0 switches the motor on and accelerates it to 300 rpm.
• The signal at digital input 1 accelerates the motor to 2000 rpm.
• With signals at both digital inputs, the motor accelerates up to 2300 rpm.

Table 8-54 Settings for the application example

Parameter Description
p1001 = 300.000 Fixed speed setpoint 1
p1002 = 2000.000 Fixed speed setpoint 2
p0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1: Switches on the motor with digital input 0
p1070 = 1024 Main setpoint: Interconnects the main setpoint with a fixed speed setpoint.
p1020 = 722.0 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 0: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 1
with digital input 0 (DI 0).
p1021 = 722.1 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1: Interconnects fixed speed setpoint 2
with digital input 1 (DI 1).
p1016 = 1 Fixed speed setpoint mode: Directly selects fixed speed setpoints.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

322 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Table 8-55 Resulting fixed speed setpoints for the application example

Fixed speed setpoint selected via Resulting setpoint

DI 0 = 0 Motor stops
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 0 300 rpm
DI 0 = 1 and DI 1 = 1 2300 rpm

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0840[C] BI: ON/OFF (OFF1) [0] 2090.0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
p1001 CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 0 rpm
p1002 CO: Fixed speed setpoint 2 0 rpm
p1016 Fixed speed setpoint selection mode 1
p1020[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 0 0
p1021[C] BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection, bit 1 0
p1070[C] CI: Main setpoint [0] 755[0]
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 323
Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

8.19.6 Pulse input as source of setpoint value

Interconnecting the digital input as setpoint source

Using the "probe" function ("pulse train"), the converter converts a pulse signal at one of the
digital inputs DI 24 … DI 27 to an analog signal. The converter evaluates a signal with a max.
frequency of 32 kHz.

3UREH

 9RXW
S S 0DLQVHWSRLQW
 ', U  U  
 ', U  PLQ S

 ', U  6XSSOHPHQWDU\VHWSRLQW
 ', U 

Figure 8-42 Pulse signal of the digital input as setpoint source

The "probe" function ("pulse train") creates an analog value from a pulse train at a digital
input of the converter.

'LJLWDOLQSXW

6HWSRLQW W

W
Figure 8-43 Converting the pulse signal at the digital input to an analog value

Parameter Description
p1070 = 586 Main setpoint (factory setting depending on the Control Unit)
Interconnect the result of the speed calculation with the main setpoint.
p1075 = 586 Supplementary setpoint (factory setting 0)
Interconnect the result of the speed calculation with the supplementary setpoint.

When you use this function, you cannot use any of the digital inputs to monitor the speed.
Speed deviation monitoring (Page 407)

Setting the probe

Parameter Description
p0490 Probe 1) invert (factory setting 0000bin)
The 3rd bit of the parameter value inverts the input signal of digital input 3 for the probe.
p0580 Probe 1) input terminal (factory setting 0)
Interconnect the probe input with a digital input.
p0581 Probe 1) edge(factory setting 0)
Edge to evaluate the probe signal for the actual measuring speed value
0: 0/1 edge
1: 1/0 edge

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

324 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.19 Setpoints

Parameter Description
p0582 Probe 1) Pulses per revolution (factory setting 1)
Number of pulses per revolution.
p0583 Probe 1) Maximum measurement time (factory setting 10 s)
Maximum measurement time for the probe. If there is no new pulse before the maxi‐
mum measuring time elapses, the converter sets the actual speed value in r0586 to
zero.
The time is restarted with the next pulse.
p0585 Probe 1) Gear ratio (factory setting 1)
The converter multiplies the measured speed by the gear ratio before displaying it in
r0586.
r0586 Probe 1) Actual speed value
Result of the speed calculation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 325
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.1 Overview

Overview
Setpoint processing influences the setpoint using the following functions:
• "Invert" inverts the motor direction of rotation.
• The "Inhibit direction of rotation" function prevents the motor from rotating in the incorrect
direction; this function can make sense for conveyor belts, extruders, pumps and fans, for
example.
• The "Skip frequency bands" prevent the motor from being continuously operated within
these skip bands. This function avoids mechanical resonance effects by only permitting the
motor to operate briefly at specific speeds.
• The "Speed limitation" function protects the motor and the driven load against excessively
high speeds.
• The "Ramp-function generator" function prevents the setpoint from suddenly changing. As
a consequence, the motor accelerates and brakes with a reduced torque.
,QKLELW 6NLSIUHTXHQF\ 6SHHG 5DPS
,QYHUW GLUHFWLRQRI EDQGV OLPLWDWLRQ IXQFWLRQ
URWDWLRQ JHQHUDWRU
\ [
)URP  6HWSRLQWIRU
[ \ [ \
VHWSRLQW PRWRUFRQWURO
 [ \
VRXUFH 
W
Figure 8-44 Setpoint processing in the converter

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

326 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.2 Invert setpoint

Function description

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W

S






The function inverts the sign of the setpoint using a binary signal.

Example
To invert the setpoint via an external signal, interconnect parameter p1113 with a binary signal
of your choice.

Table 8-56 Application examples showing how a setpoint is inverted

Parameter Description
p1113 = 722.1 Digital input 1 = 0: Setpoint remains unchanged.
Digital input 1 = 1: Converter inverts the setpoint.
p1113 = 2090.11 Inverts the setpoint via the fieldbus (control word 1, bit 11).

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

p1113[C] BI: Setpoint inversion Dependent on the
converter

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 327
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.3 Inhibit direction of rotation

Function description

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W

S


S


In the factory setting of the converter, both motor directions of rotation are enabled.
Set the corresponding parameter to a value = 1 to permanently block directions of rotation.

Example

Table 8-57 Application examples for inhibiting and enabling a direction of rotation

Parameter Description
p1110[0] = 1 Negative direction of rotation is permanently inhibited.
p1110[0] = 722.3 Digital input 3 = 0: Negative direction of rotation is enabled.
Digital input 3 = 1: Negative direction of rotation is inhibited.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1110[C] BI: Inhibit negative direction 0
p1111[C] BI: Inhibit positive direction 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

328 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.4 Skip frequency bands and minimum speed

Overview
The converter has a minimum speed and four skip frequency bands:
• The minimum speed prevents continuous motor operation at speeds less than the minimum
speed.
• Each skip frequency band prevents continuous motor operation within a specific speed
range.

Function description

Minimum speed

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W
S
\
0$;
0LQLPXP
VSHHG
[ \
 [

Speeds where the absolute value is less than the minimum speed are only possible when the
motor is accelerating or braking.

Skip frequency bands

Additional information on the skip frequency bands is provided in the function diagram.

Parameter

Table 8-58 Minimum speed

Number Name Factory setting

p1051[C] CI: Speed limit of ramp-function generator, positive direction 9733
of rotation
p1052[C] CI: Speed limit of ramp-function generator, negative direction 1086
of rotation
p1080[D] Minimum speed 0 rpm
p1083[D] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive active - rpm
p1085[C] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 329
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

Number Name Factory setting

p1091[D] Skip speed 1 0 rpm
p1092[D] Skip speed 2 0 rpm
p1093[D] Skip speed 3 0 rpm
p1094[D] Skip speed 4 0 rpm
p1098[C] CI: Skip speed scaling 1
r1099 CO/BO: Skip frequency band of status word -
p1101 Skip speed bandwidth 0 rpm
p1106 CI: Minimum speed signal source 0
r1112 CO: Speed setpoint according to minimum limit - rpm
r1114 CO: Setpoint after direction limiting - rpm
r1119 CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input - rpm
r1170 CO: Speed controller setpoint sum - rpm

Note
In order that a stationary motor – after all of the enable signals have been switched on, can
operate at the minimum
speed/minimum velocity once all of the enable signals are available, the direction must be
entered using one of the
following options:
- direction input via small setpoint.
- direction input by inhibiting the negative or positive direction (p1110, p1111).

NOTICE
Incorrect direction of motor rotation if the parameterization is not suitable
If you are using an analog input as speed setpoint source, then for a setpoint = 0 V, noise
voltages can be superimposed on the analog input signal. After the on command, the motor
accelerates up to the minimum frequency in the direction of the random polarity of the noise
voltage. A motor rotating in the wrong direction can cause significant material damage to the
machine or system.
• Inhibit the motor direction of rotation that is not permissible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

330 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.5 Speed limitation

The maximum speed limits the speed setpoint range for both directions of rotation.

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W

S

0LQ
0D[LPXPVSHHG 



S 0D[

The converter generates a message (fault or alarm) when the maximum speed is exceeded.
If you must limit the speed depending on the direction of rotation, then you can define speed
limits for each direction.

Parameters

Table 8-59 Parameters for the speed limitation

Number Name Factory setting

p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1083[D] CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 210000 rpm
p1085[C] CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation 1083
p1086[D] CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation -210000 rpm
p1088[C] CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation 1086

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 331
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

8.20.6 Ramp-function generator

The ramp-function generator in the setpoint channel limits the rate change of the speed setpoint
(acceleration). A reduced acceleration reduces the accelerating torque of the motor. In this case,
the motor reduces the load on the mechanical system of the driven machine.
You can select between two different ramp-function generator types:
• Extended ramp-function generator
The expanded ramp-function generator limits not only the acceleration but also the change
in acceleration (jerk) by rounding the setpoint. In this case, the torque does not rise suddenly
in the motor.
• Basic ramp-function generator
The basic ramp-function generator limits the acceleration, however not the rate the
acceleration changes (jerk).

Extended ramp-function generator

The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the extended ramp-function generator can be set
independently of each other. The optimal times depend on the application, and can lie in the
range from a few 100 ms to several minutes.

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W

[
[

\ W
0D[LPXP
[ VSHHG \
[

W
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPS
GRZQWLPH
(IIHFWLYHUDPSXS (IIHFWLYHUDPSGRZQ
WLPH WLPH

Initial and final rounding permit smooth, jerk-free acceleration and braking.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times of the motor are increased by the rounding times:
• Effective ramp-up time = p1120 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).
• Effective ramp-down time = p1121 + 0.5 × (p1130 + p1131).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

332 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

Parameter

Table 8-60 Additional parameters to set the extended ramp-function generator

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1115 Ramp-function generator selection 1
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time 10 s
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time 30 s
p1130[D] Ramp-function generator initial rounding time 0s
p1131[D] Ramp-function generator final rounding time 2s
p1134[D] Ramp-function generator round‐ [ 0
ing type
0: Continuous smoothing W
1: Discontinuous smoothing \
S 

\ W
S 
W

p1135[D] OFF3 ramp-down time 30 s / 0 s

p1136[D] OFF3 initial rounding time 2s/0s
p1137[D] OFF3 final rounding time 0s

Additional information is provided in the parameter list of the List Manual.

Setting the extended ramp-function generator

Procedure
1. Enter the highest possible speed setpoint.
2. Switch on the motor.
3. Evaluate your drive response.
– If the motor accelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-up time.
An excessively short ramp-up time means that the motor will reach its current limiting
when accelerating, and will temporarily not be able to follow the speed setpoint. In this
case, the drive exceeds the set time.
– If the motor accelerates too fast, then extend the ramp-up time.
– Increase the initial rounding if the acceleration is jerky.
– In most applications, it is sufficient when the final rounding is set to the same value as the
initial rounding.
4. Switch off the motor.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 333
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

5. Evaluate your drive response.

– If the motor decelerates too slowly, then reduce the ramp-down time.
The minimum ramp-down time that makes sense depends on your particular application.
Depending on the Power Module used, for an excessively short ramp-down time, the
converter either reaches the motor current, or the DC link voltage in the converter
becomes too high.
– Extend the ramp-down time if the motor is braked too quickly or the converter goes into
a fault condition when braking.
6. Repeat steps 1 … 5 until the drive behavior meets the requirements of the machine or plant.
You have set the extended ramp-function generator.
❒

Basic ramp-function generator

\ [

[ \ [ \
 [ \

W

[
[

\ W
[ 0D[LPXP \
VSHHG
[

W
5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQ
WLPH

When compared to the extended ramp-function generator, the basic ramp-function

generator has no rounding times.

Parameter

Table 8-61 Parameters for setting the ramp-function generator

Parame‐ Description Factory setting

ter
p1082[D] Maximum speed 1500 rpm
p1115 Ramp-function generator selection 1
p1120[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-up time 10 s
p1121[D] Ramp-function generator ramp-down time 10 s
p1135[D] OFF3 ramp-down time 30 s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

334 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

Changing the ramp-up and ramp-down times in operation

The ramping up and down time of the ramp-function generator can be changed during
operation. The scaling value can come, e.g. from the fieldbus.

Requirements
• You have commissioned the communication between the converter and the control system.
• Free telegram 999 has been set in the converter and in your higher-level control system.
Expanding or freely interconnecting telegrams (Page 250)
• The control sends the scaling value to the converter in PZD 3.

Procedure
1. Set p1138 = 2050[2].
This means that you have interconnected the scaling factor for the ramp-up time with PZD
receive word 3.
2. Set p1139 = 2050[2].
This means that you have interconnected the scaling factor for the ramp-down time with PZD
receive word 3.
The converter receives the value for scaling the ramp-up and ramp-down times via PZD
receive word 3.
❒
Further information is provided on the Internet:
FAQ (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/82604741)

Application example
In the following application example, the higher-level control sets the ramp-up and ramp-down
times of the converter via PROFIBUS.

5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
5HFHLYHGGDWD 5DPSXSWLPH 5DPSGRZQWLPH
3=' U>@ VFDOLQJ VFDOLQJ
3=' U>@ S S
3=' U>@ U>@
3=' U>@

[ \

Figure 8-45 Application example for changing the ramp-function generator times in operation

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 335
Advanced commissioning
8.20 Setpoint processing

Parameter

Table 8-62 Parameters for setting the scaling

Parame‐ Description Factory setting

ter
p1138[C] CI: Ramp-function generator ramp-up time scaling 1
p1139[C] Down ramp scaling 1
r2050 CO: PROFIdrive PZD receive word -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

336 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

8.21 PID technology controller

Overview
3,' The technology controller controls process variables, e.g. pressure, temperature, level or flow.

3,' 6SHHGVHWSRLQW 0RWRUFRQWURO

/HYHOVHWSRLQW

7HFKQRORJ\
FRQWUROOHU
$FWXDOYDOXH

3XPS

Figure 8-46 Example: Technology controller as a level controller

Requirement
The U/f control or the vector control have been set.

Function description

Function diagram
The technology controller is implemented as a PID controller (controller with proportional,
integral, and derivative action).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 337
Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

5DPSXSWLPH S S 

S 6WDUWLQJYDOXH
6FDOLQJ
6HWSRLQW .3 7, 2XWSXW
S  VLJQDO
U
  
   
2XWSXWVLJQDOZLWK
6HWSRLQW &RQWUROOHU HUURU
5DPSGRZQWLPH
HQDEOH
5HVSRQVHWR
S
6PRRWKLQJ HUURUV
S
S
3UHSDUDWLRQ
$FWXDOYDOXH
/LPLWDWLRQ 7G
S
6FDOLQJ 5DPSXSUDPS
,QYHUVLRQ GRZQWLPH
)XQFWLRQI [

(QDEOH 2SHUDWLRQLVHQDEOHG
WKHPRWRULVVZLWFKHGRQ
S

① The converter uses the start value when all the following conditions are simultaneously satisfied:
• The technology controller supplies the main setpoint (p2251 = 0).
• The ramp-function generator output of the technology controller has not yet reached the start value.
Figure 8-47 Simplified representation of the technology controller

Basic settings
The settings required as a minimum are marked in gray in the function diagram:
• Interconnect setpoint and actual values with signals of your choice
• Set ramp-function generator and controller parameters KP, TI and Td.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

338 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

Set controller parameters KP, TI and Td.

Procedure
1. Temporarily set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator (p2257
and p2258) to zero.
2. Enter a setpoint step and monitor the associated actual value.
The slower the response of the process to be controlled, the longer you must monitor the
controller response. Under certain circumstances (e.g. for a temperature control), you need
to wait several minutes until you can evaluate the controller response.

Optimum controller response for applications that do not permit

any overshoot.
The actual value approaches the setpoint without any significant
overshoot.
W

Optimum controller behavior for fast correction and quick com‐

pensation of disturbance components.
The actual value approaches the setpoint and slightly over‐
shoots, maximum 10 % of the setpoint step.
W

The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint.

• Increase the proportional component KP (p2280) and reduce
the integration time TI (p2285).

The actual value only slowly approaches the setpoint with slight
oscillation.
• Increase the proportional component KP (p2280) and reduce
the rate time Td (p2274)
W

The actual value quickly approaches the setpoint, but overshoots

too much.
• Decrease the proportional component KP (p2280) and in‐
crease the integration time TI (p2285).
W

3. Set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator back to their original
value.
You have manually set the technology controller.
❒

Limiting the output of the technology controller

In the factory setting, the output of the technology controller is limited to ± maximum speed.
You must change this limit, depending on your particular application.
Example: The output of the technology controller supplies the speed setpoint for a pump.
The pump should only run in the positive direction.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 339
Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

Parameter

Table 8-63 Basic settings

Number Name Factory setting

r0046[0…31] CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
r0052[0…15] CO/BO: Status word 1 -
r0056[0…15] CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
r1084 CO: Speed limit positive active -
r1087 CO: Speed limit negative active - rpm
p2200[C] BI: Technology controller enable 0
p2252 Technology controller configuration See parameter list
p2253[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 0
p2254[C] CI: Technology controller setpoint 2 0
p2255 Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling 100%
p2256 Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling 100%
p2257 Technology controller ramp-up time 1s
p2258 Technology controller ramp-down time 1s
r2260 CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function gen‐ -%
erator
p2261 Technology controller setpoint filter time constant 0s
r2262 CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter -%
p2263 Technology controller type 0
r2273 CO: Technology controller system deviation -%
p2274 Technology controller differentiation time constant 0s
p2280 Technology controller proportional gain See parameter list
p2285 Technology controller integral time See parameter list
p2286 BI: Hold technology controller integrator 56.13
p2289[C] CI: Technology controller precontrol signal 0
p2306 Technology controller system deviation inversion 0
p2339 Technology controller threshold value for I proportion stop at -s
skip speed
r2344 CO: Technology controller last speed setpoint (smoothed) -%
p2345 Technology controller fault response 0
r2349[0…13] CO/BO: Technology controller status word -
r3889[0…10] CO/BO: ESM status word -

Table 8-64 Limiting the output of the technology controller

Number Name Factory setting

p2290[C] BI: Technology controller limitation enable 1
p2291 CO: Technology controller maximum limiting 100%
p2292 CO: Technology controller minimum limiting 0%
p2293 Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time 1s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

340 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

Number Name Factory setting

r2294 CO: Technology controller output signal -%
p2295 CO: Technology controller output scaling 100%
p2296[C] CI: Technology controller output scaling 2295
p2297[C] CI: Technology controller maximum limiting signal source 1084
p2298[C] CI: Technology controller minimum limiting signal source 1087
p2299[C] CI: Technology controller limitation offset 0
p2302 Technology controller output signal start value 0%

Table 8-65 Adapting the actual value of the technology controller

Number Name Factory setting

p2264[C] CI: Technology controller actual value 0
p2265 Technology controller actual value filter time constant 0s
p2266 CO: Technology controller actual value after filter -%
p2267 Technology controller upper limit actual value 100%
p2268 Technology controller lower limit actual value -100%
p2269 Technology controller gain actual value 100%
p2270 Technology controller actual value function 0
p2271 Technology controller actual value inversion 0
r2272 CO: Technology controller actual value scaled -%

Table 8-66 PID technology controller, fixed values (binary selection)

Number Name Factory setting

p2201[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 1 10%
p2202[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 2 20%
p2203[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 3 30%
p2204[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 4 40%
p2205[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 5 50%
p2206[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 6 60%
p2207[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 7 70%
p2208[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 8 80%
p2209[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 9 90%
p2210[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 10 100%
p2211[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 11 110%
p2212[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 12 120%
p2213[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 13 130%
p2214[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 14 140%
p2215[D] CO: Technology controller fixed value 15 150%
p2216[D] Technology controller fixed value selection method 1
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value active -%

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 341
Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

Number Name Factory setting

r2225 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status -%
word
r2229 Technology controller number actual -

Table 8-67 PID technology controller, fixed values (direct selection)

Number Name Factory setting

p2216[D] Technology controller fixed value selection method 1
p2220[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 0
p2221[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 1 0
p2222[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 2 0
p2223[C] BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 3 0
r2224 CO: Technology controller fixed value active -%
r2225 CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status -%
word
r2229 Technology controller number actual -

Table 8-68 PID technology controller, motorized potentiometer

Number Name Factory setting

r2231 Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint -%
memory
p2235[C] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint, 0
raise
p2236[C] BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint, 0
lower
p2237[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum 100%
value
p2238[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum -100%
value
p2240[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer start value 0%
r2245 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint -%
before RFG
p2247[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time 10 s
p2248[D] Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down 10 s
time
r2250 CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer, setpoint -%
after RFG

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

342 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.21 PID technology controller

Further information
You will find additional information on the following PID controller components on the Internet
at:
• Setpoint input: Analog value or fixed setpoint
• Setpoint channel: Scaling, ramp-function generator and filter
• Actual value channel: Filter, limiting and signal processing
• PID controller: Principle of operation of the D component, inhibiting the I component and the
control sense
• Enable, limiting the controller output and fault response
FAQ (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/92556266)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 343
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22 Motor control

Overview
The converter has two alternative methods to ensure the motor speed follows the configured
speed setpoint:
• U/f control
• Vector control

8.22.1 Reactor, filter and cable resistance at the converter output

Overview
Components between the converter and the motor influence the closed-loop control quality of
the converter:
• Output reactor or sine-wave filter
In the factory setting, for the motor data identification, the converter assumes that neither
output reactor nor sine wave filter are connected at the converter output.
• Motor cable with unusually high cable resistance.
For the motor data identification, the converter assumes a cable resistance = 20 % of the
stator resistance of the cold motor.

Function description
You must correctly set the components between the converter and motor to achieve an
optimum closed-loop control quality

Procedure
1. Set p0010 = 2.
2. Set the cable resistance in p0352.
3. Set p0230 to the appropriate value.
4. Set p0235 to the appropriate value.
5. Set p0010 = 0.
6. Carry out the quick commissioning and the motor identification again.
Commissioning (Page 133)
You have set the reactor, filter and cable resistance between the converter and motor.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

344 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
p0230 Drive filter type, motor side 0
p0235 Number of motor reactors in series 1
p0350[M] Motor stator resistance, cold 0Ω
p0352[M] Cable resistance 0Ω

For further information on parameters, please refer to the parameter list.

8.22.2 U/f control

Overview

6SHHGVHWSRLQW  2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U  U
6RIWVWDUW
0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,
TBVHW

9IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
1)
In the "Flux Current Control (FCC)" U/f version, the converter controls the motor current (starting
current) at low speeds.
Figure 8-48 Simplified function diagram of the U/f control

The U/f control is a speed feedforward control with the following properties:
• The converter sets the output voltage on the basis of the U/f characteristic.
• The output frequency is essentially calculated from the speed setpoint and the number of
pole pairs of the motor.
• The slip compensation corrects the output frequency depending on the load and thus
increases the speed accuracy.
• The omission of a control loop means that the U/f control is stable in all cases.
• In applications with higher speed accuracy requirements, a load-dependent voltage boost
can be selected (flux current control, FCC)
For operation of the motor with U/f control, you must set at least the following subfunctions
appropriate for your application:
• U/f characteristic
• Voltage boost

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 345
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Function description
The converter has different U/f characteristics.

0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U

S

5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\
(&2
PRGH 6HOHFWLRQRIWKH
FKDUDFWHULVWLF
)&& S
U
 

,TBVHW 
IVHW  
S 8VHW


3DUDEROLF 
U


S

3URJUDPPDEOH
U

,QGHSHQGHQWYROWDJH
VHWSRLQW

① The voltage boost of the characteristic improves speed control at low speeds
② With the flux current control (FCC), the converter compensates for the voltage drop in the stator
resistor of the motor
Figure 8-49 Characteristics of U/f control

With increasing speed or output frequency, the converter increases its output voltage U. The
maximum possible output voltage of the converter depends on the line voltage.
The converter can increase the output frequency even at the maximum output voltage. The
motor is then operated with field weakening.
The value of the output voltage at the rated motor frequency p0310 also depends on the
following variables:
• Ratio between the converter size and the motor size
• Line voltage

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

346 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

• Line impedance
• Actual motor torque
The maximum possible output voltage as a function of the input voltage is provided in the
technical data.
Technical data (Page 497)

Table 8-69 The characteristic that matches the application

Requirement Application exam‐ Remark Charac‐ Parameter

ples teristic
The required Conveyor belts, - Linear p1300 = 0
torque is inde‐ roller conveyors, The converter compensates for the Linear p1300 = 1
pendent of the chain conveyors, voltage drops across the stator re‐ with Flux
speed eccentric worm sistance. Recommended for mo‐ Current
pumps, compres‐ tors less than 7.5 kW. Control
sors, extruders,
Precondition: You have set the mo‐ (FCC)
centrifuges, agita‐
tor data according to the rating
tors, mixers
plate and have performed the mo‐
tor identification after quick com‐
missioning.
The required Centrifugal Lower losses in the motor and con‐ Parabolic p1300 = 2
torque increa‐ pumps, radial fans, verter than for a linear characteris‐
ses with the axial fans tic.
speed

Table 8-70 Characteristics for special applications

Requirement Application exam‐ Remark Charac‐ Parameter

ples teristic
Applications Centrifugal If the speed setpoint is reached and ECO p1300 = 4
with a low dy‐ pumps, radial fans, remains unchanged for 5 seconds, mode or
namic response axial fans then the converter reduces its out‐ p1300 = 7
and constant put voltage.
speed As a consequence, the ECO mode
saves energy with respect to the
parabolic characteristic.
The converter Drives in the textile When reaching the maximum cur‐ Precise p1300 = 5
must maintain sector rent limit, the converter only re‐ frequen‐ or
the motor duces the output voltage, but not cy charac‐ p1300 = 6
speed constant the frequency. teristic
for the longest
possible time.
Freely adjusta‐ - - Adjusta‐ p1300 = 3
ble U/f charac‐ ble char‐
teristic acteristic
U/f characteris‐ - The interrelationship between the Inde‐ p1300 = 19
tic with inde‐ frequency and voltage is not calcu‐ pendent
pendent volt‐ lated in the converter, but is speci‐ voltage
age setpoint fied by the user. setpoint

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 347
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms
r0066 CO: Output frequency - Hz
r0071 Output voltage, maximum - Vrms
p0304[M] Rated motor voltage 0 Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p1300[D] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode 0
p1333[D] U/f control FCC starting frequency 0 Hz
p1334[D] U/f control slip compensation starting frequency 0 Hz
p1335[D] Slip compensation scaling 0%
p1338[D] U/f mode resonance damping gain 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

348 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.2.1 Optimizing motor starting

Overview
After selection of the U/f characteristic, no further settings are required in most applications.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
• Load moment of inertia too high
• Load torque too large
• Ramp-up time p1120 too short
To improve the starting behavior of the motor, a voltage boost can be set for the U/f
characteristic at low speeds.

Requirement
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).

Function description

Setting the voltage boost for U/f control

The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 … p1312.

8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U

S
S

S
 S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 8-50 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example

Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in

p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to
overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of
the parameters.

Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 349
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor to the maximum speed with maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in
order to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r0071 Output voltage, maximum Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p1310[D] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent 50%
p1311[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating 0%
p1312[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting 0%

Overview

6SHHGVHWSRLQW  2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
QൺI
U  U

0 8
IVHW 8VHW 2XWSXWYROWDJH
Q I U
6OLSFRPSHQVD ,TBVHW 8IFKDUDFWHUL
WLRQ VWLF
&XUUHQWVHWSRLQW,TBVHW 9ROWDJHERRVW
U
Figure 8-51 Default setting of the U/f control after selecting Standard Drive Control

Selecting application class Standard Drive Control in the quick commissioning adapts the
structure and the setting options of the U/f control as follows:
• Starting current closed-loop control: At low speeds, a controlled motor current reduces the
tendency of the motor to oscillate.
• With increasing speed, the converter changes from closed-loop starting current control to
U/f control with load-dependent voltage boost.
• The slip compensation is activated.
• Soft starting is not possible.
• Reduced setting options

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

350 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Function description

Characteristics after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control

0D[LPXPRXWSXW /LQHDU
YROWDJH
U

IVHW
7HFKQRORJLFDODSSOLFDWLRQ

,TBVHW
S S

5DWHGPRWRUIUHTXHQF\ 
8VHW

3DUDEROLF
U
IVHW 

,TBVHW 
S

① The closed-loop starting current control optimizes the speed control at low speeds
② The converter compensates the voltage drop across the motor stator resistance
Figure 8-52 Characteristics after selecting Standard Drive Control

The application class Standard Drive Control reduces the number of characteristics and
setting options:
• A linear and a parabolic characteristic are available.
• Selecting a technological application defines the characteristics.

Table 8-71 Linear and parabolic characteristics

Requirement Application exam‐ Remark Charac‐ Parameter

ples teristic
The required Conveyor belts, - Linear p0501 = 0
torque is inde‐ roller conveyors,
pendent of the chain conveyors,
speed eccentric worm
pumps, compres‐
sors, extruders,
centrifuges, agita‐
tors, mixers
The required Centrifugal Lower losses in the motor and con‐ Parabol‐ p0501 = 1
torque increa‐ pumps, radial fans, verter than for a linear characteris‐ ic
ses with the axial fans tic.
speed

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 351
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0025 CO: Output voltage, smoothed - Vrms
r0066 CO: Output frequency - Hz
r0071 Output voltage, maximum - Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p501 Technology application 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

352 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.2.2 Optimizing motor starting using Standard Drive Control

Overview
After selecting application class Standard Drive Control, in most applications no additional
settings need to be made.
At standstill, the converter ensures that at least the rated motor magnetizing current flows.
Magnetizing current p0320 approximately corresponds to the no-load current at 50 % … 80 %
of the rated motor speed.
In the following circumstances, the motor cannot accelerate to its speed setpoint after it has
been switched on:
• Load moment of inertia too high
• Load torque too large
• Ramp-up time p1120 too short
The current can be increased at low speeds to improve the starting behavior of the motor.

Requirement
The ramp-up time of the ramp-function generator is, depending on the motor rated power, 1 s
(< 1 kW) … 10 s (> 10 kW).

Function description

Starting current (boost) after selecting the application class Standard Drive Control

8
0D[LPXPRXWSXW
YROWDJH
U
S
S
S

S

 S I
5DWHGPRWRU
IUHTXHQF\
Figure 8-53 The resulting voltage boost using a linear characteristic as example

The converter boosts the voltage corresponding to the starting currents p1310 … p1312.
Increase parameter values p1310 … p1312 in steps of ≤ 5 %. Excessively high values in
p1310 ... p1312 can cause the motor to overheat and switch off (trip) the converter due to
overcurrent.
If message A07409 appears, it is not permissible that you further increase the value of any of
the parameters.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 353
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Procedure
1. Switch on the motor with a setpoint of a few revolutions per minute.
2. Check whether the motor rotates smoothly.
3. If the motor does not rotate smoothly, or even remains stationary, increase the voltage boost
p1310 until the motor runs smoothly.
4. Accelerate the motor with the maximum load.
5. Check that the motor follows the setpoint.
6. If necessary, increase the voltage boost p1311 until the motor accelerates without problem.
In applications with a high break loose torque, you must also increase parameter p1312 in
order to achieve a satisfactory motor response.
You have set the voltage boost.
❒

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r0071 Output voltage, maximum Vrms
p0310[M] Rated motor frequency 0 Hz
p0320[M] Rated motor magnetizing current / short-circuit current 0 Arms
p1310[D] Starting current (voltage boost) permanent 50%
p1311[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when accelerating 0%
p1312[D] Starting current (voltage boost) when starting 0%

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

354 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.3 Vector control

8.22.3.1 Structure of the vector control

Overview
The vector control comprises closed-loop current control and a higher-level closed-loop speed
control.

2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
0D[LPXPVSHHG
&DOFXODWHDFFHOHUD 6OLS  
S 0HDVXUHG
WLRQWRUTXH 7RUTXH YROWDJH
&DOFXODWH SUHFRQWURO 0RWRUDQGFXUUHQWPRGHO 

VSHHGOLPLWV
0HDVXUHG
7UDQVIRU FXUUHQW
7, PDWLRQ
.3 7RUTXH 2XWSXWYROWDJH
6SHHGVHWSRLQW VHWSRLQW 
7UDQVIRU
 PDWLRQ
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU

,TFRQWUROOHU 9ROWDJHDQJOH

9HFWRUFRQWUROZLWK (QFRGHUOHVV
HQFRGHU YHFWRUFRQWURO
0HDVXUHGVSHHG &DOFXODWHGVSHHG
DFWXDOYDOXH DFWXDOYDOXH

&XUUHQWOLPLW
S )OX[VHWSRLQW ,GFRQWUROOHU


8SSHUWRUTXHOLPLW &DOFXODWH 6WDWLFWRUTXHVHWSRLQW

S WRUTXHOLPLWV S
/RZHUWRUTXHOLPLW 6XSSOHPHQWDU\DFFHOHUDWLRQWRUTXH
S S
3RZHUOLPLWZKHQPRWRULQJ 3RZHUOLPLWZKHQJHQHUDWLQJ
S S
1)
for induction motors
2)
Selecting the control mode
3)
Settings that are required
Figure 8-54 Simplified function diagram for vector control with speed controller

Using the motor model, the converter calculates the following closed-loop control signals
from the measured phase currents and the output voltage:
• Current component Iq
• Current component Iq
• Speed actual value for encoderless vector control
The setpoint of the current component Id (flux setpoint) is obtained from the motor data.
For speeds above the rated speed, the converter reduces the flux setpoint along the field
weakening characteristic.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 355
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

When the speed setpoint is increased, the speed controller responds with a higher setpoint
for current component Iq (torque setpoint). The closed-loop control responds to a higher
torque setpoint by adding a higher slip frequency to the output frequency. The higher output
frequency also results in a higher motor slip, which is proportional to the accelerating torque.
Iq and Idcontrollers keep the motor flux constant using the output voltage, and adjust the
matching current component Iq in the motor.
The complete function diagrams 6020 ff. for vector control are provided in the List Manual.

Settings that are required

Restart quick commissioning and select the vector control in quick commissioning.
Quick commissioning with a PC (Page 142)
In order to achieve a satisfactory control response, as a minimum you must set the partial
functions – shown with gray background in the diagram above – to match your particular
application:
• Motor and current model: In the quick commissioning, correctly set the motor data on the
rating plate corresponding to the connection type (Y/Δ), and carry out the motor data
identification routine at standstill.
• Speed limits and torque limits: In the quick commissioning, set the maximum speed
(p1082) and current limit (p0640) to match your particular application. When exiting quick
commissioning, the converter calculates the torque and power limits corresponding to the
current limit. The actual torque limits are obtained from the converted current and power
limits and the set torque limits.
• Speed controller: Start the rotating measurement of the motor data identification. You must
manually optimize the controller if the rotating measurement is not possible.

WARNING
The load falls due to incorrect closed-loop control settings
For encoderless vector control, the converter calculates the actual speed based on an electric
motor model. In applications with pulling loads - e.g. hoisting gear, lifting tables or vertical
conveyors - an incorrectly set motor model or other incorrect settings can mean that the load
falls. A falling load can result in death or serious injury.
• Correctly set the motor data during the quick commissioning.
• Carry out the motor data identification.
• Correctly set the "Motor holding brake" function.
Motor holding brake (Page 271)
• For pulling loads, carefully comply with the recommended settings for vector control.
Advanced settings (Page 364)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

356 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.3.2 Default setting as a result of the application class Dynamic Drive Control
Selecting application class Dynamic Drive Control in the quick commissioning adapts the
structure of the vector control, and reduces the setting options:

Vector control after selecting the ap‐ Vector control without se‐
plication class Dynamic Drive Control lecting an application class
Closed-loop torque control Not possible Possible
without higher-level speed
controller
Droop Not possible Possible
KP- and TIadaptation Simplified Advanced
Hold or set the integral com‐ Not possible Possible
ponent of the speed control‐
ler
Acceleration model for pre‐ Default setting Can be activated
control
Motor data identification at Shortened, with optional transition into Complete
standstill or with rotating operation
measurement

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 357
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.3.3 Adapting the encoder data

Preconditions
• You have selected an encoder type that does not precisely match your encoder, because it is
not included in the list of default encoder types.
• You have completely configured the drive.

Procedure
1. Select the "Motor encoder" screen form.
2. Select the "Encoder data" button.

3. You have access to the following settings in the "Encoder data" screen form:
– You can change all of the encoder data.
– You can select another encoder type. Startdrive only lists the encoder types that are
permitted for the configured interface.
If you wish to set another encoder interface, you must restart the commissioning Wizard.
You have adapted the encoder data.
❒

8.22.3.4 Example for adapting the encoder data

Overview
In the following example, the converter must evaluate an SSI encoder. The encoder data sheet
also includes the following encoder data:

Table 8-72 Excerpt from the data sheet of the absolute encoder

Property Value
Principle of operation Multiturn
Operating voltage 10 V … 30 V
Clock frequency of the SSI interface 100 kHz … 1 MHz
Digital resolution 25 bit (8192 steps x 4096 revolutions)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

358 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Property Value
SSI telegram 25 bit, without parity
Code type Gray

Function description
When configuring the encoder, you must select an encoder type that has the best possible fit to
the real encoder.

Procedure
1. In the commissioning wizard, select multiturn encoder with SSI interface.

Property Value Parameter

Principle of operation Multiturn p0404.2 = 1

2. Complete the commissioning wizard.

3. Select the "Motor encoder" screen form.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 359
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

4. Select the "Encoder data" button.

5. … 10. In the "Encoder data" screen form, adapt the settings corresponding to the data sheet
of your encoder.

 

 




Property Value General encoder da‐ Parameter

ta
Principle of operation Multiturn ③ p0404.2 = 1
Operating voltage 10 V … 30 V ④ p0404.21 = 1
Clock frequency of the SSI 100 kHz … 1 MHz ⑤ p0427 = 100
interface
Digital resolution 25 bit (8192 steps x 4096 ⑥ p0423 = 8192
revolutions) p0421 = 4096
SSI telegram 25 bit, without parity ⑦ p0447 = 25
Code type Gray ⑧ p429.0 = 0



The "Details" tab is used for application-specific settings:

– ⑨ When required, invert the encoder signal.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

360 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

– ⑩ The fine resolution can be separately set for the process data Gx_XIST1 and Gx_XIST2.
2 bit fine resolution is practical for square wave encoders. Typically, sin/cos encoders have
an 11 bit fine resolution.
You have now configured the absolute encoder.
❒

8.22.3.5 Checking the encoder signal

If you use an encoder to measure the speed, you should check the encoder signal before the
encoder feedback is active.

Procedure
1. Set the control mode "encoderless vector control": p1300 = 20.
2. Switch-on the motor with an average speed.
3. Compare parameters r0061 (speed encoder signal in rpm) and r0021 (calculated speed in
rpm) regarding the sign and absolute value.
4. If the signs do not match, invert the speed encoder signal: Set p0410 = 1.
5. If the absolute values of the two values do not match, check the setting of p0408 and the
encoder wiring.
You have ensured that the scaling and polarity of the encoder signal are correct.
❒

8.22.3.6 Optimizing the speed controller

Optimum control response - post optimization not required

Preconditions for assessing the controller response:
• The moment of inertia of the load is constant and does not depend on the speed
• The converter does not reach the set torque limits during acceleration
• You operate the motor in the range 40 % … 60 % of its rated speed
If the motor exhibits the following response, the speed control is well set and you do not
have to adapt the speed controller manually:

The speed setpoint (broken line) increases with the set ramp-up
time and rounding.
The speed actual value follows the setpoint without any over‐
shoot.
W

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 361
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Control optimization required

In some cases, the self optimization result is not satisfactory, or self optimization is not possible
as the motor cannot freely rotate.

Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.

First, the actual speed value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. Before the setpoint reaches its final value, it passes the
actual value. Finally, the actual value approaches the setpoint
without any significant overshoot.
W

In the two cases describe above, we recommend that you manually optimize the speed
control.

Optimizing the speed controller

Requirements
• Torque precontrol is active: p1496 = 100 %.
• The load moment of inertia is constant and independent of the speed.
• The converter requires 10 % … 50 % of the rated torque to accelerate.
When necessary, adapt the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121).

Procedure
1. Switch on the motor.
2. Enter a speed setpoint of approximately 40 % of the rated speed.
3. Wait until the actual speed has stabilized.
4. Increase the setpoint up to a maximum of 60% of the rated speed.
5. Monitor the associated characteristic of the setpoint and actual speed.
6. Optimize the controller by adapting the ratio of the moments of inertia of the load and motor
(p0342):

Initially, the speed actual value follows the speed setpoint with
some delay, and then overshoots the speed setpoint.
• Increase p0342

Initially, the speed actual value increases faster than the speed
setpoint. The setpoint passes the actual value before reaching its
final value. Finally, the actual value approaches the setpoint with‐
out any overshoot.
W • Reduce p0342

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

362 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

7. Switch off the motor.

8. Set p0340 = 4. The converter again calculates the speed controller parameters.
9. Switch on the motor.
10.Over the complete speed range check as to whether the speed control operates satisfactorily
with the optimized settings.
You have optimized the speed controller.
❒
When necessary, set the ramp-up and ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator
(p1120 and p1121) back to the value before optimization.

Mastering critical applications

The drive control can become unstable for drives with a high load moment of inertia and
gearbox backlash or a coupling between the motor and load that can possibly oscillate. In this
case, we recommend the following settings:
• Encoderless vector control - and vector control with encoder
– Increase p1452 (smoothing the speed actual value).
– Increase p1472 (integral time TI): TI ≥ 4 · p1452
– If, after these measures, the speed controller does not operate with an adequate dynamic
performance, then increase p1470 (gain KP) step-by-step.
• Additional settings for vector control with encoder
– Increase p1441 (smoothing the speed actual value): p1441 = 2 … 4 ms.

The most important parameters

Table 8-73 Encoderless speed control

Parameter Description
p0342 Moment of inertia ratio, total to motor (factory setting: 1.0)
p1496 Acceleration precontrol scaling (factory setting: 0 %)
For the rotating measurement of the motor data identification the converter sets the
parameters to 100 %.
p1452 Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (without encoder) (factory set‐
ting: 10 ms)
p1470 Speed controller operation without encoder P gain (factory setting: 0.3)
p1472 Speed controller operation without encoder integral action time (factory setting:
20 ms)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 363
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Table 8-74 Speed control with encoder

Parameter Description
p0342 Moment of inertia ratio, total to motor (factory setting: 1.0)
p1496 Acceleration precontrol scaling (factory setting: 0 %)
For the rotating measurement of the motor data identification the converter sets the
parameters to 100 %.
p1441 Speed controller smoothing time (factory setting: 0 ms)
p1442 Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (factory setting: 4 ms)
p1460 Speed controller operation without encoder P gain (factory setting: 0.3)
p1462 Speed controller operation without encoder integral action time (factory setting:
20 ms)

8.22.3.7 Advanced settings

KP- and TIadaptation

Kp and TI adaptation suppress speed control oscillations that may occur. The "rotating
measurement" of the motor data identification optimizes the speed controller. If you have
performed the rotating measurement, then the Kp- and Tnadaptation has been set.
Additional information is provided in the List Manual:
• Vector control with speed controller: Function diagram 6050
• Vector control after presetting the application class Dynamic Drive Control: Function diagram
6824

Function description
For mechanically coupled drives, there is the risk that the drives oppose one another: Small
deviations in the speed setpoint or actual value of the coupled drives can mean that the drives
are operated with significantly different torques.
The droop function ensures even torque distribution between several mechanically coupled
drives.
The droop function reduces the speed setpoint as a function of the torque setpoint.

'URRS

6HWSRLQWIURP 7RUTXHSUHFRQWURO
.3 7, 7RUTXH
UDPSIXQFWLRQ  VHWSRLQW
JHQHUDWRU


6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
Figure 8-55 Effect of droop in the speed controller

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

364 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r1482 CO: Speed controller I torque output - Nm
p1486 Droop compensation torque 0
p1487 Droop compensation torque scaling 100.0%
p1488[D] Droop input source 0
p1489[D] Droop feedback scaling 0.05
r1490 CO: Droop feedback speed reduction - rpm
p1492[C] BI: Droop feedback enable 0

When droop is active, the ramp-function generators of all of the coupled drives must be set
to have identical ramp-up and ramp-down times as well as rounding-off.
After selecting application class "Dynamic Drive Control", droop is no longer possible.
Additional information is provided in the List Manual, function diagram 6030.

Overview

Special settings for a pulling load

For a pulling load, e.g. a hoisting gear, a permanent force is exerted on the motor, even
when the motor is stationary.
For a pulling load, we recommend that you use vector control with an encoder.

Function description
If you use sensorless vector control with a pulling load, then the following settings are required:
• Set the following parameters:
• When opening the motor holding brake, enter a speed setpoint > 0.
For speed setpoint = 0, and with the motor holding brake open, the load drops because the
induction motor rotates with the slip frequency as a result of the pulling load.
• Set the ramp-up and ramp-down times ≤ 10 s in the ramp-function generator.
• If, in quick commissioning, you have selected application class Dynamic Drive Control then
set p0502 = 1 (technological application: dynamic starting or reversing).

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1610[D] Torque setpoint static (without encoder) 50%
p1750[D] Motor model configuration 0000 0000 0000
1100 bin

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 365
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.3.8 Friction characteristic

Overview
In many applications, e.g. applications with geared motors or belt conveyors, the frictional
torque of the load is not negligible.
The converter provides the possibility of precontrolling the torque setpoint, bypassing the
speed controller. The precontrol reduces overshooting of the speed after speed changes.

.3 71
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 7RUTXH
 VHWSRLQW
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
)ULFWLRQDOWRUTXH
Figure 8-56 Precontrol of the speed controller with frictional torque

The converter calculates the current frictional torque from a friction characteristic with 10
intermediate points.

)ULFWLRQDO VSHHG IULFWLRQDOWRUTXH

WRUTXHLQ1P
 SS  SS
  
  SS  SS
 
 SS  SS
 SS  SS
6SHHGLQUSP
   SS  SS

Figure 8-57 Friction characteristic

The intermediate points of the friction characteristic are defined for positive speeds. In the
negative direction of rotation, the converter uses the intermediate points with a negative
sign.

Function description

Recording a friction characteristic

After quick commissioning, the converter sets the speeds of the intermediate points to values
suitable for the rated speed of the motor. The frictional torque of all intermediate points is
still equal to zero. On request, the converter records the friction characteristic: The converter
accelerates the motor step by step up to the rated speed, measures the frictional torque and
writes the frictional torque into the intermediate points of the friction characteristic.

Requirement
The motor is permitted to accelerate up to the rated speed without endangering persons or
property.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

366 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Procedure
1. Set P3845 = 1: The converter accelerates the motor successively in both directions of rotation
and averages the measurement results of the positive and negative directions.
2. Switch on the motor (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3. The converter accelerates the motor.
During measurement, the converter signals the alarm A07961.
When the converter has determined all the intermediate points of the friction characteristic
without fault code F07963, the converter stops the motor.
You have recorded the friction characteristic.
❒

Adding friction characteristic for the torque setpoint

If you enable the friction characteristic (p3842 = 1), the converter adds the output of the
friction characteristic r3841 to the torque setpoint.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p3820[D] Friction characteristic, value n0 15 rpm
p3821[D] Friction characteristic, value n1 30 rpm
p3822[D] Friction characteristic, value n2 60 rpm
p3823[D] Friction characteristic, value n3 120 rpm
p3824[D] Friction characteristic, value n4 150 rpm
p3825[D] Friction characteristic, value n5 300 rpm
p3826[D] Friction characteristic, value n6 600 rpm
p3827[D] Friction characteristic, value n7 1200 rpm
p3828[D] Friction characteristic, value n8 1500 rpm
p3829[D] Friction characteristic, value n9 3000 rpm
p3830[D] Friction characteristic, value M0 0 Nm
p3831[D] Friction characteristic, value M1 0 Nm
p3832[D] Friction characteristic, value M2 0 Nm
p3833[D] Friction characteristic, value M3 0 Nm
p3834[D] Friction characteristic, value M4 0 Nm
p3835[D] Friction characteristic, value M5 0 Nm
p3836[D] Friction characteristic, value M6 0 Nm
p3837[D] Friction characteristic, value M7 0 Nm
p3838[D] Friction characteristic, value M8 0 Nm
p3839[D] Friction characteristic, value M9 0 Nm
r3840.0…8 CO/BO: Friction characteristic status word -
r3841 CO: Friction characteristic, output - Nm
p3842 Activate friction characteristic 0
p3845 Activate friction characteristic plot 0
p3846[D] Friction characteristic plot ramp-up/ramp-down time 10 s
p3847[D] Friction characteristic plot warm-up period 0s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 367
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Further information on this topic is provided in the List Manual.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

368 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.3.9 Moment of inertia estimator

Overview
From the load moment of inertia and the speed setpoint change, the converter calculates the
accelerating torque required for the motor. Via the speed controller precontrol, the accelerating
torque specifies the main percentage of the torque setpoint. The speed controller corrects
inaccuracies in the precontrol (feed-forward control).

7RUTXHDFWXDOYDOXH
0RPHQWRILQHUWLD
HVWLPDWRU
0RPHQWRILQHUWLD

$FFHOHUDWLQJWRUTXH 7RUTXHSUHFRQWURO

.3 71
6SHHGVHWSRLQW 7RUTXH
 VHWSRLQW
6SHHGDFWXDOYDOXH
6SHHGFRQWUROOHU
Figure 8-58 Influence of the moment of inertia estimator on the speed control

The more precise the value of the moment of inertia in the converter, the lower the
overshoot after speed changes.

,QDFFXUDWHYDOXHRIWKHPRPHQWRILQHUWLD 7KHPRPHQWRILQHUWLDYDOXHLQWKHLQYHUWHU
LQWKHLQYHUWHU FRUUHVSRQGVWRUHDOLW\
6SHHG 6SHHG

6HWSRLQW 6HWSRLQW

W W
Figure 8-59 Influence of the moment of inertia on the speed

Function description
The converter calculates the total moment of inertia of the load and motor. The calculation
comprises the following components:
• Current speed
• Actual motor torque
• Reduce the load

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 369
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

)ULFWLRQDOWRUTXH0 5
&DOFXODWH
PRPHQWRI 0RPHQWRILQHUWLD-
LQHUWLD
0RPHQWRI
6SHHG &DOFXODWHORDG
/RDGWRUTXH0 / LQHUWLD
0RWRUWRUTXH0 0 WRUTXH SUHFRQWURO

Figure 8-60 Overview of the function of the moment of inertia estimator

When using the moment of inertia estimator, we recommend that you also activate the
friction characteristic.
Friction characteristic (Page 366)

How does the converter calculate the load torque?

6SHHG

W
0RWRUWRUTXH0 0
0/

W
,QHUWLDHVWLPDWRULV
DFWLYH

/RDGHVWLPDWRULV W
DFWLYH

W
Figure 8-61 Calculating the load torque

At low speeds, the converter calculates the load torque ML from the actual motor torque.
The calculation takes place under the following conditions:
• Speed ≥ p1226
• Acceleration setpoint < 8 1/s2 (≙ speed change 480 rpm per s)
• Acceleration × moment of inertia (r1493) < 0.9 × p1560

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

370 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

How does the converter calculate the moment of inertia?

6SHHG

S
W
0RWRUWRUTXH00

0/
W
$FFHOHUDWLQJWRUTXH
0%
0LQLPXPWRUTXH
W
0RPHQWRILQHUWLD
HVWLPDWLRQLVDFWLYH

/RDGHVWLPDWRULV W
DFWLYH

&DOFXODWHGPRPHQWRI W
LQHUWLD
U

   W

Figure 8-62 Calculating the moment of inertia

For higher speed changes, the converter initially calculates the accelerating torque MB as
difference between the motor torque MM, load torque ML and frictional torque MR:
MB = MM - ML - MR
Moment of inertia J of the motor and load is obtained from the accelerating torque MB and
angular acceleration α (α = rate at which the speed changes):
J = MB / α
If all of the following conditions are met, the converter calculates the moment of inertia:
• ① The rated accelerating torque MB must satisfy the following two conditions:
– The sign of MB is the same as the direction of the actual acceleration
– MB > p1560 × rated motor torque (r0333)
• ② speed > p1755
• The converter has calculated the load torque in at least one direction of rotation.
• Acceleration setpoint > 8 1/s2 (≙ speed change 480 rpm per s)
③ The converter calculates the load torque again after acceleration.
Moment of inertia precontrol
In applications where the motor predominantly operates with a constant speed, the
converter can only infrequently calculate the moment of inertia using the function described
above. Moment of inertia precontrol is available for situations such as these. The moment
of inertia precontrol assumes that there is an approximately linear relationship between the
moment of inertia and the load torque.
Example: For a horizontal conveyor, in a first approximation, the moment of inertia depends
on the load.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 371
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

0RPHQWRILQHUWLD-

 /RDGWRUTXH0/
Figure 8-63 Moment of inertia precontrol

The relationship between load torque and torque is saved in the converter as linear
characteristic.
• In a positive direction of rotation:
Moment of inertia J = p5312 × load torque ML + p5313
• In a negative direction of rotation:
Moment of inertia J = p5314 × load torque ML + p5315
You have the following options to determine the characteristic:
• You already know the characteristic from other measurements. In this case, you must set the
parameters to known values when commissioning the system.
• The converter iteratively determines the characteristic by performing measurements while
the motor is operational.

Activating the moment of inertia estimator

The moment of inertia estimator is deactivated in the factory setting. p1400.18 = 0,
p1400.20 = 0, p1400.22 = 0.
If you performed the rotating measurement for the motor identification during quick
commissioning, we recommend leaving the moment of inertia estimator deactivated.

Requirements
• You have selected sensorless vector control.
• The load torque must be constant whilst the motor accelerates or brakes.
Typical of a constant load torque are conveyor applications and centrifuges, for example.
Fan applications, for example, are not permitted.
• The speed setpoint is free from superimposed unwanted signals.
• The motor and load are connected to each other with an interference fit.
Drives with slip between the motor shaft and load are not permitted, e.g. as a result of loose
or worn belts.
If the preconditions are not met, you must not activate the moment of inertia estimator.

Procedure
1. Set p1400.18 = 1
2. Check: p1496 ≠ 0
3. Activate the acceleration model of the speed controller pre-control: p1400.20 = 1.
You have activated the moment of inertia estimator.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

372 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

The most important settings

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0333[M] Rated motor torque - Nm
p0341[M] Motor moment of inertia 0 kgm²
p0342[M] Ratio between the total and motor moments of inertia 1
p1400[D] Speed control configuration 0000 0000 0000
0000 1000 0000
0010 0001 bin
r1407.0…27 CO/BO: Status word, speed controller -
r1493 CO: Total moment of inertia, scaled - kgm²
p1496[D] Acceleration precontrol scaling 0%
p1498[D] Load moment of inertia 0 kgm²
p1502[C] BI: Freezing the moment of inertia estimator 0
p1755[D] Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation 210000 rpm

Advanced settings

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1226[D] Speed threshold for standstill detection 20 rpm
p1560[D] Moment of inertia estimator accelerating torque threshold 10%
value
p1561[D] Moment of inertia estimator change time moment of inertia 500 ms
p1562[D] Inertia estimator, change time, load 10 ms
p1563[D] CO: Moment of inertia estimator load torque positive direc‐ 0 Nm
tion of rotation
p1564[D] CO: Moment of inertia estimator load torque negative direc‐ 0 Nm
tion of rotation
p5310[D] Moment of inertia precontrol configuration 0000 bin
r5311[D] Moment of inertia precontrol status word -
p5312[D] Moment of inertia precontrol linear positive 0 s²
p5313[D] Moment of inertia precontrol constant positive 0 kgm²
p5314[D] Moment of inertia precontrol linear negative 0 s²
p5315[D] Moment of inertia precontrol constant negative 0 kgm2

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 373
Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

8.22.4 Torque control

Overview
Torque control is part of the vector control and normally receives its setpoint from the speed
controller output. By deactivating the speed controller and directly entering the torque setpoint,
the closed-loop speed control becomes closed-loop torque control. The converter then no
longer controls the motor speed, but the torque that the motor generates.

2XWSXWIUHTXHQF\
0HDVXUHG
YROWDJH
0RWRUDQGFXUUHQWPRGHO

0HDVXUHG
$GGLWLRQDOWRUTXHVHWSRLQW 7UDQVIRU FXUUHQW
PDWLRQ
7RUTXH 2XWSXW
S 
7RUTXHVHWSRLQW VHWSRLQW YROWDJH
7UDQVIRU
&XUUHQWOLPLW 0D[LPXPVSHHG PDWLRQ
S S ,TFRQWUROOHU 9ROWDJHDQJOH

8SSHUWRUTXHOLPLW
&DOFXODWLRQRI 
S WKHWRUTXH
/RZHUWRUTXHOLPLW OLPLWV )OX[VHWSRLQW ,GFRQWUROOHU

S
0RWRULQJSRZHU *HQHUDWLQJ
OLPLW SRZHUOLPLW
S S
Figure 8-64 Simplified function diagram of the closed-loop torque control

Function description

Typical applications for torque control

The torque control is used in applications where the motor speed is specified by the
connected driven load. Examples of such applications include:
• Load distribution between master and follower drives:
The master drive is speed controlled, the follower drive is torque controlled.
• Winding machines

The most important settings

Preconditions for the correct functioning of the torque control:
• You have set the motor data correctly during the quick commissioning
Quick commissioning with a PC (Page 142)
• You have performed a motor data identification on the cold motor

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

374 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.22 Motor control

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0300 … p0360 Motor data is transferred from the motor type plate during -
quick commissioning and calculated with the motor data
identification
p1300[D] Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode 0
p1511[C] CI: Supplementary torque 1 0
p1520[D] CO: Torque limit, upper 0 Nm
p1521[D] CO: Torque limit, lower 0 Nm
p1530[D] Power limit, motoring 0 kW
p1531[D] Power limit, generating -0.01 kW

Additional information about this function is provided in the parameter list and in function
diagrams 6030 ff in the List Manual.

8.22.5 Application examples for closed-loop motor control

Additional information for setting the closed-loop motor control in certain applications is
provided in the Internet:
Engineering and commissioning series lifting equipment/cranes (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/103156155)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 375
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23.1 ((Elektrisch bremsen))

Overview

Braking with the motor in generating mode

If the motor brakes the connected load electrically, it converts the kinetic energy of the motor
into electrical energy. The electrical energy E released when braking the load is proportional
to the moment of inertia J of the motor and load and to the square of the speed n. The motor
attempts to transfer the energy on to the converter.

Main features of the braking functions

DC braking
DC braking prevents the motor from transferring braking energy to
the converter. The converter impresses a DC current into the mo‐
tor, therefore braking the motor. The motor converts braking en‐
ergy E of the load into heat.
• Advantage: The motor brakes the load without the converter Q
having to process regenerative power.
• Disadvantages: Significant increase in the motor temperature;
no defined braking characteristics; no constant braking torque; Q
no braking torque at standstill; braking energy E is lost as heat;
does not function when the power fails ( ˭-Q

Compound braking W

One version of DC braking. The converter brakes the motor with a

defined ramp-down time and superimposes a DC current on the
output current.

Dynamic braking
Using a braking resistor, the converter converts the electrical en‐
ergy into heat.
• Advantages: Defined braking response; motor temperature
does not increase any further; constant braking torque
• Disadvantages: Braking resistor required; braking energy E is Q
lost in the form of heat

( ˭-Q
W

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

376 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

Braking with energy recovery into the line supply

The converter feeds electrical energy back into the line supply
(energy recovery).
• Advantages: Constant braking torque; the braking energy E is
not completely converted into heat, but regenerated back into
the line supply; suitable for all applications; continuous regen‐
erative operation is possible - e.g. when lowering a suspended Q
load
• Disadvantage: Does not function with a power failure
Q

( ˭-Q
W

Which Power Module permits which braking method?

Electrical braking method Power Modules that can be used

DC braking, compound braking PM240‑2, PM240P‑2
Dynamic braking PM240‑2
Braking with energy recovery into the line supply PM250

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 377
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23.2 DC braking

Overview
DC braking is used for applications where the motor must be actively braked, but where the
converter is neither capable of energy recovery nor does it have a braking resistor.
Typical applications for DC braking include:
• Centrifuges
• Saws
• Grinding machines
• Conveyor belts
DC braking is not permissible in applications involving suspended loads, e.g. lifting
equipment/cranes and vertical conveyors.

Requirement
The DC braking function is possible only for induction motors.

NOTICE
Motor overheating as a result of DC braking
The motor will overheat if you use DC braking too frequently or use it for too long. This may
damage the motor.
• Monitor the motor temperature.
• Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
• If necessary, select another motor braking method.

Function description
With DC braking, a constant braking current flows through the motor. As long as the motor is
rotating, the DC current generates a braking torque.
The following configurations are available for DC braking:
• DC braking initiated by a control command
• DC braking when falling below a starting speed
• DC braking when the motor is switched off

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

378 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

Regardless of the configuration, you also can define the DC braking as a reaction to certain
converter faults.

WARNING
Unexpected motor acceleration
In the following configurations, the converter can accelerate the motor to the set speed
without requiring a further ON command:
- DC braking initiated by a control command
- DC braking when falling below a starting speed
An unexpected acceleration of the motor can cause serious injury or material damage.
• Consider the behavior of the drive in the higher-level controller.

DC braking initiated by a control command

S
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYDWLRQ
W
Q 'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
PRWRU

W
S

U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-65 Activating DC braking via a control command

Set p1231 = 4 and p1230 = control command.

The control command "DC braking activation" activates and deactivates the DC braking:
• 1 signal:
The converter de-energizes the motor for the motor de-excitation time p0347 in order to
demagnetize the motor.
The converter activates the DC braking.
• 0 signal: The drive switches back to normal operation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 379
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

DC braking when falling below a starting speed

S
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYDWLRQ
W
Q

'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ

U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-66 DC braking when falling below a starting speed

Set p1231 = 14 and p1230 = control command.

With an active DC braking command (p1230 = 1 signal), the following occurs:
1. If motor speed < starting speed p1234:
The converter de-energizes the motor for the motor de-excitation time p0347 in order to
demagnetize the motor.
2. The converter activates the DC braking.
3. The drive switches back to normal operation if at least one of the following conditions has
been fulfilled:
– "DC braking duration" p1233 has expired.
– The DC braking command is inactive (p1230 = 0 signal).

DC braking when the motor is switched off

2))RU2)) W

Q 2))RU2))

'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S
PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ

U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-67 DC braking when the motor is switched off

Set p1231 = 5.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

380 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

The following occurs after an OFF1 or OFF3 command:

1. The motor brakes along the OFF1 or OFF3 deceleration ramp to starting speed p1234.
2. The converter de-energizes the motor for the motor de-excitation time p0347 in order to
demagnetize the motor.
3. The converter activates the DC braking.
4. After "DC braking duration" p1233 expires, the converter de-energizes the motor.
If the OFF1 command is deactivated before "DC braking duration" p1233 expires, the
converter terminates the DC braking and switches to normal operation.

DC braking as reaction to a fault

)DXOW

W
Q 2))

'HPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
S
PRWRU
6SHHGDWWKHVWDUWRI'&
EUDNLQJ
W
S
S '&EUDNLQJGXUDWLRQ

U
'&EUDNLQJDFWLYH
W
Figure 8-68 DC braking as a fault reaction

Set p2101[x] = 6 and p2100[x] to the corresponding fault code.

If you have defined the DC braking as a reaction to a fault, then the following will occur:
1. The converter brakes the motor with OFF1.
2. The converter de-energizes the motor for the motor de-excitation time p0347 in order to
demagnetize the motor.
3. The converter activates the DC braking.
4. After "DC braking duration" p1233 expires, the converter de-energizes the motor.

Parameter

Settings for DC braking

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0347[M] Motor de-excitation time 0s
p1230[C] BI: DC braking activation 0
p1231[M] Configuring DC braking 0
p1232[M] DC braking, braking current 0 Arms
p1233[M] DC braking duration 1s
p1234[M] Speed at the start of DC braking 210000 rpm
r1239[8…13] CO/BO: DC braking status word -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 381
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

Table 8-75 Configuring DC braking as a response to faults

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2100[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, fault code 0
p2101[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, reaction 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

382 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23.3 Compound braking

Overview
Compound braking is suitable for applications in which the motor is normally operated at a
constant speed and is only braked down to standstill in longer time intervals.
Typically, the following applications are suitable for compound braking:
• Centrifuges
• Saws
• Grinding machines
• Horizontal conveyors
Compound braking is not permissible for applications with suspended loads, e.g. lifting
equipment/cranes all vertical conveyors.

Function description

:LWKRXWFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ :LWKFRPSRXQGEUDNLQJ

6SHHG

W W $GGLWLYH'&
0RWRUFXUUHQW

W W

'&OLQNYROWDJH
U

W W

Figure 8-69 Motor brakes with and without active compound braking

Compound braking prevents the DC-link voltage increasing above a critical value. The
converter activates compound braking depending on the DC-link voltage. Above a DC-link
voltage threshold (r1282), the converter adds a DC current to the motor current. The DC
current brakes the motor and prevents an excessive increase in the DC-link voltage.

Note
Compound braking is possible only with the U/f control.
Compound braking does not operate in the following cases:
• The "flying restart" function is active
• DC braking is active
• Vector control is selected

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 383
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to compound braking
The motor will overheat if you use compound braking too frequently or for too long. This may
damage the motor.
• Monitor the motor temperature.
• Allow the motor to adequately cool down between braking operations.
• If necessary, select another motor braking method.

Parameter

Table 8-76 Setting and enabling compound braking

Parameter Description Factory setting

r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-on level (U/f) -V
p3856[D] Compound braking current (%) 0%
r3859.0 CO/BO: Compound braking/equal quantity control status word -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

384 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23.4 Dynamic braking

Overview
Dynamic braking processes the regenerative power that occurs during braking of the motor. In
this way, the converter can accelerate and brake the motor with the same dynamic response.
The following are typical applications for dynamic braking:
• Centrifuge
• Horizontal conveyors
• Vertical and inclined conveyors
• Hoisting gear

Requirement
You are using a PM240-2 power module and a braking resistor.

Function description

6SHHG
U

W
'&OLQNYROWDJH U

0D[LPXP'&OLQNYROWDJH U

$FWLYDWLRQWKUHVKROGIRUWKHEUDNLQJ
PRGXOH

%UDNLQJUHVLVWRUEUDNLQJSRZHU W

W
%UDNLQJUHVLVWRU

Q Q

/RDGDFFHOHUDWLQJ0RWRUL]HGRSHUDWLRQ

Q Q

/RDGEUDNLQJ*HQHUDWLQJRSHUDWLRQ

Flow direction of power

Figure 8-70 Simplified representation of dynamic braking when a motor is reversed

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 385
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

The motor supplies regenerative power to the converter when braking. The regenerative
power means that the DC-link voltage in the converter increases. Above the activation
threshold for the braking module, the converter forwards the regenerative power to the
braking resistor. The braking resistor converts the regenerative power into heat, thereby
preventing converter faults due to excessive DC-link voltage.
Factory setting for the activation threshold for the braking module:
• 690 V converter: 1120 V
• 400 V converters: 760 V
• 200 V converter: 385 V

NOTICE
Overload of motor insulation during braking
When the motor brakes, the DC-link voltage, and thus also the voltage load of the motor,
increases. Particularly when you operate a 500 V motor on a 690 V converter, the converter can
overload the motor insulation and damage the motor.
• Reduce the activation threshold for the braking module

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

386 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

Procedure
1. Setting the braking power
Using p0219, you define the maximum braking power that the braking resistor must absorb.
3
3PD[

S

Pmax Maximum braking power of the braking resistor

p021 Maximum braking power of the application
9
Figure 8-71 Example of maximum braking power in an application

p0219 > 0 activates dynamic braking.

Boundary conditions for p0219:
– p0219 is too low:
The converter cannot fully convert the generated braking power into heat. The converter
extends the ramp-down time of the motor in order to reduce the braking power.
– p0219 > maximum braking power of the braking resistor:
The temperature monitoring of the braking resistor can trigger a converter fault.
Connecting the temperature contact of the braking resistor (Page 122)
You can find the maximum braking power of the braking resistor in the Hardware Installation
Manual of the power module.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
The SIZER PC tool supports you when calculating the maximum braking power.
Configuring support (Page 557)
2. If necessary: Reduce the activation threshold for the braking module
You can reduce the activation threshold for the braking module for the following converters:
– 690 V converter
– 400 V converter
We recommend the following settings, particularly when using a 500 V motor:
– Set p0212.8 = 1
– Enter the rated value of the converter supply voltage in p0210.
Enter the voltage value at the intended place of use of the converter, if known, in p0210.
You have now set the dynamic braking.
❒

Example
You can find an example for configuring and commissioning a drive with braking resistor on the
Internet:
Engineering and commissioning series lifting equipment/cranes (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/103156155)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 387
Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0063 CO: Actual speed value - rpm
r0070 CO: Actual DC link voltage value -V
p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p0212 Power unit configuration 0000 0000 bin
p0219 Braking resistor braking power 0 kW
r0297 DC-link voltage overvoltage threshold -V

Further information
Interaction with other functions
When you set the braking power of the braking resistor (p0219 > 0), the converter disables
the Vdc_max control.
Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage (Page 399)
At the same time, p0219 defines the regenerative power limit p1531 for vector control.
Vector control (Page 355)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

388 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.23 Electrically braking the motor

8.23.5 Braking with regenerative feedback to the line

Overview
The typical applications for braking with energy recovery (regenerative feedback into the line
supply) are as follows:
• Hoist drives
• Centrifuges
• Unwinders
For these applications, the motor must brake for longer periods of time.
The converter can feed back up to 100% of its rated power into the line supply (referred to
"High Overload" base load).
Technical data, PM250 Power Module (Page 529)

Parameter

Setting the braking with regenerative feedback to the line

Parameter Description Factory setting

Limiting the regenerative feedback for U/f control (p1300 < 20)
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms
Limiting feedback with vector control (p1300 ≥ 20)
p1531[D] Power limit, generating -0.01 kW

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 389
Advanced commissioning
8.24 Overcurrent protection

8.24 Overcurrent protection

Overview
The U/f control prevents too high a motor current by influencing the output frequency and
the motor voltage (I-max controller).

Requirement
You have selected U/f control.
The application must allow the motor torque to decrease at a lower speed.

Function description
The I-max controller influences the output frequency and the motor voltage.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during acceleration, the I-max controller
extends the acceleration operation.
If the motor load is so high during steady-state operation that the motor current reaches the
current limit, then the I-max controller reduces the speed and the motor voltage until the
motor current returns to the permissible range again.
If the motor current reaches the current limit during deceleration, the I-max controller
extends the deceleration operation.

Changing the settings

The factory setting for proportional gain and the integral time of the I-max controller ensures
faultless operation in the vast majority of cases.
The factory setting of the I-max controller must only be changed in the following exceptional
cases:
• Speed or torque of the motor tend to cause vibrations upon reaching the current limit.
• The converter goes into the fault state with an overcurrent message.

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r0056.0 … 13 CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
p0305[M] Rated motor current 0 Arms
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms
p1340[D] I_max frequency controller proportional gain 0
p1341[D] I_max frequency controller integral time 0.300 s
r1343 CO: I_max controller frequency output - rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

390 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.25 Converter protection using temperature monitoring

8.25 Converter protection using temperature monitoring

Overview
The converter temperature is essentially defined by the following effects:
• The ambient temperature
• The ohmic losses increasing with the output current
• Switching losses increasing with the pulse frequency

Monitoring types
The converter monitors its temperature using the following monitoring types:
• I2t monitoring (alarm A07805, fault F30005)
• Measuring the chip temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05006, fault F30024)
• Measuring the heat sink temperature of the Power Module (alarm A05000, fault F30004)

Function description

Overload response for p0290 = 0

The converter responds depending on the control mode that has been set:
• In vector control, the converter reduces the output current.
• In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If the measure cannot prevent a converter thermal overload, then the converter switches off
the motor with fault F30024.

Overload response for p0290 = 1

The converter immediately switches off the motor with fault F30024.

Overload response for p0290 = 2

We recommend this setting for drives with square-law torque characteristic, e.g. fans.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 391
Advanced commissioning
8.25 Converter protection using temperature monitoring

The converter responds in 2 stages:

1. If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the base-load output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to parameter p1800.
%DVHORDGRXWSXWFXUUHQW

%DVHORDGRXWSXWFXUUHQWIRUD
WHPSRUDULO\UHGXFHGSXOVHIUHTXHQF\

S 3XOVHIUHTXHQF\

Figure 8-72 Derating characteristic and base load output current for overload

Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of thermal overload
cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the converter reduces its output current.
– In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches
off the motor with fault F30024.

Overload response for p0290 = 3

If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency, then the converter reduces its
pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
In spite of the temporarily reduced pulse frequency, the maximum output current remains
unchanged at the value that is assigned to the pulse frequency setpoint. Also see p0290 = 2.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent
a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

392 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.25 Converter protection using temperature monitoring

Overload response for p0290 = 12

The converter responds in 2 stages:
1. If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency setpoint p1800, then the
converter reduces its pulse frequency starting at p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
2. If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the risk of converter thermal
overload cannot be prevented, then stage 2 follows:
– In vector control, the converter reduces the output current.
– In U/f control, the converter reduces the speed.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter re-enables the output current
or speed.
If both measures cannot prevent a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches
off the motor with fault F30024.

Overload response for p0290 = 13

We recommend this setting for drives with a high starting torque.
If you operate the converter with increased pulse frequency, then the converter reduces its
pulse frequency starting at the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
There is no current derating as a result of the higher pulse frequency setpoint.
Once the overload condition has been removed, the converter increases the pulse frequency
back to the pulse frequency setpoint p1800.
If it is not possible to temporarily reduce the pulse frequency, or the measure cannot prevent
a power unit thermal overload, then the converter switches off the motor with fault F30024.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

r0036 CO: Power unit overload I2t %
r0037[0…19] Power unit temperatures °C
p0290 Power unit overload response 2
p0292[0…1] Power unit temperature alarm threshold [0] 5 °C, [1] 15 °C
p0294 Power Module alarm for I2t overload 95%

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 393
Advanced commissioning
8.26 Motor protection with temperature sensor

8.26 Motor protection with temperature sensor

Overview
The converter can evaluate one of the following sensors to protect the motor against
overtemperature:

 702725 • KTY84 sensor

 702725
• Temperature switch (e.g. bimetallic switch)
 702725 • PTC sensor
 702725
˽
• Pt1000 sensor
 702725
 702725

Function description

KTY84 sensor

NOTICE
Overheating of the motor due to KTY sensor connected with the incorrect polarity
If a KTY sensor is connected with incorrect polarity, the motor can be damaged by overheating,
as the converter cannot detect a motor overtemperature condition.
• Connect the KTY sensor with the correct polarity.

Using a KTY sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature and the sensor itself for
wire-break or short-circuit:
• Temperature monitoring:
The converter uses a KTY sensor to evaluate the motor temperature in the range from
-48 °C ... +248 °C.
Set the temperature for the alarm and fault thresholds with parameter p0604 or p0605.
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
• Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 50 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

394 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.26 Motor protection with temperature sensor

Temperature switch
The converter interprets a resistance ≥ 100 Ω as an opened bimetallic switch and responds
according to the setting for p0610.

PTC sensor
˽ The converter interprets a resistance > 1650 Ω as being an overtemperature condition and
responds according to the setting of p0610.
The converter interprets a resistance < 20 Ω as being a short-circuit and responds with alarm
A07015. If the alarm is present for longer than 100 milliseconds, the converter shuts down
with fault F07016.

Pt1000 sensor
˽ Using a Pt1000 sensor, the converter monitors the motor temperature and the sensor itself
for wire breakage and/or short-circuit:
• Temperature monitoring:
Using a Pt1000 sensor, the converter evaluates the motor temperature in the range from
-48 °C ... +248 °C.
Set the temperature for the alarm and fault thresholds with parameter p0604 or p0605.
– Overtemperature alarm (A07910):
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 = 0
– Overtemperature fault (F07011):
The converter responds with a fault in the following cases:
- motor temperature > p0605
- motor temperature > p0604 and p0610 > 0
• Sensor monitoring (A07015 or F07016):
– Wire-break:
The converter interprets a resistance > 2120 Ω as a wire-break and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.
– Short-circuit:
The converter interprets a resistance < 603 Ω as a short-circuit and outputs the alarm
A07015. After 100 milliseconds, the converter changes to the fault state with F07016.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

p0335[M] Type of motor cooling 0
p0601[M] Motor temperature sensor type 0
p0604[M] Mot_temp_mod 2/sensor alarm threshold 130 °C
p0605[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value 145 °C
p0610[M] Motor overtemperature response 12
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 395
Advanced commissioning
8.27 Motor protection by calculating the temperature

8.27 Motor protection by calculating the temperature

Overview
The converter calculates the motor temperature based on a thermal motor model. After
commissioning, the converter sets the thermal motor type to match the motor.
The thermal motor model responds far faster to temperature increases than a temperature
sensor.
If the thermal motor model is used together with a temperature sensor, e.g. a Pt1000, then
the converter corrects the model according to the measured temperature.

Function description

Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors

The thermal motor model 2 for induction motors is a thermal 3-mass model, consisting of
stator core, stator winding and rotor. Thermal motor model 2 calculates the temperatures -
both in the rotor as well as in the stator winding.

S S S S S S!

฀ U
۞L۞ U 
$

)
 •
W 
Figure 8-73 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors

Parameter

Table 8-77 Thermal motor model 2 for induction motors

Number Name Factory setting

r0068[0 … 1] CO: Absolute actual current value - Arms
p0344[M] Motor weight (for thermal motor model) 0 kg
p0604[M] Mot_temp_mod 2/KTY alarm threshold 130 °C
p0605[M] Mot_temp_mod 1/2/sensor threshold and temperature value 145 °C
p0610[M] Motor overtemperature response 12
p0612[M] Mot_temp_mod activation 0000 0010 0000
0010 bin
p0625[M] Motor ambient temperature during commissioning 20 °C
p0627[M] Motor overtemperature, stator winding 80 K
r0632[M] Mot_temp_mod stator winding temperature - °C
p0640[D] Current limit 0 Arms

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

396 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.27 Motor protection by calculating the temperature

Thermal motor model 1 for synchronous motors

Further information about thermal motor model 1 for synchronous motors is provided in the
function charts 8016 and 8017 of the List Manual.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 397
Advanced commissioning
8.28 How do I achieve a motor overload protection in accordance with IEC/UL 61800-5-1?

8.28 How do I achieve a motor overload protection in accordance

with IEC/UL 61800-5-1?

Overview
The thermal motor model of the converter fulfills motor overload protection according to IEC/
UL 61800‑5‑1.
For motor overload protection according to IEC/UL 61800‑5‑1, some parameters of the
thermal motor model may also need to be adjusted.

Requirement
You have correctly entered the motor data during quick commissioning.

NOTICE
Thermal overload of third-party motors due to a trip threshold that is too high
With a Siemens motor, the converter sets the trip threshold of the thermal motor model to
match the motor. With a third-party motor, the converter cannot ensure in every case that the
trip threshold is exactly right for the motor. A trip threshold that is set too high can lead to a
thermal overload, thus causing damage to the motor.
• If required for a third-party motor, reduce the corresponding trip threshold p0605, p0615,
or p5391.

Procedure
1. Set p0610 = 12.
2. Set the following parameters depending on the motor:
– Induction motor:
p0612.1 = 1
p0612.9 = 1
For a motor without temperature sensor: p0625 = 40 °C
– Synchronous motor
p0612.0 = 1
p0612.8 = 1
For a motor without temperature sensor: p0613 = 40 °C
The trip threshold p0605, p0615 or p5391 parameterized in the motor data set may not be
increased.
Changing additional parameters of the thermal motor model can lead to the converter no
longer satisfying the motor overload protection in accordance with IEC/UL 61800‑5‑1.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

398 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.29 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage

8.29 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage

Overview
An electric motor converts electrical energy into mechanical energy to drive the load. If the
motor is driven by its load, e.g. by the inertia of the load during braking, the energy flow
reverses: The motor temporarily operates as generator, and converts mechanical energy into
electrical energy. The electrical energy flows from the motor to the converter. If the converter
cannot output the electrical energy supplied by the motor, e.g. to a braking resistor, then the
converter stores the energy in its DC link capacitance. As a consequence, the DC link voltage
Vdc in the converter is higher.
An excessively high DC link voltage damages the converter and also the motor. As a
consequence, the converter monitors its DC link voltage - and when necessary switches
off the motor and outputs fault "DC link overvoltage".

Function description

Protecting the motor and converter against overvoltage

6SHHG
U

'&OLQNYROWDJH U

9GFBPD[
6ZLWFKLQOHYHO9GFBPD[
FRQWUROOHU

W
9GFBPD[FRQWUROOHUDFWLYH

Q Q Q

PRWRULQJ JHQHUDWLQJ PRWRULQJ

Figure 8-74 Simplified representation of the Vdc_max control

The Vdc_max control extends the motor ramp-down time when braking. Consequently, the
motor feeds only so much energy back into the converter to cover the losses in the converter.
The DC link voltage remains in the permissible range.
The Vdc_max control is not suitable for applications where the motor is in continuous
regenerative operation, e.g. as is the case for cranes and centrifuges.
((Elektrisch bremsen)) (Page 376)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 399
Advanced commissioning
8.29 Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage

The Vdc_max control can only be used with PM240‑2 Power Modules. The Vdc_max control
is not required if you use a braking resistor.
PM250 Power Modules feed back regenerative energy into the line supply. Therefore, the
Vdc_max control is not required for a PM250 Power Module.

Parameters
The parameters differ depending on the motor control mode.

Table 8-78 Parameters for U/f control

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p1280[D] Vdc controller configuration (U/f) 1
r1282 Vdc_max controller switch-on level (U/f) -V
p1283[D] Vdc_max controller, dynamic factor (U/f) 100%
p1284[D] Vdc_max controller time threshold (U/f) 4s
p1290[D] Vdc controller proportional gain (U/f) 1
p1291[D] Vdc controller integral time (U/f) 40 ms
p1292[D] Vdc controller derivative-action time (U/f) 10 ms
p1294 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection (U/f) 0

Table 8-79 Parameters for vector control

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V
p1240[D] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) 1
r1242 Vdc_max controller switch-in level -V
p1243[D] Vdc_max controller, dynamic factor 100%
p1250[D] Vdc controller proportional gain 1
p1251[D] Vdc controller integral time 0 ms
p1252[D] Vdc controller derivative-action time 0 ms
p1254 Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection 0

For further information about this function, see function diagram in the List Manual.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

400 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30 Monitoring the driven load

In many applications, the speed and the torque of the motor can be used to determine
whether the driven load is in an impermissible operating state. The use of an appropriate
monitoring function in the converter prevents failures and damage to the machine or plant.
Examples:
• For fans or conveyor belts, an excessively low torque can mean a broken drive belt.
• For pumps, insufficient torque can indicate a leakage or dry-running.
• For extruders and mixers, an excessive torque together with low speed can indicate machine
blockage.

Functions for monitoring the driven load

The converter provides the following means to monitor the driven load via the torque of the
motor:

0 The stall protection prevents an induction motor from stalling.

The no-load monitoring evaluates the motor current. Insufficient current indicates
that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected with each other.

The blocking protection triggers for a motor current that corresponds to the set
current limit coupled with motor standstill.

The torque monitoring assumes that a specific torque is associated with each speed
for pumps and fans. Insufficient torque indicates that the motor and the load are no
longer mechanically connected.
An excessive torque can indicate problems in the mechanical system of the driven
load, e.g. a mechanically blocked load.

Monitoring the driven load with a binary signal:

The speed monitoring evaluates a periodic binary signal. A signal failure indicates
that the motor and the load are no longer mechanically connected with each other.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 401
Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30.1 Stall protection

Function description
0 If the load of a standard induction motor exceeds the stall torque of the motor, the motor
can also stall during operation on the converter. A stalled motor is stationary and does not
Q develop sufficient torque to accelerate the load.
If the "Motor model fault signal stall detection" r1746 for the time p2178 is present via the
"Motor model error threshold stall detection" p1745, the converter signals "Motor stalled"
and fault F07902.

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r1408[0 … 14] CO/BO: Status word, current controller -
p1745[D] Motor model error threshold stall detection 5%
r1746 Motor model fault signal stall detection -%
p2178[D] Motor stalled delay time 0.01 s
r2198 CO/BO: Status word monitoring functions 2 -

See also
Blocking protection (Page 403)

8.30.2 No-load monitoring

Function description
An insufficient motor current indicates that the motor cable is disconnected.
If the motor current for the time p2180 lies below the current level p2179, the converter
signals the alarm A07929.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

r0068[0 … 1] CO: Absolute actual current value - Arms
p2179[D] Output load detection current limit 0 Arms
p2180[D] Output load detection delay time 2000 ms
r2197[0 … 13] CO/BO: Status word monitoring functions 1 -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

402 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30.3 Blocking protection

Function description
If the mechanical load is too high, the motor may block. For a blocked motor, the motor
current corresponds to the set current limit without the speed reaching the specified setpoint.
If the speed lies below the speed threshold p2175 for the time p2177 while the motor
current reaches the current limit, the converter signals "Motor blocked" and fault F07900.

Parameter

Number Name Factory settings

p0045 Display values of smoothing time constant 4 ms
r0063 CO: Speed actual value - rpm
p2175[D] Motor blocked speed threshold 120 rpm
p2177[D] Motor blocked delay time 3s
r2198 Status word monitoring functions 2 -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 403
Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30.4 Torque monitoring

Function description
In applications with fans, pumps or compressors with the flow characteristic, the torque
follows the speed according to a specific characteristic. An insufficient torque for fans
indicates that the power transmission from the motor to the load is interrupted. For pumps,
insufficient torque can indicate a leakage or dry-running.
The converter monitors the torque based on the envelope curve depending on the speed
against a lower and upper torque.

7RUTXH>1P@
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS

7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS

7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGXSSHUS
7RUTXHWKUHVKROGORZHUS

6SHHG>USP@
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SPD[LPXPVSHHG
6SHHGWKUHVKROGS SVSHHGWKUHVKROG

If the torque lies in the impermissible range longer than time p2192, the converter reacts as
specified in p2181.
The monitoring is not active below speed threshold 1 and above speed threshold 3.

Setting monitoring
1. Operate the drive at three different speeds in succession.
2. Set the speed thresholds p2182 … p2184 to the respective values.
3. Set the torque thresholds for each speed.
The converter displays the current torque in r0031.
4. Set p2193 = 1.
You have now set monitoring.
❒

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r0031 Torque actual value, smoothed -
p2181[D] Load monitoring, response 0
p2182[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 1 150 rpm
p2183[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 2 900 rpm
p2184[D] Load monitoring, speed threshold 3 1500 rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

404 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

Number Name Factory setting

p2185[D] Load monitoring, torque threshold 1, upper 10000000 Nm
p2186[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower 0 Nm
p2187[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, upper 10000000 Nm
p2188[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 2, lower 0 Nm
p2189[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, upper 10000000 Nm
p2190[D] Load monitoring torque threshold 3, lower 0 Nm
p2191[D] Load monitoring torque threshold, no load 0 Nm
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 405
Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30.5 Rotation monitoring

Function description
The converter monitors the speed or velocity of a machine component via an
electromechanic or electronic encoder, e.g. a proximity switch. Examples of how the function
can be used:
• Gearbox monitoring for traction drives and hoisting gear
• Drive belt monitoring for fans and conveyor belts
• Blocking protection for pumps and conveyor belts
The converter checks whether the encoder consistently supplies a 24 V signal during motor
operation. If the encoder signal fails for time p2192, the converter signals fault F07936.

S ',[
9
S W
U[ [ 7  ) S
',[
)

W
Figure 8-75 Function plan and time response of the speed monitoring

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0722 CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status -
p2192[D] Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1
p3232[C] BI: Load monitoring, failure detection 1

Additional information is provided in the List Manual (the parameter list and function
diagram 8013).

Function diagrams
Torque monitoring (Page 404)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

406 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

8.30.6 Speed deviation monitoring

The converter calculates and monitors the speed or velocity of a machine component.
Examples of how the function can be used:
• Gearbox monitoring for traction drives and hoisting gear
• Drive belt monitoring for fans and conveyor belts
• Blocking protection for conveyor belts
You need an electronic sensor, e.g. a proximity switch, for the "Speed monitoring" function.
The converter analyzes an encoder signal at max. 32 kHz.

S S
S S S
 9RXW
S S  
 ', U  U   7

 ', U  PLQ 
 ', U 
 ', U 

S S U>PLQ@

Figure 8-76 Speed deviation monitoring

Connect the encoder to one of the digital inputs DI 24 … 27. In the converter, you must
interconnect the corresponding digital input to function block via p0580; this function block
converts the input signal frequency into speed r0586.
When you use this monitoring function, you cannot use any of the digital inputs as setpoint
source at the same time.
Pulse input as source of setpoint value (Page 324)

Function description

6SHHG
U

W
'LJLWDOLQSXW (QFRGHUVLJQDO
IDLOXUH

6SHHGGHYLDWLRQ W

S

S W
5HVSRQVH

W
Figure 8-77 Time response of the speed monitoring

The converter compares speed r0586 with the actual speed value r2169 and signals an
excessive deviation between the encoder signal and the motor speed. p2181 specifies the
converter response for an excessive deviation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 407
Advanced commissioning
8.30 Monitoring the driven load

1)
The "Probe" subfunction calculates the speed from the pulse signal of the digital input.
Additional information is provided in the List Manual (the parameter list and function
diagram 8013).

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0490 Invert measuring probe 1)
0000 bin
p0580 Measuring probe input terminal 1) 0
p0581 Measuring probe signal edge 1)
0
p0582 Measuring probe pulses per revolution 1) 1
p0583 Maximum measuring probe measurement time 1)
10 s
p0585 Measuring probe gear ratio 1)
1
r0586 CO: Measuring probe speed actual value 1) - rpm
r2169 CO: Actual speed value smoothed messages - rpm
p2181[D] Load monitoring, response 0
p2192 Load monitoring, delay time 10 s
p2193[D] Load monitoring configuration 1
p3230[C] CI: Load monitoring, speed actual value 0
p3231[D] Load monitoring speed deviation 150 rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

408 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.31 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

8.31 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

Overview
If you switch on the motor while it is still rotating, without the "Flying restart" function,
there is a high probability that a fault will occur as a result of overcurrent (F30001 or
F07801). Examples of applications involving an unintentionally rotating motor directly before
switching on:
• The motor rotates after a brief line interruption.
• A flow of air turns the fan impeller.
• A load with a high moment of inertia drives the motor.

Function description
The "Flying restart" function comprises the following steps:
1. After the on command, the converter impresses the search current in the motor and
increases the output frequency.
2. When the output frequency reaches the actual motor speed, the converter waits for the
motor excitation build up time.
3. The converter accelerates the motor to the actual speed setpoint.

212))

W
6SHHG 7KHFRQYHUWHUPDJQHWL]HVWKH
PRWRU

&RQYHUWHURXWSXW
IUHTXHQF\
W
Figure 8-78 Principle of operation of the "flying restart" function

Parameter

Setting "flying restart" function

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1200[D] Flying restart operating mode 0
0 = flying restart is inhibited
1 = Flying restart is enabled, search for the motor in both
directions, start in the direction of the setpoint
4 = Flying restart is enabled, search for the motor only in the
direction of the setpoint

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 409
Advanced commissioning
8.31 Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running

No "Flying restart" function for group drives

It is not permissible that you enable the "Flying restart" function if the converter is
simultaneously driving several motors.
Exception: A mechanical coupling ensures that all of the motors always operate with the
same speed.

Table 8-80 Advanced settings

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0346[M] Motor excitation build-up time 0s
p0347[M] Motor de-excitation time 0s
p1201[C] BI: Flying restart enable signal source 1
p1202[D] Flying restart detection current Factory setting de‐
pendent on the
Power Module
p1203[D] Flying restart search rate factor Factory setting de‐
pendent on the
Power Module

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

410 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.32 Automatic restart

8.32 Automatic restart

Overview
The automatic restart includes two different functions:
• The converter automatically acknowledges faults.
• After a fault occurs or after a power failure, the converter automatically switches-on the
motor again.
The converter interprets the following events as power failure:
• The converter signals fault F30003 (undervoltage in the DC link), after the converter line
voltage has been briefly interrupted.
• All the converter power supplies have been interrupted and all the energy storage devices in
the converter have discharged to such a level that the converter electronics fail.

Function description

Setting the automatic restart function

WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by the active automatic restart function
When the "automatic restart" function is active (p1210 > 1), the motor automatically starts
after a line supply phase. Unexpected movement of machine parts can result in serious injury
and material damage.
• Block off hazardous areas within the machine to prevent inadvertent access.

If it is possible that the motor is still rotating for a longer period of time after a power failure
or after a fault, then you must also activate the "flying restart" function.
Flying restart – switching on while the motor is running (Page 409)
Using p1210, select the automatic restart mode that best suits your application.

$XWRPDWLFUHVWDUWPRGH $5

1R$5 $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH 'RQRWDXWRPDWLFDOO\ $XWRPDWLFDOO\DFNQRZOHGJH

IDXOWV IDXOWV DFNQRZOHGJHIDXOWV IDXOWV
LI212)) 

'RQRWDXWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFK $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ $XWRPDWLFDOO\VZLWFKRQ

RQPRWRU PRWRU PRWRU PRWRU

$IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU $IWHUSRZHU

IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG IDLOXUH IDLOXUHDQG
IDXOWV IDXOWV

S  S  S  S  S  S  S 
Figure 8-79 Automatic restart modes

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 411
Advanced commissioning
8.32 Automatic restart

The principle of operation of the other parameters is explained in the following diagram and
in the table below.

VWVWDUWDWWHPSW QGVWDUWDWWHPSWLV
XQVXFFHVVIXOGXH VXFFHVVIXO
)DXOWDIWHUSRZHUIDLOXUHRU WRDQHZIDXOW
LQRSHUDWLRQ

&RXQWHUVWDUWDWWHPSWV W

S ,IVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHUWKHQIDXOW
S )LVRXWSXW
S
$IWHUS>@WKHLQYHUWHUUHVHWV W
WKHVWDUWDWWHPSWFRXQWHU
$XWRPDWLFDFNQRZOHGJPHQW

W
$XWRPDWLF21FRPPDQG S S

W
6SHHG
W: VXPRIWKHWLPHVIRUDIO\LQJ
W: V W: V UHVWDUWDQGPDJQHWL]LQJWKH
PRWRU
$VWDUWDWWHPSWPXVWKDYHEHHQVXFFHVVIXOZLWKLQ W
S>@,IQRWWKHQIDXOW)LVRXWSXW

1)
The converter automatically acknowledges faults under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1 or 26: Always.
• p1210 = 4 or 6: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or via the
fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
• p1210 = 14 or 16: Never.
2)
The converter attempts to automatically switch the motor on under the following conditions:
• p1210 = 1: Never.
• p1210 = 4, 6, 14, 16, or 26: If the command to switch-on the motor is available at a digital input or
via the fieldbus (ON/OFF1 = 1).
3)
If, after a flying restart and magnetization (r0056.4 = 1) no fault occurs within one second, then the
start attempt was successful.
Figure 8-80 Time response of the automatic restart

Further information is provided in the parameter list.

Advanced settings
If you with to suppress the automatic restart function for certain faults, then you must enter
the appropriate fault numbers in p1206[0 … 9].
Example: p1206[0] = 07331 ⇒ No restart for fault F07331.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

412 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.32 Automatic restart

Suppressing the automatic restart only functions for the setting p1210 = 6, 16 or 26.

Note
Motor starts in spite of an OFF command via the fieldbus
The converter responds with a fault if fieldbus communication is interrupted. For one of the
settings p1210 = 6, 16 or 26, the converter automatically acknowledges the fault and the motor
restarts, even if the higher-level control attempts to send an OFF command to the converter.
• In order to prevent the motor automatically starting when the fieldbus communication fails,
you must enter the fault number of the communication error in parameter p1206.

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

p1206 Automatic restart faults not active 0
p1210 Automatic restart mode 0
p1211 Automatic restart, start attempts 3
p1212 Automatic restart, wait time start attempts 1s
p1213[0] Automatic restart monitoring time 60 s
for restart
p1213[1] Reset automatic restart monitoring time for 0s
startup counter

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 413
Advanced commissioning
8.33 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control)

8.33 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control)

Overview
Kinetic buffering increases the drive availability. The kinetic buffering utilizes the kinetic
energy of the load to buffer line dips and failures. During a line dip, the converter keeps the
motor in the switched-on state for as long as possible. One second is a typical, maximum
buffer time.

Requirement
The following requirements must be fulfilled to practically use the "kinetic buffering" function:
• The driven load has a sufficiently high inertia.
• The application allows a motor to be braked during a power failure.
The Vdc_min control is only possible with PM240‑2 Power Modules.

Function description
When the line supply dips or is interrupted, the DC-link voltage in the converter decreases. At an
adjustable threshold, kinetic buffering intervenes (VDC min control). The VDC min control forces the
load to go into slightly regenerative operation. As a consequence, the converter covers its power
loss and the losses in the motor with the kinetic energy of the load. The load speed decreases,
but the DC-link voltage remains constant during the kinetic buffering. After the line supply
returns, the converter immediately resumes normal operation.

'&OLQNYROWDJH

U

W
9'&PLQFRQWUROOHULV
DFWLYH
W
6SHHG

S
W
2SHUDWLRQ

0RWRULQJ
*HQHUDWLQJ W
3RZHUIDLOXUH

Figure 8-81 Principle mode of operation of kinetic buffering

Parameters

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0056[0…15] CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control -
p0210 Device supply voltage 400 V

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

414 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.33 Kinetic buffering (Vdc min control)

Parameter Description Factory setting

p1240[D] Vdc controller configuration (vector control) 1
p1245[D] Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) 73% … 76%
r1246 Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) -V
p1247[D] Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) 300%
p1255[D] Vdc_min controller, time threshold 0s
p1257[D] Vdc_min controller, speed threshold 50 rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 415
Advanced commissioning
8.34 Efficiency optimization

8.34 Efficiency optimization

Overview
$
%
The efficiency optimization reduces the motor losses as far as possible.
&
Active efficiency optimization has the following advantages:
• Lower energy costs
• Lower motor temperature rise
• Lower motor noise levels
Active efficiency optimization has the following disadvantage:
• Longer acceleration times and more significant speed dips during torque surges.
The disadvantage is only relevant when the motor must satisfy high requirements relating
to the dynamic performance. Even when efficiency optimization is active, the converter
closed-loop motor control prevents the motor from stalling.

Requirement
Efficiency optimization functions under the following preconditions:
• Operation with an induction motor
• Vector control is set in the converter.

Function description

,QYHUWHU

'ULYHQPDFKLQH

9DULDEOH VSHFLILHG
)OX[ 7RUTXH

6SHHG 6SHHG

Figure 8-82 Efficiency optimization by changing the motor flux

The three variables that the converter can directly set, which define efficiency of an induction
motor, are speed, torque and flux.
However, in all applications, speed and torque are specified by the driven machine. As a
consequence, the remaining variable for the efficiency optimization is the flux.
The converter has two different methods of optimizing the efficiency.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

416 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.34 Efficiency optimization

Efficiency optimization, method 2

Generally, energy efficiency optimization method 2 achieves a better efficiency than
method 1.
We recommend that you set method 2.

,QYHUWHU

7KHUPDOPRWRU
PRGHO

(IILFLHQF\
GHSHQGHQWRQWKH
IOX[

2SWLPXPIOX[

Figure 8-83 Determining the optimum flux from the motor thermal model

Based on its thermal motor model, the converter continually determines - for the actual
operating point of the motor - the interdependency between efficiency and flux. The
converter then sets the flux to achieve the optimum efficiency.

)OX[   )OX[  
 

(IILFLHQF\ (IILFLHQF\
 

 (IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVQRWDFWLYH
 (IILFLHQF\RSWLPL]DWLRQLVDFWLYH
Figure 8-84 Qualitative result of efficiency optimization, method 2

Depending on the motor operating point, the converter either decreases or increases the flux
in partial load operation of the motor.

Efficiency optimization, method 1

)OX[VHWSRLQW
S   S 
  S 
Sy
  S 
Sy
3DUWLDOORDGRSHUDWLRQ

1RORDG 7RUTXH
RSHUDWLRQ 5DWHGWRUTXH

Figure 8-85 Reduce the flux setpoint in the partial load range of the motor

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 417
Advanced commissioning
8.34 Efficiency optimization

The motor operates in partial load mode between no-load operation and the rated motor
torque. Depending on p1580, in the partial load range, the converter reduces the flux
setpoint linearly with the torque.

)OX[   

 S 
 S 
(IILFLHQF\
  S 

Figure 8-86 Qualitative result of efficiency optimization, method 1

The reduced flux in the motor partial load range results in higher efficiency.

Parameters

Table 8-81 Efficiency optimization, method 2

Number Name Factory setting

p1401[D] Flux control configuration 0000 0000 0000
0110 bin
p1570[D] CO: Flux setpoint 100%
p3315[D] Efficiency optimization 2 minimum flux limit value 50%
p3316[D] Efficiency optimization 2 maximum flux limit value 110 %

Table 8-82 Efficiency optimization, method 1

Number Name Factory setting

p1570[D] CO: Flux setpoint 100%
p1580[D] Efficiency optimization 80%

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

418 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.35 Line contactor control

8.35 Line contactor control

Overview
$
%
A line contactor disconnects the converter from the line supply, and therefore reduces the
& converter losses when the motor is not operational.

Requirement
The line contactor control requires a 24 V power supply from the converter. The 24 V power
supply must be maintained, even when the line contactor is open.

Function description
The converter controls its own line contactor using a digital output.

'&9  9,1
9  *1',1

.
%,S
 ', U 

. .  '21&

 '212 S
 '2&20  U

Figure 8-87 Line contactor control via DO 2 with feedback signal via DI 3

Activating the line contactor control

Connect the digital output that controls the line contactor with signal r0863.1.
Example for DO 2: p0732 = 863.1.

Line contactor control with feedback signal

Interconnect p0860 with the signal of the corresponding digital input:
• p0860 = 722.x: Feedback signal of an NO contact via DIx
• p0860 = 723.x: Feedback signal of an NC contact via DIx

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 419
Advanced commissioning
8.35 Line contactor control

'2
(QHUJL]HFRQWDFWRU

W
',
/LQHFRQWDFWRUIHHGEDFNVLJQDO
W
S S
Figure 8-88 Line contactor control via DO 2 with feedback signal via DI 3

If the line contactor feedback signal is not available for longer than the time set in p0861,
then the converter issues fault F07300.

Parameter

Number Name Factory setting

r0046.0…n CO/BO: Missing enable signals -
p0860 BI: Line contactor feedback signal 863.1
p0861 Line contactor monitoring time 100 ms
r0863.0…1 CO/BO: Drive coupling status word / control word -
p0867 Power unit main contactor holding time after OFF1 50 ms
p0869 Configuration sequence control 0000 bin
p0870 BI: close main contactor 0

Further information is provided in the parameter list.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

420 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.36 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines

8.36 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines

Overview
$
%
Fluid flow machines, which mechanically control the flow rate using valves or throttle flaps,
& operate with a constant speed corresponding to the line frequency.

/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\
+] +]
3XPS

Figure 8-89 Flow control with pump and throttle connected to a 50 Hz line supply

The lower the flow rate, the poorer the efficiency of the fluid flow machine (pump). The
fluid flow machine (pump) has the poorest efficiency when the throttle or valve is completely
closed. Further, undesirable effects can occur, for example the formation of vapor bubbles in
liquids (cavitation) or the temperature of the medium being pumped can increase.
The converter controls the flow rate by appropriately varying the speed of the fluid flow
machine. By controlling the flow rate, the fluid flow machine operates at the optimum
efficiency for each flow rate. This situation means that in the partial load range less electric
power is required than when controlling the flow rate using valves and throttles.

/LQHVXSSO\ /LQHVXSSO\

,QYHUWHU ,QYHUWHU

+] +]

Figure 8-90 Flow control with pump and converter

Function description

5HTXLUHG The converter calculates the en‐

)ORZUDWHFRQWUROXVLQJ
HOHFWULF ergy saving from the flow charac‐
DWKURWWOHIODS
SRZHU
teristic associated with a mechan‐
ical flow control and the meas‐
LQ J ured electric power that is drawn.
DY
UJ \V The calculation is suitable for cen‐
H
(Q
trifugal pumps, fans, radial and
&RQWUROOLQJWKHIORZUDWH
XVLQJDQLQYHUWHU axial compressors, for instance.

)ORZUDWH

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 421
Advanced commissioning
8.36 Calculating the energy saving for fluid flow machines

Flow characteristic


3RZHULQ  


 6SHHG SRZHU
 SS

  SS
 SS

  SS
 SS

    
6SHHGLQ
Figure 8-91 Factory setting of the flow characteristic

To set the characteristic, you require the following data from the machine manufacturer for
each speed interpolation point:
• The flow rate of the fluid-flow machine associated with the 5 selected converter speeds
• At constant speed, the power drawn which is associated with the 5 flow rates corresponds to
the line frequency and mechanical throttling of the flow rate.

Parameters

Number Name Factory setting

r0039[0...n] CO: Energy display -
p0040 Reset energy consumption display 0
r0041 Energy saved -
r0042[0...n] CO: Process energy display -
p0043 BI: Energy consumption display enabled. 0
p3320[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 1 25
p3321[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 1 0
p3322[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 2 50
p3323[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 2 25
p3324[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 3 77
p3325[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 3 50
p3326[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 4 92
p3327[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 4 75
p3328[0…n] Fluid flow machine power, point 5 100
p3329[0…n] Fluid flow machine speed, point 5 100

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

422 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.37 Switchover between different settings

8.37 Switchover between different settings

Overview
There are applications that require different converter settings.

Example:
Different motors are operated on one converter. Depending on the particular motor, the
converter must operate with the associated motor data and the appropriate ramp-function
generator.

Function description

Drive Data Sets (DDS)

You can set several converter functions differently and then switch over between the
different settings.

Note
You can only switch over the motor data of the drive data sets in the "ready" state with the motor
switched off. The switchover time is approx. 50 ms.
If you do not switch over the motor data together with the drive data sets (i.e. same motor
number in p0826), then the drive data sets can also be switched over in operation.

The associated parameters are indexed (index 0, 1, 2, or 3). Using control commands select
one of the four indexes and therefore one of the four saved settings.
The settings in the converter with the same index are called the drive data set.

6HWSRLQWV 6HWSRLQWSURFHVVLQJ 0RWRUFRQWURO

0
IL[HGVHWSRLQWV
PRWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
MRJJLQJ

3URWHFWLRQ $YDLODELOLW\

RYHUFXUUHQW IO\LQJUHVWDUW
RYHUYROWDJH
''6
RYHUWHPSHUDWXUH
''6
ORDGPRQLWRULQJ ''6
''6

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 423
Advanced commissioning
8.37 Switchover between different settings

Selecting the number of drive data sets

The number of drive data sets (1 ... 4) is defined by parameter p0180.

Parameter Description
p0010 = 0 Drive commissioning: Ready
p0010 = 15 Drive commissioning: Data sets
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)

Copying the drive data sets

Parameter Description
p0819[0] Source drive data set
p0819[1] Target drive data set
p0819[2] = 1 Starts the copy operation

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

p0010 Drive commissioning parameter filter 1
r0051 CO/BO: Drive data set DDS effective -
p0180 Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) 1
p0819[0 … 2] Copy drive data set DDS 0
p0820[C] BI: Drive data set DDS selection, bit 0 0
p0821[C] BI: Drive data set DDS selection, bit 1 0
p0826[M] Motor changeover, motor number 0

Further information
The converter switches the motor data set (MDS) and the power unit data set (PDS) together
with the drive data set (DDS).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

424 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

8.38 Activating licensed functions

8.38.1 Licensing

Purchasing a memory card with license

Procedure
1. Order a memory card - with or without firmware – with the license that you require.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Insert the card into the converter.
4. Switch on the power supply for the converter.
You have activated the licensed function.
❒

Purchasing a license and loading to a memory card

Requirement
You have a memory card without a license.
Recommended memory cards (Page 172)

Procedure
1. Order the license for the function that you require.
2. You receive the "Certificate of License", it contains:
– the software order number
– the license number
– the delivery note number
3. Create the license key using the "WEB License Manager".
License key (Page 426)
4. Insert the card into the converter.
5. Write the license key to the card using STARTER or BOP-2.
Writing the license key to the card (Page 429)
6. Switch off the converter power supply.
7. Switch on the converter power supply again.
You have activated the licensed function.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 425
Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

8.38.2 Creating or displaying the license key

Overview
The WEB License Manager has the following functions:
• Generate the license key for a new license
• Display the licenses on a card
WEB License Manager on the Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/automation/
license (https://workplace.automation.siemens.com/pls/swl-pub/
SWL_MAIN_MENU.NAVIGATION_HEAD?a_lang_id=E&a_action=)

Creating the license key using "WEB License Manager"

Requirements
• You know the license number and the delivery note number from the Certificate of License.
• You know the serial number of your memory card.

Procedure
1. Open the WEB License Manager.
2. Click "Direct access" in the WEB License Manager in the navigation bar.

3. Enter the license number and delivery note number from your Certificate of License.
4. Click "Next".
5. Progress display: "Identify product".
Enter the serial number of the memory card.
6. Select for "Product": SINAMICS G120
7. Click "Next".
If licenses are already assigned to your software, they are displayed here.
8. Click "Next".
9. Progress display: "Select licenses".
The WEB License Manager displays the licenses that you can assign. Select the checkbox for
assignment.
10.Click "Next".

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

426 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

11.Progress display: "Assign licenses".

The WEB License Manager displays a summary of the licenses selected for assignment.
12.Click "Assign".
13.Confirm the following confirmation prompt with OK.
14.Progress display: "Generate license key".
The licenses are permanently assigned to the specified memory card. The license key is
displayed.

15.Save the license key on your PC.

You have created a license key.
❒

Displaying and requesting the license key using the "WEB License Manager"
With this function, the WEB License Manager displays which converter functions are assigned to
which card with which license keys.

Requirement
One of the following requirements must be satisfied:
• You know the serial number of the memory card
• You know the license number of the converter function

Procedure
1. Open the WEB License Manager.
2. Select "Show license key"
3. In the drop-down list, make the entry based on the license key you wish to display or request.
4. Complete the fields below appropriately.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 427
Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

5. Click the "Display license key" button.

6. Enter your e-mail address and click "Request license report".

7. You receive the license report as a PDF. In addition to the actual license key, it includes the
serial number of the memory card and all of the licenses assigned to this memory card.
You have displayed and requested the license key.
❒
A new license is not required if you upgrade/downgrade to older or newer software
versions. For this reason, do not delete the license key from the memory card
(..\KEYS\SINAMICS\KEYS.txt), if you want to switch over to another software version.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

428 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

8.38.3 Writing the license key to the card

Overview
You write the license key to the memory card by writing the individual positions – in an
ascending order – into the bits of parameter p9920, and then subsequently activate the key
using p9921.
The procedure for Startdrive and BOP-2, based on the fictitious "E1MQ-4BEA" license key, is
described below.

Note
If you subsequently purchase an additional license, then you will require a new license key. You
must overwrite the old license key. The new license key can have more than 9 positions.
You must set p9920[0] = 0 in order to reset the license key.

Activating the license key with Startdrive

Procedure
1. Go online and switch over to the parameter view.
2. In the parameter view, go to parameter p9920
3. Enter the license key (example: "E1MQ-4BEA") - always use uppercase letters:
– p9920[0] = E
– p9920[1] = 1
– …
– p9920[7] = E
– p9920[8] = A
4. Set p9921 = 1.
After activation, the converter sets p9921 = 0.
You have activated the license key using Startdrive.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 429
Advanced commissioning
8.38 Activating licensed functions

Activating the license key with BOP-2

Procedure
1. Convert the license key (example:"E1MQ-4BEA") into decimal numbers based on the table
below.
– E = 69, 1 = 49, M = 77, Q = 81, - = 45, 4 = 52, B = 66, E = 69, A = 65
2. Enter the value in ascending order into p9920
– p9920[0] = 69
– p9920[1] = 49
– …
– p9920[7] = 69
– p9920[8] = 65
3. Set p9921 = 1.
After activation, the converter sets p9921 = 0.
You have activated the license key using BOP-2.
❒

Converting the license key for input using the BOP-2

Convert the license code into decimal numbers based on the following ASCII table.

Excerpt of ASCII code

Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal

- 45 C 67 P 80
0 48 D 68 Q 81
1 49 E 69 R 82
2 50 F 70 S 83
3 51 G 71 T 84
4 52 H 72 U 85
5 53 I 73 V 86
6 54 J 74 W 87
7 55 K 75 X 88
8 56 L 76 Y 89
9 57 M 77 Z 90
A 65 N 78 Blank 32
B 66 O 79

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

430 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Alarms, faults and system messages 9
The converter has the following diagnostic types:
• LED
The LEDs at the front of the converter immediately inform you about the most important
converter states.
• System runtime
The system run time is the total time that the converter has been supplied with power since
the initial commissioning.
• Alarms and faults
The converter signals alarms and faults via the following interfaces:
– Fieldbus
– Terminal strip with the appropriate setting
– Interface for an operator panel
– Interface for a PC
• Identification & maintenance data (I&M)
If requested, the converter sends data to the higher-level control via PROFIBUS or PROFINET:
– Converter-specific data
– Plant-specific data

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 431
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

Table 9-1 Explanation of symbols for the following tables

LED is ON
LED is OFF

LED flashes slowly

V

LED flashes quickly

V

LED flashes with variable frequency

Please contact Technical Support for LED states that are not described in the following.

Table 9-2 Basic states

RDY Explanation
Temporary state after the supply voltage is switched on.

The converter is operating fault-free

Commissioning or reset to factory settings

A fault is active

Licensing is not sufficient.

Activating licensed functions (Page 425)

Firmware update is active

Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware
update

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

432 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

Table 9-3 Integrated safety functions

SAFE Explanation
One or more safety functions are enabled, but not active.

One or more safety functions are active and error-free.

The converter has detected a safety function fault and initiated a stop response.

Table 9-4 PROFINET fieldbus

LNK Explanation
Communication via PROFINET is error-free

Device naming is active

No communication via PROFINET

Table 9-5 PROFINET fieldbus

BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
The fieldbus is improperly configured.
RDY In conjunction with a synchronously flashing LED RDY:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a
firmware update

No communication with higher-level controller

RDY In conjunction with an asynchronously flashing LED RDY:
Incorrect memory card

Firmware update failed

Firmware update is active

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 433
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

Table 9-6 PROFIBUS fieldbus

BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active

Fieldbus interface is not being used

The fieldbus is improperly configured.
RDY In conjunction with a synchronously flashing LED RDY:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a
firmware update

No communication with higher-level controller

RDY In conjunction with an asynchronously flashing LED RDY:
Incorrect memory card

Firmware update failed

Firmware update is active

Table 9-7 Fieldbuses via RS 485 interface

BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active
The fieldbus is active, however, the converter is not receiving any process data
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a
firmware update

No fieldbus connection available

RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Incorrect memory card

Firmware update failed

Firmware update is active

Communication via Modbus or USS:

If the fieldbus monitoring is deactivated with p2040 = 0, the BF-LED remains dark,
independent of the communication state.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

434 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

Description of the LED symbols for CANopen

LED is bright

LED flashes slowly

V

LED flashes quickly

V

LED flashes in the "single flash" mode

V

LED flashes in the "double flash" mode

V

LED flashes with variable frequency

Table 9-8 CANopen fieldbus

BF Explanation
Data exchange between the converter and control system is active ("Operational" state)

Fieldbus is in the "Pre-operational" state

Fieldbus is in the "Stopped" state

No fieldbus available
RDY When LED RDY flashes simultaneously:
Firmware update failed

Alarm - limit reached

Error event in the higher-level control system (Error Control Event)

Converter waits until the power supply is switched off and switched on again after a firmware
update

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 435
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.1 Operating states indicated via LEDs

BF Explanation
Incorrect memory card or unsuccessful firmware update

Firmware update is active

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

436 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.2 System runtime

9.2 System runtime

Overview
By evaluating the system runtime of the converter, you can decide whether you must replace
components subject to wear such as fans, motors and gear units.

Function description
The converter starts the system runtime as soon as it is supplied with power. The system runtime
stops when the converter is switched off.
The system runtime comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days):
System runtime = r2114[1] × days + r2114[0] × milliseconds
If r2114[0] has reached a value of 86,400,000 ms (24 hours), the converter sets r2114[0]
the value 0 and increases the value of r2114[1] by 1.
Using system runtime, you can track the chronological sequence of faults and alarms over
time. When a corresponding message is triggered, the converter transfers the parameter
values r2114 to the corresponding parameters of the alarm or fault buffer.

Example

Parameter Description
r2114[0] System runtime (ms)
r2114[1] System runtime (days)

You cannot reset the system runtime.

Parameter

Parameter Description Factory setting

r2114[0 … 1] Total system runtime -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 437
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)

9.3 Identification & maintenance data (I&M)

I&M data
The converter supports the following identification and maintenance (I&M) data.

I&M data Format Explanation Associated param‐ Example for the

eters content
I&M0 u8[64] PROFIBUS Converter-specific data, read only - See below
u8[54] PROFINET
I&M1 Visible String [32] Plant/system identifier p8806[0 … 31] "ak12-ne.bo2=fu1"
Visible String [22] Location code p8806[32 … 53] "sc2+or45"
I&M2 Visible String [16] Date p8807[0 … 15] "2013-01-21 16:15"
I&M3 Visible String [54] Any comment p8808[0 … 53] -
I&M4 Octet String[54] Check signature to track changes for Safe‐ p8809[0 … 53] Values of r9781[0]
ty Integrated. and r9782[0]
This value can be changed by the user.
The test signature is reset to the value
generated by the machine if p8805 = 0 is
used.

When requested, the converter transfers its I&M data to a higher-level control or to a PC/PG
with installed STEP 7 or TIA Portal.

I&M0

Designation Format Example for the con‐ Valid for PROFI‐ Valid for PROFI‐
tent NET BUS
Manufacturer-specific u8[10] 00 … 00 hex --- ✓
MANUFACTURER_ID u16 42d hex (=Siemens) ✓ ✓
ORDER_ID Visible String [20] "6SL3246-0BA22-1FA0" ✓ ✓
SERIAL_NUMBER Visible String [16] "T-R32015957" ✓ ✓
HARDWARE_REVISION u16 0001 hex ✓ ✓
SOFTWARE_REVISION char, u8[3] "V" 04.70.19 ✓ ✓
REVISION_COUNTER u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_ID u16 3A00 hex ✓ ✓
PROFILE_SPECIFIC_TYPE u16 0000 hex ✓ ✓
IM_VERSION u8[2] 01.02 ✓ ✓
IM_SUPPORTED bit[16] 001E hex ✓ ✓

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

438 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history

9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history

Overview
An alarm generally indicates that the converter may no longer be able to maintain the operation
of the motor in future.
The extended diagnostics have an alarm buffer and an alarm history, in which the converter
stores the most recent alarms.

Function description
Alarms have the following properties:
• Incoming alarms have no direct influence on the converter.
• A warning disappears as soon as its cause is eliminated.
• Alarms do not have to be acknowledged.
Alarm code or alarm value describe the cause of the alarm.

Alarm buffer

$ODUPFRGH $ODUPYDOXH $ODUPWLPHUHFHLYHG $ODUPWLPHUHPRYHG

, IORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV

U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ ROG U>@ U>@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ QHZ >@ >@
Figure 9-1 Alarm buffer

The converter saves incoming alarms in the alarm buffer. An alarm includes an alarm code,
an alarm value, and two alarm times:
• Alarm code: r2122
• Alarm value: r2124 in fixed-point format "I32", r2134 in floating-point format "Float"
• Alarm time received = r2145 + r2123
• Alarm time removed = r2146 + r2125
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the alarm times.
System runtime (Page 437)
Up to 8 alarms can be saved in the alarm buffer.
In the alarm buffer, the alarms are sorted according to "Alarm time received". If the alarm
buffer is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, then the converter overwrites the
values with Index [7].

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 439
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history

Alarm history

$ODUPWLPHUHFHLYHG
>@ 2OG
>@
5HPRYHGDODUP >@
>@
$ODUPEXIIHU
>@
>@
>@
,QFRPLQJDODUPZKHQDODUPEXIIHULV >@ 1HZ
FRPSOHWHO\IXOO
>@ 1HZ
>@

$ODUPKLVWRU\
>@
>@
>@ 2OG

Figure 9-2 Shifting removed alarms into the alarm history

If the alarm buffer is completely filled and an additional alarm occurs, the converter shifts all
removed alarms into the alarm history. The following occurs in detail:
1. To create space after position [8] in the alarm history, the converter shifts the alarms already
stored in the alarm history "down" by one or more positions.
If the alarm history is completely full, the converter will delete the oldest alarms.
2. The converter moves the removed alarms from the alarm buffer to the now freed up positions
of the alarm history.
Alarms that have not been removed remain in the alarm buffer.
3. The converter closes gaps in the alarm buffer that occurred when the removed alarms were
shifted in the alarm history by shifting the alarms that have not been removed "up".
4. The converter saves the received alarm as the latest alarm in the alarm buffer.
The alarm history saves up to 56 alarms.
In the alarm history, alarms are sorted according to the "alarm time removed". The latest
alarm to be removed has Index [8].

Parameter

Table 9-9 Parameters of the alarm buffer and the alarm history

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2111 Alarm counter 0
r2122[0 … 63] Alarm code -
r2123[0 … 63] Alarm time received in milliseconds - ms
r2124[0 … 63] Alarm value -
r2125[0 … 63] Alarm time removed in milliseconds - ms

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

440 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.4 Alarms, alarm buffer, and alarm history

Parameter Description Factory setting

r2132 CO: Actual alarm code -
r2134[0 … 63] Alarm value for float values -
r2145[0 … 63] Alarm time received in days -
r2146[0 … 63] Alarm time removed in days -

Table 9-10 Extended settings for alarms

Parameter Description Factory setting

You can change up to 20 different alarms into a fault or suppress alarms:
p2118[0…19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 1

Further information is provided in the parameter list.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 441
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history

9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history

Overview
A fault generally indicates that the converter can no longer maintain the operation of the motor.
The extended diagnostics have a fault buffer and a fault history, in which the converter stores
the most recent faults.

Function description
Faults have the following properties:
• In general, a fault leads to the motor being switched off.
• A fault must be acknowledged.

Fault buffer

)DXOWFRGH )DXOWYDOXH )DXOWWLPHUHFHLYHG )DXOWWLPHUHPRYHG

, IORDW 'D\V PV 'D\V PV

U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ U>@ 2OG U>@ U>@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@ >@ 1HZ >@ >@
Figure 9-3 Fault buffer

The converter saves incoming faults in the fault buffer. A fault includes a fault code, a fault
value, and two fault times:
• Fault code: r0945
The fault code and fault value describe the cause of the fault.
• Fault value: r0949 in fixed-point format "I32", r2133 in floating-point format "Float"
• Fault time received = r2130 + r0948
• Fault time removed = r2136 + r2109
The converter takes its internal time calculation to save the fault times.
System runtime (Page 437)
Up to 8 faults can be saved in the fault buffer.
In the fault buffer, the faults are sorted according to "Fault time received". If the fault buffer
is completely full, and an additional fault is received in the fault buffer, then the converter
overwrites the values with Index [7].

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

442 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history

Acknowledge fault
To acknowledge a fault, you have the following options:
• PROFIdrive control word 1, bit 7 (r2090.7)
• Acknowledge via a digital input
• Acknowledge via the Operator Panel
• Switch off the converter power supply and switch on again
Faults detected during the converter-internal monitoring of hardware and firmware can be
acknowledged only by switching the supply voltage off and on again. In the list of faults in
the List Manual, at the corresponding fault codes you may find the information on limitations
when acknowledging.

Fault history

)DXOWEXIIHU )DXOWKLVWRU\
&RS\IDXOWV

>@ >@ >@ >@

>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@
>@ >@ >@ >@

$FNQRZOHGJHIDXOW
Figure 9-4 Fault history after acknowledging the faults

If at least one of the fault causes in the fault buffer has been removed and you acknowledge
the faults, the following takes place:
1. The converter shifts the values previously saved in the fault history each by eight indices.
The converter deletes the faults that were saved in the indexes [56 … 63] before the
acknowledgement.
2. The converter copies the contents of the fault buffer to the memory locations [8 … 15] in the
fault history.
3. The converter deletes the faults that have been removed from the fault buffer.
The faults that have not been removed are now saved both in the fault buffer and in the fault
history.
4. The converter writes the time of acknowledgement of the removed faults to "Fault time
removed".
The "Fault time removed" of the faults that have not been removed retains the value = 0.
The fault history can contain up to 56 faults.

Deleting the fault history

To delete all faults from the fault history, set parameter p0952 = 0.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 443
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.5 Faults, alarm buffer and alarm history

Parameter

Table 9-11 Parameters of the fault buffer and the fault history

Parameter Description Factory setting

r0945[0 … 63] Fault code -
r0948[0 … 63] Fault time received in milliseconds - ms
r0949[0…63] Fault value -
p0952 Fault cases counter 0
r2109[0 … 63] Fault time removed in milliseconds - ms
r2130[0 … 63] Fault time received in days -
r2131 CO: Actual fault code -
r2133[0 … 63] Fault value for float values -
r2136[0 … 63] Fault time removed in days -

Extended settings for faults

Parameter Description Factory setting

p2100[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, fault number 0
p2101[0…19] Changing the fault reaction, reaction 0
p2118[0…19] Change message type, message number 0
p2119[0 … 19] Change message type, type 1
p2126[0 … 19] Changing the acknowledge mode, fault number 0
p2127[0 … 19] Changing the acknowledge mode 1

Further information is provided in the parameter list.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

444 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

9.6 List of alarms and faults

Axxxxx Alarm
Fyyyyy: Fault

Table 9-12 The most important alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F01000 Software error in the CU Replace CU.
F01001 Floating point exception Switch off CU and switch on again.
F01015 Software error in the CU Upgrade firmware or contact technical support.
F01018 Power-up aborted more than once 1. Switch the module off and on again.
2. After this fault has been output, the module is powered up with the
factory settings.
3. Recommission the converter.
A01028 Configuration error Explanation: Parameterization on the memory card has been created with a
different type of module (Article number, MLFB).
Check the module parameters and recommission if necessary.
F01033 Switching over units: Reference pa‐ Set the value of the reference parameter not equal to 0.0 (p0304, p0305,
rameter value invalid p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
F01034 Switching over units: Calculation of Select the value of the reference parameter so that the parameters involved
the parameter values after refer‐ can be calculated in the per unit notation (p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596,
ence value change unsuccessful p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004).
F01040 Parameters must be saved Save parameters (p0971).
Switch CU off and on again.
F01044 Error loading data from memory Replace memory card or CU.
card
A01053 System overload measured The maximum computing power of the Control Unit was exceeded. The
F01054 System limit exceeded following measures reduce the load on the Control Unit:
• Use only one data record (CDS and DDS)
• Only use the safety features of the basic functions
• Deactivate the technology controller
• Use the simple ramp-function generator rather than the extended ramp-
function generator
• Do not use any free function components
• Reduce the sampling time of the free function blocks
A01101 Memory card not available Insert a memory card or deactivate alarm A01101.
Message for a memory card that is not inserted (Page 175)
F01105 CU: Insufficient memory Reduce number of data sets.
F01122 Frequency at the probe input too Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the probe input.
high
F01205 CU: Time slice overflow Contact technical support.
F01250 CU hardware fault Replace CU.
F01303 The DRIVE-CLiQ does not support A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ
the requested function component.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 445
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F01512 An attempt has been made to estab‐ Create scaling or check transfer value.
lish a conversion factor for scaling
which does not exist
A01590 Motor maintenance interval expired Carry out maintenance and reset the maintenance interval (p0651).
F01600 STOP A initiated Select STO and then deselect again.
F01625 Sign-of-life error in the Safety data • Check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compli‐
ance.
• Check whether an impermissible voltage is connected at one of the dig‐
ital outputs.
• Check whether a digital output is loaded with an impermissible current.
• Check whether additional faults exist and perform diagnostics if appli‐
cable.
• Select STO safety function and then deselect again.
• Switch off the converter power supply and switch it on again.
F01650 Acceptance test required Carry out an acceptance test and create test certificate.
Switch off the Control Unit and switch on again.
F01659 Write task for parameter rejected Cause: The converter should be reset to the factory setting. However, it is not
permissible to reset the safety functions as the safety functions are currently
enabled.
Remedy with operator panel:
p0010 = 30 Parameter reset
p9761 = … Enter password for the safety functions.
p0970 = 5 Reset start safety parameter.
The converter sets p0970 = 5 once it has reset the pa‐
rameters.
Then reset the converter to the factory setting again.
F01662 Error, internal communications • Check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compli‐
ance.
• Check whether an impermissible voltage is connected at one of the dig‐
ital outputs.
• Check whether a digital output is loaded with an impermissible current.
If the checks are unsuccessful:
• Switch off the converter power supply and switch it on again
• Upgrade the firmware
• Contact technical support
A01666 Static 1 signal at the F-DI for safe ac‐ Set failsafe digital input F-DI to a logical 0 signal.
knowledgment
A01698 Commissioning mode active for This message is withdrawn after the Safety commissioning has ended.
safety functions
A01699 Switch-off signal path test required After the next time that the "STO" function is deselected, the message is
withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
F01800 DRIVE-CLiQ: Incorrect hardware/ A DRIVE-CLiQ connection error has occurred.
configuration Check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the Control Unit.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

446 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

A01900 PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram Explanation: A PROFIBUS master is attempting establish a connection with a
faulty faulty configuration telegram.
Check the bus configuration on the master and device side.
A01910 Setpoint timeout The alarm is generated when p2040 ≠ 0 ms and one of the following causes
F01910 is present:
• The bus connection is interrupted
• The Modbus master is switched off
• Communications error (CRC, parity bit, logical error)
• An excessively low value for the fieldbus monitoring time (p2040)
A01920 PROFIBUS: Cyclic connection inter‐ Explanation: The cyclic connection to PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
rupt Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master with
cyclic operation.
F03505 Analog input, wire break Check the wiring for interruptions.
Check the level of the injected signal.
The input current measured by the analog input can be read out in r0752.
A03520 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
A05000 Power Module overtemperature Check the following:
A05001 - Is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
A05002 - Are the load conditions and duty cycle configured accordingly?
A05004 - Has the cooling failed?
A05006 Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
F06310 Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly Check the set supply voltage and if required change (p0210).
set Check the line voltage.
F07011 Motor overtemperature Reduce the motor load.
Check ambient temperature.
Check the wiring and connection of the sensor.
A07012 I2t motor model overtemperature Check and if necessary reduce the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the thermal time constant p0611.
Check overtemperature fault threshold p0605.
A07015 Motor temperature sensor alarm Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameter assignment (p0601).
F07016 Motor temperature sensor fault Make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.
Check the parameterization (p0601).
Deactivate the motor temperature sensor fault evaluation (p0607 = 0).
F07086 Switching over units: Parameter lim‐ Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.
F07088 it violation
F07320 Automatic restart aborted Increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The current number of
start attempts is shown in r1214.
Increase the wait time in p1212 and/or monitoring time in p1213.
Connect an ON command (p0840).
Increase the monitoring time of the power unit or switch off (p0857).
Reduce the wait time for resetting the fault counter p1213[1] so that fewer
faults are registered in the time interval.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 447
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

A07321 Automatic restart active Explanation: The automatic restart (AR) is active. During voltage recovery
and/or when remedying the causes of pending faults, the drive is automat‐
ically switched back on.
F07330 Search current measured too low Increase the search current (p1202), check the motor connection.
A07400 DC-link voltage maximum controller If the controller is not to intervene:
active • Increase the ramp-down time of the ramp-function generator (p1121,
p1135).
• Deactivate the Vdc_max controller.
Motor and converter protection by limiting the voltage (Page 399)
F07403 Lower DC-link voltage threshold The DC-link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 = 5, 6) and the lower
reached DC-link voltage threshold (p1248) was reached in the "Operation" state.
Check the following:
• Line voltage
• Infeed
Reduce the lower DC-link voltage threshold (p1248).
F07404 DC-link voltage monitoring VDCmax The DC-link voltage monitoring p1284 has responded.
Check the following:
• Line voltage
• Braking resistor
• Device supply voltage (p210)
Increase the DC-link voltage threshold (p1284).
A07409 U/f control, current limiting control‐ The alarm automatically disappears after one of the following measures:
ler active • Increase the current limit (p0640).
• Reduce the load.
• Slow down the ramp up to the setpoint speed.
F07412 Commutation angle incorrect (mo‐ An incorrect commutation angle can result in positive feedback in the speed
tor model) controller.
Check the motor phase sequence (wiring, p1820).
Adjust the encoder.
Replace the encoder.
Carry out motor data identification.
Carry out pole position identification.
F07413 Commutation angle incorrect (pole An incorrect commutation angle can result in positive feedback in the speed
position identification) controller.
Check the motor phase sequence (wiring, p1820).
Adjust the encoder.
Replace the encoder.
Carry out pole position identification.
F07426 Technology controller actual value • Adapt the limits to the signal level (p2267, p2268).
limited • Check the actual value scaling (p2264).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

448 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F07801 Motor overcurrent Check current limits (p0640).
Vector control: Check current controller (p1715, p1717).
U/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 … p1346).
Increase the acceleration ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
Check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
Check the motor regarding the star/delta connection and rating plate pa‐
rameterization.
Check power unit / motor combination.
Select the flying restart function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
A07805 Drive: Power unit overload I2t • Reduce the continuous load.
• Adapt the load cycle.
• Check the assignment of rated currents of the motor and power unit.
Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
F07806 Regenerative power limit exceeded Increase the deceleration ramp.
Reduce the driving load.
Use a power unit with higher energy recovery capability.
For vector control, the regenerative power limit in p1531 can be reduced
until the fault is no longer activated.
F07807 Short circuit detected • Check the converter connection on the motor side for any phase-phase
short-circuit.
• Rule out that line and motor cables have been interchanged.
A07850 External alarm 1 … 3 The signal for "external alarm 1" has been triggered.
A07851 Parameters p2112, p2116 and p2117 determine the signal sources for the
A07852 external alarm 1… 3.
Remedy: Remove the causes of these alarms.
F07860 External fault 1 … 3 Remove the external causes for this fault.
F07861
F07862
F07900 Motor blocked Check that the motor can run freely.
Check the torque limits (r1538 and r1539).
Check the parameters of the "Motor blocked" message (p2175, p2177).
F07901 Motor overspeed Activate the precontrol for the speed limiting controller (p1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for overspeed signal p2162.
F07902 Motor stalled Check whether the motor data has been set correctly and perform a motor
identification.
Check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too
low, the drive cannot be magnetized.
Check whether motor cables are disconnected during operation.
A07903 Motor speed deviation Increase p2163 and/or p2166.
Increase the torque, current and power limits.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 449
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

A07904 External armature short-circuit: When closing, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not signal "closed"
"Closed" contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1) within the monitoring time (p1236).
missing Check the following:
• Has the contactor feedback signal been incorrectly connected (p1235)?
• Contactor feedback signal logic (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0:
"Open").
Increase the monitoring time (p1236).
F07905 External armature short-circuit: When opening, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not signal "open"
"Open" contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 0) within the monitoring time (p1236).
missing Check the following:
• Has the contactor feedback signal been incorrectly connected (p1235)?
• Contactor feedback signal logic (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0:
"Open").
Increase the monitoring time (p1236).
A07908 Internal armature short-circuit ac‐ The motor is short-circuited via the power semiconductor (r1239.5 = 1).
tive
F07909 Internal voltage protection: Deacti‐ The converter has activated the "Internal voltage protection" function
vation only active after POWER ON (p1231 = 3). Deactivation of the internal voltage protection (p1231 not
equal to 3) only becomes active after POWER ON.
A07910 Motor overtemperature Check the motor load.
Check the motor's ambient temperature.
Check the KTY84 or PT1000 sensor.
Check the overtemperatures of the thermal model (p0626 ... p0628).
A07920 Torque/speed too low The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope curve.
A07921 Torque/speed too high • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
A07922 Torque/speed out of tolerance • Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
F07923 Torque/speed too low • Check the connection between the motor and the load.
F07924 Torque/speed too high • Adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07927 DC braking active Not required
F7966 Check commutation angle Carry out pole position identification.
F7969 Pole position identification incorrect An error has occurred during the pole position identification.
Check the following:
• Motor connection
• Motor data
A07980 Rotary measurement activated Not required
A07981 No enabling for rotary measurement Acknowledge pending faults.
Establish missing enables (see r00002, r0046).
A07991 Motor identification activated Switch on the motor and identify the motor data.
F07995 Pole position identification unsuc‐ An error has occurred during the pole position identification.
cessful Check the following:
• Motor connection
• Motor data

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

450 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F08501 Setpoint timeout • Check the PROFINET connection.
• Set the controller to RUN mode.
• If the fault occurs repeatedly, check the monitoring time set p2044.
F08502 Monitoring time, sign-of-life expired • Check the PROFINET connection.
F08510 Send configuration data not valid • Check the PROFINET configuration
A08511 Receive configuration data not valid
A08526 No cyclic connection • Activate the control with cyclic operation.
• Check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000,
r61001).
A08565 Consistency error affecting adjusta‐ Check the following:
ble parameters • IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct.
• IP address or station name used twice in the network.
• Station name contains invalid characters.
A08800 PROFIenergy energy-saving mode The PROFIenergy energy-saving mode is active.
active The alarm automatically disappears when the energy-saving mode is exited.
A13000 Licensing is not sufficient You are using functions that require a license, but you don't have the ap‐
propriate licenses.
Activating licensed functions (Page 425)
F13010 Licensing is not sufficient Options requiring a license are used in the converter, and the licensing is not
sufficient.
F13010 Licensing, function module not li‐ At least one function module requiring a license is not licensed.
censed. Deactivate the function module that is not licensed.
F13101 Know-how protection: Copy protec‐ Insert a valid memory card.
tion cannot be activated
F30001 Overcurrent Check the following:
• Motor data, if required, carry out commissioning
• Motor connection method (Υ / Δ)
• U/f operation: Assignment of rated currents of motor and Power Module
• Line quality
• Make sure that the line commutating reactor is connected properly
• Power cable connections
• Power cables for short-circuit or ground fault
• Power cable length
• Line phases
• Short-circuit at the Control Unit output terminals
If this doesn't help:
• U/f operation: Increase the acceleration ramp
• Reduce the load
• Replace the power unit

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 451
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F30002 DC-link voltage overvoltage Increase the ramp-down time (p1121).
Set the rounding times (p1130, p1136).
Activate the DC-link voltage controller (p1240, p1280).
Check the line voltage (p0210).
Check the line phases.
F30003 DC-link voltage undervoltage Check the line voltage (p0210).
F30004 Converter overtemperature Check whether the converter fan is running.
Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Reduce the pulse frequency.
Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
F30005 I2t converter overload Check the rated currents of the motor and Power Module.
Reduce the current limit p0640.
When operating with U/f characteristic: Reduce p1341.
Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
F30011 Line phase failure Check the input fuses of the converter.
Check the motor feeder cables.
F30015 Motor cable phase failure Check the motor cables.
Increase the ramp-up or ramp-down time (p1120).
F30021 Ground fault • Check the power cable connections.
• Check the motor.
• Check the current transformer.
• Check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire might be
broken).
F30022 Power Module: Monitoring UCE Check or replace Power Module.
F30027 Time monitoring for DC link pre- Check the line voltage at the input terminals.
charging Check the line voltage setting (p0210).
F30024 Overtemperature, thermal model • Adapt the duty cycle.
• Check whether the fan is running.
• Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
• Check the motor load.
• Reduce the pulse frequency.
• Reduce the current of the DC current braking.
Converter protection using temperature monitoring (Page 391)
F30035 Overtemperature, intake air • Check whether the fan is running.
F30036 Overtemperature, inside area • Check the fan filter elements.
• Check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
F30037 Rectifier overtemperature See F30035 and, in addition:
• Check the motor load.
• Check the line phases
A30049 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
F30052 Incorrect Power Module data Replace Power Module or upgrade CU firmware.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

452 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Number Cause Remedy

F30053 Error in FPGA data Replace the Power Module.
F30059 Internal fan defective Check the internal fan and if required replace.
F30074 Communications error between There is a communications fault between the Control Unit and the Power
Control Unit and Power Module Module. Possible causes:
• The Control Unit may have been removed or inserted incorrectly.
• The external 24 V Control Unit power supply has dipped to ≤95% of the
rated voltage for ≤3 ms
A30502 DC link overvoltage • Check the device supply voltage (p0210).
• Check the line reactor dimensioning
A30920 Temperature sensor fault Check that the sensor is connected correctly.
F30600 STOP A initiated Select STO and then deselect again.
F30662 CU hardware fault Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical support.
F30664 CU power up aborted Switch CU off and on again, upgrade firmware, or contact technical support.
F30850 Software fault in the Power Module Replace Power Module or contact technical support.
A50001 PROFINET configuration error A PROFINET control is attempting to establish a connection with an incorrect
configuration telegram. Check whether "Shared Device" is activated (p8929
= 2).
A50010 PROFINET name of station invalid Correct the name of station (p8920) and activate (p8925 = 2).
A50020 PROFINET: Second control missing "Shared Device" is activated (p8929 = 2). However, only the connection to a
PROFINET control is available.
Further information on this topic is provided in the List Manual.

Further information on this topic is provided in the List Manual.

Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 453
Alarms, faults and system messages
9.6 List of alarms and faults

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

454 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Corrective maintenance 10
WARNING
Fire or electric shock due to defective components
If an overcurrent protection device is triggered, the converter may be defective. A defective
converter can cause a fire or electric shock.
• Have the converter and the overcurrent protection device checked by a specialist.

Repair

WARNING
Fire or electric shock due to improper repair
Improper repair of the converter may cause malfunctions or result in consequential damage
such as fire or electric shock.
• Only commission the following persons to repair the converter:
– Siemens customer service
– A repair center that has been authorized by Siemens
– Specialist personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating
procedures contained in this manual.
• Only use original spare parts when carrying out repairs.

Recycling and disposal

For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose
of the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use.

Continuous development within the scope of product maintenance

Converter components are being continuously developed within the scope of product
maintenance. Product maintenance includes, for example, measures to increase the
ruggedness or hardware changes which become necessary as components are discontinued.
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article
number.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 455
Corrective maintenance

In the scope of such spare parts-compatible ongoing development, plug connector or

connection positions are sometimes slightly modified. This does not cause any problems
when the components are properly used. Please take this fact into consideration in special
installation situations (e.g. allow sufficient reserve regarding the cable length).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

456 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replace Control Unit

10.1 Replace Control Unit

Overview
You are only permitted to replace a Control Unit with a different Control Unit under certain
preconditions. After the replacement, you must transfer the settings of the Control Unit that was
replaced to the new Control Unit.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply for making a replacement:
• The new Control Unit is the same type as the Control Unit that was replaced.
• The new Control Unit has the same or more recent firmware version than that of the Control
Unit that was replaced.

Description

WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused when using an inappropriate Control Unit
Replacing Control Units of different types can result in incomplete or inappropriate/incorrect
converter settings. As a consequence, machines can unexpectedly move, e.g. speed
oscillation, overspeed or incorrect direction of rotation. Unexpected machine motion can result
in death, injury and/or material damage.
• In all cases not permitted according to the above precondition, you must recommission the
drive after replacing the Control Unit.

WARNING
Unexpected machine motion caused by inappropriate/incorrect converter settings
Missing or incorrect converter settings can lead to unexpected operating states or machine
movements, e.g. a non-functioning EMERGENCY STOP or an incorrect direction of rotation. As
a consequence, machine components or devices can become damaged or death or bodily
injury may result.
• If possible, back up the settings of the Control Unit to be replaced by uploading them to an
external storage medium, e.g. a memory card.
• Transfer the settings of the Control Unit that was replaced per download to the new Control
Unit.
• If you do not have a backup of the converter settings, commission the converter as new
converter.
• After replacing the Control Unit, you must check the function of the converter.

Procedure
1. Switch off the line voltage to the Power Module.
2. If being used, switch off the supply voltage for the digital outputs on the Control Unit.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 457
Corrective maintenance
10.1 Replace Control Unit

3. If being used, switch off the external 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
4. Carefully check that the Control Unit terminals have a no voltage condition.
5. Remove the signal cables from the Control Unit.
6. Remove the defective Control Unit.
7. Mount the new Control Unit on the Power Module.
8. Reconnect the signal cables of the Control Unit.
9. Switch on all of the converter power supplies again.
10.Set the new converter to suit the application:
– If the settings of the replaced Control Unit are backed up on an external storage medium,
transfer the settings using a download.
Downloading the converter settings (Page 459)
– If there is no data backup of the replaced Control Unit, commission the converter as new
converter.
You have replaced the Control Unit.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

458 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2.1 Converter without enabled safety functions

10.2.1.1 Automatic download from the memory card

Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter automatically imports its settings from the inserted memory card.

Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched off.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Switch on the power supply for the converter.
3. The converter loads the settings from the memory card.
4. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028:
The converter accepts the settings that have been loaded.
You have transferred the settings to the converter.
❒

10.2.1.2 Manual downloading from the memory card with the BOP-2

Overview
If you have backed up the settings of several converters on the memory card, the settings
download must be started manually.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 459
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Select the download.
2. 2.

3. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
2.

4. Start the data transfer.

2.

5. Wait until the converter has transferred the settings from the memory card.
2.

6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

You have transferred the settings from the memory card to the converter.
❒

10.2.1.3 Manual download from the memory card using Startdrive

Overview
If you have backed up the settings of several converters on the memory card, the settings
download must be started manually.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

460 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure

   

1. Go online.
2. Select "Online & diagnostics".
3. Select "Back up/reset".
4. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
5. Start the data transfer.
6. Wait until Startdrive has signaled that the data transfer has been completed.
7. Go offline.
You have transferred your settings from a memory card to the converter.
❒

10.2.1.4 Download from BOP-2 operator panel

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the BOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 461
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Attach the Operator Panel to the converter.
2. Select the download from the operator panel to the converter.
2. 2.

3. Start the download.

2.

4. Wait until the download is completed.

2.

5. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.

2. 2.

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

You have transferred the settings to the converter.

❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

462 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2.1.5 Download from IOP-2 operator panel

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the IOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.

Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Connect the operator panel to the converter.
2. Start the download.
0HQX 8S'RZQORDG
'RZQORDGSDQHOWRGULYH
8SORDGGULYHWRSDQHO
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 'HOHWHSDQHOSDUDPHWHUVHW
'ULYHWRPHPRU\FDUG
0HPRU\FDUGWRGULYH

8S 5HQDPHSDUDPHWHUVHW
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

3. Wait until the download is completed.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 463
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

4. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.

0HQX 'LDJQRVWLFV

$FWLYHIDXOWVDODUPV
+LVWRU\
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV ,GHQWLILFDWLRQ0DLQWHQDQFH
,2VWDWXV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQVVWDWXV
8S ,2VLPXODWLRQ
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV
'ULYHHQDEOHV

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
5. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
0HQX ([WUDV
'ULYHIDFWRU\UHVHW
6WDWXVVFUHHQZL]DUG 6DIHIDFWRU\UHVHW
'ULYHLGHQWLW\ 'HIDXOWGDWDVHW
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 3DUDPHWHUVHWWLQJV 3DUDPHWHUVDYLQJPRGH
3DQHOVHWWLQJV 6DYH5$0WR520

8S
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

You transferred the settings to the converter.

❒

10.2.1.6 Download from Smart Access

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the digital terminal device back
into the converter.

Precondition
The following requirements apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

464 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Function description

Procedure
1. Attach the Smart Access to the converter.
2. Connect your terminal device with the Smart Access.
3. Select the file for restoring the converter settings.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 465
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

4. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.

5. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.
You transferred the settings from the Smart Access to the new converter.
❒

10.2.1.7 Download from the PC using Startdrive

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that have been backed up to a PC back to the converter.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

466 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The PC and converter are connected with one another.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Open the Startdrive project that matches the drive.
2. Select "Load to device".
3. Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
You transferred the settings from the PC to the new converter.
❒

10.2.2 Converter with enabled safety functions

10.2.2.1 Automatic download from the memory card

Overview
We recommend that you insert the memory card before switching on the converter. The
converter automatically imports its settings from the inserted memory card.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched off.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Insert the memory card into the converter.
2. Switch on the power supply for the converter.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 467
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

3. The converter loads the settings from the memory card.

4. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Set p0971 = 1 to delete the alarm. Check the converter settings. We recommend that you
recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028:
Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You have transferred the settings to the converter.
❒

10.2.2.2 Manual downloading from the memory card with the BOP-2

Overview
If you have backed up the settings of several converters on the memory card, the settings
download must be started manually.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• You know the password for the converter safety functions.
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
• Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Insert a memory card into the converter.
2. Select the download.
2. 2.

3. Set the number of your data backup. You can back up 99 different settings on the memory
card.
2.

4. Start the data transfer.

2.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

468 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

5. Wait until the converter has transferred the settings from the memory card.
2.

6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

7. Start to commission the safety functions.

2. 2. 2.

8. Enter the password for the safety functions.

2. 2.

9. Confirm the setting of the safety functions.

2. 2.

10.Exit commissioning of the safety functions.

2. 2.

11.Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

12.Switch off the converter power supply.

13.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
14.Switch on the converter power supply again.
15.Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You have transferred the settings from the memory card to the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 469
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2.2.3 Download from BOP-2 operator panel

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the BOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• You know the password for the converter safety functions.
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Attach the Operator Panel to the converter.
2. Select the download from the operator panel to the converter.
2. 2.

3. Start the download.

2.

4. Wait until the download is completed.

2.

5. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.

2. 2.

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

470 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

6. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

7. Start to commission the safety functions.

2. 2. 2.

8. Enter the password for the safety functions.

2. 2.

9. Confirm the setting of the safety functions.

2. 2.

10.Exit commissioning of the safety functions.

2. 2.

11.Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
2. 2.

2.

2.

12.Switch off the converter power supply.

13.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
14.Switch on the converter power supply again.
15.Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You have transferred the settings to the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 471
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2.2.4 Download from IOP-2 operator panel

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the IOP-2 operator panel back into
the converter.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• You know the password for the converter safety functions.
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Attach the Operator Panel to the converter.
2. Start the download.
0HQX 8S'RZQORDG
'RZQORDGSDQHOWRGULYH
8SORDGGULYHWRSDQHO
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 'HOHWHSDQHOSDUDPHWHUVHW
'ULYHWRPHPRU\FDUG
0HPRU\FDUGWRGULYH

8S 5HQDPHSDUDPHWHUVHW
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

3. Wait until the transfer is complete.

4. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.
0HQX 'LDJQRVWLFV

$FWLYHIDXOWVDODUPV
+LVWRU\
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV ,GHQWLILFDWLRQ0DLQWHQDQFH
,2VWDWXV
&RPPXQLFDWLRQVVWDWXV
8S ,2VLPXODWLRQ
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV
'ULYHHQDEOHV

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

472 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

5. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
0HQX ([WUDV
'ULYHIDFWRU\UHVHW
6WDWXVVFUHHQZL]DUG 6DIHIDFWRU\UHVHW
'ULYHLGHQWLW\ 'HIDXOWGDWDVHW
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 3DUDPHWHUVHWWLQJV 3DUDPHWHUVDYLQJPRGH
3DQHOVHWWLQJV 6DYH5$0WR520

8S
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

6. Select menu "Parameter".

0HQX 3DUDPHWHUV
Parameter groups
Search by number
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV My parameters
Changed parameters
Parameter filter

8S
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

7. To start commissioning of the safety functions, set p10 = 95.

8. Enter the password for the safety functions in p9761.
9. To confirm the settings of the safety functions, set p9701 = AC.
10.To exit commissioning of the safety functions, set p10 = 0.
11.Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.
0HQX ([WUDV
'ULYHIDFWRU\UHVHW
6WDWXVVFUHHQZL]DUG 6DIHIDFWRU\UHVHW
'ULYHLGHQWLW\ 'HIDXOWGDWDVHW
6HWXS 3DUDPHWHUV 'LDJQRVWLFV 3DUDPHWHUVHWWLQJV 3DUDPHWHUVDYLQJPRGH
3DQHOVHWWLQJV 6DYH5$0WR520

8S
'RZQORDG 6XSSRUW ([WUDV

12.Switch off the converter power supply.

13.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
14.Switch on the converter power supply again.
15.Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You have replaced the converter and transferred the safety function settings from the
operator panel to the new converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 473
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

10.2.2.5 Download from Smart Access

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that are backed up on the digital terminal device back
into the converter.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• You know the password for the converter safety functions.
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. Attach the Smart Access to the converter.
2. Connect your terminal device with the Smart Access.
3. Select the file for restoring the converter settings.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

474 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

4. Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.

5. After loading, check whether the converter outputs Alarm A01028.

– Alarm A01028:
The loaded settings are not compatible with the converter.
Delete the alarm with p0971 = 1.
Recommission the drive.
– No alarm A01028: Proceed with the next step.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 475
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

6. Select menu "Parameter".

7. To start commissioning of the safety functions, set p10 = 95.

8. Enter the password for the safety functions in p9761.
9. To confirm the settings of the safety functions, set p9701 = AC.
10.To exit commissioning of the safety functions, set p10 = 0.
11.Back up the settings so that they are protected against power failure.

12.Switch off the converter power supply.

13.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
14.Switch on the converter power supply again.
15.Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

476 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

You transferred the settings from the Smart Access to the new converter.
❒

10.2.2.6 Download from the PC using Startdrive

Overview
You can transfer the converter settings that have been backed up to a PC back to the converter.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The converter power supply has been switched on.
• The PC and converter are connected with one another via a USB cable or via the fieldbus.
• The converter settings are not protected against copying.
Download with active know-how protection with copy protection (Page 478)

Function description

Procedure
1. In Startdrive, open the project that matches the drive.
2. Select "Load to device".
3. Connect Startdrive online with the drive.
The converter signals faults after the download. Ignore these faults, as they will be
automatically acknowledged by the following steps.
4. Press the "Start safety commissioning" button.

5. Enter the password for the safety functions.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 477
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

6. Press the "End safety commissioning" button.

7. Confirm the prompt for saving your settings (copy RAM to ROM).
8. Disconnect the online connection.
9. Switch off the converter power supply.
10.Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
11.Switch on the converter power supply again.
12.Perform a reduced acceptance test.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You transferred the settings from the PC to the new converter.
❒

10.2.3 Download with active know-how protection with copy protection

Overview
The know-how protection function prevents converter settings from being copied.
There are two options to avoid recommissioning after a converter has been replaced.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply:
• The end user uses a SIEMENS memory card.
• The machine manufacturer (OEM) has an identical machine.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

478 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Function description

Procedure 1: The machine manufacturer only knows the serial number of the new
converter
1. The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the converter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new converter?
2. The machine manufacturer performs the following steps online on the prototype machine:
– Deactivating know-how protection
Activating and deactivating know-how protection (Page 190)
– Enter the serial number of the new converter in p7759.
– Enter the serial number of the inserted memory card as reference serial number in p7769.
– Activate know-how protection with copy protection. "Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated.
– Write the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card.
– Send the memory card to the end customer.
3. The end user inserts the memory card.
4. The end user switches on the converter power supply.
5. The converter checks the serial numbers of the card and the converter, and when there is a
match the converter goes into the "Ready for switching on" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the converter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory
card).
The settings have been transferred to the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 479
Corrective maintenance
10.2 Downloading the converter settings

Procedure 2: The machine manufacturer knows the serial number of the new converter
and the serial number of the memory card
1. The end customer provides the machine manufacturer with the following information:
– For which machine must the converter be replaced?
– What is the serial number (r7758) of the new converter?
– What is the serial number of the memory card?
2. The machine manufacturer performs the following steps online on the prototype machine:
– Deactivating know-how protection
Activating and deactivating know-how protection (Page 190)
– Enter the serial number of the new converter in p7759.
– Enter the serial number of the customer's memory card as reference serial number in
p7769.
– Activate know-how protection with copy protection. "Copy RAM to ROM" must be
activated.
– Write the configuration with p0971 = 1 to the memory card.
– Copy the encrypted project from the card to the associated PC.
– Send the encrypted project to the end customer, e.g. via e-mail.
3. The end user copies the project to the Siemens memory card that belongs to the machine.
4. The end user inserts the Siemens memory card into the converter.
5. The end user switches on the converter power supply.
6. The converter checks the serial numbers of the card and the converter, and when there is a
match the converter goes into the "Ready for switching on" state.
If the numbers do not match, then the converter signals fault F13100 (no valid memory
card).
The settings have been transferred to the converter.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

480 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.3 Replacing a Power Module

10.3 Replacing a Power Module

Overview
You are only permitted to replace the Power Module by another Power Module under certain
specific preconditions.

Requirement
The following preconditions apply when making a replacement:
• The new and replaced Power Modules have the same power rating.
• The new Power Module has a different power rating than the replaced Power Module,
however still the same frame size.
In this case, the rated power of the Power Module and the rated power of the motor must not
differ too much.
The following values are permissible for the quotients (rated motor power)/(rated Power
Module power):
– 200 V Power Modules and 400 V Power Modules: 0.25 … 1.5
– 690 V Power Modules: 0.5 …1.5

Description

Procedure
1. Switch off the line voltage to the Power Module.
You do not have to switch off an external 24 V power supply for the Control Unit if one is being
used.
2. Remove the connecting cables of the Power Module.
3. Remove the Control Unit from the Power Module.
4. Replace the previous Power Module with the new Power Module.
5. Mount the Control Unit onto the new Power Module.
6. Connect up the new Power Module using the connecting cables.

NOTICE
Motor damage due to interchanged motor connecting cables
The direction in which the motor rotates switches if you exchange the two phases of the
motor line. A motor with an incorrect direction of rotation can damage the machine or
installation. Driven loads with only one permissible direction of rotation include certain
compressors, saws and pumps, for example.
• Connect the 3 phases of the motor lines in the correct sequence.
• After replacing the Power Module, check the direction of motor rotation.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 481
Corrective maintenance
10.3 Replacing a Power Module

7. Switch on the line supply and, if necessary, the 24 V supply of the Control Unit.
8. Perform a reduced acceptance test if the converter outputs fault F01641.
Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change
(Page 494)
You have successfully replaced the Power Module.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

482 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.4 PROFINET device name

10.4 PROFINET device name

Overview
Converters with PROFINET interface support "Device replacement without removable data
storage medium".

Requirement
The topology of the PROFINET IO system with the IO device involved is configured in the higher-
level control system.

Function description
The converter can be replaced without having to insert a removable data storage medium (e.g.
a memory card) with the saved device names in the converter – or having to reassign the device
names using a PG.

Further information
Details of the device replacement without removable storage medium can be found on the
Internet:
PROFINET system description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
19292127)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 483
Corrective maintenance
10.5 Replacing an encoder

10.5 Replacing an encoder

Same interface, same encoder type

If you have to replace a defective encoder, then it is best if you use the same encoder type.
Replacing the encoder - same encoder type (Page 484)

Same interface, different encoder type

If you use an different encoder type:
Replacing the encoder - different encoder type (Page 485)

Different interface
If you connect the encoder at a different interface, you must perform a recommissioning.
Starting wizards for the quick commissioning (Page 144)

10.5.1 Replacing the encoder - same encoder type

Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply, including the external 24 V supply for the Control Unit
and digital outputs.
2. Replace the encoder. Connect the encoder cable shield as specified.
EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system (Page 58)
3. Switch on the power supplies.
4. If you have replaced an absolute encoder, and you use this encoder to sense positions, then
you must adjust the encoder. Further information about this topic is provided in the "Basic
positioner" function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
You have replaced the encoder.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

484 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.5 Replacing an encoder

10.5.2 Replacing the encoder - different encoder type

Requirement
You have backed up the actual converter settings to your PC using Startdrive.

Procedure
1. Switch off the converter power supply, including the external 24 V supply for the Control Unit
and the digital outputs.
2. Remove the encoder to be replaced.
3. Switch on the power supplies.
4. Change the encoder data in Startdrive (see below).
5. Acknowledge the changes by pressing OK and save the data to your computer.
6. Go online.
7. In the project, select the converter
8. Press the "Load to device" button. .
9. In the following screen form, select "Back up parameter assignment in the EEPROM".
10.Go offline.
11.Connect the new encoder.
Connect the encoder cable shield as specified.
EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system (Page 58)
12.Switch on the power supplies.
13.Check that the drive functions correctly.
You have replaced the encoder with another encoder type.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 485
Corrective maintenance
10.5 Replacing an encoder

Changing the encoder data

Procedure

1. Open the "Motor encoder" function view.

2. Select the "Encoder data" button.
3. Change the encoder data.
4. Save your settings.
You have changed the encoder data.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

486 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6.1 Overview

&RQYHUWHULVUHDG\

 
6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))

,QVHUWPHPRU\FDUGZLWKWKH
ILUPZDUH ):

6ZLWFKRQ
WKHSRZHUVXSSO\

):YHUVLRQFDUG
1R
):YHUVLRQFRQYHUWHU"

):YHUVLRQFDUG
<HV ! 1R
):YHUVLRQFRQYHUWHU"
7KHFRQYHUWHUUHVWRUHVLWVIDFWRU\
VHWWLQJV
<HV

)LUPZDUHXSJUDGH )LUPZDUHGRZQJUDGH
7KHFRQYHUWHUORDGVWKH 7KHFRQYHUWHUORDGVWKHILUPZDUH
ILUPZDUH
'DWDEDFNXS
DYDLODEOHRQWKHPHPRU\ 1R
FDUG"

<HV

7KHFRQYHUWHULPSRUWVWKHGDWD 7KHFRQYHUWHUVDYHVLWVGDWDำ 7KHFRQYHUWHUVLJQDOV'DWDKDV

EDFNXSIURPWKHPHPRU\FDUG IDFWRU\VHWWLQJRQWKHPHPRU\ EHHQGRZQORDGHGIURPWKH
FDUG PHPRU\FDUG

   6ZLWFKRIIWKH
SRZHUVXSSO\
/('2))
DQGVZLWFKRQDJDLQ
7KHLQYHUWHULVUHDG\

User actions Converter response

Figure 10-1 Overview of the firmware upgrade and firmware downgrade

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 487
Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6.2 Preparing the memory card

Overview
You can load the converter firmware from the Internet to a memory card.

Precondition
You have the appropriate memory card.
Recommended memory cards (Page 172)

Function description

Procedure
1. Download the required firmware to your PC from the Internet.
Download (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/67364620)
2. Extract the files to a directory of your choice on your PC.
3. Transfer the unzipped files into the root directory of the memory card.

Figure 10-2 Example of memory card contents after the file transfer

Depending on the firmware, the filenames and the number of files may differ from the display
above.
The "USER" directory does not exist on unused memory cards. After the memory card is
plugged in for the first time, the converter creates a new "USER" directory.
You have prepared the memory card for the firmware upgrade or downgrade.
❒

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

488 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6.3 Upgrading the firmware

Overview
When upgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by a later version.

Requirement
• Your converter's firmware is at least version V4.5.
• Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.

Function description

Procedure

1. Switch off the converter power supply.

 
2. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
/('2))

3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot

until it latches into place.

4. Switch on the converter power supply again.

 
5. The converter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory. 5'<
The transfer takes between 5 and 10 minutes.
PLQ
%)
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the con‐
verter stays red. The BF LED flashes orange with a variable
frequency.
6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red

(0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer 5'<
The converter firmware will be incomplete if the power supply fails
during the transfer. %)

• Start again with step 1 of the instructions.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 489
Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

7. Switch off the converter power supply.

 
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
Decide whether you want to withdraw the memory card from the /('2))

converter:
• You remove the memory card:
⇒ The converter keeps its settings.

• You leave the memory card in the converter:

⇒ If the memory card still does not have a data backup of the converter settings, in
step 9 the converter writes its settings to the memory card.
⇒ If the memory card already includes a data backup, the converter imports the settings
from the memory card in step 9.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
 
10 If the firmware upgrade was successful, the converter LED RDY
. turns green after several seconds. 5'<
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the previous
content of the memory card, one of the two following cases has
occurred:

• The memory card contains a data backup:

⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has written its settings to the memory card.
You have upgraded the converter firmware.
❒

Memory cards with license

If the memory card includes a license, e.g. for the basic positioner, then the memory card
must remain inserted after the firmware has been updated.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

490 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6.4 Firmware downgrade

Overview
When downgrading the firmware, you replace the converter firmware by an older version.

Requirement
• Your converter's firmware is at least version V4.6.
• Converter and memory card have different firmware versions.
• You have backed up your settings on the memory card, in an Operator Panel or in a PC.

Function description

Procedure

1. Switch off the converter power supply.

 
2. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
/('2))

3. Insert the card with the matching firmware into the converter slot

until it latches into place.

4. Switch on the converter power supply again.

 
5. The converter transfers the firmware from the memory
card into its memory. 5'<
The transfer takes between 5 and 10 minutes.
PLQ
%)
While data is being transferred, the LED RDY on the con‐
verter stays red. The BF LED flashes orange with a variable
frequency.
6. At the end of the transfer, the LED RDY and BF slowly flash red

(0.5 Hz).
Power supply failure during transfer 5'<
The converter firmware will be incomplete if the power supply fails
during the transfer. %)

• Start again with Step 1 of these instructions.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 491
Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

7. Switch off the converter power supply.

 
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark.
Decide whether you want to withdraw the memory card from the /('2))

converter:
• The memory card contains a data backup:
⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has the factory setting.
9. Switch on the converter power supply again.
 
10 If the firmware downgrade was successful, after several seconds
. the converter LED RDY turns green. 5'<
If the memory card is still inserted, depending on the previous
content of the memory card, one of the two following cases has
occurred:

• The memory card contains a data backup:

⇒ The converter has taken the settings from the memory card.
• There was no data backup on the memory card:
⇒ The converter has the factory setting.
11 If the memory card did not contain a data backup of the converter settings, then you must
. transfer your settings to the converter from another data backup.
Uploading the converter settings (Page 171)
You have replaced the converter firmware by an older version.
❒

Memory cards with license

If the memory card includes a license, e.g. for the basic positioner, then the memory card
must remain inserted after the firmware has been updated.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

492 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.6 Firmware upgrade and downgrade

10.6.5 Correcting an unsuccessful firmware upgrade or downgrade

Requirements

5'< • When upgrading, the converter has firmware version V4.5 as a minimum.

%)
• When downgrading, as a minimum the converter has firmware version V4.6.

Function Description
To correct a failed firmware upgrade or downgrade you can check the following:
• Have you inserted the card properly?
• Does the card contain the correct firmware?
Repeat the firmware upgrade or downgrade

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 493
Corrective maintenance
10.7 Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a firmware change

10.7 Reduced acceptance after a component has been replaced and a

firmware change
After a component has been replaced or the firmware updated, a reduced acceptance test of the
safety functions must be performed.

Table 10-1 Reduced acceptance test after component replacement

Measure Acceptance test Documentation

Replacing the Control Unit or the An acceptance test for the • Supplement converter data
converter with an identical type safety functions is not re‐ • Document the modified check‐
quired.
sum and time stamp 1)
Only check the direction of ro‐
• Countersignature
tation of the motor.
Replacing a Power Module with an Supplement the hardware version
identical type in the converter data.
Replacing the motor with an identi‐ No change
cal pole pair number
Replace the gearbox with an identi‐
cal ratio
Replacing the Safe Brake Relay Check the SBC function. Supplement the hardware version
in the converter data.
Replacing safety-related I/O devices Check the control of the safe‐ No change
(e.g. Emergency Stop switch). ty functions affected by the
components that have been
replaced.
Converter firmware update An acceptance test for the • Supplement firmware version
safety functions is not re‐ in the converter data
quired.
• Document the modified check‐
Check as to whether the firm‐ sum and time stamp 1)
ware update was successful
and the converter functions • Countersignature
as expected.
1)
The converter changes the following parameters after replacing converter components and after a
firmware update:
- checksum r9781
- time stamp r9782

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

494 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Corrective maintenance
10.8 If the converter no longer responds

10.8 If the converter no longer responds

If the converter no longer responds

For example, when loading an incorrect file from the memory card, the converter can go into a
state where it can no longer respond to commands from the operator panel or from a higher-
level control system. In this case, you must reset the converter to its factory setting and
recommission it. This converter state is manifested in two different ways:

Case 1
• The motor is switched off.
• You cannot communicate with the converter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
• The LEDs flicker and after 3 minutes the converter has still not powered up.

Procedure
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the converter.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the converter outputs fault F01018.
5. Set p0971 = 1.
6. Switch off the converter power supply.
7. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
The converter now powers up with the factory settings.
8. Recommission the converter.
You have restored the converter factory settings.
❒

Case 2
• The motor is switched off.
• You cannot communicate with the converter, either via the operator panel or other
interfaces.
• The LEDs flash and are dark - this process is continually repeated.

Procedure
1. Remove the memory card if one is inserted in the converter.
2. Switch off the converter power supply.
3. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
4. Wait until the LEDs flash orange.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 495
Corrective maintenance
10.8 If the converter no longer responds

5. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as required until the converter outputs fault F01018.
6. Now set p0971 = 1.
7. Switch off the converter power supply.
8. Wait until all LEDs on the converter are dark. Then switch on the converter power supply
again.
The converter now powers up with the factory settings.
9. Recommission the converter.
You have restored the converter factory settings.
❒

The motor cannot be switched-on

If the motor cannot be switched-on, then check the following:
• Is a fault present?
If there is, then remove the fault cause and acknowledge the fault.
• Has the converter been completely commissioned p0010 = 0?
If not, the converter is e.g. still in a commissioning state.
• Is the converter reporting the "ready to start" status (r0052.0 = 1)?
• Is the converter missing some enable signals (r0046)?
• How does the converter receive its setpoint and commands?
Digital inputs, analog inputs or fieldbus?

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

496 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Technical data 11
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit

Feature Data
Fieldbus interfaces CU250S‑2 With RS485 interface for the Article numbers:
following protocols: Overview of Control
• USS Units (Page 35)
• Modbus RTU
CU250S‑2 DP With PROFIBUS interface
CU250S‑2 PN With RJ45 connector for the
following fieldbuses:
• PROFINET
• EtherNet/IP
CU250S‑2 CAN With CANopen interface
Operating voltage You have two options for the Control Unit power supply:
• External supply via terminals 31 and 32 with 20.4 V … 28.8 V DC.
• Internal supply from the power module.
The summation of all currents of the following interfaces is limited to 0.8 A:
– Encoder power supply
– DRIVE-CLiQ
– Power supply for the Operator Panel
– Analog outputs
– 24 V output voltage (terminal 9)
– 24 V PROFIBUS teleservice
– Resolver excitation
Current drain when supplied via 31 ≤ 1.5 A
and 32
Power loss 12.0 W plus the power loss of all output voltages
Output voltages +24 V out (terminal 9) 18 V … 26.8 V, ≤ 200 mA
+10 V out (terminal 1) 9.5 V … 10.5 V, ≤ 10 mA
HTL encoder (terminal 33) 24 V, ≤ 200 mA
HTL encoder (pins 4 and 5 of the Sub-D connector on the 24 V, ≤ 350 mA
lower side of the Control Unit)
TTL encoder (pins 4 and 5 of the Sub-D connector on the 4.75 V … 5.25 V, ≤ 350 mA
lower side of the Control Unit)
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz
Maximum frequency of the HTL en‐ 500 kHz
coder

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 497
Technical data
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit

Feature Data
Digital inputs 11 fixed • DI 0 … DI 6 and DI 16 … DI 19
• Electrically isolated
4 can be switched over • DI 24 … DI 27
• Not isolated
Common data • Voltage: ≤ 30 V
• Voltage for "low" state: < 5 V
• Voltage for "high" state: > 11 V
• Current for 24 V input voltage: 2.7 mA … 4.7 mA
• Minimum current for the "high" state: 1.8 mA … 3.9 mA
• Compatible to SIMATIC outputs
• Response time for debounce time p0724 = 0: 10 ms
Pulse inputs 4 (DI 24 … DI27) Input frequency ≤ 32 kHz
Analog inputs 2 (AI 0, AI 1) • Differential inputs
• Resolution: 13 bit (12 bits plus sign)
• Response time: 13 ms ± 1 ms
• AI 0 and AI 1 can be switched over:
– 0 V … 10 V or ‑10 V … +10 V (typical power con‐
sumption: 0.1 mA, voltage < 35 V)
– 0 mA … 20 mA (120 Ω input resistance, voltage <
10 V, current < 80 mA)
• If AI 0 and AI 1 are configured as supplementary digital
inputs: Voltage < 35 V, low < 1.6 V, high > 4.0 V,
13 ms ± 1 ms response time for debounce time
p0724 = 0.
Digital outputs 3 fixed • DO 0 … DO 2: Relay outputs, 30 VDC / ≤ 0.5 A with re‐
sistive load
For applications that require UL certification, the voltage at
DO 0 … DO 2 must not exceed 30 VDC referred to ground
potential and must be supplied via a grounded Class‑2‑pow‐
er supply.
4 can be switched over • DO 24 … DO27: Transistor outputs
• Output current: ≤ 0.1 A per output
• Output current for "low" state: ≤ 0.5 mA
• An external power supply is required via terminals 31
and 32
• Update time: 2 ms
Analog outputs 2 (AO 0, AO 1) • 0 V … 10 V or 0 mA … 20 mA
• Resolution: 16 bit
• Update time: 4 ms
• <400 mV offset at 0 %

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

498 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit

Feature Data
Encoder input HTL, TTL Input frequency: ≤ 500 kHz
SSI Baud rate: ≤ 1 MHz
The dependency on baud rate and cable length is shown in
the diagram below.
Resolver • Ratio ü = 0.3 … 0.7
Resolvers with ratios ü < 0.3 or ü > 0.7 reduce the accu‐
racy of the speed sensing and the resolution of the po‐
sition actual value.
• Excitation voltage for ü = 0.5: 1.8 Vrms
• Excitation frequency, synchronized to the current con‐
troller clock cycle: 8 kHz
The impedances that can be connected and the maximum
speed that can be evaluated are listed below.
Temperature sensor PTC • Short-circuit monitoring < 20 Ω
• Overtemperature 1650 Ω
KTY84 • Short-circuit monitoring < 50 Ω
• Wire-break: > 2120 Ω
Pt1000 • Short-circuit monitoring < 603 Ω
• Wire-break > 2120 Ω
Temperature switch with NC contact
Failsafe digital input 1 (DI 4 and DI 5) • Maximum input voltage: 30 V, 5.5 mA
for enabled Basic Functions • Response time:
– Typical: 5 ms + debounce time p9651
– Typical, if debounce time = 0: 6 ms
– Worst-case scenario: 15 ms + debounce time
– Worst case, if debounce time = 0: 16 ms
You can find the failsafe inputs of the Extended safety functions in the "Safety Integrated"
function manual.
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)
PFH 5 × 10E-8 Probability of failure of the safety functions (probability of
failure per hour – PFH)
USB interface Mini-B
Dimensions (WxHxD) 73 mm × 199 mm × The depth specification is valid when mounting on the Pow‐
63 mm er Module.
Weight 0.49 kg
Memory cards Slot for SD or MMC memory cards
Recommended memory cards (Page 172)
Operating temperature -10 °C … 50 °C Without inserted Operator Panel
0 °C … 50 °C With inserted BOP‑2 or IOP-2 operator panel
Observe any possible restrictions regarding the operating temperature as a result of the
Power Module.
Storage temperature - 40 °C … 70 °C
Relative humidity < 95 % Condensation is not permissible.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 499
Technical data
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit

Permissible encoder cable lengths

Permissible cable lengths depend on the encoder type and the encoder cable.

Table 11-1 Maximum cable length:

TTL encoder 100 m

HTL encoder with bipolar signals (differential signals) 300 m
HTL encoder with unipolar signals 100 m
SSI encoder 100 m
DRIVE-CLiQ with MC800 50 m
DRIVE-CLiQ with MC500 100 m

We recommend that SIEMENS cables are connected using DRIVE-CLiQ components.

For SSI encoders, the permissible ca‐

ble length also depends on the baud 
&DEOHOHQJWK
rate. LQP




  
66,EDXGUDWHLQN+]

Maximum speeds that can be evaluated by a resolver

Resolver Maximum speed that can be evaluated by the resolver

No. of poles Number of Pulse frequency = 4 kHz Pulse frequency = 2 kHz
pole pairs
2-pole 1 60000 rpm 30000 rpm
4-pole 2 30000 rpm 15000 rpm
6-pole 3 20000 rpm 10000 rpm
8-pole 4 15000 rpm 7500 rpm

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

500 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.1 Technical data, CU250S-2 Control Unit

Impedances that can be connected at the resolver input


,QGXFWDQFH/ 3HUPLVVLEOH
LQP+ UDQJH



,PSHUPLVVLEOH
 UDQJH


      
2KPLFUHVLVWDQFH5LQ˖
Figure 11-1 Connectable impedances with an excitation frequency of f = 8kHz

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 501
Technical data
11.2 Overload capability of the converter

11.2 Overload capability of the converter

Overload capability is the property of the converter to temporarily supply a current that is higher
than the rated current to accelerate a load. Two typical load cycles are defined to clearly
demonstrate the overload capability: "Low Overload" and "High Overload"

Definitions

Base load
Constant load between the accelerating phases of the drive

Low Overload High Overload

• LO base load input current • HO base load input current
Permissible input current for a "Low Over‐ Permissible input current for a "High
load" load cycle Overload" load cycle
• LO base load output current • HO base load output current
Permissible output current for a "Low Permissible output current for a "High
Overload" load cycle Overload" load cycle
• LO base load power • HO base load power
Rated power based on the LO base load Rated power based on the HO base load
output current output current
If not specified otherwise, the power and current data in the technical data always refer to a
load cycle according to Low Overload.
We recommend using the "SIZER" engineering software to select the converter.
You can find additional information about SIZER on the Internet:
Download SIZER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10804987/130000)

Load cycles and typical applications:

"Low Overload" load cycle "High Overload" load cycle

The "Low Overload" load cycle assumes a The "High Overload" load cycle permits dy‐
uniform base load with low requirements namic accelerating phases at a reduced base
placed on brief accelerating phases. Typical load. Typical applications when designing
applications when designing according to according to "High Overload" include:
"Low Overload" include: • Horizontal and vertical conveyor technol‐
• Pumps, fans and compressors ogy (conveyor belts, roller conveyors,
• Wet or dry blasting technology chain conveyors)
• Mills, mixers, kneaders, crushers, agita‐ • Centrifuges
tors • Escalators/moving stairways
• Basic spindles • Lifters/Lowerers
• Rotary furnaces • Elevators
• Extruders • Gantry cranes
• Cable railways
• Storage and retrieval machines

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

502 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Protective devices for the Power Module

The fuses listed in the following tables are examples of suitable fuses.
Additional components for branch protection are available in the Internet:
Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109801083)

11.3.1 High overload - low overload PM240-2

Typical converter load cycles

VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDG +LJK2YHUORDG
,  ,+2
 ,/2 ,
 ,/2  ,+2

,/2
,+2
V V V
V V V
V
V
 W>V@
 W>V@

Figure 11-2 "Low Overload" and "High Overload" load cycles

11.3.2 Ambient conditions

Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Air-conditioning ‑ 40 °C … + 70 °C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2:1997
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical system Shocks and vibrations permissible according to 2M3 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
Chemical substances Protected according to Class 2C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 2B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑2:1997
tions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging or in transport packaging
Air-conditioning ‑ 25 °C … + 55 °C, according to Class 1K3 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Chemical substances Protected according to Class 1C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 1B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑1:1997
tions
Ambient conditions in operation

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 503
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Property Version
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without limitations
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)
Air-conditioning 1)
• FSA ... FSC ambient operating temperature 2)
– For operation according to Low Overload: -10 °C … +40 °C
– For operation according to High Overload: -10 °C … +50 °C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)
• FSD ... FSG ambient operating temperature 2)
– For operation according to Low Overload: -20 °C … +40 °C
– For operation according to High Overload: -20 °C … +50 °C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing water and
water jets are not permitted
Mechanical system Vibration test during operation according to IEC 60068-2-6 Test Fc (sinusoidal)
• 0 ... 57 Hz: 0.075 mm deflection amplitude
• 57 ... 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration amplitude
• 10 frequency cycles per axis
Shock test according to IEC 60068-2-27 Test Ea (half-sine)
• 5 g peak acceleration
• 30 ms duration
• 3 shocks in all three axes in both directions
Chemical substances Protected according to 3C2 to IEC 60721‑3‑3:2002
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to 3B1 to IEC 60721‑3‑3: 2002
tions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air Clean and dry air
Noise emission Maximum 75 db(A)
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than 3K3 according to IEC
60721-3-3: 2002
2)
Observe the permissible ambient operating temperatures for the Control Unit and the Operator Panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

504 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.3 General technical data, 200 V converters

Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 200 V … 240 V 1 AC ± 10% 0.55 kW … 4 kW - LO
0.37 kW … 3 kW - HO
200 V … 240 V 3 AC ± 10% 0.55 kW … 7.5 kW - LO
0.37 kW … 5.5 kW - HO
FSD … FSF 200 V … 240 V 3 AC ± 10% (in op‐ 11 kW … 55 kW - LO
eration -20% < 1 min) 7.5 kW … 45 kW - HO
Line supply configurations Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
Permissible line supplies (Page 76)
Line impedance FSA … FSC 2% ≤ Uk < 4%. For Uk < 2%, we recommend a line reactor, or a Power Module
with the next higher power rating.
FSD … FSF No restrictions
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 2%
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 2%
FSD … FSF > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 × input voltage
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency 4 kHz (factory setting),
Adjustable in steps of 2 kHz.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 513)
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Short-circuit current Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch protec‐ Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
tion support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109801083)
Degree of protection ac‐ IP20
cording to EN 60529 IP55 PT devices outside the control cabinet
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 505
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.4 Specific technical data, 200 V converters

Table 11-2 PM240-2, IP20, frame size A, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PB13-0UL0 6SL3210-1PB13-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PB13-0AL0 6SL3210-1PB13-8AL0
LO base load power 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 7.5 A 9.6 A
3 AC LO base load input current 4.2 A 5.5 A
LO base load output current 3.2 A 4.2 A
HO base load power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 6.6 A 8.4 A
3 AC HO base load input current 3.0 A 4.2 A
HO base load output current 2.3 A 3.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3805 (16 A) 3NA3805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 15 A 15 A
Power loss 0.04 kW 0.04 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
Weight with filter 1.6 kg 1.6 kg

Table 11-3 PM240-2, PT, frame size A, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PB13-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PB13-8AL0
LO base load power 0.75 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 9.6 A
3 AC LO base load input current 5.5 A
LO base load output current 4.2 A
HO base load power 0.55 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 8.4 A
3 AC HO base load input current 4.2 A
HO base load output current 3.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3 805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 15 A
Power loss 0.04 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.8 kg
Weight with filter 2.0 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

506 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-4 PM240-2, IP20, frame size B, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PB15-5UL0 6SL3210-1PB17-4UL0 6SL3210-1PB21-0UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PB15-5AL0 6SL3210-1PB17-4AL0 6SL3210-1PB21-0AL0
LO base load power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 13.5 A 18.1 A 24.0 A
3 AC LO base load input current 7.8 A 9.7 A 13.6 A
LO base load output current 6A 7.4 A 10.4 A
HO base load power 0.75 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 11.8 A 15.8 A 20.9 A
3 AC HO base load input current 5.5 A 7.8 A 9.7 A
HO base load output current 4.2 A 6A 7.4 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3812 (32 A) 3NA3812 (32 A) 3NA3812 (32 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 35 A 35 A 35 A
Power loss 0.05 kW 0.07 kW 0.12 kW
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s
Weight without filter 2.8 kg 2.8 kg 2.8 kg
Weight with filter 3.1 kg 3.1 kg 3.1 kg

Table 11-5 PM240-2, PT, frame size B, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PB21-0UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PB21-0AL0
LO base load power 2.2 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 24.0 A
3 AC LO base load input current 13.6 A
LO base load output current 10.4 A
HO base load power 1.5 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 20.9 A
3 AC HO base load input current 9.7 A
HO base load output current 7.4 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3812 (32 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 35 A
Power loss 0.12 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s
Weight without filter 3.4 kg
Weight with filter 3.7 kg
1)
approx. 0.08 kW through the heat sink

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 507
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-6 PM240-2, IP 20, frame size C, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PB21-4UL0 6SL3210-1PB21-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PB21-4AL0 6SL3210-1PB21-8AL0
LO base load power 3 kW 4 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 35.9 A 43.0 A
3 AC LO base load input current 17.7 A 22.8 A
LO base load output current 13.6 A 17.5 A
HO base load power 2.2 kW 3 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 31.3 A 37.5 A
3 AC HO base load input current 13.6 A 17.7 A
HO base load output current 10.4 A 13.6 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A) 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A 50 A
Power loss 0.14 kW 0.18 kW
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 5.0 kg 5.0 kg
Weight with filter 5.2 kg 5.2 kg

Table 11-7 PM240-2, PT, frame size C, 200 V … 240 V 1 AC / 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PB21-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PB21-8AL0
LO base load power 4 kW
1 AC LO base load input current 43.0 A
3 AC LO base load input current 22.8 A
LO base load output current 17.5 A
HO base load power 3 kW
1 AC HO base load input current 37.5 A
3 AC HO base load input current 17.7 A
HO base load output current 13.6 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A
Power loss 0.18 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 5.9 kg
Weight with filter 6.2 kg
1)
approx. 0.09 kW through the heat sink

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

508 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-8 PM240-2, IP 20, frame size C, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC22-2UL0 6SL3210-1PC22-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PC22-2AL0 6SL3210-1PC22-8AL0
LO base load power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
LO base load input current 28.6 A 36.4 A
LO base load output current 22.0 A 28.0 A
HO base load power 4 kW 5.5 kW
HO base load input current 22.8 A 28.6 A
HO base load output current 17.5 A 22.0 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A) 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A 50 A
Power loss 0.2 kW 0.26 kW
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 5.0 kg 5.0 kg
Weight with filter 5.2 kg 5.2 kg

Table 11-9 PM240-2, PT, frame size C, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PC22-2UL0 6SL3211-1PC22-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PC22-2AL0 6SL3211-1PC22-8AL0
LO base load power 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
LO base load input current 28.6 A 36.4 A
LO base load output current 22.0 A 28.0 A
HO base load power 4 kW 5.5 kW
HO base load input current 22.8 A 28.6 A
HO base load output current 17.5 A 22.0 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A) 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A 50 A
Power loss 0.2 kW 1) 0.26 kW 2)
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 5.9 kg 5.9 kg
Weight with filter 6.2 kg 6.2 kg
1)
approx. 0.2 kW through the heatsink
2)
approx. 0.25 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-10 PM240-2, IP20, frame size D, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC24-2UL0 6SL3210-1PC25-4UL0 6SL3210-1PC26-8UL0

LO base load power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
LO base load input current 40 A 51 A 64 A

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 509
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC24-2UL0 6SL3210-1PC25-4UL0 6SL3210-1PC26-8UL0

LO base load output current 42 A 54 A 68 A
HO base load power 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
HO base load input current 36 A 43 A 56 A
HO base load output current 35 A 42 A 54 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3822 (63 A) 3NA3824 (80 A) 3NA3830 (100 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 60 A 70 A 90 A
Power loss 0.45 kW 0.61 kW 0.82 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s 55 l/s 55 l/s
Weight 18.3 kg 18.3 kg 18.3 kg

Table 11-11 PM240-2, PT, frame size D, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PC26-8UL0

LO base load power 18.5 kW
LO base load input current 64 A
LO base load output current 68 A
HO base load power 15 kW
HO base load input current 56 A
HO base load output current 54 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 (100 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 90 A
Power loss 0.82 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s
Weight 19.5 kg
1)
approx. 0.72 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-12 PM240-2, IP20, frame size E, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC28-0UL0 6SL3210-1PC31-1UL0

LO base load power 22 kW 30 kW
LO base load input current 76 A 98 A
LO base load output current 80 A 104 A
HO base load power 18.5 kW 22 kW
HO base load input current 71 A 83 A
HO base load output current 68 A 80 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 (100 A) 3NA3836 (160 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 100 A 150 A
Power loss 0.92 kW 1.28 kW

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

510 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC28-0UL0 6SL3210-1PC31-1UL0

Required cooling air flow 83 l/s 83 l/s
Weight 26.8 kg 26.8 kg

Table 11-13 PM240-2, PT, frame size E, 200 V to 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PC31-1UL0

LO base load power 30 kW
LO base load input current 98 A
LO base load output current 104 A
HO base load power 22 kW
HO base load input current 83 A
HO base load output current 80 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3836 (160 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 150 A
Power loss 1.28 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 83 l/s
Weight 29.5 kg
1)
approx. 1.1 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-14 PM240-2, IP20, frame size F, 200 V … 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PC31-3UL0 6SL3210-1PC31-6UL0 6SL3210-1PC31-8UL0

LO base load power 37 kW 45 kW 55 kW
LO base load input current 126 A 149 A 172 A
LO base load output current 130 A 154 A 178 A
HO base load power 30 kW 37 kW 45 kW
HO base load input current 110 A 138 A 164 A
HO base load output current 104 A 130 A 154 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3140 (200 A) 3NA3140 (200 A) 3NA3142 (224 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 175 A 200 A 250 A
Power loss 1.38 kW 1.72 kW 2.09 kW
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s 153 l/s 153 l/s
Weight 58 kg 58 kg 58 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 511
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-15 PM240-2, PT, frame size F, 200 V to 240 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PC31-8UL0

LO base load power 55 kW
LO base load input current 172 A
LO base load output current 178 A
HO base load power 45 kW
HO base load input current 164 A
HO base load output current 154 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3142 (224 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 250 A
Power loss 2.09 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s
Weight 60.5 kg
1)
approx. 1.9 kW through the heatsink

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

512 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.5 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 200 V converters

LO base load

Article number LO Pulse frequency [kHz]

power 2 4 *) 6 8 10 12 14 16
[kW]
LO base load output current [A]
6SL3210-1PB13-0 . L0 0.55 3.2 3.2 2.7 2.2 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.3
6SL321 . -1PB13-8 . L0 0.75 4.2 4.2 3.6 2.9 2.5 2.1 1.9 1.7
6SL3210-1PB15-5 . L0 1.1 6 6 5.1 4.2 3.6 3 2.7 2.4
6SL3210-1PB17-4 . L0 1.5 7.4 7.4 6.3 5.2 4.4 3.7 3.3 3
6SL321 . -1PB21-0 . L0 2.2 10.4 10.4 8.8 7.3 6.2 5.2 4.7 4.2
6SL3210-1PB21-4 . L0 3 13.6 13.6 11.6 9.5 8.2 6.8 6.1 5.4
6SL321 . -1PB21-8 . L0 4 17.5 17.5 14.9 12.3 10.5 8.8 7.9 7
6SL3210-1PC22-2 . L0 5.5 22 22 18.7 15.4 13.2 11 9.9 8.8
6SL3210-1PC22-8 . L0 7.5 28 28 23.8 19.6 16.8 14 12.6 11.2
6SL3210-1PC24-2UL0 11 42 42 35.7 29.4 25.2 21 18.9 16.8
6SL3210-1PC25-4UL0 15 54 54 45.9 37.8 32.4 27 24.3 21.6
6SL321 . -1PC26-8UL0 18.5 68 68 57.8 47.6 40.8 34 30.6 27.2
6SL3210-1PC28-0UL0 22 80 80 68 56 48 40 36 32
6SL321 . -1PC31-1UL0 30 104 104 88.4 72.8 62.4 52 46.8 41.6
6SL3210-1PC31-3UL0 37 130 130 110.5 91 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PC31-6UL0 45 154 154 130.9 107.8 --- --- --- ---
6SL321 . -1PC31-8UL0 55 178 178 151.3 124.6 --- --- --- ---
*)
Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 513
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.6 General technical data, 400 V converters

Property Version
Line voltage FSA … FSC 380 V … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
FSD … FSG 380 V (-20 %) … 480 V 3 AC + 10%
Line supply configurations Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
Permissible line supplies (Page 76)
Line impedance FSA … FSC 1% ≤ Uk < 4%, for values smaller than 1%, we recommend a line reactor, or a
Power Module with the next higher power rating.
FSD … FSG No restrictions
Power factor λ FSA … FSC 0.7 without line reactor for Uk ≥ 1%
0.85 with line reactor for Uk < 1%
FSD … FSG > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage category ac‐ III for line supplies
cording to EN 61800-5-1
Pulse frequency Factory setting
• 4 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 110 kW
• 2 kHz for devices with an LO base load power ≥ 110 kW
Can be adjusted in 2 kHz steps as follows:
• 2 kHz … 16 kHz for devices with an LO base load power < 55 kW
• 2 kHz … 8 kHz for devices with an LO base load output of 55 kW … 250 kW
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum output current.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 523)
Short-circuit current (SCCR) Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
and branch protection Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109801083)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking chopper
Degree of protection accord‐ IP20
ing to EN 60529 IP55 PT devices outside the control cabinet
Protection class according The converters are devices with protection class I
to EN 61800-5-1
Touch protection according DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
to EN 50274
Cooling in compliance with Forced air cooling AF
EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

514 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.7 Specific technical data, 400 V converters

Table 11-16 PM240-2, IP20, frame size A, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE11-8UL1 6SL3210-1PE12-3UL1 6SL3210-1PE13-2UL1

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE11-8AL1 6SL3210-1PE12-3AL1 6SL3210-1PE13-2AL1
LO base load power 0.55 kW 0.75 kW 1.1 kW
LO base load input current 2.3 A 2.9 A 4.1 A
LO base load output current 1.7 A 2.2 A 3.1 A
HO base load power 0.37 kW 0.55 kW 0.75 kW
HO base load input current 2.0 A 2.6 A 3.3 A
HO base load output current 1.3 A 1.7 A 2.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3803 (10 A) 3NA3803 (10 A) 3NA3805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 10 A 10 A 15 A
Power loss 0.04 kW 0.04 kW 0.04 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s 5 l/s 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.3 kg 1.3 kg 1.3 kg
Weight with filter 1.5 kg 1.5 kg 1.5 kg

Table 11-17 PM240-2, IP20, frame size A, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE14-3UL1 6SL3210-1PE16-1UL1 6SL3210-1PE18-0UL1

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE14-3AL1 6SL3210-1PE16-1AL1 6SL3210-1PE18-0AL1
LO base load power 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 3.0 kW
LO base load input current 5.5 A 7.7 A 10.1 A
LO base load output current 4.1 A 5.9 A 7.7 A
HO base load power 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW
HO base load input current 4.7 A 6.1 A 8.8 A
HO base load output current 3.1 A 4.1 A 5.9 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3805 (16 A) 3NA3805 (16 A) 3NA3805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 15 A 15 A 15 A
Power loss 0.07 kW 0.1 kW 0.12 kW
Required cooling air flow 5 l/s 5 l/s 5 l/s
Weight without filter 1.4 kg 1.4 kg 1.4 kg
Weight with filter 1.6 kg 1.6 kg 1.6 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 515
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-18 PM240-2, PT, frame size A, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE18-0UL1

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE18-0AL1
LO base load power 3.0 kW
LO base load input current 10.1 A
LO base load output current 7.7 A
HO base load power 2.2 kW
HO base load input current 8.8 A
HO base load output current 5.9 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3805 (16 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 15 A
Power loss without filter 0.12 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 7 l/s
Weight without filter 1.8 kg
Weight with filter 2.0 kg

1) approx. 0.1 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-19 PM240-2, IP20, frame size B, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE21-1UL0 6SL3210-1PE21-4UL0 6SL3210-1PE21-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE21-1AL0 6SL3210-1PE21-4AL0 6SL3210-1PE21-8AL0
LO base load power 4.0 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW
LO base load input current 13.3 A 17.2 A 22.2 A
LO base load output current 10.2 A 13.2 A 18.0 A
HO base load power 3.0 kW 4.0 kW 5.5 kW
HO base load input current 11.6 A 15.3 A 19.8 A
HO base load output current 7.7 A 10.2 A 13.2 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3812 (32 A) 3NA3812 (32 A) 3NA3812 (32 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 35 A 35 A 35 A
Power loss 0.11 kW 0.15 kW 0.2 kW
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s 9.2 l/s
Weight without filter 2.9 kg 2.9 kg 3.0 kg
Weight with filter 3.1 kg 3.1 kg 3.2 kg

Table 11-20 PM240-2, PT, frame size B, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE21-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE21-8AL0
LO base load power 7.5 kW
LO base load input current 22.2 A
LO base load output current 18.0 A

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

516 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE21-8UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE21-8AL0
HO base load power 5.5 kW
HO base load input current 19.8 A
HO base load output current 13.7 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3812 (32 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 35 A
Power loss 0.2 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 9.2 l/s
Weight without filter 3.6 kg
Weight with filter 3.9 kg

1) approx. 0.16 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-21 PM240-2, IP20, frame size C, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE22-7UL0 6SL3210-1PE23-3UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE22-7AL0 6SL3210-1PE23-3AL0
LO base load power 11.0 kW 15.0 kW
LO base load input current 32.6 A 39.9 A
LO base load output current 26.0 A 32.0 A
HO base load power 7.5 kW 11.0 kW
HO base load input current 27.0 A 36.0 A
HO base load output current 18.0 A 26.0 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A) 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A 50 A
Power loss 0.3 kW 0.37 kW
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 4.7 kg 4.8 kg
Weight with filter 5.3 kg 5.4 kg

Table 11-22 PM240-2, PT, frame size C, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE23-3UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE23-3AL0
LO base load power 15.0 kW
LO base load input current 39.9 A
LO base load output current 32.0 A
HO base load power 11.0 kW
HO base load input current 36.0 A
HO base load output current 26.0 A

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 517
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE23-3UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE23-3AL0
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 (50 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 50 A
Power loss 0.37 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 18.5 l/s
Weight without filter 5.8 kg
Weight with filter 6.3 kg

1) approx. 0.3 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-23 PM240-2, IP20, frame size D, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE23-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE24-5UL0 6SL3210-1PE26-0UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE23-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE24-5AL0 6SL3210-1PE26-0AL0
LO base load power 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
LO base load input current 36 A 42 A 57 A
LO base load output current 38 A 45 A 60 A
HO base load power 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW
HO base load input current 33 A 38 A 47 A
HO base load output current 32 A 38 A 45 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3822 (63 A) 3NA3824 (80 A) 3NA3830 (100 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 60 A 70 A 90 A
Power loss without filter 0.57 kW 0.70 kW 0.82 kW
Power loss with filter 0.58 kW 0.71 kW 0.83 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s 55 l/s 55 l/s
Weight without filter 16.6 kg 16.6 kg 18.3 kg
Weight with filter 18.3 kg 18.3 kg 19 kg

Table 11-24 PM240-2, IP20, frame size D, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE27-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE27-5AL0
LO base load power 37 kW
LO base load input current 70 A
LO base load output current 75 A
HO base load power 30 kW
HO base load input current 62 A
HO base load output current 60 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 (100 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 100 A
Power loss without filter 1.09 kW

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

518 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE27-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE27-5AL0
Power loss with filter 1.10 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s
Weight without filter 18.3 kg
Weight with filter 19 kg

Table 11-25 PM240-2, PT, frame size D, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE27-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE27-5AL0
LO base load power 37 kW
LO base load input current 70 A
LO base load output current 75 A
HO base load power 30 kW
HO base load input current 62 A
HO base load output current 60 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 (100 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 100 A
Power loss without filter 1.09 kW 1)
Power loss with filter 1.10 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s
Weight without filter 20 kg
Weight with filter 22 kg
1)
Approx. 1 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-26 PM240-2, IP20, frame size E, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE28-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE31-1UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE28-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE31-1AL0
LO base load power 45 kW 55 kW
LO base load input current 86 A 104 A
LO base load output current 90 A 110 A
HO base load power 37 kW 45 kW
HO base load input current 78 A 94 A
HO base load output current 75 A 90 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3832 (125 A) 3NA3836 (160 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 125 A 150 A
Power loss without filter 1.29 kW 1.65 kW
Power loss with filter 1.30 kW 1.67 kW
Required cooling air flow 83 l/s 83 l/s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 519
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE28-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE31-1UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE28-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE31-1AL0
Weight without filter 26.4 kg 26.4 kg
Weight with filter 28.4 kg 28.4 kg

Table 11-27 PM240-2, PT, frame size E, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE31-1UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE31-1AL0
LO base load power 55 kW
LO base load input current 104 A
LO base load output current 110 A
HO base load power 45 kW
HO base load input current 94 A
HO base load output current 90 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3836 (160 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 150 A
Power loss without filter 1.65 kW 1)
Power loss with filter 1.67 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 83 l/s
Weight without filter 30.5 kg
Weight with filter 32 kg
1)
Approx. 1.4 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-28 PM240-2, IP20, frame size F, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE31-5UL0 6SL3210-1PE31-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE32-1UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE31-5AL0 6SL3210-1PE31-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE32-1AL0
LO base load power 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW
LO base load input current 140 A 172 A 198 A
LO base load output current 145 A 178 A 205 A
HO base load power 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
HO base load input current 117 A 154 A 189 A
HO base load output current 110 A 145 A 178 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3140 (200 A) 3NA3142 (224 A) 3NA3250 (300 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 200 A 250 A 300 A
Power loss without filter 1.91 kW 2.46 kW 2.28 kW
Power loss with filter 1.93 kW 2.48 kW 2.30 kW
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s 153 l/s 153 l/s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

520 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE31-5UL0 6SL3210-1PE31-8UL0 6SL3210-1PE32-1UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE31-5AL0 6SL3210-1PE31-8AL0 6SL3210-1PE32-1AL0
Weight without filter 58 kg 58 kg 62 kg
Weight with filter 64 kg 64 kg 66 kg

Table 11-29 PM240-2, IP20, frame size F, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3210-1PE32-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PE32-5AL0
LO base load power 132 kW
LO base load input current 242 A
LO base load output current 250 A
HO base load power 110 kW
HO base load input current 218 A
HO base load output current 205 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3252 (315 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 350 A
Power loss without filter 2.98 kW
Power loss with filter 3.02 kW
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s
Weight without filter 62 kg
Weight with filter 66 kg

Table 11-30 PM240-2, PT, frame size F, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE32-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE32-5AL0
LO base load power 132 kW
LO base load input current 242 A
LO base load output current 250 A
HO base load power 110 kW
HO base load input current 218 A
HO base load output current 205 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3252 (315 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 350 A
Power loss without filter 2.98 kW 1)
Power loss with filter 3.02 kW 1)
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 521
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. without filter 6SL3211-1PE32-5UL0

Article No. with filter 6SL3211-1PE32-5AL0
Weight without filter 63.5 kg
Weight with filter 68.5 kg
1)
Approx. 2.6 kW through the heatsink

Table 11-31 PM240-2, frame size G, 380 V … 480 V 3 AC

Article No. with filter class C3 6SL3210-1PE33-0CL0 6SL3210-1PE33-7CL0 6SL3210-1PE34-8CL0

Article No. with filter class C2 6SL3210-1PE33-0AL0 6SL3210-1PE33-7AL0 6SL3210-1PE34-8AL0
LO base load power 160 kW 200 kW 250 kW
LO base load input current 300 A 365 A 470 A
LO base load output current 302 A 370 A 477 A
HO base load power 132 kW 160 kW 200 kW
HO base load input current 275 A 330 A 400 A
HO base load output current 250 A 302 A 370 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3254 (355 A) 3NA3260 (400 A) 3NA3372 (630 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 400 A 500 A 600 A
Fuse according to IEC/UL 3NE1334-2 (500A) 3NE1334-2 (500A) 3NE1436-2 (630A)
Power loss with filter class C3 3.67 kW 4.62 kW 6.18 kW
Power loss with filter class C2 3.67 kW 4.62 kW 6.18 kW
Required cooling air flow 210 l/s 210 l/s 210 l/s
Weight with filter class C3 105 kg 113 kg 120 kg
Weight with filter class C2 107 kg 114 kg 122 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

522 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.8 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 400 V converters

LO base load

Article number LO Pulse frequency [kHz]

power 2 4 *) 6 8 10 12 14 16
[kW]
LO base load output current [A]
6SL3210-1PE11-8 . L1 0.55 1.7 1.7 1.4 1.2 1 0.9 0.8 0.7
6SL3210-1PE12-3 . L1 0.75 2.2 2.2 1.9 1.5 1.3 1.1 1 0.9
6SL3210-1PE13-2 . L1 1.1 3.1 3.1 2.6 2.2 1.9 1.6 1.4 1.2
6SL3210-1PE14-3 . L1 1.5 4.1 4.1 3.5 2.9 2.5 2.1 1.8 1.6
6SL3210-1PE16-1 . L1 2.2 5.9 5.9 5 4.1 3.5 3 2.7 2.4
6SL321 . -1PE18-0 . L1 3 7.7 7.7 6.5 5.4 4.6 3.9 3.5 3.1
6SL3210-1PE21-1 . L0 4 10.2 10.2 8.7 7.1 6.1 5.1 4.6 4.1
6SL3210-1PE21-4 . L0 5.5 13.2 13.2 11.2 9.2 7.9 6.6 5.9 5.3
6SL321 . -1PE21-8 . L0 7.5 18 18 15.3 12.6 10.8 9 8.1 7.2
6SL3210-1PE22-7 . L0 11 26 26 22.1 18.2 15.6 13 11.7 10.4
6SL321 . -1PE23-3 . L0 15 32 32 27.2 22.4 19.2 16 14.4 12.8
6SL3210-1PE23-8 . L0 18.5 38 38 32.3 26.6 22.8 19 17.1 15.2
6SL3210-1PE24-5 . L0 22 45 45 38.3 31.5 27 22.5 20.3 18
6SL3210-1PE26-0 . L0 30 60 60 51 42 36 30 27 24
6SL321 . -1PE27-5 . L0 37 75 75 63.8 52.5 45 37.5 33.8 30
6SL3210-1PE28-8 . L0 45 90 90 76.5 63 54 45 40.5 36
6SL321 . -1PE31-1 . L0 55 110 110 93.5 77 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PE31-5 . L0 75 145 145 123.3 101.5 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PE31-8 . L0 90 178 178 151.3 124.6 --- --- --- ---
Article number Pulse frequency [kHz]
2 *) 4 6 **) 8 **) 10 12 14 16
LO base load output current [A]
6SL3210-1PE32-1 . L0 110 205 143.5 102.5 82 --- --- --- ---
6SL321 .-1PE32-5 . L0 132 250 175 125 100 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PE33-0 .L0 160 302 211.4 151 120.8 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PE33-7 .L0 200 370 259 185 148 --- --- --- ---
6SL3210-1PE34-8 .L0 250 477 333.9 238.5 190.8 --- --- --- ---
*)
Factory setting
**)
Available from Functional State (FS) 12
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 523
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.9 General technical data, 690 V converters

Property Version
Line voltage • for systems according to IEC: 500 V … 690 V 3 AC ± 10% (in operation
-20% < 1 min)
• for systems according to UL 500 V … 600 V 3 AC ± 10% (in operation -20%
< 1 min)
filtered devices only with Slash Rating (600Y/347V AC)
Line supply configu‐ Grounded TN/TT line supplies or non-grounded IT line supplies
rations Permissible line supplies (Page 76)
Line impedance No restrictions
Power factor λ > 0.9
Output voltage 0 V 3 AC … 0.95 x input voltage (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Overvoltage catego‐ III for line supplies
ry according to EN
61800-5-1
Pulse frequency 2 kHz (factory setting), can be adjusted to 4 kHz
Adjustable in steps of 2 kHz.
Current reduction as a function of the pulse frequency (Page 528)
If you increase the pulse frequency, the converter reduces the maximum
output current.
Short-circuit current Maximum permissible line short-circuit current ≤ 100 kA rms
(SCCR) and branch Branch protection and short-circuit strength according to UL and IEC
protection (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109801083)
Braking methods DC braking, compound braking, dynamic braking with integrated braking
chopper
Degree of protection IP20; must be installed in a control cabinet
according to EN
60529
Protection class ac‐ The converters are devices with protection class I
cording to EN
61800-5-1
Touch protection ac‐ DGUV regulation 3 when used for the intended purpose
cording to EN 50274
Cooling in compli‐ Forced air cooling AF
ance with EN 60146
Safety Integrated See function manual "Safety Integrated"
Overview of the manuals (Page 555)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

524 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.10 Specific technical data, 690 V converters

Table 11-32 PM240-2, IP20, frame size D, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH21-4UL0 6SL3210-1PH22-0UL0 6SL3210-1PH22-3UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH21-4AL0 6SL3210-1PH22 -0AL0 6SL3210-1PH22 -3AL0
LO base load power 11 kW 15 kW 18.5 kW
LO base load input current 14 A 18 A 22 A
LO base load output current 14 A 19 A 23 A
HO base load power 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
HO base load input current 11 A 14 A 20 A
HO base load output current 11 A 14 A 19 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3807-6 (20 A) 3NA3810-6 (25 A) 3NA3812-6 (32 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 20 A 25 A 30 A
Power loss without filter 0.35 kW 0.44 kW 0.52 kW
Power loss with filter 0.35 kW 0.45 kW 0.52 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s 55 l/s 55 l/s
Weight without filter 17.4 kg 17.4 kg 17.4 kg
Weight with filter 18.9 kg 18.9 kg 18.9 kg

Table 11-33 PM240-2, IP20, frame size D, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH22-7UL0 6SL3210-1PH23-5UL0 6SL3210-1PH24-2UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH22-7AL0 6SL3210-1PH23 -5AL0 6SL3210-1PH24-2AL0
LO base load power 22 kW 30 kW 37 kW
LO base load input current 25 A 33 A 40 A
LO base load output current 27 A 35 A 42 A
HO base load power 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
HO base load input current 24 A 28 A 36 A
HO base load output current 23 A 27 A 35 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC 3NA3817-6KJ (40 A) 3NA3820-6KJ (50 A) 33NA3822-6 (63 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 35 A 45 A 60 A
Power loss without filter 0.60 kW 0.77 kW 0.93 kW
Power loss with filter 0.60 kW 0.78 kW 0.94 kW
Required cooling air flow 55 l/s 55 l/s 55 l/s
Weight without filter 17.4 kg 17.4 kg 17.4 kg
Weight with filter 18.9 kg 18.9 kg 18.9 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 525
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Table 11-34 PM240-2, IP20, frame size E, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH25-2UL0 6SL3210-1PH26-2UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH25-2AL0 6SL3210-1PH26-2AL0
LO base load power 45 kW 55 kW
LO base load input current 50 A 59 A
LO base load output current 52 A 62 A
HO base load power 37 kW 45 kW
HO base load input current 44 A 54 A
HO base load output current 42 A 52 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC 3NA3824-6 (80A) 3NA3824-6 (80A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 80 A 80 A
Power loss without filter 1.07 kW 1.30 kW
Power loss with filter 1.08 kW 1.31 kW
Required cooling air flow 83 l/s 83 l/s
Weight without filter 27.1 kg 27.1 kg
Weight with filter 28.5 kg 28.5 kg

Table 11-35 PM240-2, IP20, frame size F, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH28-0UL0 6SL3210-1PH31-0UL0 6SL3210-1PH31-2UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH28-0AL0 6SL3210-1PH31-0AL0 6SL3210-1PH31-2AL0
LO base load power 75 kW 90 kW 110 kW
LO base load input current 78 A 97 A 111 A
LO base load output current 80 A 100 A 115 A
HO base load power 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
HO base load input current 66 A 85 A 106 A
HO base load output current 62 A 80 A 100 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC 3NA3830-6 (100 A) 3NA3132-6 (125 A) 3NA3136-6 (160 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 100 A 125 A 150 A
Power loss without filter 1.37 kW 1.74 kW 1.95 kW
Power loss with filter 1.38 kW 1.76 kW 1.97 kW
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s 153 l/s 153 l/s
Weight without filter 61 kg 61 kg 61 kg
Weight with filter 65 kg 65 kg 65 kg

Table 11-36 PM240-2, IP20, frame size F, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH31-4UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH31-4AL0
LO base load power 132 kW
LO base load input current 137 A

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

526 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

Article No. - without filter 6SL3210-1PH31-4UL0

Article No. - with filter 6SL3210-1PH31-4AL0
LO base load output current 142 A
HO base load power 110 kW
HO base load input current 122 A
HO base load output current 115 A
Siemens fuse according to IEC 3NA3140-6 (200 A)
Fuse according to UL, class J 200 A
Power loss without filter 2.48 kW
Power loss with filter 2.51 kW
Required cooling air flow 153 l/s
Weight without filter 61 kg
Weight with filter 65 kg

Table 11-37 PM240-2, frame size G, 500 V … 690 V 3 AC

Article No. with filter 6SL3210-1PH31-7CL0 6SL3210-1PH32-1CL0 6SL3210-1PH32-5CL0

LO base load power 160 kW 200 kW 250 kW
LO base load input current 170 A 205 A 250 A
LO base load output current 171 A 208 A 250 A
HO base load power 132 kW 160 kW 200 kW
HO base load input current 160 A 185 A 225 A
HO base load output current 144 A 171 A 208 A
Fuse according to the IEC/UL 3NE1227-0 (250A) 3NE1230-0 (315A) 3NE1331-0 (350A)
Power loss 2.94 kW 3.70 kW 4.64 kW
Required cooling air flow 210 l/s 210 l/s 210 l/s
Weight 114 kg 114 kg 114 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 527
Technical data
11.3 Technical data, PM240-2 Power Modules

11.3.11 Current derating depending on the pulse frequency, 690 V converters

LO base load

Article number LO power [kW] Pulse frequency [kHz]

2 *) 4
LO base load output current [A]
6SL3210-1PH21-4 . L0 11 14 8.4
6SL3210-1PH22-0 . L0 15 19 11.4
6SL3210-1PH22-3 . L0 18.5 23 13.8
6SL3210-1PH22-7 . L0 22 27 16.2
6SL3210-1PH23-5 . L0 30 35 21
6SL321 . -1PH24-2 . L0 37 42 25.2
6SL3210-1PH25-2 . L0 45 52 31.2
6SL321 . -1PH26-2 . L0 55 62 37.2
6SL3210-1PH28-0 . L0 75 80 48
6SL3210-1PH31-0 . L0 90 100 60
6SL3210-1PH31-2 . L0 110 115 69
6SL3210-1PH31-4 . L0 132 142 85.2
6SL3210-1PH31-7CL0 160 171 102.6
6SL3210-1PH32-1CL0 200 208 124.8
6SL3210-1PH32-5CL0 250 250 150
*)
Factory setting
The permissible motor cable length depends on the particular cable type and the pulse frequency that has
been selected

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

528 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

Typical converter load cycles

VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ VORDGF\FOHEDVHGRQ
/RZ2YHUORDG +LJK2YHUORDG
,  ,+2
 ,/2 ,
 ,/2  ,+2

,/2
,+2
V V V
V V V
V
V
 W>V@
 W>V@

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 529
Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

11.4.1 Ambient conditions

Ambient conditions during operation

Property Version
Ambient conditions for transport in the transport packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 40° C … + 70° C, according to Class 2K4 to EN 60721‑3‑2
maximum humidity 95% at 40 °C
Mechanical ambient condi‐ FSC: Shock and vibration permissible according to 1M2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions FSD … FSF: Shock and vibration permissible according to 2M3 to EN 60721‑3‑2
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 2C2 to EN 60721‑3‑2
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to Class 2B1 to EN 60721‑3‑2
tions
Ambient conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging
Climatic ambient conditions ‑ 25 °C … + 55 °C, according to Class 1K3 to EN 60721‑3‑1
Protection against chemical Protected according to Class 1C2 to EN 60721‑3‑1
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to class 1B1 to EN 60721‑3‑1
tions
Ambient conditions in operation
Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without limitations
Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)
Climatic ambient • Ambient operating temperature 2)
conditions 1) – For operation according to Low Overload: 0° C … +40° C
– For operation according to High Overload: 0° C … +50° C
– Restrictions for special ambient conditions (Page 536)
• Relative humidity: 5 … 95%, condensation not permitted
• Oil mist, salt mist, ice formation, condensation, dripping water, spraying water, splashing
water and water jets are not permitted
Mechanical ambient condi‐ • FSC … FSF: Vibration levels permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
tions • FSC: Shock, permissible according to Class 3M2 to EN 60721-3-3
• FSD … FSF: Shock permissible according to Class 3M1 to EN 60721-3-3
Protection against chemical Protected according to 3C2 to EN 60721‑3‑3
substances
Biological ambient condi‐ Suitable according to 3C2 to EN 60721‑3‑3
tions
Pollution Suitable for environments with degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1, condensation
not permitted
Cooling Forced air cooling AF, according to EN 60146
Cooling air Clean and dry air
1)
Increased ruggedness regarding temperature range and relative humidity; therefore better than 3K3 according to EN
60721-3-3
2)
Observe the permissible ambient temperatures for the Control Unit and possibly the operator panel (IOP-2 or BOP‑2).

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

530 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

11.4.2 General technical data, PM250

Property Version
Line voltage 380 … 480 V 3 AC ± 10%
Line impedance Uk < 1% (RSC > 100), a line reactor is not permitted
Output voltage 3-phase 0 VAC … input voltage x 0.87 (max.)
Input frequency 50 Hz … 60 Hz, ± 3 Hz
Output frequency 0 … 550 Hz, depending on the control mode
Power factor λ 0.9
Inrush current < LO base load input current
Pulse frequency (factory set‐ 4 kHz
ting) The pulse frequency can be adjusted up to 16 kHz in 2 kHz steps. The higher the pulse frequency,
the lower the available output current.
Current reduction depending upon pulse frequency (Page 534)
Electromagnetic compatibili‐ The devices comply with EN 61800-3: 2004 suitable for Category C2 and C3 environments.
ty
Braking methods • DC braking
• Regenerative feedback (energy recovery)
max. with rated power based on high overload (HO)
Degree of protection IP20 chassis units

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 531
Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

11.4.3 Specific technical specifications

Note
The values for Low Overload (LO) are identical with those of the rated values.

Table 11-38 PM250, IP20, Frame Size C, 3-ph. AC 380 V … 480 V

Article No. 6SL3225-0BE25-5AA1 6SL3225-0BE27-5AA1 6SL3225-0BE31-1AA1

LO base load output 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
LO base load input current 18 A 25 A 32 A
LO base load output current 18 A 25 A 32 A
HO base load output 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW
HO base load input current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
HO base load output current 13.2 A 19 A 26 A
Fuse 20 A, Class J 32 A, Class J 35 A, Class J
Power loss 0.24 kW 0.30 kW 0.31 kW
Required cooling air flow 38 l/s 38 l/s 38 l/s
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) < 60 dB < 60 dB < 60 dB
Weight 7.5 kg 7.5 kg 7.5 kg

Table 11-39 PM250, IP20, Frame Size D, 3-ph. AC 380 V … 480 V

Article No. 6SL3225-0BE31-5 . A0 6SL3225-0BE31-8 . A0 6SL3225-0BE32-2 . A0

LO base load output 18.5 kW 22 kW 30 kW
LO base load input current 36 A 42 A 56 A
LO base load output current 38 A 45 A 60 A
HO base load output 15 kW 18.5 kW 22 kW
HO base load input current 30 A 36 A 42 A
HO base load output current 32 A 38 A 45 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3820 3NA3822 3NA3824
Fuse according to UL 50 A, Class J 63 A, Class J 80 A, Class J
3NE1817-0 3NE1818-0 3NE1820-0
Power loss 0.44 kW 0.55 kW 0.72 kW
Required cooling air flow 22 l/s 22 l/s 39 l/s
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) < 60 dB < 60 dB < 61 dB
Weight 15 kg 15 kg 16 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

532 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

Table 11-40 PM250, IP20, Frame Size E, 3-ph. AC 380 V … 480 V

Article No. 6SL3225-0BE33-0 . A0 6SL3225-0BE33-7 . A0

LO base load output 37 kW 45 kW
LO base load input current 70 A 84 A
LO base load output current 75 A 90 A
HO base load output 30 kW 37 kW
HO base load input current 56 A 70 A
HO base load output current 60 A 75 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3830 3NA3832
Fuse according to UL 100 A, Class J 125 A, Class J
3NE1821-0 3NE1822-0
Power loss 1.04 kW 1.2 kW
Required cooling air flow 22 l/s 39 l/s
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) < 60 dB < 62 dB
Weight 21 kg 21 kg

Table 11-41 PM250, IP20, Frame size F, 3-ph. AC 380 V … 480 V

Article No. 6SL3225-0BE34-5 . A0 6SL3225-0BE35-5 . A0 6SL3225-0BE37-5 . A0

LO base load output 55 kW 75 kW 90 kW
LO base load input current 102 A 135 A 166 A
LO base load output current 110 A 145 A 178 A
HO base load output 45 kW 55 kW 75 kW
HO base load input current 84 A 102 A 135 A
HO base load output current 90 A 110 A 145 A
Fuse according to IEC 3NA3836 3NA3140 3NA3144
Fuse according to UL 160 A, Class J 200 A, Class J 250 A, Class J
3NE1824-0 3NE1825-0 3NE1827-0
Power loss 1.5 kW 2.0 kW 2.4 kW
Required cooling air flow 94 l/s 94 l/s 117 l/s
Sound pressure level LpA (1 m) < 60 dB < 60 dB < 65 dB
Weight 51 kg 51 kg 51 kg

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 533
Technical data
11.4 Technical data, PM250 Power Module

11.4.4 Current reduction depending upon pulse frequency

Relationship between pulse frequency and current reduction

Table 11-42 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency

Rated Base load Base load current (LO) at pulse frequency of

Power current
(LO) (LO)
4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
kW A A A A A A A
0,55 1,7
0,75 2,2
1,1 3,1
1,5 4,1
2,2 5,9
3 7,7
4 10.2
5,5 13.2
7.5 18.0 12.5 11.9 10.6 9.20 7.90 6.60
11 25.0 18.1 17.1 15.2 13.3 11.4 9.50
15 32.0 24.7 23.4 20.8 18.2 15.6 12.8
18.5 38.0 32.3 26.6 22.8 19.0 17.1 15.2
22 45.0 38.3 31.5 27.0 22.5 20.3 18.0
30 60.0 51.0 42.0 36.0 30.0 27.0 24.0
37 75.0 63.8 52.5 45.0 37.5 33.8 30.0
45 90.0 76.5 63.0 54.0 45.0 40.5 36.0
55 110 93.5 77.0 -- -- -- --
75 145 123 102 -- -- -- --
90 178 151 125 -- -- --

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

534 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.5 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation

11.5 Data regarding the power loss in partial load operation

You can find data regarding power loss in partial load operation in the Internet:
Partial load operation (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/94059311)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 535
Technical data
11.6 Restrictions for special ambient conditions

11.6 Restrictions for special ambient conditions

Permissible line supplies dependent on the installation altitude

• For installation altitudes ≤ 2000 m above sea level, it is permissible to connect the converter
to any of the line supplies that are specified for it.
• For installation altitudes 2000 m ... 4000 m above sea level, the following applies:
– Connection to a TN line system with grounded neutral point is permissible.
– TN systems with grounded line conductor are not permitted.
– The TN line system with grounded neutral point can also be supplied using an isolation
transformer.
– The phase-to-phase voltage does not have to be reduced.

Note
Using Power Modules connected to TN line supplies with voltages ≥ 600 V for installation
altitudes 2000 m … 4000 m
For voltages ≥ 600 V, the TN line supply must have a grounded neutral point established using
an isolating transformer.

Current derating as a function of the installation altitude

The permissible converter output current is reduced above an installation altitude of 1000 m.


2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@ 



    

,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH>P@
Figure 11-3 Characteristic for the PM240-2 Power Module


2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@ 



    

,QVWDOODWLRQDOWLWXGH>P@
Figure 11-4 Characteristic for the PM250 Power Module

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

536 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Technical data
11.6 Restrictions for special ambient conditions

Current de-rating depending on the ambient operating temperature


2XWSXWFXUUHQW
>@ 



 +LJK2YHUORDG

 /RZ2YHUORDG
      
$PELHQWWHPSHUDWXUH>r&@

The Control Unit and operator panel can restrict the maximum permissible operating
ambient temperature of the Power Module.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 537
Technical data
11.7 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields

11.7 Protecting persons from electromagnetic fields

Overview
Protection of workers from electromagnetic fields is specified in the European EMF Directive
2013/35/EU. This directive is implemented in national law in the European Economic Area (EEA).
Employers are obligated to design workplaces in such a way that workers are protected from
impermissibly strong electromagnetic fields.
To this end, assessments and/or measurements must be performed for workplaces.

General conditions
The following general conditions apply for the evaluations and measurements:
1. The laws for protection from electromagnetic fields in force in individual EU member states
can go beyond the minimum requirements of the EMF Directive 2013/35/EU and always take
precedence.
2. The ICNIRP 2010 limits for the workplace are the basis for the assessment.
3. The 26th BImSchV (German Federal Emission Protection Regulation) defines 100 μT (RMS)
for the assessment of active implants.
According to Directive 2013/35/EU, 500 µT (RMS) at 50 Hz is applicable here.
4. The routing of power cables has a significant impact on the electromagnetic fields that occur.
Install and operate the components inside metallic cabinets in compliance with the
documentation and use shielded motor cables.
EMC-compliant installation of a machine or system (Page 58)

Evaluation of the converter

The converters are normally used in machines. The assessment and testing is based on
DIN EN 12198.
Compliance with the limit values was assessed for the following frequencies:
• Line frequency 47 ... 63 Hz
• Pulse frequency, for example 4/8/16 kHz and multiples thereof, assessed up to a maximum
of 100 kHz
The indicated minimum distances apply to the head and complete torso of the human body.
Shorter distances are possible for extremities.

Table 11-43 Minimum distances to the converter

Individuals without active implants Individuals with active implants

Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet Control cabinet
closed open closed open
0 cm Forearm length (approx. Must be separately assessed depending on the ac‐
35 cm) tive implant.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

538 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Appendix A
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.1 Firmware version 4.7 SP14

Table A-1 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP14

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*'

*&
1 The G115D converter now supports the extended safety function 'Safety Limited ✓ - - - ✓ - ✓ -
Speed (SLS)' when using motors from SIEMENS and third-party manufacturers.

A.1.2 Firmware version 4.7 SP13

Table A-2 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP13

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0
*'

*&

1 SIMOTICS 1FP1 and 1FP3 synchronous-reluctance motors have also been - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ -

approved for operation with SINAMICS G120C.
2 The extended safety functions SS1, SLS, SSM and SDI are approved when - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
using synchronous-reluctance motors from Siemens and third-party manu‐
facturers.
3 The converter transmits the state of the fail-safe digital input F-DI 0 via ✓ ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
PROFIsafe when using the basic functions.
You can find more information in the "Safety Integrated" Function Manual.
"Safety Integrated" function manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751320)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 539
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
4 Modbus RTU: - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
The converter supports the combination "1 stop bit" and "no parity".
5 EtherNet/IP: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
When selecting the ODVA AC/DC drive profile, although telegram 1 is pre‐
defined, it can be extended to include additional process data.
The EDS file has been extended accordingly by a telegram with a length of 6
words.
More information is provided in the "Fieldbuses" Function Manual.
"Fieldbus" function manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109751350)
EDS (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/de/view/78026217)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

540 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.3 Firmware version 4.7 SP10

Table A-3 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP10

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'

(7SUR)&
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0

*&
1 New parameter r7844 [1] for displaying the firmware version in plain text. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
"04070901" is equivalent to firmware version V4.7 SP9 HF1, for example
2 Modbus RTU: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
• The factory setting of parameter p2040 was increased to provide more
robust converter operation. Monitoring time for data failure at the Mod‐
bus interface: p2040 = 10 s
• r2057 indicates how the address switch on the converter is set
3 BACnet MS/TP: - - ✓ - - - - - -
• New factory setting for more robust converter operation:
– Baud rate p2020 = 38.4 kBd
– Monitoring time for data failure at the BACnet interface was in‐
creased: p2040 = 10 s
– Factory setting for the maximum number of info frames p2025 [1] = 5
– Factory setting for the maximum number of manager addresses
p2025 [3] = 32
• r2057 indicates how the address switch on the converter is set
4 Further technological unit kg/cm² for unit switchover ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
5 Further technological unit kg/cm² for additional technology controllers - - ✓ - - - - - -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 541
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
6 Commissioning with predefined motor data for SIMOTICS GP/SD synchro‐ ✓ - ✓ - ✓ - ✓ - -
nous-reluctance motors: 1)

• Second generation: 1FP1 . 04 → 1FP1 . 14

• Further frame sizes:
– 1.1 kW … 3 kW, 1500 1/min, 1800 1/min, 2810 1/min
– 0.75 kW … 4 kW, 3000 1/min, 3600 1/min
• In planning:
– 37 kW … 45 kW, 1500 1/min, 1800 1/min, 2810 1/min
– 5.5 kW … 18.5 kW, 3000 1/min, 3600 1/min
– 45 kW, 3000 1/min, 3600 1/min
– The predefined motor data is already included in the firmware
7 Extended setting option for evaluating the STOP cam in the "basic positioner" - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
function
Two different functions to evaluate STOP cams can be set:
• Edge-triggered evaluation (factory setting)
• Level-triggered evaluation
For more information, refer to the "Basic Positioner" Function Manual or the
operating instructions for "SINAMICS G120D Converter with CU250D-2 Con‐
trol Units".
"Basic positioner" function manual (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477922)
Operating instructions SINAMICS G120D with CU250D-2 (https://
support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109477365)
1)
Installation with PM240-2 or PM240P-2 Power Modules

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

542 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.4 Firmware version 4.7 SP9

Table A-4 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP9

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'

(7SUR)&
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0

*&
1 Support of PM240‑2 FSG Power Modules - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
2 Support of PM240‑2 Power Modules in push-through technology, frame - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
sizes FSD … FSF, for the following voltages:
• 3 AC 200 V … 240 V
• 3 AC 380 V … 480 V
• 3 AC 500 V … 690 V
3 Shortened switch-on time for PM330 Power Modules - - ✓ - - - - - -
4 Expansion of the support for 1FP1 synchronous-reluctance motor with the ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ - -
following converters:
• SINAMICS G110M
• SINAMICS G120D
• SINAMICS G120 with CU240B‑2 or CU240E‑2 Control Unit
A PM240‑2 Power Module is required to operate a 1FP1 synchronous-reluc‐
tance motor with SINAMICS G120
5 Support of 1FP3 synchronous-reluctance motors - - ✓ - - - - - -
A PM240‑2 Power Module is required to operate a 1FP3 synchronous-reluc‐
tance motor along with a selective release from SIEMENS
6 Support of 1LE5 induction motors - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
7 The converter supports forming of the PM330 Power Module DC link capac‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
itors
8 Setting option for two output reactors using parameter p0235 at the SI‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
NAMICS G120C and SINAMICS G120 with PM240-2 FSD … FSF Power Module
9 Efficiency-optimized operation of induction motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Improved method "Efficiency optimization 2"
10 New setting option for the "Technology application" p0500 = 5 during quick ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
commissioning
11 Expansion of the available PROFIdrive telegrams in the SINAMICS G120C to - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
include telegram 350
12 An SSI encoder can be parameterized as motor encoder - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
13 Expansion of the "Basic positioner" function to include the feedback signal - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
from traversing blocks to the higher-level control system
14 Feedback signal supplemented to indicate that a memory card is not inser‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
ted in the converter:
• Parameter r9401 as BiCo parameter for the optional feedback signal to
the higher-level control system.
• New alarm A01101

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 543
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
15 Expansion of the "End stop control" function on the following converters: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
• SINAMICS G120
• SINAMICS G120C
• SINAMICS G120D
16 Expansion of the technology controller to include the following functions: - - ✓ - ✓ - - - -
• Gain KP and integral time TN can be adapted.
• The system deviation can be used as adaptation signal
17 Expansion to the torque limiting for SINAMICS G120 converters with ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CU230P‑2 Control Unit
18 The converter displays the state "PROFIenergy pause" as follows: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• LED RDY "green on": 0.5 s
• LED RDY off: 3 s

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

544 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.5 Firmware version 4.7 SP6

Table A-5 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP6

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'

(7SUR)&
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0

*&
1 Support for the Power Module PM240-2, FSF frame sizes - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
Support of PM240P‑2 Power Modules frame sizes FSD … FSF - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
Support of safety function Safe Torque Off (STO) via the terminals of the - - - - ✓ ✓ - - -
PM240‑2 Power Module, frame size FSF and PM240P‑2 Power Module
FSD … FSF
2 Support for Power Module PM330 JX frame size - - ✓ - - - - - -
3 Support for 1PC1 induction motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
4 The control of synchronous reluctance takes into account the inductance of - - ✓ - - - - - -
the output reactor.
5 Support of motor temperature sensor Pt1000 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
6 New p4621 parameter for disabling PTC short-circuit monitoring - - - - - - ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Revision of the thermal motor model for protecting the motor against dam‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
age due to overheating in the stator or rotor
8 Changing the quick commissioning in the "Standard Drive Control" applica‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
tion class:
The motor data identification is no longer permanently set to p1900 = 12;
instead, users select the appropriate motor data identification.
Factory setting: p1900 = 2.
9 The free function blocks are also available in the SINAMICS G120C. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 545
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.6 Firmware version 4.7 SP3

Table A-6 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.7 SP3

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'

(7SUR)&
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0

*&
1 PM240‑2 Power Modules, frame sizes FSD and FSE are supported - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
The Safety Integrated Basic Function Safe Torque Off (STO) is supported via - - - - ✓ ✓ - - -
the terminals of the PM240‑2 Power Module, frame sizes FSD and FSE
2 Revised PM230 Power Module with new article numbers supported: - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
• IP55 degree of protection: 6SL3223-0DE . . - . . G .
• IP20 degree of protection and Push Through: 6SL321 . -1NE . . - . . G .
The Safety Integrated Basic Function Safe Torque Off (STO) is supported with - - - - ✓ - - - -
the revised PM230 Power Module
3 PM330 Power Module, frame size HX is supported - - ✓ - - - - - -
4 Support of 1FP1 synchronous-reluctance motors - - ✓ - - - - - -
5 Encoderless 1FG1 geared synchronous motors are supported - - - - - - ✓ - -
6 Selection list for 1PH8 induction motors in the STARTER and Startdrive com‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
missioning wizard
7 Updated selection list for 1LE1 induction motors in the STARTER and Start‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
drive commissioning wizard
8 Motor support expanded with 1LE1, 1LG6, 1LA7 and 1LA9 induction motors ✓ - - - - - - - -
9 Speed and position control obtain their respective actual value from an SSI - - - - - ✓ - ✓ -
encoder with incremental tracks. The output signals of the encoder are
available as encoder 2 for position control and timer 1 for speed control.
10 Power Module with temperature-controlled fan ✓ - - - - - - - -
11 SINAMICS "Standard Drive Control" and "Dynamic Drive Control" application - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
classes to simplify commissioning and increase the degree of ruggedness of
the closed-loop motor control.
The SINAMICS application classes are available with the following convert‐
ers:
• SINAMICS G120C
• SINAMICS G120 with PM240, PM240-2 and PM330 Power Modules
12 Moment of inertia estimator with moment of inertia precontrol to optimize ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
the speed controller in operation
13 Friction torque characteristic with automatic plotting to optimize the speed ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
controller
14 Automatic optimization of the technology controller - - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
15 The sign of the system deviation for the additional, free technology control‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
ler can be switched over.
A new parameter defines the sign of the system deviation matching the
particular application, e.g. for cooling or heating applications.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

546 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D
16 The technology controller output can be enabled and disabled during oper‐ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
ation
17 Ramp-function generator remains active with enabled technology controller - - ✓ - - - - - -
18 Line contactor control using a digital output of the converter to save energy ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
when the motor is switched off
19 Fast flying restart for PM330 Power Modules: - - ✓ - - - - - -
The "Flying restart" function does not have to wait for the motor demagnet‐
ization time, and identifies the motor speed without requiring a search op‐
eration.
20 Load torque monitoring extended to include the following functions: ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - -
• Protection against blocking, leakage and dry running operation in pump
applications
• Protection against blocking and broken belts in fan applications
21 Automatic switchover of the real time clock from daylight saving time (sum‐ - - ✓ - - - - - -
mer time) to standard time (winter time).
22 New or revised default settings of the interfaces: p0015 macros 110, 112 - - ✓ - - - - - -
and 120
23 Expansion of the temperature sensors to include DIN-Ni1000 for analog - - ✓ - - - - - -
inputs AI 2 and AI 3
24 Communication via AS-Interface. ✓ - - - - - - - -
Default setting of the communication via AS-i: p0015 macros 30, 31, 32 and
34
25 Communication expansion via Modbus: ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
Adjustable parity bit, access to parameters and analog inputs
26 Extending communication via BACnet: - - ✓ - - - - - -
Access to parameters and analog inputs
27 The bus error LED for communication via USS and Modbus can be switched ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
off
28 Default of the minimum speed to 20 % of the rated motor speed - - ✓ - - - - - -
29 For commissioning with an operator panel, the converter automatically ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
backs up the measured data retentively in the ROM after identification of the
motor data.
30 The result of the energy savings calculation for flow machines is available as ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
a connector
31 New "ppm" unit (parts per million) for unit switching ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
32 Displaying speeds during commissioning via operator panel in units of Hz - - ✓ - - - - - -
instead of rpm. Conversion from Hz to rpm via p8552
33 Voltage-dependent current limit for 600V devices of Power Module PM330 - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
and PM240-2

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 547
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.7 Firmware version 4.7

Table A-7 New functions and function changes in Firmware 4.7

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*0

*&
1 Supporting the identification & maintenance datasets (I&M1 … 4) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2 Fall in pulse rate with increased drive power required by the motor ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• The converter temporarily lowers the pulse frequency if required when the
motor is started up, and simultaneously increases the current limit.
3 S7 communication ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Direct data exchange between the converter and human-machine interface
(HMI).
• Increase in communication performance with the engineering tools and sup‐
port of the S7 routing
4 The basic functions of Safety Integrated are unrestrictedly available in all control - - - - - - ✓ -
types with 1FK7 encoderless permanent-field synchronous motors
5 Encoderless 1FK7 synchronous motors are supported - - - - - - ✓ -
• Direct motor selection based on the article number with associated code
number
• It is not necessary to input individual motor data
6 Pulse input as source of setpoint value - - - - - ✓ - -
• The converter calculates its speed setpoint from a sequence of pulses at the
digital input.
7 Dynamic IP address assignment (DHCP) and temporary device names for PROFI‐ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
NET
8 PROFIenergy device profile 2 and 3 ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
9 Uniform behavior for component replacement ✓ ✓ - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• After a component is replaced, a converter with activated Safety Integrated
will report what type of component has been replaced using a unique code.
10 Improved direct-component control in PM230 - - ✓ - - - - -
• Optimized efficiency for pump and fan applications
11 Rounding down of BACnet and macros - - ✓ - - - - -

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

548 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.8 Firmware version 4.6 SP6

Table A-8 New functions and function changes in firmware 4.6 SP6

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*&
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ - - - - -
• PM330 IP20 GX

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 549
Appendix
A.1 New and extended functions

A.1.9 Firmware version 4.6

Table A-9 New functions and function changes in Firmware 4.6

Function SINAMICS
G120 G120D

&8'

&8'
&8%

&8(
&83

&86
*&
1 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - -
• PM240-2 IP20 FSB … FSC
• PM240-2 in through-hole technology FSB ... FSC
2 Support for the new Power Modules - ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
• PM230 in through-hole technology FSD ... FSF
3 Motor data preassignment for the 1LA/1LE motors via code number ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• During quick commissioning with the operator panel, set the motor data using a
code number
4 Extension to communication via CANopen ✓ ✓ - - ✓ - -
• CAN velocity, ProfilTorque, SDO channel for each axis, system test with CodeSys,
suppression of ErrorPassiv alarm
5 Extension to communication via BACnet - ✓ - - - - -
• Multistate value objects for alarms, commandable AO objects, objects for config‐
uring the PID controller
6 Communication via EtherNet/IP ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
7 Skip frequency band for analog input ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
• A symmetrical skip frequency band can be set for each analog input around the 0 V
range.
8 Changing the control of the motor holding brake ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -
9 Safety function SBC (Safe Brake Control) - - - - ✓ - -
• Secure control of a motor holding brake when using the "Safe Brake Module" option
10 Safety function SS1 (Safe Stop 1) without speed monitoring - - - - ✓ - -
11 Straightforward selection of standard motors ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• Selection of 1LA... and 1LE... motors with an operator panel using a list containing
code numbers
12 Firmware update via memory card ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
13 Safety info channel - - - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• BICO source r9734.0…14 for the status bits of the extended safety functions
14 Diagnostic alarms for PROFIBUS ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

550 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter

A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter

A.2.1 Fundamentals
The following functions are implemented in the converter:
• Open-loop and closed-loop control functions
• Communication functions
• Diagnosis and operating functions
Every function comprises one or several blocks that are interconnected with one another.

,QSXWV 3DUDPHWHU 2XWSXW

0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU
S VHWSRLQWKLJKHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHUVHWSRLQW
DIWHUWKHUDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU

0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 023 U

S VHWSRLQWORZHU

Figure A-1 Example of a block: Motorized potentiometer (MOP)

Most of the blocks can be adapted to specific applications using parameters.

You cannot change the signal interconnection within the block. However, the
interconnection between blocks can be changed by interconnecting the inputs of a block
with the appropriate outputs of another block.
The signal interconnection of the blocks is realized, contrary to electric circuitry, not using
cables, but in the software.

352),GULYH
UHFHLYH3='
ELWE\ELW
0RWRUL]HG
SRWHQWLRPHWHU 0RWRUL]HGSRWHQWLRPHWHU 0DLQVHWSRLQW
S VHWSRLQWDIWHUWKH
VHWSRLQWKLJKHU
U UDPSIXQFWLRQJHQHUDWRU S
0RWRUL]HG 
SRWHQWLRPHWHU
023 U
S VHWSRLQWORZHU
U

Figure A-2 Example: Signal interconnection of two blocks for digital input 0

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 551
Appendix
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter

Binectors and connectors

Connectors and binectors are used to exchange signals between the individual blocks:
• Connectors are used to interconnect "analog" signals (e.g. MOP output speed)
• Binectors are used to interconnect digital signals (e.g. "Enable MOP up" command)
S[[[[
%LQHFWRULQSXW U[[[[ %LQHFWRURXWSXW
%, %2

%,&2EORFN U[[[[ %LQHFWRUFRQQHFWRURXWSXW

U[[[[ &2%2
S[[[[
&RQQHFWRULQSXW U[[[[ &RQQHFWRURXWSXW
&, &2
Figure A-3 Symbols for binector and connector inputs and outputs

Binector/connector outputs (CO/BO) are parameters that combine more than one binector
output in a single word (e.g. r0052 CO/BO: status word 1). Each bit in the word represents
a digital (binary) signal. This summary reduces the number of parameters and simplifies
parameter assignment.
Binector or connector outputs (CO, BO or CO/BO) can be used more than once.

Interconnecting signals

When must you interconnect signals in the converter?

If you change the signal interconnection in the converter, you can adapt the converter to
a wide range of requirements. This does not necessarily have to involve highly complex
functions.
Example 1: Assign a different function to a digital input.
Example 2: Switch the speed setpoint from the fixed speed to the analog input.

Principle when connecting BICO blocks using BICO technology

When interconnecting the signal, the following principle applies: Where does the signal
come from?
An interconnection between two BICO blocks consists of a connector or a binector and a BICO
parameter. The input of a block must be assigned the output of a different block: In the BICO
parameters, enter the parameter numbers of the connector/binector that should supply its
output signal to the BICO parameter.

How much care is required when you change the signal interconnection?
Note which changes you make. A subsequent analysis of the set signal interconnections is
possible only by evaluating the parameter list.

Where can you find additional information?

• All the binectors and connectors are located in the Parameter list.
• The function diagrams provide a complete overview of the factory setting for the signal
interconnections and the setting options.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

552 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter

A.2.2 Application example

Shift the control logic into the converter

It is only permissible that a conveyor system starts when two signals are present simultaneously.
These could be the following signals, for example:
• The oil pump is running (the required pressure level is not reached, however, until after 5
seconds)
• The protective door is closed
To implement this task, you must insert free function blocks between digital input 0 and the
command to switch on the motor (ON/OFF1).

S  S >PV@

S>@ 7 
 ', U  U S  S 
3'(

S>@
S   S>@
 ', U 
  $1' U  212))

 

Figure A-4 Signal interconnection for control logic

The signal of digital input 0 (DI 0) is fed through a time block (PDE 0) and is interconnected
with the input of a logic block (AND 0). The signal of digital input 1 (DI 1) is interconnected to
the second input of the logic block. The logic block output issues the ON/OFF1 command to
switch-on the motor.

Setting the control logic

Parameter Description
p20161 = 5 The time block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
p20162 = 430 Run sequence of the time block within runtime group 5 (processing before
the AND logic block)
p20032 = 5 The AND logic block is enabled by assigning to runtime group 5 (time slice of
128 ms)
p20033 = 440 Run sequence of the AND logic block within runtime group 5 (processing
after the time block)
p20159 = 5000.00 Setting the delay time [ms] of the time module: 5 seconds
p20158 = 722.0 Connect the status of DI 0 to the input of the time block
r0722.0 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 0.
p20030[0] = 20160 Interconnecting the time block to the 1st AND input
p20030[1] = 722.1 Interconnecting the status of DI 1 to the 2nd AND input
r0722.1 = Parameter that displays the status of digital input 1.
p0840 = 20031 Interconnect the AND output to ON/OFF1

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 553
Appendix
A.2 Interconnecting signals in the converter

Explanation of the application example using the ON/OFF1 command

Parameter p0840[0] is the input of the "ON/OFF1" block of the converter. Parameter r20031
is the output of the AND block. To interconnect ON/OFF1 with the output of the AND block,
set p0840 = 20031.

S>@ 
S>@
S>@
$1' U  212))

Figure A-5 Interconnecting blocks by setting p0840[0] = 20031

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

554 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.3 Manuals and technical support

A.3 Manuals and technical support

A.3.1 Overview of the manuals

Converter Manuals
• CU250S-2 List Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109782287)
Parameter list, alarms and faults. Graphic function diagrams

• CU250S-2 operating instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/

view/109782994)
Installing, commissioning and maintaining the converter. Advanced commissioning (this
manual)

• Power Module Installation Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/

13224/man)
Installing Power Modules, reactors and filters. Technical data, maintenance

Supplementary manuals for converter

• "Basic positioner" function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/
view/109477922)
Commissioning the basic positioner.

• "Fieldbus" function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/

109751350)
Configuring fieldbuses

• "Safety Integrated" function manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/

view/109751320)
Configuring PROFIsafe. Installing, commissioning and operating failsafe functions of the
converter.

Converter accessory manuals

• BOP-2 operating instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
109483379)
Using the operator panel.

• Operating instructions IOP-2 (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/

109808456)
Using the operator panel, mounting the door mounting kit for IOP.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 555
Appendix
A.3 Manuals and technical support

• Accessories manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13225/man)

Descriptions of how to install converter components, e.g. line reactors and line filters. The
printed installation descriptions are supplied together with the components.

• S120 Manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109478725)

Description of the SMC and SME Sensor Modules

Additional information
• EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
60612658)
EMC-compliant control cabinet design, equipotential bonding and cable routing

Finding the most recent edition of a manual

If there a multiple editions of a manual, select the latest edition:

Configuring a manual
Further information about the configurability of manuals is available in the Internet:
MyDocumentationManager (https://www.industry.siemens.com/topics/global/en/
planning-efficiency/documentation/Pages/default.aspx).
Select "Display and configure" and add the manual to your "mySupport-documentation":

Not all manuals can be configured.

The configured manual can be exported in RTF, PDF or XML format.

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

556 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Appendix
A.3 Manuals and technical support

A.3.2 Configuring support

Catalog
Ordering data and technical information for the converters SINAMICS G.

Catalogs for download or online catalog (Industry Mall):

Everything about SINAMICS G120 (www.siemens.en/sinamics-g120)

SIZER
The configuration tool for SINAMICS, MICROMASTER and DYNAVERT T drives, motor starters, as
well as SINUMERIK, SIMOTION controllers and SIMATIC technology

SIZER on DVD:
Article number: 6SL3070-0AA00-0AG0
Download SIZER (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/
10804987/130000)

EMC (electromagnetic compatibility) technical overview

Standards and guidelines, EMC-compliant control cabinet design

EMC overview (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/103704610)

EMC Guidelines configuration manual

EMC-compliant control cabinet design, potential equalization and cable routing

EMC installation guideline (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/

60612658)

See also
Safety Integrated for novices (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/
80561520)

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 557
Appendix
A.3 Manuals and technical support

A.3.3 Product Support

Overview
You can find additional information about the product on the Internet:
Product support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)
This URL provides the following:
• Up-to-date product information (product announcements)
• FAQs
• Downloads
• The Newsletter contains the latest information on the products you use.
• The Knowledge Manager (Intelligent Search) helps you find the documents you need.
• Users and specialists from around the world share their experience and knowledge in the
Forum.
• You can find your local representative for Automation & Drives via our contact database
under "Contact & Partner".
• Information about local service, repair, spare parts and much more can be found under
"Services".
If you have any technical questions, use the online form in the "Support Request" menu:

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

558 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Index
Base load power, 502
Basic positioner, 194
8 BF (Bus Fault), 432, 433, 434
BICO block, 551
87 Hz characteristic, 91
Bimetallic switch, 394
87 Hz characteristic, 91
Binary changeover switch, 286
Binectors, 552
Bit pattern test, 305
A Block, 551
Absolute encoder, 359 BOP-2
Absolute value generator, 281 Menu, 163
Acceptance test, 311 Symbols, 163
Complete, 311 Brake Relay, 92
Reduced scope, 312, 494 Braking
Test scope, 312 Regenerative, 389
Acceptance test record, 311 Braking functions, 376
Acyclic communication, 254 Braking method, 376
ADD, 279 Braking module, 385
Adder, 279 Braking resistor, 51, 385
Agitators, 145, 152 Breaker block, 285, 286
Alarm, 431, 439 BSW, 286
Alarm buffer, 439 Bus termination, 97
Alarm code, 439
Alarm history, 440
Alarm time, 439 C
Alarm value, 439
Cable railways, 152
Ambient temperature, 396
Cable resistance, 344
Analog input, 99, 102
Calculation block, 279, 280, 281
Function, 206
Catalog, 557
Analog output, 99, 102
CDS (Command Data Set), 269, 310
AND, 277
Centrifuge, 145, 152, 378, 383, 385, 389
AND block, 277
Chain conveyors, 145, 152
Application example, 126, 128, 202, 210, 254, 321,
Characteristic
322, 327, 328, 553
Additional, 347
Application example, 205, 208
Linear, 347, 351
Reading and writing parameters cyclically via
parabolic, 347, 351
PROFIBUS, 254
square-law, 347, 351
Article number, 32
Clockwise rotation, 213
ASCII code
Closed-loop torque control, 374
Licensing, 430
Command data set, 269
Automatic mode, 270
Commissioning
Automatic restart, 411
Guidelines, 133
AVA, 281
Communication
Acyclic, 254
Comparator, 280
B Complex block, 288
Base load, 502 Compound braking, 383, 384
Base load input current, 502 Compressor, 145, 152
Base load output current, 502 Computational performance, 141

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 559
Index

Configuring support, 557 Digital output, 99, 102

Connectors, 552 Function, 205, 207, 210
Consistency, 304 DIP switch
Consistent signals, 304 Analog input, 206
Contact bounce, 305 Direct data exchange, 254
Control block, 286, 287 Direction of rotation, 326
Control terminals, 102 Direction reversal, 213
Control Units, 32 Discrepancy, 304
Control word Filter, 304
Control word 1, 229, 258 Tolerance time, 304
Control word 2, 232 DIV, 280
Control word 3, 233 Divider, 280
Control word 2 (STW2), 232 Drive control, 193
Control word 3 (STW3), 233 Drive Data Set, DDS, 423
Control word";"Control word 1, 255 Drive Data Sets, 423
Controlling the motor, 213 Droop, 364
Converter, 279 Dynamic braking, 385
does not respond, 495
Update, 494
Conveyor belt, 145, 152, 378 E
Conveyor systems, 152
Elevator, 152, 273
Copy
EMC, 58
Series commissioning, 312
EMERGENCY OFF, 299
Copy parameters (series commissioning), 312
EMERGENCY STOP, 299
Counter-clockwise rotation, 213
Emergency Stop button, 298
Crane, 273
EN 60204‑1, 299
Crushers, 145, 152
EN 61800-5-2, 298
Current input, 206
Encoder, 361
Current reduction, 534
Encoder cable, 130, 132
Cyclic communication, 228, 229, 250
Encoder cables, 121
Encoder data, 360
End position, 267
D End position control, 267
D flip-flop, 285 Energy recovery, 38
Data backup, 171, 181 Energy recovery option, 389
Data transfer, 180 Energy-saving display, 421
Data set 47 (DS), 254 Escalator, 152
Data set changeover, 310 EXCLUSIVE OR block, 278
DC braking, 233, 378, 379, 380, 381 Extending the telegram, 251
DC link overvoltage, 399 Extruder, 145, 152
DC link voltage, 399
Deadband, 209
Delta connection, 91 F
Delta connection (Δ), 135
Factory assignment, 102
Derating
Factory settings, 158
Installation altitude, 536
Restoring the, 158, 159, 161
DFR, 285
Failsafe digital input, 203
DIF, 287
Fan, 145, 152
Differentiator, 287
Fans, 391
Digital input, 99, 102, 213
Digital inputs
Multiple assignment, 310

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

560 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Index

Fault, 431 Hoisting gear, 273, 385

Acknowledge, 443 Horizontal conveyors, 383, 385
Motor, 496 Hotline, 558
Fault buffer, 442
Fault case, 444
Fault code, 442 I
Fault history, 443
I_max controller, 390
Fault time, 442
i2t monitoring, 393
Received, 442
Inclined conveyors, 385
Removed, 442
IND (page index), 242, 246, 247
Fault value, 442
Industry Mall, 557
FCC, 345
Installation altitude, 536
FCC (Flux Current Control), 347
Installing, 65
F-DI (Failsafe Digital Input), 203
INT, 287
F-digital output module, 118
Integrator, 287
Field weakening, 91
Interfaces, 97
Fieldbus interfaces, 97
Interlock, 553
Filter
Contact bounce, 305
Discrepancy, 304
On/off test, 305
J
Fine resolution, 361 JOG function, 265
Firmware, 32
Firmware downgrade, 491
Firmware update, 494 K
Firmware version, 539, 540, 541, 542, 543, 544, 545,
Kinetic buffering, 414
546, 547, 548, 549, 550
Kneaders, 145, 152
Flip-flop, 284, 285
Know-how protection, 174, 186
Flow control, 337
KTY84 sensor, 394
Flux current control, 345
Flying restart, 409
Forced checking procedure, 307
Setting, 307
L
Formatting, 173 LED
Forming the DC-link capacitors, 136 BF, 432, 433, 434
Free function blocks, 276 LNK, 433
Function Manual, 555 RDY, 432
Function module, 140 SAFE, 433
Functional expansions, 312 LED (light emitting diode), 431
Functions Level control, 337
BOP-2, 163 License, 174, 194
License key
Create, 426
G Display, 426
Entering in STARTER, 429
Gantry crane, 152
Entry using the BOP-2, 430
Grinding machine, 378, 383
Licensing
ASCII code, 430
Lifter, 152
H LIM, 286
High Overload, 502 Limit monitor, 288
Hoist drive, 389 Limit switch, 267

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 561
Index

Limiter, 286 Multiple assignment

Line and motor connection, frame sizes Digital inputs, 310
FSD … FSF, 90 Multiplier, 280
Line contactor, 298 Multiturn encoder, 359
Line dip, 414
Line filter, 41
Linear characteristic, 347, 351 N
List Manual, 555
NCM, 280
LNK (PROFINET Link), 433
NOT, 279
Load failure, 407
NSW, 285
Logic block, 277, 278, 279
Numeric changeover switch, 285
Low Overload, 502
Lowerer, 152
LVM, 288
O
OFF delay, 283
M OFF1 command, 213
OFF3 ramp-down time, 333
Main screen form (basic functions), 303
ON command, 213
Manual mode, 270
ON delay, 283
Maximum cable length
On/off test, 305
DRIVE-CLiQ, 500
Operating instruction, 25
Encoder, 500
Operating Instructions, 555
PROFIBUS, 127
Operation, 198
PROFINET, 125
Operator panel
Maximum current controller, 390
BOP-2, 163
Maximum speed, 139, 326
Menu, 163
MELD_NAMUR (fault word according to the VIK-Namur
Optimizing the closed-loop speed controller, 362
definition), 235
OR, 278
Memory block, 284, 285
OR block, 278
Memory card, 172
Output reactor, 344
Menu
Overload, 390
BOP-2, 163
Overview
Operator panel, 163
Chapter, 26, 27
MFP, 282
Overvoltage, 399
Mills, 145, 152
Overvoltage protection, 119
Minimum speed, 139, 326, 329
Mixers, 145, 152
MMC (memory card), 173
Moment of inertia estimator, 369
P
MOP (motorized potentiometer), 317 Parabolic characteristic, 347, 351
Motor control, 195 Parameter channel, 240
Motor data, 135 IND, 242, 246, 247
Identify, 362, 374 Parameter index, 242, 246, 247
Motor data set, 424 Parameter list, 555
Motor Data Set, MDS, 424 Parameter number, 167, 242, 246, 247
Motor fault, 496 Parameter value, 168
Motor holding brake, 271, 272, 273, 298 Parameters
Motor standard, 291 Overview, 196
Motor temperature sensor, 99, 102 Partial load operation, 535
Motorized potentiometer, 317 PCL, 282
MUL, 280 PDE, 283
PDF, 283

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

562 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Index

PFH (Probability of failure per hour), 499 Replace

PID controller, 337 Control Unit, 494
PKW (parameter, ID value), 225 Gear unit, 494
PLC functionality, 553 Hardware, 494
PLI, 281 Motor, 494
Polyline, 281 Power Module, 494
Power failure, 411 Reset
Power Module, 32 Parameter, 158, 159, 161
Power unit data set, 424 Reversing, 326
Power Unit Data Set, PDS, 424 Roller conveyors, 145, 152
Pre-control, 372 Rotary furnace, 145, 152
Prefabricated encoder cable, 130, 132 Rounding, 333
Pressure control, 337 Rounding OFF3, 333
Probe, 324, 408 RS flip-flop, 284
Procedure, 25 RSR, 284
PROFIBUS, 127 Run sequence, 277
PROFIdrive, 123 Runtime group, 277
PROFIenergy, 123
PROFIsafe, 123
Protection functions, 195 S
PST, 284
S7 communication, 123
PT1, 286
SAFE, 433
Pt1000 sensor, 394
Safe Brake Relay, 53, 92, 306
PTC sensor, 394
Safety function, 194
Pulse cancellation, 230, 255, 258
Safety relay, 118
Pulse enable, 230, 255, 258
Saw, 378, 383
Pulse frequency, 392, 393, 534
Scaling
Pulse generator, 282
Analog input, 208
Pulse shortener, 282
Analog output, 211
Pulse stretcher, 284
SD (memory card), 173
Pulse train, 324
Formatting, 173
Pump, 145, 152
MMC, 173
PZD (process data), 225
Self-test, 307
Sensor
Electromechanical, 117
Q Sensor Module, 56, 130, 132, 556
Questions, 558 Sequence control, 197
Series commissioning, 162, 312
Setpoint processing, 194, 326
R Setpoint source, 194
Selecting, 315, 316, 317
Ramp-down time, 333, 334
Settling time, 145, 151
Scaling, 336
Shield connection kit, 40
Ramp-function generator, 326, 332
Short-circuit monitoring, 394, 395
Ramp-up time, 333, 334
Signal cables, 121
Scaling, 336
Signal interconnection, 551
RDY (Ready), 432
Sine-wave filter, 49, 344
Ready, 198
SIZER, 557
Ready for switching on, 198
Skip frequency band, 326
Regenerative feedback, 389
Slip compensation, 345
Regenerative operation, 376
SMC (Sensor Module Cabinet), 56, 132
SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet, 130

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 563
Index

SME (Sensor Module External), 56, 132

SME: Sensor Module External, 130
Smoothing element, 286 T
Speed
Technical data
change with BOP-2, 163
Control Unit, 497, 498, 499
Limiting, 326
Technology controller, 233, 293, 337
Speed control, 355
Temperature calculation, 396
Speed monitoring, 407
Temperature monitoring, 393, 396
Spindle, 145, 152
Temperature sensor, 99, 102
Square-law characteristic, 347, 351
Temperature switch, 394
Stacker crane, 152
Terminal block, 200
Standards
Terminal strip, 119
EN 61800-3, 33
Factory setting, 102
Star connection (Y), 91
Overview, 99
Startdrive, 300
Test signals, 305
Download, 134
Three-wire control, 213
Startdrive PC tool, 300
Time slice, 277
STARTER
Timer block, 282, 283, 284
Download, 134
Torque accuracy, 145, 151
STARTER PC tool, 300
Two-wire control, 213
Starting behavior
Type plate
Optimization, 353
Control Unit, 32
Starting behavior"; "Optimization, 349
Power Module, 32
Starting current, 350
State overview, 197
Status word
Status word 1, 230, 256, 259
U
Status word 2, 232 U/f characteristic, 345
Status word 3, 234 Unit system, 291
Status word 1 (ZSW2), 232 Unwinders, 389
STO (Safe Torque Off), 297, 298 Update
select, 298 Firmware, 494
Storage medium, 171 Upgrading the firmware, 489
STW1 (control word 1), 229, 255, 258 Upload
SUB, 279 Data transfer, 181
Subindex, 242, 246, 247 Download, 180
Subtractor, 279 Use for the intended purpose, 29
Support, 558 User interfaces, 97
Switch off
Motor, 198
OFF1 command, 198 V
OFF2 command, 198
Vdc_min controller, 414
OFF3 command, 198
Vector control, 355, 362, 374
Switch on
Version
Motor, 198
Control Unit, 32
ON command, 198
Power Module, 32
Switching on inhibited, 198, 230, 255, 258
Vertical conveyors, 385
Switch-off signal paths, 307
Voltage boost, 345, 349, 350, 353
Symbols, 25
Voltage input, 206
System runtime, 437

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

564 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
 Index

W
Winders, 389
Wire breakage, 304
Wire-break monitoring, 209, 394, 395
Write protection, 183

X
XOR, 278

Z
ZSW1 (status word 1), 230, 256
ZSW3 (status word 3), 234
ZWST1 (status word 1), 259

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK 565
Index

Converter with CU250S-2 Control Unit

566 Operating Instructions, 02/2023, FW 4.7 SP14, A5E31759476B AK
Additional information
SINAMICS inverters:
www.siemens.com/sinamics

Safety Integrated:
www.siemens.com/safety-integrated
PROFINET:
www.siemens.com/profinet

Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Digital Factory © Siemens AG 2013 - 2016
Motion Control
Postfach 3180
Scan the QR code
91050 ERLANGEN
for additional
GERMANY
information about
the SINAMICS G120.

www.siemens.com/drives